Sheq Framework

LHWP2 SHEQ Management Framework
Lesotho Highlands Development Authority
Contract LHDA No.: 6010 Document Date: 27 February 2017

Contract Name: Project SHEQ Framework
Document Ref: LHWP2-6010-DFR-0001_00
Revision History
Version Issue Date Description of Changes
01 27 February 2017 LHDA Report Template
ii
Overview
This Safety Health Environment and Quality Management (SHEQ) Framework comprises
overarching principles, requirements and guidelines for the development and review of SHEQ
Management Systems during the implementation of the Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II.
It is applicable to all Consultants and Contractors delivering work for, or on behalf of, the Lesotho
Highlands Development Authority (LHDA).
A framework can be defined as: ‘Broad overview, outline, or skeleton of interlinked items which
supports a particular approach to a specific objective, and serves as a guide that can be modified as
required by adding or deleting items’.
By drawing up this SHEQ Framework, LHDA has endeavoured to address the most critical aspects
relating to SHEQ issues in order to assist the Consultant and Contractor in adequately providing for
implementing sound SHEQ practices on site. Nothing in this Framework must be construed as
relieving a Consultant or Contractor from complying with any additional specific SHEQ requirements
that it determines to be necessary to ensure the quality of project deliverables or protect the
environment and/or safety and health of employees. Should LHDA not have addressed all SHEQ
aspects pertaining to the work that is tendered for, the Consultant or Contractor shall include all such
omissions in the documentation when submitting the tender.
This SHEQ Framework has been developed to inform Consultants and Contractors in advance of the
SHEQ directive and requirements that will be enforced during the project. All provisions in this
document shall apply to every organisation doing project work for LHDA or its entities. Requirements
may only be excluded where non-applicability manifests. Where an omission in the document is
identified by an interested or affected party, the matter should be reported and managed
appropriately. The stated requirements shall be implemented to meet, or exceed, the legal
requirements as enacted by the relevant legislation referenced in paragraph 2.1.
i
Table of Contents
1. Preface ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Overview of the Framework and its application .................................................................... 2
1.1.1. Contract-specific SHEQ requirements ............................................................................. 2
1.1.2. Tender SHEQ documentation requirements ................................................................... 3
1.1.3. Project SHEQ documentation requirements .................................................................... 3
1.2. Sanctions for Breach of SHEQ Framework Requirements ................................................... 4
2. References ............................................................................................................................... 6
3. Terms and Definitions ............................................................................................................ 7
4. Context of the Work Package ................................................................................................ 8
4.1. Baseline Risk Assessment .................................................................................................... 8
4.2. Stakeholders / Interested Parties .......................................................................................... 8
4.3. SHEQ Plan scope ................................................................................................................. 8
4.4. SHEQ Management Plans .................................................................................................... 9
5. Leadership ............................................................................................................................. 10
5.1. Leadership and commitment ............................................................................................... 10
5.2. Project SHEQ Policy ........................................................................................................... 10
5.3. Organizational roles, responsibilities and authorities .......................................................... 10
5.3.1. Framework roles and responsibilities ............................................................................ 10
5.3.2. SHEQ organisational roles and responsibilities ............................................................. 11
5.3.3. Appointments ................................................................................................................. 12
5.3.4. Stop Work ...................................................................................................................... 12
6. Planning ................................................................................................................................. 13
6.1. Actions to address risks and opportunities ......................................................................... 13
6.2. SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve them ................................................................. 13
7. Support .................................................................................................................................. 15
7.1. Resources ........................................................................................................................... 15
7.1.1. Subcontractors ............................................................................................................... 15
7.2. Competence ........................................................................................................................ 15
7.3. Awareness ........................................................................................................................... 16
7.3.1. Project and Site SHEQ Rules ........................................................................................ 16
7.3.2. SHEQ Awareness .......................................................................................................... 17
7.4. Communication and Consultation ....................................................................................... 17
7.4.1. Communication .............................................................................................................. 18
7.4.2. Consultation ................................................................................................................... 18
7.5. Documented information ..................................................................................................... 18
7.5.1. Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation Structure .................................................... 19
7.5.2. SHEQ File ...................................................................................................................... 20
8. Contract Execution ............................................................................................................... 21
i
Table of Contents
8.1. Method Statements ............................................................................................................. 21

8.1.1. Method Statements for High-risk or Non-routine Tasks ................................................ 21
8.1.2. Environmental Method Statements................................................................................ 22
8.2. Task Risk Assessments ...................................................................................................... 22
8.2.1. Daily Site Task Instructions (DSTIs) .............................................................................. 22
8.3. Mobilisation Requirements .................................................................................................. 22
8.3.1. Pre-contract documentation submission & site access ................................................. 23
8.4. Emergency Preparedness and Response .......................................................................... 23
8.4.1. Fire Protection ................................................................................................................ 24
8.5. Site Establishment and Facilities Requirements – Workplace Standards .......................... 24
8.5.1. Employees Site Facilities ............................................................................................... 24
8.5.2. Site Access Control and Movement (Traffic & People) Management on Site ............... 25
8.5.3. Transportation of Employees ......................................................................................... 26
8.5.4. Food and Food Safety ................................................................................................... 26
8.6. Safety Management ............................................................................................................ 27
8.6.1. Controlling Hazardous Work – Safe Work Practices (SWPs) ....................................... 27
8.6.2. Controlling Workplace Safety Hazards – Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) ...... 27
8.7. Occupational Health Management ...................................................................................... 28
8.7.1. Occupational Hygiene .................................................................................................... 28
8.7.2. Medical Surveillance Programme .................................................................................. 29
8.7.3. HIV/AIDS Programme .................................................................................................... 29
8.7.4. Hazardous chemical substances (HCS) ........................................................................ 30
8.7.5. First Aid .......................................................................................................................... 30
8.7.6. Emergency Care ............................................................................................................ 30
8.7.7. Management of Alcohol and Substance Abuse ............................................................. 30
8.7.8. Welfare........................................................................................................................... 31
8.7.9. Workmen’s Compensation ............................................................................................. 31
8.8. Environmental Management ............................................................................................... 31
8.8.1. Construction EMP (CEMP) ............................................................................................ 31
8.8.2. Project environmental requirements .............................................................................. 32
8.8.3. Public Complaints .......................................................................................................... 32
8.9. Quality Management ........................................................................................................... 32
8.9.1. Quality Control ............................................................................................................... 32
8.9.2. Quality Assurance .......................................................................................................... 34
8.9.3. Inspection and test plans ............................................................................................... 34
8.9.4. Control of inspection, measuring and test equipment ................................................... 35
8.10. Engineering change management ................................................................................. 35
8.11. Maintenance of equipment, machinery, tools and vehicles ........................................... 35
8.12. Demobilisation requirements ......................................................................................... 36
8.12.1. Commissioning and handover ................................................................................... 36
ii
Table of Contents
8.12.2. Project site decommissioning .................................................................................... 36

8.12.3. Project close-out ........................................................................................................ 36
9. Performance evaluation ....................................................................................................... 38
9.1. Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation ............................................................ 38
9.1.1. SHEQ performance reporting ........................................................................................ 38
........................................................................................................................................... 38
9.1.2. Consultant and Contractor SHEQ performance evaluation ........................................... 39
9.2. Audits .................................................................................................................................. 39
9.2.1. SHEQ Plan audits .......................................................................................................... 39
9.2.2. Internal audits to the SHEQ Framework ........................................................................ 39
9.2.3. Third Party Framework compliance verification audits .................................................. 39
9.3. Inspection and Planned Task Observation (PTO) programmes ......................................... 40
9.3.1. Inspection, testing and certification................................................................................ 40
9.3.2. Planned Task Observation (PTO) programme .............................................................. 40
9.4. Management review ............................................................................................................ 41
10. Improvement ......................................................................................................................... 42
10.1. Incident and nonconformity management ..................................................................... 42
10.2. Corrective action ............................................................................................................ 42
10.3. Improvement .................................................................................................................. 43
Annexure A – Project SHEQ Policy ............................................................................................... 44
iii
1. Preface
Lesotho Highlands Development Authority (LHDA) engages a large number of Consultants,
Contractors and Subcontractors to perform Engineering and Construction work on behalf of LHDA.
The challenge of having so many different organisations participating in project delivery is the
management of Occupational Safety & Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ) by these
organisations while engaged on LHDA projects.
Therefore, a systematic approach is required to effectively integrate SHEQ requirements into contract
management activities and to fulfil obligations in relation to SHEQ. There are three important stages
in the contracting process:
Contract and specification - Ensuring that appropriate SHEQ requirements are incorporated into the
contract, conditions of tender and the pricing documents.
Tender evaluation - Establishing a systematic approach to evaluating bidding Consultants’ and

Contractors’ SHEQ capabilities and resources.
Contract management - Ensuring that Consultant and Contractor SHEQ performance is adequately
managed and monitored for the duration of the contract.
This document applies to all three of the above stages and specifies requirements to Consultants &
Contractors to ensure effective SHEQ Management during implementation of the LHWP Phase II.
Successful bidders will receive the detailed LHDA Project SHEQ Framework with a ‘starter pack’
which contains templates and procedures to provide guidance to Consultants and Contractors for
managing SHEQ during contract execution and against which their SHEQ performance will be
measured during project execution.
Effective management of SHEQ matters both in the administration of contracts, and physically at
project sites demands the inclusion of SHEQ requirements in project processes in an organised,
hierarchical approach that includes the following steps:
o Identifying task SHEQ hazards and associated risks as early as possible.

o Involving SHEQ professionals who have the necessary experience, competence and training
to assess and manage SHEQ risks and to carry out specialised SHEQ management
functions, including the preparation of project- or task-specific plans and procedures.
o Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of SHEQ risks, based on -
- the nature of the project activities, such as whether the project will involve hazardous
materials or processes;
- the use of sub-standard materials and methods; and
- the potential consequences to employees, communities or the environment if risks are not
adequately managed, which may depend on the proximity of project activities to people
(this includes for example prevention of their unauthorised access to the project site and
potential injuries occurring).
o Applying risk management methodologies to achieve an overall reduction of risk to human

health and safety or the environment and damage to equipment/materials, focusing on the
prevention of irreversible and/or significant impacts.
o Favouring methods that eliminate the cause of the hazard at its source, for example by
selecting less hazardous materials or processes that obviate the need for SHEQ controls.
o When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating engineering and management controls
to reduce or minimise the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for example
with the application of pollution controls to reduce the levels of emitted contaminants to
1
employees (and the environment) or the protection of utility areas by creating physical
barriers.
o Preparing employees and nearby communities to respond to incidents, including providing
technical and financial resources to control such events effectively and safely, and restoring
workplace and community environments to a safe and healthy condition.
o Improving SHEQ performance through a combination of on-going monitoring and effective
corrective and risk response actions.
This document aims to -
o support the development of a common approach to Consultant & Contractor SHEQ

management;
o enable LHDA to improve the standard of Consultant & Contractor SHEQ performance
through its enforcement; and
o provide a framework within which Consultants & Contractors may work to improve their
SHEQ management systems and performance.
By applying the principles contained in this document, Consultants & Contractors can -
o reduce injuries to employees, harm to the environment and project delivery losses on LHDA
project sites;
o demonstrate their commitment to SHEQ management;
o ensure that all persons on their site, including Subcontractors and visitors, know and comply
with the legal and other requirements governing SHEQ;
o ensure that all employees under their control, who work on the project, know that they must
demonstrate the effectiveness of their SHEQ management systems; and
o ensure effective reporting by Consultants and Contractors on SHEQ related matters, which
in turn will lead to timely and effective corrective action interventions where required.
1.1. Overview of the Framework and its application

Consultants, Contractors and Subcontractors contracted to do work for, or on behalf of, LHDA will be
required to implement the provisions set out in this SHEQ Framework, manage SHEQ in their
organisations according to these provisions while on the project site, and make available the
necessary evidence of these provisions having been implemented and functioning effectively.
The provisions are based on the development of SHEQ Plans (see the SHEQ Plan Form) at three
different levels (i.e., for the Consultant, Contractors and Subcontractors – also see Paragraph 4.4),
with the Plans at the lower levels integrated with those at the level above; the objective is to ensure
that SHEQ is managed as one complete management system across the project – and not as multiple
(often conflicting) systems on the same project.
1.1.1. Contract-specific SHEQ requirements

Where such is deemed appropriate, the Consultant shall identify and add contract-specific SHEQ
requirements, i.e. in addition to the relevant legal requirements and the requirements of this
Framework. When applicable, such supplemental SHEQ requirements must be specified and
documented as part of the tender stage enquiry documentation submitted to the Contractor to ensure
the requirements are included in the SHEQ bill of quantities.
Reference Documents Document No.:

1. Tender - Contract-specific Supplemental SHEQ Requirements LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1
2
1.1.2. Tender SHEQ documentation requirements
Tenderers shall complete the appropriate Tender Pack SHEQ Management System Documentation
(including the SHEQ History Questionnaire and Cost Breakdown) and incorporate the completed
documentation with their tender submission. Tenderers who do not complete the questionnaire shall
be ineligible for selection as the tender documents will not be deemed compliant. Tenderers are
required to verify ability/capacity in their responses noted in the questionnaire by providing relevant
evidence. By submission of the tender and SHEQ documentation the Tenderer acknowledges and
confirms as accurate all details contained in the questionnaire and any verifying documents.

1. Tender Phase - SHEQ Management Plan LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1
2A. Tender Baseline Risk Assessment Template (Consultants) LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-2A
2B. Tender Risk Assessment Template (Contractors) LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-2B
3. Tender Method Statement Template LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-3
4. Tender Task Risk Assessment Template LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-4
5. Tender SHEQ Cost Breakdown Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-5
6. Tender SHEQ Questionnaire LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-6
7. Tender SHEQ Document List LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-7
1.1.3. Project SHEQ documentation requirements

Figure 1.1 below summarises the SHEQ documentation requirements and flow across all contracting
phases, i.e. Tender, Submission, Tender Evaluation, Contracting, Mobilisation and Site
Establishment, Execution and Closure.
No permission will be granted to execute work on site unless a SHEQ Management Plan has been
approved by the responsible LHDA SHEQ Manager (for Consultants) or Consultant SHEQ Manager
(for Contractors). Two (2) weeks must be allowed for the SHEQ Plan review and, based on the review
results, more time may be required for Consultants/Contractors to implement proposed corrective
actions before final approval. Successful bidders must allow for this in their scheduling.
3
Figure 1.1 SHEQ Plan Structure
1.2. Sanctions for Breach of SHEQ Framework

Requirements
If during the performance of works under the contract LHDA informs the Consultant or Contractor in
writing that it is the opinion of LHDA that the Consultant/Contractor is (i) not conducting the work in
compliance with their approved SHEQ Plan, SHEQ management procedures, relevant legislation or
SWPs/SOPs provided by LHDA from time to time; or (ii) conducting the work in such a way as to
endanger the health and safety of employees, plant, equipment or materials, the Contractor shall
promptly remedy that SHEQ breach.
The general conditions of each Contract shall ensure that the Consultant/Contractor is made aware
that the management of LHDA or the Consultant shall be empowered to direct the
Consultant/Contractor to stop any work that the LHDA/Consultant Representative considers as being
carried out in a risky manner and/or remove such wrongdoer(s) from site.
LHDA may direct the Consultant/Contractor to suspend the work until such time as the
Consultant/Contractor satisfies LHDA by expressing, in writing, actions taken to ensure the work will
4
be resumed in conformity with applicable contractual and SHEQ provisions. During periods of
suspension referred to above, LHDA shall not be required to make any payment whatsoever to the
Consultant/Contractor.
In the event that the Consultant or Contractor fails to satisfy the requirements of this Framework,
LHDA may apply any of the sanctions provided for in the contract. Sanctions may include the
application of a financial penalty – up to maximum of 5% of contract value per instance - the
referenced fine(s) shall be independent of those imposed by the state regulatory authority.
If the Consultant/Contractor fails to rectify any SHEQ breach for which the work has been suspended,
or if the Consultant/Contractor performance has involved recurring SHEQ breaches, LHDA may as
its option terminate the work forthwith, without further obligation to the Consultant/Contractor. In this
event, the LHDA’s liability shall be limited to payment for the work performed and costs incurred by
the Consultant/Contractor up to the time of termination or an earlier suspension of works.
5
2. References
Consultants and Contractors must, in addition to SHEQ requirements specified in this Framework,
also comply with the duties placed on them under the following:
o The Constitution of Lesotho

o Lesotho Legislation
- Labour Code (Order No.24 of 1992) and Labour Code (Amendment) Act of 2006 and
associated Regulations;
- Environment Act of 2008 (Act 10 of 2008);
- Explosives Proclamation of 1958 (amended); and
- Mine Safety Act of 1981 (Act 4 of 1981).
o Lesotho Highlands Water Project Treaties
- LHDA Order of 1992, as amended;
- LHWP Treaty of 1986; and
- LHWP Phase II Agreement of 2011.
o LHDA SHEQ documentation
- LHWP2 Procedures for Consultants Providing Professional Services (document
reference: W-PMU-GEN-MAN-0002)
- LHDA SHE Policy (Draft – 2015, document reference: LHDA Policy LHDA/DOD/01)
- LHWP2 SHEQ Strategy and Implementation Plan (July 2015)
o General
- FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Construction (Multilateral Development Bank
Harmonised Ed. Version 3: June 2010) – also known as the FIDIC Pink Book
- Article 4 & Article 16 of ILO Convention 155
- IFC Performance Standards
The following International Management System Standards may be referenced for clarity regarding
the Framework structure and more information on selected Framework requirements:
o ISO 9001:2015 Quality management systems - Requirements

o ISO 14001:2015 Environmental management systems - Requirements with guidance for use
o BS OHSAS 18001:2007 Occupational health and safety management systems –
Requirements
o ISO 19011:2011 Guidelines for auditing management systems
Note: While the South African OHS legislation is not enforceable for this project, Consultants and
Contractors are recommended to use the Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act No. 85 of
1993) and Mine Health and Safety Act, 1996 (Act No. 29 of 1996) and their Regulations as reference
for OHS practices when required, and where the South African legislation is more stringent.
6
3. Terms and Definitions
LHDA Lesotho Highlands Development Authority
LHWP2 Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II
SHEQ Safety, Health, Environment and Quality
SWP Safe Work Practice
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
DSTI Daily Site Task Instructions
EMP Environmental Management Plan
CEMP Construction Environmental Management Plan
STI/STD Sexually transmitted infection/sexually transmitted disease
HIV Human Immunodeficiency Virus
AIDS Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome
Confined Space An enclosed or partially enclosed space that is not primarily
designed or intended for human occupancy and has a restricted
entrance or exit by way of location, size or means.
7
4. Context of the Work Package
4.1. Baseline Risk Assessment

The Consultant/Contractor must conduct a Baseline SHEQ Risk Assessment to determine the
relevant issues, both internal and external, that have an impact on what the contracted scope of work
aims to achieve, and the intended outcomes. The Baseline Risk Assessment should take into
consideration contract-specific legal requirements and risks that could have an impact beyond the
site borders as well as external factors that could affect the project SHEQ objectives. The Baseline
Risk Assessment must be reviewed and updated - with changes communicated to stakeholders -
periodically (but at least quarterly) based on, for example, project life-cycle changes, incident trend
analysis, changes to scope or type of contract works and newly introduced risks.

1. Baseline Risk Assessment Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.1
4.2. Stakeholders / Interested Parties

Stakeholders are individuals or groups that can affect, can be affected, or perceive to be affected by
the Consultant’s or Contractor’s decisions and activities. Therefore, determination of the impacts of
Consultant/Contractor decisions and activities will facilitate the identification of the most important
stakeholders. To identify stakeholders the following questions should be answered:
o To whom do we have legal obligations?

o Who might be positively or negatively affected by our organisation's decisions or activities?
o Who are directly affected communities?
o Who is likely to express concerns about the decisions and activities of our organisation?
o Who have been involved in the past when similar concerns needed to be addressed?
o Who can help our organisation address specific impacts?
o Who can affect our organisation's ability to meet our responsibilities (both negatively and
positively)?
o Who would be disadvantaged if excluded from the engagement?
o Who in the project value chain is affected?
o Whose needs is the project aimed at addressing (i.e. beneficiaries)?
o Who is financing the project?
The Consultants and Contractor must identify all relevant internal and external stakeholders within its
sphere of influence for their contract scope of work and duration. Specific consideration must be given
to the community, as per the LHWP2 Community Participation Strategy (Appendix E of the
Consultants Manual). All communications with third parties and stakeholders, and specifically the
media, shall be in accordance with the LHWP2 Communications Protocol (Appendix B of the
Consultants Manual).
4.3. SHEQ Plan scope

The Consultant and Contractors must clearly determine and document the SHEQ Plan scope – what
is in and what is out. This needs to be appropriate to the Consultant/Contractor’s contracted scope of
work.
8
4.4. SHEQ Management Plans
Each Consultant must, using the LHDA SHEQ Plan form, prepare Part 1 – Consultant SHEQ Plan -
and cascade a copy to each of their Contractors who must, in turn, complete Part 2 - Contractor
SHEQ Plan. The Consultant SHEQ Plan will prescribe the generic SHEQ practices that apply project-
wide (such as Emergency Response, Incident Management, Access Control and SHEQ Reporting)
and therefore are applicable to all Contractors appointed by the Consultant, and hence their
employees whilst on site.
Parts 1 & 2 together hence form the Contractor’s complete SHEQ Plan. Similarly, if the Contractor
appoints Subcontractors, they must cascade the Plan to each Subcontractor to complete Part 3 -
Subcontractor SHEQ Plan, with Parts 1, 2 & 3 together serving as the Subcontractor’s SHEQ Plan.
The LHDA Project SHEQ Plans structure is shown in Figure 4.1 below:
LHDA SHEQ Framework
Part 1 – Consultant Part 1 – Consultant Part 1 – Consultant

A SHEQ B SHEQ X SHEQ
Management Plan Management Plan Management Plan
Parts 1 & 2– Contractor A-1 Consultant A - Parts 1 & 2– Contractor A-

SHEQ Management Plan Construction EMP (CEMP) X SHEQ Management Plan
Parts 1 & 2– Contractor B-1 Consultant B - Parts 1 & 2– Contractor B-X

SHEQ Management Plan Construction EMP (CEMP) SHEQ Management Plan
Parts 1 & 2 & 3 – Parts 1 & 2 & 3 –

Subcontractor B-1-1 SHEQ Subcontractor B-1-X SHEQ
Management Plan Management Plan
Figure 4.1 SHEQ Plan Structure
The SHEQ Plans shall include or reference applicable documentation, as required by the Framework
and Plan – attachments may be added where deemed appropriate.

1. Contract Phase - SHEQ Management Plan Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4
9
5. Leadership
5.1. Leadership and commitment

Executives and management of Consultant and Contractor firms (i.e. Consultant Project
Manager/Resident Engineer), management (Consultant Shift Engineer and the Contractor Site
Manager/SHEQ Officer) and first line/shift supervisors shall be ultimately accountable for SHEQ -
both its implementation and enforcement. The Consultant and each Contractor shall define their top
management involvement in the SHEQ management system - to make sure that the requirements of
the SHEQ Framework will be integrated into the organisation’s business processes. Executives,
management and first line supervisors shall visibly demonstrate their commitment to SHEQ. They
must endorse the project SHEQ policy (refer paragraph 5.2 below) to include specified commitments
and plan for its internal communication to employees and availability to interested parties.
The Consultant and each Contractor shall further demonstrate management commitment by making
sure that the SHEQ Plan achieves its intended outcome(s), has adequate resources, and ensure
everyone is informed that the SHEQ Plan is important and that everyone should participate in its
effective implementation.
5.2. Project SHEQ Policy

Refer to Annexure A for the approved LHWP2 Project SHEQ Policy.
The Consultant and/or Contractor may choose to develop (optional) their own SHEQ Policy in
corroboration of the LHWP2 Project SHEQ Policy.
5.3. Organizational roles, responsibilities and

authorities
5.3.1. Framework roles and responsibilities
The Consultant is responsible for providing and demonstrating to LHDA a suitable and sufficiently
documented Consultant SHEQ Plan and functional management structure to be applied from the date
of commencement of and for the duration of the project work. The structure must incorporate all
Contractors and Subcontractors and be based on the provisions of this document. LHDA shall verify
acknowledgement of SHEQ framework through the Consultant, who will advise Contractors and
Subcontractors about the content of the Framework by including it in their tender process.
The Consultant shall:
o ensure that all work is conducted in compliance with the provisions specified in this
document, statutory rules and regulations and in a manner that is sound, safe, secure and
without risk to all employees, visitors, the public, materials, equipment and the environment;
o take reasonable steps as are necessary to ensure all Contractors and Subcontractors
comply with the provisions of this Framework;
o provide and demonstrate to LHDA a suitable and sufficiently documented Consultant SHEQ
Plan, based on the relevant sections of the Framework;
o provide any Contractor who is a bidder, or is appointed to perform project work for the
Consultant, with the relevant requirements, pertaining to the work which has to be
performed; and
o ensure that potential Contractors submitting tenders have made provision for the cost of
SHEQ measures during the project execution.
10
The Contractor shall -
o provide and demonstrate to the Consultant a suitable and sufficiently documented

Contractor SHEQ Plan, based on the relevant sections of this Framework;
o submit the Contractor SHEQ Plan to the Consultant for evaluation and approval before site
access is granted;
o cooperate with the Consultant to enable both parties to comply with the provisions of this
Framework;
o when electing to outsource a portion of the contracted work to a Subcontractor, manage
Subcontractor SHEQ compliance within the parameters of this Framework; and
o as far as is reasonably practicable, promptly provide the Consultant with any information of
issues that might affect site SHEQ performance.
o
The Subcontractor shall –
o ensure they are aware of and understand relevant SHEQ requirements stated in this
Framework before contracting for project work;
o provide and demonstrate to the Contractor a suitable and sufficiently documented
Subcontractor SHEQ Plan, based on the relevant sections of this Framework;
o submit the Subcontractor SHEQ Plan to the Contractor for evaluation and approval before
site access is granted;
o adhere to (and enhance, where possible) SHEQ practices implemented by the Contractor;
and
o as far as is reasonably practicable, promptly provide the Contractor with any information of
issues that might affect site SHEQ performance.
5.3.2. SHEQ organisational roles and responsibilities

The Consultant shall define an appropriate SHEQ organisation structure in the Consultant SHEQ
Plan - for both their own organisation and respective Contractors/Subcontractors, based on the scope
of contract work and associated SHEQ risks. This structure shall include defined SHEQ roles,
responsibilities, and authorities for project team members, other than SHEQ staff.
SHEQ committees shall be established with the purpose of promoting co-operation between the
Consultant/Contractor and their employees in achieving and maintaining safe and healthy working
conditions. A SHEQ committee must consist of an equal number of members, not less than two on
each side, representing the employer and the employees, provided that the representatives of the
employees shall be chosen by the employees or designated by a trade union. The Consultant will
draw the Terms of Reference (TOR) for the SHEQ Committees. A draft TOR is included and may be
used as an input document.

1. SHEQ Committee – Draft Terms of Reference LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 5.1
LHDA will hold the Consultant to account on SHEQ transgressions which may occur at a construction
site. In a similar fashion, this arrangement should cascade down from the Consultant to the Contractor
and Subcontractor. Consultant and Contractor managers should clearly communicate roles,
responsibilities, and authorities and insist on accountability of employees at all levels (note that
accepting accountability is based on having the required authority, resources and competence).
Managers and supervisors should carry out their own responsibilities and expect employees to follow
sound SHEQ practices. Line Managers are accountable for the overall SHEQ Plan, including planning
and allocating resources for their activities. Supervisors are accountable for ensuring that the SHEQ
Plans, Programmes, and documented information, including Task Risk Assessment activities, are
11
implemented on a day-to-day basis in the workplace. Employee accountability involves following
procedures, using sound SHEQ practices, and reporting risks.
5.3.3. Appointments
The Consultant shall define a structure for required formal appointments by the Contractor, based on
the project organisation structure defined above. The following appointments, as a minimum, must
however be made in writing and kept on file by the Consultant:
o Appointment - Contractor
o Appointment - Construction Supervisor
o Appointment - Assistant Construction Supervisor
o Appointment - Consultant SH/E/Q Manager(s)
o Appointment - SH/E/Q Officers
o Appointment - SH/E/Q Representatives
o Appointment - Risk Assessment Coordinator
o Appointment - Relevant Operators (such as Crane Operators, etc.)
5.3.4. Stop Work

Further to the General Conditions of Contract, the Contractor is to be aware that the management of
the Consultant will be empowered to direct the Contractor to stop any work that a Consultant SHEQ
Manager considers as being carried out in a risky manner.
Any stop work authority should be exercised in a justifiable and responsible manner. All employees,
supervisors, managers, and SHEQ professionals are responsible for being cognisant of the conditions
in their workplaces and for being prepared to stop work when these conditions pose an imminent
danger of death, serious physical or environmental harm, or damage to equipment or materials. The
Consultant shall have procedures in place that address stop work authority, and all Contractor
employees should be trained in such procedures. The procedures for stopping work shall be
unambiguous and adopted only when absolutely necessary.
If an imminent danger stop work is necessary, the employee(s) must safely stop their work and notify
their supervisor(s), who will initiate the Consultant’s ‘Stop Work’ procedure - this should be done in
such a manner that the work stoppage itself doesn’t pose further danger to employees and/or
equipment in the immediate environment. The Area Supervisor whose work was stopped must notify
their company designated SHEQ Representative, who is to promptly notify the Consultant SHEQ
Manager of the stoppage. When the SHEQ Representative views any such circumstances as
imminent, a stop work order should be issued. Before a stop work order is issued, the person issuing
it should ensure that the work stoppage itself would not negatively impact SHEQ.
For non-imminent danger stop work, normal supervisory procedures, staff communication, and
referral to SHEQ staff, as appropriate, should be used. For non-imminent danger stop work, line
management in the area where the work was stopped and of the employees who were stopped must
decide on the appropriate level of communication with other staff. The condition that caused a stop
work to be initiated must be evaluated to determine if the controls that are in place will adequately
protect people and the environment, before work is resumed.
Failure to comply will result in the Consultant or authorised LHDA Representative engaging another
Contractor to correct the deviation or transgression at the cost of the non-complying Contractor. LHDA
will not pay for costs of delay or rectification brought about by such a direction by the Consultant or
Authorised LHDA Representative.
12
6. Planning
Risk management is all about making informed decisions, minimising potential damage or loss and
controlling uncertainties. Once a Contractor is aware of the risks that a particular project or activity
involves, informed decisions can be taken regarding different courses of action. It also focuses efforts
and energies into dealing with the areas that might have the potential to cause time delays and cost
overruns on a project. Consequently, risk management is also about opportunities for improving the
way in which a contractor operates.
6.1. Actions to address risks and opportunities

The Contractor must have a risk assessment performed by a competent person before any
construction work starts, as well as during the construction work. Such an assessment must take
cognisance of the Consultant’s Baseline Risk Assessment – see paragraph 4.1. Consultant Baseline
Risk Assessment - and shall, as a minimum:
o Identify the SHEQ risks based on the contract scope of work.

o Analyse and evaluate the identified risks.
o Document a plan of response actions (including development of Method Statements, Safe
Work Practices and Standard Operating Procedures) to mitigate, reduce or control the risks
that have been identified.
o Provide a risk response monitoring plan.
o Provide a risk review plan.
o Provide a risk communication plan.
People attending, or trained in, a particular risk assessment need to sign an attendance form
acknowledging they have been informed and understand the particular risk. This risk assessment
must be available on site for inspection by an inspector, client, and representative of a trade union,
employee, SHEQ representative or any member of the SHEQ committee.
The Contractor must ensure that all Subcontractors are aware of any risks on the site before
construction work commences and during the construction period.

1. Risk Assessment Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 6.1
6.2. SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve

them
SHEQ objectives are the starting point of the planning process. The Consultant shall define a set of
SHEQ objectives to be consistent with the legal, project SHEQ Policy and Framework requirements.
Performance against objectives must be measurable (if practicable), monitored, communicated, and
updated as appropriate to provide a balanced view of SHEQ performance. Consultant SHEQ
objectives must be cascaded to Contractors to enable tracking of their Contractors’ SHEQ
performance. The SHEQ performance monitoring structure must include a balanced mix of the
following:
o Lagging indicators: Measurements of SHEQ performance at the end of a time period (e.g.,
significant safety and environmental incidents, occupational illnesses, quality
nonconformities, etc.).
o Leading indicators: Measurements of the effectiveness of the SHEQ management process
during a specified time period, used to forecast SHEQ performance (e.g., percentage of risk
13
response actions implemented, number of actions from audits closed within agreed target
dates).
Detailed action plans need to be developed (and incorporated into SHEQ Plans) to achieve defined
objectives.
14
7. Support
7.1. Resources
Proper planning and resourcing improves project efficiency and profitability, avoids penalties,
motivates staff and demonstrates to the competence of the Contractor. From the quantities identified
in the contract or taken off the drawings, the Contractor can identify the gross quantities of each type
of material that will be required to construct the works, how many people will be required to finish the
works in time, the plant required to carry out each activity and also have a good idea of the profit that
might be made on the project. The resources associated with each activity now need to be identified
– labour, materials, equipment, subcontractors, etc. Resource planning stems from two main
elements of a contract:
o The programme of works.

o The production rates that the Contractor can manage to do the work.
The Contractor project programming must arrange the activity list in a logical construction sequence,
considering three main aspects, namely:
o Physical considerations.
o Methodology or approach.
o Practicalities.
Decisions relating to the sequencing of activities should be based on security and SHEQ
considerations; adequate resources shall then be made available to ensure the effective
implementation of the SHEQ Policy, Framework, Plan and Rules - see paragraph 5.3. Organizational
roles, responsibilities and authorities.
7.1.1. Subcontractors
A Contractor may only subcontract work in terms of a written subcontract and shall only appoint a
Subcontractor should the Contractor be reasonably satisfied that such a Subcontractor has the
necessary competencies and resources to perform the work falling within the scope of the subcontract
and the SHEQ requirements of this Framework.
7.2. Competence
Formal systems shall be in place to ensure that all Consultant and Contractor personnel are
competent to perform their work effectively when engaged on the project. All project team roles,
positions and job functions shall, in addition, have the required SHEQ competencies formally defined
in terms of appropriate education, training and experience. As people’s behaviour is key to the
success of any SHEQ management programme, recruitment and selection practices shall specifically
consider the SHEQ training, awareness and competencies of all relevant personnel prior to
deployment on the project.
The Consultant shall ensure that all the Contractors’ Personnel working on the Project Site (or other
places, if any, as may be specified under the Contract as forming part of the Site) are adequately
trained in the type of work/tasks to be performed. This training shall extend to include relevant
procedures, hazard identification and risk assessment. Contractors’ Personnel shall have the
appropriate qualifications, certificates and tickets, and shall work under competent supervision.
Copies of records of appropriate training and qualifications for all employees shall be kept and
maintained.
15
Note: For more information on Health and Safety functionaries’ competence, guidance is available
from the South African Council for Project and Construction Management Professionals (SACPCMP),
as they are responsible for the SA qualification process. Categories identified include:
o Client Appointed H&S Agent (CAH&SA)

o Construction H&S Coordinator / Manager
o Construction H&S Officer
o Candidate / Assistant Construction H&S Officer
7.3. Awareness
Consultant and Contractor Management shall be accountable for developing and implementing formal
induction and SHEQ awareness programmes, which are applicable to all relevant levels and functions
within their project teams. Awareness training must include the SHEQ Policy, Framework, Plan and
Rules.
7.3.1. Project and Site SHEQ Rules

These project and site SHEQ rules apply to everyone working on the LHWP2 project site. LHDA will
take a stance of zero tolerance on these rules. Any non-compliance to a requirement in this SHEQ
framework is subject to discipline/removal of person from the project site. Non-compliance to a project
site rule shall be considered serious misconduct and shall lead to disciplinary action, which may
include dismissal.
Rule Description of Rule

Rule 1 SHEQ Fundamentals
Do not carry out a task unless you are trained and authorised to do it. Prior to carrying
out any task, make sure you assess the risks involved and guard against them.
Rule 2 Working at heights
Always use fall protection safety equipment when working at heights. Any person who
performs work higher than two metres above ground level shall be attached to an
anchor point at all times, or as identified during the risk assessment.
Rule 3 Confined spaces
Do not enter a confined space without understanding and following the site confined
space SWP - refer LHWP2- SWP10.
Rule 4 Underground
Do not enter restricted areas unless you have permission. When underground, do not
enter areas of unsupported ground, or tunnels not cleared for access.
Rule 5 Mobile equipment and light vehicles
Always follow the traffic rules, wear your seat belt, keep within speed limits, and do
not use hand held phones while driving. Pedestrians must always stand clear of
mobile equipment.
Rule 6 Permits and isolation
Obtain a permit to work where an authorisation limitation exists (refer LHWP2-SWP1).
Always follow the site’s isolation procedure. Release energy, lock, tag & test.
Rule 7 Water bodies
When working around water and liquid storage facilities always wear a buoyancy vest
and never work alone.
Rule 8 Alcohol and drugs
No person is allowed to be under the influence of intoxicating liquor or drugs while on
a worksite.
16
Rule 9 Waste
Ensure that all waste generated during construction and commissioning is properly
handled, stored and disposed of - refer LHWP2-SWP18.
Rule 10 Conservation
Respect the habitat and proactively manage natural resources by reducing emissions
and preventing discharges of contaminants to the soil, water and air.
Rule 11 Accuracy
Work with accuracy to avoid any scrap, rework or disruption/stoppage/delay of work
during construction.
7.3.2. SHEQ Awareness

‘SHEQ induction training’ means construction SHEQ awareness training undertaken prior to
commencing construction work and is compulsory for all individuals who are new arrivals at a
worksite. Three types of SHEQ induction training may be required:
o General induction provides persons entering the construction site (typically new employees
and Visitors) with a basic knowledge of SHEQ requirements, the common risks likely to be
encountered on construction sites and how these risks should be controlled.
o Site induction provides information and instruction to anyone engaged on a particular
construction site with a knowledge of the Contractor’s rules and procedures for site SHEQ,
emergency management, the supervisory and reporting arrangements and other site-
specific issues.
o Task-specific induction provides information and instruction to anyone undertaking a
particular construction activity of the risk factors and control measures relating to that task.
The Contractor shall develop suitable induction programmes and ensure that all his personnel
undergo Site and Task-specific induction with regard to the approved SHEQ Plan, Rules and
documentation; general risks prevalent on the project site; Consultant’s baseline risk assessment;
the Contractor’s Risk Assessment; and other related aspects. Induction session must be presented
by suitably qualified personnel and in a language and medium understood by employees and records
of attendance shall be retained for the duration of the project. Refresher training shall be provided at
six-monthly intervals and after absence of more than three weeks form site for any person.
DSTI sessions – refer paragraph 8.2.1. Daily Site Task Instructions (DSTIs) - are further conducted
at the start of each day with all employees coming on site, during which they are alerted to particular
SHEQ issues/risks associated with their tasks for that day or the area/habitat in which they will be
working.
SHEQ induction training on its own is not sufficient to fully discharge all required obligations in relation
to training. Other forms of training, instruction, information and supervision may be needed on a
regular basis to ensure currency of skills and knowledge and to manage risks associated with the
changing nature of the work and workplace. Additional training may also be required specific to roles
or occupations, e.g. persons undertaking management or supervisory functions, first aid officers, and
plant operators – refer paragraph 7.2 Competence.
7.4. Communication and Consultation

SHEQ objectives in the workplace are more easily achieved when everyone involved in the work
communicates and consults with each other to identify risks, talks about any SHEQ concerns and
works together to find solutions. This includes cooperation between the people who manage or control
the work and those who carry out the work or who are affected by the work.
17
7.4.1. Communication
The Consultant shall develop and implement formal processes to ensure effective communication of
matters relating to SHEQ at all levels and functions. SHEQ meetings must be scheduled at fixed,
regular intervals (i.e. daily/weekly/monthly) to serve as a forum to discuss all SHEQ information
relating to the project work. Attendees will include Senior and Line Management and SHEQ
functionaries. The arrangements for personnel SHEQ representation shall be formally defined and
communicated. A structured process shall be included to allow for the sharing of lessons learned,
good practices and opportunities for improvement; including the sharing of information with other
Consultants/ Contractors.
The following SHEQ meeting structure proposes the minimum communication sessions that should
be conducted (and records thereof retained) by Contractors to keep employees current on SHEQ
matters:
o DSTIs
o Weekly Toolbox Talks.
o Monthly SHEQ Review Meetings – with the Consultant and LHDA SHEQ Managers (or
nominated Representative), the Contractor’s Supervisors and Site SHEQ Officers
o Monthly SHEQ Committee meetings
7.4.2. Consultation
Consultants and Contractors must consult with employees when:
o identifying and assessing SHEQ risks arising from the work carried out or to be carried out;
o making decisions about ways to eliminate or minimise those risks;
o making decisions about the adequacy of facilities for the welfare of employees;
o monitoring their health or proposing changes that may affect the health or safety of
employees; and
o resolving SHEQ issues;
o monitoring the conditions at the workplace;
o making decisions about procedures for consulting with employees; and
o providing information and training for employees.
However, it may be useful to also consult employees about matters that are not listed above, for
example when conducting investigations into nonconformities, incidents or ‘near misses’. Regular
consultation is preferred to consulting on a case-by-case basis only as issues arise because it allows
for early identification and fixing of potential problems.
Note: The views of employees and SHEQ functionaries should be taken into account before making
a significant SHEQ-related decision. Consultation does not require consensus or agreement but
employees should be allowed to contribute so far as is reasonably practicable to such decisions.
7.5. Documented information

Consultants and Contractors shall maintain documented information as specified in this Framework
for the purpose of communicating the information necessary to operate. These include, for example:
o The SHEQ Plan

o Method Statements, Workplace Standards, SWPs and SOPs
o Inspection and Test Plans
o Forms and templates
When creating and updating documented information, ensure appropriate:
18
o identification and description (e.g. a title, date, author, or reference number) – as per the
LHDA contractual requirements;
o format (e.g. language, software version, graphics) and media (e.g. paper, electronic);
o review and approval for suitability and adequacy; and
o general adherence to stipulations of the LHWP2 Procedures for Consultants Providing
Professional Services (issued to all consultants)
Consultants and Contractors shall retain documented information for the purpose of providing
evidence of result achieved (records). These include, for example:
o Risk Assessments
o Training records and attendance registers
o Audit, inspection and Test results
o Minutes of meetings
o Medical records
o Reports and databases
Project correspondence must be numbered and submitted as per the requirements of the LHDA
Consultants Manual. All SHEQ records shall be kept for 5 years - except for the Medical records,
which shall be kept for 40 years - after completion of the contract.
The Consultant shall specify the following activities for the control of documented information, as
applicable:
o distribution, access, retrieval and use;

o storage and preservation, including preservation of legibility;
o control of changes (e.g. version control);
o retention and disposition.
7.5.1. Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation Structure

All high risk activities shall be documented in SWPs, and SOPs shall be developed for all equipment,
machinery, tools and vehicles used by the Contractor. Refer paragraphs 8.6.1 and 8.6.2 for more
information on SWPs and SOPs respectively.
Method statements shall be developed prior to the commencement of any high-risk or non-routine
tasks within the Contractor’s scope of work, referencing applicable SWPs, SOPs and CEMPs where
relevant– refer paragraph 8.1 for more information.
The Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation structure is shown in Figure 7.1 below:
LHDA SHEQ Framework
Other
Method Statements
Documentation
Safe Work Procedures (SWPs)

Construction EMPs (CEMPs)
(Controlling Hazardous Work)
Standard Operating Procedures

(Equipment/Machinery/Tools/Vehicles)
Figure 7.1 Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation Structure
19
7.5.2. SHEQ File
The Consultant must clearly specify the required contents of documented information to be retained
in the SHEQ File. The Contractor shall keep the SHEQ File as a record of information which focuses
on issues pertaining to the managing of construction SHEQ activities for the project or, in view of
Subcontractors, a specific part of the project. The SHEQ File serves as proof of compliance with
SHEQ requirements in accordance with this Framework and applicable legislation and protects the
Contractor against any potential liability. The contents of the SHEQ File, and continual maintenance
thereof, shall be evaluated as a specific element during each audit and during SHEQ performance
reviews. The complete SHEQ File must be handed over to the Consultant upon contract closure,
who in turn will consolidate and hand the files over to LHDA upon closure of their contract.
20
8. Contract Execution
This section contains requirements for the execution of project work. Different methods of working
require different resources. As such, the work methods need to (i) be matched with the resources
available, (ii) ensure SHEQ Framework compliance and (iii) achieve the time that they are scheduled
to be completed in.
8.1. Method Statements

A Method Statement or equivalent must be completed by the Contractor prior to the commencement
of any high-risk or non-routine tasks within the project scope. The Method Statement shall give
specific instructions on how to effectively perform a task, referencing relevant SWPs and SOPs.
8.1.1. Method Statements for High-risk or Non-routine Tasks

A complete task risk assessment (TRA) – see paragraph 8.2 – must be carried out, and all identified
control measures be in place, prior to development of the associated Method Statement.
The Method Statement should contain sufficient detail to enable everyone involved in a task to be
clear about what has to be done, where and with what; as well as the risks arising from the task and
the precautions that have to be taken, and by whom. A comprehensive Method Statement will attempt
to address the majority, if not all, of the following:
o The details of the task to be undertaken;

o A formal risk assessment for the task;
o Clear identification of the area in which the task will be undertaken;
o Clear identification of the level of aptitude/skill required to perform task;
o Clear identification of the supervisory responsibilities for the task, including contact details;
o A list of equipment, materials, tools and vehicles that will be used, detailing their power
sources and authorised users – reference the relevant SOPs;
o Issues arising from relevant CEMPs - refer paragraph 8.8.1. Construction EMP (CEMP) –
activities and controls can be integrated or the relevant Environmental Method Statement(s)
referenced - refer paragraph 8.1.2 Environmental Method Statements;
o Details of any permit to work system that will be implemented, if required;
o A clear statement of the identified risks and the controls in place; this should include:
- hazards created by the task or present on site – reference relevant SWPs,
- hazardous substances,
- health exposures,
- PPE required,
- interaction with other Contractors’ activities and protection of the public,
- emergency plans, and
- first aid provision.
Once a Method Statement has been prepared, it must be communicated to the employees who will
carry it out. When briefed on a Method Statement, employees should be questioned to check that
they have understood what they have been told. They should also be encouraged to ask questions if
unclear on any aspect of the information they have been given.
Finally, the person who prepares the Method Statement should have a monitoring role to ensure that
the requirements of the Method Statement are being properly implemented.

1. LHDA Method Statement Form LHDA-SHEQ-Form 8.1
21
8.1.2. Environmental Method Statements
As part of implementing the CEMP - refer paragraph 8.8.1. Construction EMP (CEMP) - the
Contractor shall prepare Method Statements. These Method Statements should specify how they will
manage potential environmental impacts in line with the requirements of the EMP, and, where
relevant, environmental best practice; and how they will practically ensure that the objectives of the
EMP are achieved. The CEMP shall also provide for undertaking of risk assessments during
construction to determine potential impacts of activities deemed by the Consultant or Contractor not
to have been adequately covered in the CEMP or the EMP. These risk assessments shall identify
potential environmental risks, prioritise the risks and determine management measures.
8.2. Task Risk Assessments

Task Risk Assessment is a method for systematically examining a task to identify risks, evaluate the
risks and specify appropriate controls; it forms the basis of the Method Statement. Work steps
definition and risk identification help users check, assess and confirm controls.
When carrying out a Task Risk Assessment, include all foreseeable risks arising from, or in
conjunction with, the task being assessed. The assessment should be carried out before any work is
started and should be reviewed as needed. A review should also be carried out when starting on a
new site or when introducing new machinery, equipment, tools or activities into a task, which may
mean new risks or a change in risk.

1. LHDA Task Risk Assessment Form LHDA-SHEQ-Form 8.2-1
8.2.1. Daily Site Task Instructions (DSTIs)

In addition to TRAs, the Contractor shall, on a daily basis and for every task to be performed, conduct
a pre-task SHEQ risk assessment in the form of a Daily Site Task Instruction (DSTI) at their working
area and in the presence of the entire team involved with the task(s). The DSTI will form the basis of
the daily pre-task brief/toolbox talks prior to the start of work. Proof of communication as well as
confirmation that it was received and understood, by all who will be involved in the execution of the
task, will be noted on a standard form, which will be kept at the worksite during the task execution.
Each Contractor shall maintain a record of DSTIs conducted as they will be audited on a regular basis
(to be determined). Primarily, the DSTIs will be supplementing the SWP/SOP and Method Statement
developed for specific tasks. The completed signed DSTI form will be filed in the Consultant’s
Contractor SHEQ File.

1. LHDA Daily Site Task Instruction (DSTI) Form LHDA-SHEQ-Form 8.2-2
8.3. Mobilisation Requirements

The Consultant and Contractors shall take the necessary steps to be prepared and ready – including
requirements for site establishment, inventories (of hazardous materials), registers (of employees,
machinery, equipment, tools and vehicles) and SHEQ provisions specified in this document - to
commence with the work defined by the contract, and on the date as defined in the contract.
After award of the contract and prior to work commencing, the Contractor must arrange and
participate in a SHEQ review, during the contract start-up meeting, with the relevant Consultant SHEQ
Manager or nominated Representative. The purpose of this review is to:
o Confirm the contents of the SHEQ Management Plan;

o Determine progress for mobilisation and site establishment activities; and
o Confirm specific SHEQ risks are addressed prior to project work commencement.
22
The Contractor’s Project Manager, Project Sponsor (or equivalent) and Senior Site Representative
must attend the above meeting. The meeting is conducted prior to the Contractor commencing
activities on the Site.
Criteria used to evaluate and determine Contractors’ SHEQ readiness include:
o Proof of SHEQ resources availability and competency (job category list & training matrix)
o Proof of employee training and competence
o Workmen’s Compensation registration
o Public Liability Insurance
o Department of Labour registration (or stamped application form)
o Appointments
o Required pre-employment medicals completed and a Medical Fitness Certificate for each
employee
o Risk Assessments
o Workplace Standards, SWPs, SOPs and possible generic Method Statements available
o PPE available or issued
o Inventories and registers (including equipment inspection records and test certificates)
o Where required, a site establishment plan (to be integrated into the site master plan)
o Access control arrangements
o Contractor’s registered SH/E/Q Officer(s) interviewed and approved by the Consultant
SHEQ Manager
o Attendance of the Consultant Project and Site Induction programme(s)
Contractor and Subcontractor readiness must be approved by the Consultant SHEQ Manager (or
delegated authority) before site access or permission to work is granted. A contract kick-off meeting
for each Contractor/Subcontractor must be arranged by the Consultant and LHDA SHEQ
Representatives must be invited to attend.
8.3.1. Pre-contract documentation submission & site access

The Consultant (or LHDA in the case of a Consultant mobilisation) will make use of the documents
listed below in the evaluation of SHEQ documentation submitted. Once the Consultant/Contractor
SHEQ Plan and supporting documentation is approved, the SHEQ Site Access Certificate is issued.

1. Evaluation – Consultant SHEQ Management Plan LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 8.3-1
2. Evaluation – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 8.3-2
3. Mobilisation – Site Establishment Checklist LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 8.3-3
4. Mobilisation – SHEQ Site Access Certificate LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 8.3-4
8.4. Emergency Preparedness and Response

The LHDA Project SHEQ Manager shall ensure coordination between, and arrangements with,
Consultants, emergency services on site (where applicable), emergency services from nearby
cities/towns and mutual aid partners (i.e. other industries nearby who might have response capability)
to provide for an effective interfacing of Consultant and Contractor personnel with emergency
agencies.
Emergency Preparedness and Response Plans shall be developed and implemented to respond to
the identified emergency and crisis situations. The Consultant shall develop detailed, site-specific
emergency preparedness and response plans that, through exercises, can be constantly tested and
improved, and changed as physical and organisational arrangements change. Appropriate resources
and communication procedures, both on and off the site, shall be identified to ensure the effective
implementation of the emergency and crisis situation arrangements. These resources shall include
23
appropriate personnel, contractors, emergency services, and equipment and warning devices
necessary for emergency response.
These plans shall outline measures for the prevention and mitigation of illnesses and injuries arising
from crisis and emergency situations. The plan should be tested to ensure that it encompasses all
the outcomes of known or reasonably foreseeable risks and that it would be effective in providing a
sufficient and timely response. This testing must include full scale ‘live’ rehearsals of a response plan.
Emergency response procedures shall spell out how the site will respond to emergencies, including
a series of checklists that can be quickly accessed by management, response personnel and
employees. Contractors may extend these procedures to accommodate work- or area-specific
scenarios and response actions – but the plans shall remain integrated.
8.4.1. Fire Protection

The Consultant must develop, for implementation by his Contractors, a comprehensive fire safety and
emergency response program to protect employees commensurate with the nature of the work that
is performed. This includes appropriate facility and site-wide fire protection, fire alarm notification and
egress features, and access to a fully staffed, trained, and equipped emergency response
organisation that is capable of responding in a timely and effective manner to site emergencies. An
acceptable fire protection programme must include those fire protection criteria and procedures,
analyses, hardware and systems, apparatus and equipment, and personnel that would
comprehensively ensure that the above objective is met.
8.5. Site Establishment and Facilities

Requirements – Workplace Standards
Due to the physical nature of the workplace, it contains Safety and Health (S&H) hazards and
therefore poses S&H risks. The Consultant shall implement the necessary measures to control the
S&H risks posed by the workplace and manage these to ensure the workplace does not have any
adverse effects on the workforce. The Consultant must develop clear Workplace Standards to ensure
legal and LHDA requirements are met by Contractors and Subcontractors. These include:
i. Employees Site Facilities

ii. Site Access Control and Movement (Traffic & People) Management on Site
iii. Transportation of Employees
iv. Food and Food Safety
8.5.1. Employees Site Facilities

Contractors shall ensure that all workplaces and workplace facilities, as specified by the Consultant,
meet the health, safety and welfare needs of all members of their workforce, including disabled
persons.
Administrative offices
The number and quality of the office accommodation should be appropriate to the length of time that
site staff will be using them and by the number of personnel that will be using them. The site offices
should be as far as possible watertight, dust and sound proof and of a solid construction. Suitable
lighting and ventilation must be fitted either in the form of windows or lights, air conditioners and fans.
Toilets
The Contractor shall provide suitable and sufficient clean and hygienic toilets in readily accessible
places at all work sites of the Contractor’s involvement. Men and women shall have separate facilities
unless each facility is in a separate room with a lockable door and is for use by only one person at a
time.
24
Washroom facilities
The Contractor shall provide washroom facilities for his workforce to be able to clean or bathe
themselves following the completion of a work day or shift; this shall include a supply of clean water,
soap, clean towels or other suitable means of cleaning and drying. The Contractor shall take the
nature and dirtiness of the work as well as the number of people that will be requiring the use of
washroom facilities into account when determining the extent of the washroom facilities that will be
provided.
Lockers and change rooms

The Contractor shall provide change rooms with lockers where work and non-work clothes can be
stored securely for each of their employees. Separate change rooms for men and women shall be
provided.
Rest areas and eating facilities

The Contractor shall provide suitable and sufficient, readily accessible rest facilities for employees to
use during breaks, as well as shaded, clean and hygienic facilities for employees to eat meals at
work.
Drinking water
The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of clean drinking water in refillable enclosed
containers where it cannot be obtained directly from a main supply. The Contractor shall mark drinking
water clearly where there is a significant risk of people drinking non-drinking water. The Contractor
shall at all times comply with Part VII, Section 110 and Section 9 of the Sixth Schedule both of the
Lesotho Labour Code (Order 24 of 1992), with respect to the supply of drinking water to employees.
Lighting
The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting in the workplace (including for evening work) to enable
people to work and move about safely without requiring additional lighting; light fittings should not
create any hazards. Automatic emergency lighting should be provided where sudden loss of light
would create a risk.
Ventilation
The Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation in the workplace to ensure workforce health and
safety is not endangered by airborne pollutants in the air they are breathing, or a lack of oxygen. The
Contractor shall provide breathing apparatus (also see Personal Protective Equipment requirements)
to affected Employees where natural or mechanical ventilation or exhausting is not effective or
adequate in improving the air quality to within acceptable standards – refer the Environmental
Regulations for Workplaces, SA OHS Act (85 of 1993).
8.5.2. Site Access Control and Movement (Traffic & People)

Management on Site
In order to ensure the proper movement of people, material and equipment on their worksite, the
Consultant must carefully plan for the following:
o Movement of people to and from the site

o Access control
o Movement of people on site
o Movement of material and equipment
o Traffic control on site
Once a Contractor project site has been approved the Contractor must establish the site layout plan,
considering at least the following:
o Location of the site.

o Conditions on site.
25
o Access to the site.
o Drainage of the site.
o Ground conditions (wet/icy weather conditions, marshy conditions, and ground movements).
o Services available (water, sewers, electricity, gas, telephones, etc.).
o The type and quantities of material that is to be stored and laydown areas.
o The type of construction equipment that is to be used.
o Disposal sites for excess soil or rubbish.
o Security on site (access security, security of materials delivered, etc.).
o Accommodation requirements for the employer and his representatives.
o Local suppliers.
o Local labour availability.
This plan shall be submitted to the Consultant as part of a construction logistics plan, to include:
o Movement of people – Controls must be in place to prevent pedestrians from ending up in

the path of oncoming vehicles or moving machinery, or interrupt safe working conditions of
other employees.
o Work in Operating Areas - When a Contractor is working in close proximity to operating
cranes, roads, access ways or other equipment and a safety hazard has been identified, the
Contractor must provide signage and competent Safety Watchers as necessary. They must
also provide, erect and subsequently dismantle all the required barriers, wheel stops, buffer
stops, flashing lights, flags or other safety equipment to enable its operations to proceed in
a manner which satisfies the provisions of this Framework. At all times, defined access ways
are to be kept clear of objects or obstructions which could hinder safe access by others,
cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment or plant.
8.5.3. Transportation of Employees

Transporting of employees on the back of trucks or LDVs is NOT permitted and equipment/materials
must be transported in separate load spaces, or vehicles, to employees. All vehicles used for
transportation of personnel for the execution of work for LHWP2 must be fitted with seatbelts and the
use of such is compulsory. Transportation of people shall meet the relevant legal requirements and
all loads carried on vehicles must be safely secured, irrespective of the journey.
8.5.4. Food and Food Safety

The Contractor shall provide free meals (of a high nutritional value and of a well-balanced dietary
nature) seven days a week to all employees accommodated on site, consisting of breakfast, lunch
and dinner. Employees not accommodated on site shall be provided with lunch whilst at work - the
Contractor must cost for the provision of these.
Pursuant to Section 13 in the Sixth Schedule of the Lesotho Labour Code (Order 24 of 1992),
regarding facilities for the taking of meals, where the Contractor provides food or beverages to people
employed on the project site he shall ensure that any preparation and serving of food or beverages
is carried out under controlled, hygienic conditions of high standard. The food safety and hygiene
measures and facilities on site must, as a minimum, comply with municipal regulations/bylaws (of
which copies are available from the LHDA PMU for ease of reference). Where food is prepared and/or
served on site, the Consultant shall ensure that critical control points in the food supply process are
identified, that canteen facilities are clean and hygienic and that food is handled, prepared, served
and disposed of safely and hygienically.
Meals are to be taken only in a designated eating place with adjacent hand-washing facilities.
Adequate waste disposal facilities shall be in place for leftover food.
26
8.6. Safety Management
Contractors shall review generic documents (such as SOPs, Method Statements, etc.) that may have
been developed and submitted during the tender stage, to ensure project-specific risks are addressed
adequately prior to commencing with project work.
8.6.1. Controlling Hazardous Work – Safe Work Practices (SWPs)

LHDA has developed and included the following generic Safe Work Practices (SWPs) in the
Framework to serve as minimum guidelines for controlling hazardous work. Consultants and
Contractors must however review the applicability and suitability of these SWPs within their own
scope of work before use and, where required, amend the SWPs to ensure suitability.
These SWPs must not be construed as relieving the Consultant or Contractor from complying with
any additional specific SHEQ requirement that it determines to be necessary to manage their SHEQ
performance during project delivery. Where necessary, the Consultant or Contractor will be expected
to develop own task-specific SWP to supplement the LHDA SWPs.

1. Work Permits LHWP2-SWP1
2. Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock-out and Tag-out) LHWP2-SWP2
3. Explosives Handling and Blasting LHWP2-SWP3
4. Tunnelling LHWP2-SWP4
5. Excavation and Trenching LHWP2-SWP5
6. Working from Elevated Positions LHWP2-SWP6
7. Working at, over or near Water LHWP2-SWP7
8. Working in danger of Engulfment LHWP2-SWP8
9. Working Outdoors LHWP2-SWP9
10. Confined Spaces LHWP2-SWP10
11. Stacking and Storage LHWP2-SWP11
12. Manual Handling LHWP2-SWP12
13. Housekeeping LHWP2-SWP13
14. Notices, Signs and Barricading LHWP2-SWP14
15. Fire Prevention, Protection & Control LHWP2-SWP15
16. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) LHWP2-SWP16
17. Rigging, Slinging and Lifting LHWP2-SWP17
18. Waste Management LHWP2-SWP18
8.6.2. Controlling Workplace Safety Hazards – Standard

Operating Procedures (SOPs)
LHDA has developed and included the following generic Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) in
the Framework to serve as minimum guidelines for controlling workplace safety hazards. Consultants
and Contractors must however review the applicability and suitability of these SOPs within their own
scope of work before use and, where required, amend the SOPs to ensure suitability.
These SOPs must not be construed as relieving the Consultant or Contractor from complying with
any additional specific SHEQ requirement that it determines to be necessary to manage their SHEQ
performance during project delivery.
Consultants and Contractors shall further develop additional Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)
for the equipment, machinery, tools and vehicles used during project delivery, but not included in the
SOPs listed below.
27
1.1.1.1 Equipment

1. Portable Ladders LHWP2-SOP-E1
2. Welding LHWP2-SOP-E2
3. Vessels under Pressure LHWP2-SOP-E3
4. Mobile and Tower Cranes LHWP2-SOP-E4
5. Scaffolding LHWP2-SOP-E5
6. Elevating Work Platforms LHWP2-SOP-E6
7. Builders’ Hoists LHWP2-SOP-E8
1.1.1.2 Machinery

1. Machine Guarding LHWP2-SOP-M1
2. Conveyors LHWP2-SOP-M2
1.1.1.3 Tools

1. Hand Tools LHWP2-SOP-T1
2. Portable (Electrical & Pneumatic) Tools LHWP2-SOP-T2
3. Angle Grinders LHWP2-SOP-T3
1.1.1.4 Vehicles

1. Light Vehicles LHWP2-SOP-V1
2. Forklift Trucks LHWP2-SOP-V2
3. Trucks and Tippers LHWP2-SOP-V3
4. Earthmoving Equipment LHWP2-SOP-V4
8.7. Occupational Health Management

Occupational health is a combination of two main disciplines, namely occupational hygiene
(assessment and monitoring) and occupational medicine (medical surveillance). The essential
function of an occupational health management system is to eliminate occupational injuries and
illnesses. This is done by ensuring that health hazards are recognised, evaluated and controlled.
8.7.1. Occupational Hygiene

There are three core functions of the industrial hygiene programme: recognising, evaluating and
implementing controls to correct or eliminate workplace health hazards. The Consultant shall include,
with the site-specific requirements, the exposures to work-related hazards (and levels of such
exposures - based on Initial or baseline surveys and periodic resurveys and/or exposure monitoring
as appropriate) prevailing on a project site in order to enable the implementation of adequate control
measures by Contractors.
In any case in which it is requisite for ensuring the maintenance of adequate control of the exposure
of employees to substances/conditions hazardous to health, or it is otherwise requisite for protecting
the health of employees, the Contractor shall ensure that the exposure of employees to
substances/conditions hazardous to health is monitored in accordance with the site-specific
requirements.
28
8.7.2. Medical Surveillance Programme
The key to a successful occupational medicine programme is to have someone responsible for its
management. The occupational medicine programme is based on results from the hygiene
programme and will require input by an Occupational Medical Practitioner with the appropriate
knowledge.
The Consultant shall ensure all persons required to perform work on behalf of/for LHDA need to meet
the physical & psychological criteria for fitness for work. All employees shall be subjected to risk based
medical surveillance / examinations - including pre-employment-, periodic- (at intervals depending on
the employee's occupation and exposure to risk), transfer- and exit medical examinations. All
personnel employed to work on the project shall possess an up-to-date certificate of fitness, issued
by an approved authority, and a record copy shall be kept in respective personal files.
The screening and examination of employees shall be carried out by a registered medical practitioner
and records of all examinations shall be kept fully confidential; and shall be retained for 40 years after
contract completion. LHDA will submit medical records to the Ministry of Health or the area
Government Hospital for safekeeping upon completion of the contract.
8.7.3. HIV/AIDS Programme

The Contractor shall not discriminate against a job applicant on the basis of his or her HIV/AIDS
status (refer to Section 235 E. (1) of the Labour Code (Amendment) Act, 2006). The Contractor shall
implement an HIV/AIDS programme via a nationally approved Service Provider and shall undertake
the measures as specified in this Framework to reduce the risk of the transfer of the HIV virus between
and among the Contractor’s employees, their families and the local community, to promote voluntary
early diagnosis, and to assist affected individuals.
1.2.3.1 HIV awareness programme
The Contractor will implement an HIV/AIDS awareness programme. This will include voluntary
counselling and testing (VCT) of individuals, HIV/AIDS awareness training and access to ongoing
support for affected individuals. The Contractor shall arrange for, provide a suitable venue, and
instruct all employees to attend the HIV awareness programme; ensuring that their employees and
their Subcontractor employees are aware of this programme. While basic awareness regarding the
HIV/AIDS programme can be covered during induction sessions, the Consultant/Contractor shall
make provision of overtime payment to employees during HIV/AIDS education and training by
competent service provider, local medical staff or a suitably trained staff member after normal working
hours.
The Contractor shall, as soon as a construction employee camp is established and populated, and
throughout the contract (including the defects notification period):
(i) conduct information, education and communication campaigns, at least every other
month, addressed to all the project site employees (including all Subcontractors’
personnel and all truck drivers and crew making deliveries to site for construction
activities) and to the immediate local communities, concerning the risks, dangers and
impact, and appropriate avoidance behaviour with respect to, of sexually transmitted
diseases (STDs) - or sexually transmitted infections (STIs) in general and HIV/AIDS
in particular;
(ii) provide male or female condoms for all employees, as appropriate, free of charge;
(iii) provide for voluntary STI and HIV/AIDS screening, diagnosis, counselling and
referral to a dedicated national STI and HIV/AIDS programme, (unless otherwise
agreed) of all employees; and
(iv) Monitor outcomes, in collaboration with national HIV/AIDS authorities.
29
The STI, STD and HIV/AIDS alleviation programme shall indicate when, how and at what cost the
Contractor plans to satisfy these Framework requirements. For each component, the programme
shall detail the resources to be provided or utilised and any related sub-contracting proposed. The
programme shall also include provision of a detailed cost estimate with supporting documentation;
the HIV/AIDS awareness requirements should be identified as separate items/activities and be
included in the Bills of Quantities, or in activity schedules as a single item or a group of items.
1.2.3.2 HIV Reporting
The Contractor shall prepare and attach to his claims for payment a brief report which outlines how
the actions taken by the Contractor in the period for which payment is claimed satisfy the requirements
and a schedule which lists the names, identity numbers, trade/occupation and name of employer of
all construction employees exposed to the programme. Payment to the Contractor for preparation
and implementation of this programme shall not exceed the provisional sum dedicated for this
purpose (refer the FIDIC Pink Book for more details).
8.7.4. Hazardous chemical substances (HCS)

Prior to any HCS being brought onto the site or produced on the site, the Contractor shall supply the
Consultant SHEQ Manager with the following:
i. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS);

ii. Purpose for bringing the hazardous substance onto the site;
iii. Proposed arrangements for safe storage;
iv. Proposed methods for handling / usage;
v. Proposed method of disposal;
vi. Hazard communication / training plan.
The information is to be provided at least two (2) working days prior to the expected delivery on site.
The Consultant SHEQ Manager will review and may approve or reject the use of any HCS after
receiving the above information. A HCS shall not be brought onto the site before the Consultant SHEQ
Manager has approved its use. Information relating to all HCS approved for use shall be forwarded
to the LHDA Project SHEQ Manager.
8.7.5. First Aid

Contractors must provide an appropriately equipped first aid box or boxes at or near the workplace
where more than five employees are employed. Where there are more than 10 employees employed
on the site, for every group of up to 50 employees at that workplace, at least one person who is in
possession of a valid certificate of competency in first aid, is readily available during normal working
hours.
8.7.6. Emergency Care

The Consultant shall ensure sufficient medical equipment and staff to be available for all medical
events that may occur on site, and stabilising emergency cases for transportation and final treatment
at hospital. During early works, while emergency care arrangements and facilities are still under
development, the Consultant shall clearly specify interim emergency care arrangements to be
established, implemented and maintained by the Contractor, and how the Consultant will coordinate
these emergency care arrangements for the project site.
8.7.7. Management of Alcohol and Substance Abuse

The Consultant shall put in place measures to ensure no person under the influence of alcohol, drugs
or medication (in a state of intoxication) or any other condition that may render him incapable of
controlling himself or of other persons under his charge shall be allowed to enter the site.
30
The Consultant shall further ensure a drug and other substance abuse policy is implemented. The
policy should embrace an effective drug and other substance abuse prevention programme and an
employee assistance programme (EAP) to assist in identifying and resolving affected employees’
problems by providing confidential short-term counselling, referral, and follow-up services.
8.7.8. Welfare
Good health and welfare facilities on site will reduce health risks, but only if employees use them and
help to keep them in good condition. Provision of welfare facilities are defined in the Workplace
Standard (to be developed by the Consultant) as required in paragraph 8.5.1. Employees Site
Facilities.
8.7.9. Workmen’s Compensation

Consultants and Contractors must be registered for Workmen’s Compensation (refer The Workmen’s
Compensation Act No.13 of 1977). Proof of registration must be submitted with the tender SHEQ
documentation specified.
8.8. Environmental Management

The Consultant and Contractor shall comply with all the relevant legislation particularly the
Environmental Act of 2008, policies, multilateral environmental agreements and the constitutional
provisions aimed at the protection of the environment including the project Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) and the environmental authorisation or record of decision issued by the
Department of Environment, where applicable, before performing any work. This includes strategies
to prevent environmental harm, such as contamination of air, land and water.
The Consultant and Contractor shall promote culture of environmental responsibility to ensure
integration of environmental matters into their operations.
8.8.1. Construction EMP (CEMP)

The Consultant shall prepare and submit to LHDA, for approval in consultation with their
Environmental Manager (EM), a Construction EMP (CEMP). The Plan shall be based on and
complement the Project Environmental Management Plan (EMP). The CEMP represents a site-
specific EMP and shall cover all environmental protection works, including descriptions of
environmental safeguards, mitigation measures, closure and rehabilitation plan and emergency
procedures.
The CEMP shall distinguish in impacts arising from the contract works into two categories:
i. direct impacts - those impacts caused directly by contract works activities and occur at the
same time and place; and
ii. indirect impacts (also known as secondary, tertiary, or chain impacts) - those impacts which
are caused by the action and are later in time or farther removed in distance, but are still
reasonably foreseeable.
Based on the CEMP, Contractors must develop Method Statements (see paragraph 8.1) that will
address environmental management issues at site level. The Method Statements will enable the
potential positive and negative environmental impacts associated with the proposed construction
activity to be identified and mitigation measures put in place; the method statement provides an
environmental manual for use by management and construction staff involved in the project works,
as it addresses the environmental issues that are specific to an activity and/or site.
The Consultant shall provide a directive to the Contractor, indicating how and when the rehabilitation
process shall be conducted - i.e. concurrent with work activities and/or during the defects liability
31
period? The contractor shall submit a Method Statement - for approval by the Consultant - on how
the rehabilitation process will be executed.
Note: No advice, approval of method statements or any other form of communication from LHDA will
be construed as an acceptance by LHDA of any obligation that indemnifies the Consultant/Contractor
from achieving any required level of performance. Further, there is no acceptance of liability by LHDA
which may result from the Consultant/Contractor failing to comply with the requirements, i.e. the
Consultant/Contractor remains responsible for achieving the required performance levels.
8.8.2. Project environmental requirements

The Contractor’s Method Statements shall address all aspects for the following environmental
features, among others that may be relevant:
i. Air quality
ii. Water quality
iii. Water quantity
iv. Land
v. Visual/aesthetic
vi. Social
vii. Fauna
viii. Flora
8.8.3. Public Complaints

The Consultant shall establish clear guidelines for the recording and management of any public
complaints received (refer to LHDA communication protocol - Appendix B of the LHWP2 Procedures
for Consultants).
8.9. Quality Management

Quality management must ensure the adequate control and assurance of quality for materials,
equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction by the Contractor and its Subcontractors,
suppliers and authorised laboratories.
Contractor quality control (QC) is designed to monitor, assess, and adjust the production or placement
processes of specific materials to ensure that the final product will meet the specified quality level.
Consultant quality assurance (QA) involves all those planned and systematic actions necessary to
provide confidence that the facilities will perform satisfactorily in service; that it addresses the overall
objective of obtaining the quality of the facility to be built in the most efficient, economical, and
satisfactory manner possible.
The Consultant will maintain a complete submittal schedule and list of products for all items requiring
LHDA’s review and approval and will administer and control the processing of Contractors’ submittals.
After being reviewed for completeness, submittal documents will be transmitted to the relevant staff
in the Consultant’s Design Department for review and verification for compliance with contract
requirements. Submittal documents need to be approved finally by the LHDA PMU.
8.9.1. Quality Control

The Contractor is responsible for establishing, implementing, and maintaining a quality control system
to manage, control, document, and ensure that work complies with the requirements of the plans and
specifications. Quality control testing measures quality characteristics and inspects activities that
impact the quality of the finished product at a time when corrective action can be taken, if needed.
The efforts and testing defined and performed by the Contractor should be able to identify
nonconforming material and prevent its incorporation into the final product. It also identifies proper
32
control and provides a level of confidence that the work is being completed according to the
specifications.
Quality control activities shall be accomplished by competent personnel. A competent person is: One
who is experienced and capable of identifying, evaluating, and documenting that materials and
processes being used will result in work that complies with the contract; and, who has authority to
take prompt action to remove, replace, stop or correct such work or products not in compliance. Off-
site testing laboratories shall be certified or inspected by a nationally recognised entity. The
Contractor shall submit to the Consultant, for approval, the names, qualifications, authorities,
certifications, and availability of the competent personnel who will perform the quality control activities.
The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain a quality control plan (QCP) to manage,
control, document, and ensure that work complies with the requirements of the contract documents.
The minimum Contractor QC activities are defined in the construction contract. The Contractor’s QCP
should address the following elements for each contract item:
o Managing the work to ensure that both onsite and offsite work complies with the contract
requirements, including the work of subcontractors, suppliers, and testing laboratories.
o Managing submittals, including but not limited to, supplemental QCPs, qualification and
certification documents for laboratories and testing personnel, certificates of compliance,
shop drawings and proposed methods for fabrication and construction activities, mix designs,
inspection reports, and test results.
o Providing the necessary inspection to ensure effective quality control and assurance of quality
for acceptance of materials and workmanship. This includes but is not limited to fabrication,
sampling and testing, production, storage, delivery, construction, placement and installation.
o Identifying, controlling, and documenting materials and workmanship that do not meet the
specified level of quality. Documentation should include the nature of the nonconformity (see
paragraph 10.1), location, extent, and disposition (such as removed and replaced, reworked,
accepted based on engineering judgment). The final disposition of nonconforming materials
or workmanship must be authorised by the Consultant.
o Training to ensure that proficiency is achieved and maintained by personnel performing
activities that affect quality and/or perform QC activities.
o Ensuring that the equipment used in the production and testing of the materials provides
accurate and precise measurements in accordance with the applicable specifications.
o Maintaining a record of inspections (see paragraph 9.3.1), including but not limited to, date
of inspection, results of inspection, and any subsequent corrective actions (see paragraph
10.2) taken.
While the primary purpose of quality control activities is to provide timely information for the Contractor
to monitor and guide each production or placement process, quality control data for certain quality
characteristics may also be used in the final acceptance decision. If the data is used in the acceptance
decision, it must be validated by independently obtained verification data. The Consultant is
responsible for conducting verification sampling and testing to provide an assessment of deliverable
quality that is completely independent of the Contractor’s quality control process.
The Contractor's quality control records shall document both acceptable and deficient features of the
work and corrective actions taken. All records shall be on forms approved by the contracting officer,
be legible, and be dated and signed by the competent person creating the record.
Unless otherwise specified in the QCP, records shall include:
a. Documentation of shop drawings including date submitted to and date approved by the
contracting officer, results of examinations, any need for changes or modifications,
manufacturer's recommendations and certifications, if any, and signature of the authorised
examiner.
b. Documentation of material delivered including quantity, storage location, and results of quality
control examinations and tests.
33
c. Type, number, date, time, and name of individuals performing quality control activities.
d. The material or item inspected and tested, the location and extent of such material or item,
and a description of conditions observed and test results obtained during the quality control
activity.
e. The determination that the material or item met the contract provisions and documentation
that the Consultant was notified (the original plus one copy of all records, inspections, tests
performed and material testing reports shall be submitted to the Consultant within one
working day of completion; for material delivered it shall be submitted before the material is
used).
f. For deficient work, the nature of the defects, specifications not met, corrective action taken,
and results of quality control activities on the corrected material or item.
8.9.2. Quality Assurance

Quality assurance (QA) involves continued evaluation of the activities of planning, design,
development of plans and specifications, sourcing and awarding of contracts, construction,
maintenance, and the interactions of these activities. The Consultant shall define the quality
requirements for material and workmanship to be incorporated into the project, and the acceptance
criteria by which it will verify conformance with the plans and specifications, in a Quality Assurance
Programme (QAP).
Including planning and design activities in the QAP helps to ensure that designs are economical,
constructible, maintainable and appropriate for their locations and surroundings; good design quality
assurance requires several reviewers who represent all technical skills involved. The Consultant shall
facilitate the efforts of the design and construction teams in a coherent and efficient manner. Further
elements of an acceptable QAP include quality control by the Contractor, acceptance sampling and
testing and inspection by the Consultant, independent assurance, qualified personnel, accredited
laboratories, and a dispute resolution process. These elements work together to ensure an effective
QAP.
Responsibilities of the Consultant QA staff include oversight and verification that the project is being
conducted in accordance with applicable quality criteria, as specified in the contract documents, and
other specified requirements. QA staff will perform the monitoring, inspection, and testing activities
and shall be properly trained and qualified to perform their assigned duties.
The Consultant may use results from Contractor quality control testing for acceptance. For
acceptance of results, the following Consultant activities must occur:
o Authorisation of the Contractor’s quality control plan.

o Accreditation of the Contractor’s laboratory.
o Authorisation of qualifications of Contractor’s testing personnel.
o Evaluation of quality control sampling and testing.
o Verification that validates the quality of sampling and testing.
The Consultant shall document a dispute resolution process used to resolve conflicts resulting from
discrepancies between the Consultant verification test results and the Contractor’s quality control test
results when the Contractor’s results are used in the acceptance program. This type of resolution
addresses test results used in the acceptance decision and must not be confused with contract
administration dispute resolution processes.
8.9.3. Inspection and test plans

The Consultant shall develop Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs) to set out critical control points or hold
points at various, appropriate stages within the construction process. The ITP should follow the
sequence of work and clearly define who is responsible for signing off each inspection or test, clearly
specifying the hold points - prior to each phase of high cost/high value work, where any pre-existing
problems will create difficulties at the next stage, or will mean a high cost of re-work when discovered
34
later in the process. For each check point, list the material to be tested, tests to be conducted, the
location of sampling and the frequency of testing. The ITP might refer to different checklists for each
inspection point, or could refer to a specification, code or standard that sets out the requirements for
what and how the check must be performed. The ITP may be referenced from, or incorporated into,
the Consultant’s QAP.
8.9.4. Control of inspection, measuring and test equipment

Consultants and Contractors must ensure all Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment is selected,
used, maintained and calibrated to an extent consistent with its type and service duty, appropriate to
the degree of accuracy and precision required. Calibration status of all equipment must be clearly
visible. Records of calibration status, test documentation, and calibration certificates (where
applicable) must be maintained as a source for scheduling re-calibrations. In the event of significant
non-conformity of any Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment, the validity of previous inspection
and test results must be assessed and nonconforming items of equipment be marked and removed
from service.
8.10. Engineering change management

The Consultant shall develop and engineering change control procedure, to be formally set out in a
project quality plan, to ensure that changes to controlled aspects of the project are correctly prepared,
motivated, reviewed, approved and authorised Consultant and/or LHDA PMU at the right time before
they can be implemented, and to ensure changes are properly documented and reflected in all project
information.
All engineering project change requests (PCR) shall be formally initiated through a single point of
entry for the contract, where all change requests are registered. Any stakeholder of the contract can
submit a request and all requests shall be captured in a project change register. For all valid requests
that impact engineering and affect the baseline, the change coordinator shall create an engineering
change notification (ECN) that is to be evaluated by the Consultant. For all accepted ECNs, the
Consultant shall open an Engineering Change Request (ECR).
ECRs shall be classified by the Consultant Engineering Manager or any person delegated to do so,
according to their potential impact on affected systems or disciplines, SHEQ, regulation, project
timelines and cost. The ECR level classification, criteria and relevant engineering change committee
members must be clearly defined. The implementation status of engineering changes shall be
reviewed in the subsequent formal design review of all affected packages. Once construction and
commissioning is completed, the change coordinator shall close out the PCR and a notification shall
also be sent to the Consultant to close out the ECR and update the status.
When changes are made to drawings, the revision number, date of revision and description of revision
shall be updated in the drawing title block (refer paragraph 1.5.3 in the LHWP2 Procedures for
Consultants).
8.11. Maintenance of equipment, machinery, tools

and vehicles
All mechanical and electrical plant and equipment must be suitably maintained to prevent employees
from being endangered by unsafe and substandard equipment; breakdowns also have a negative
impact on productivity. Consultants shall ensure the implementation of an inspection (pre-use/daily/
weekly/monthly) and maintenance programme to ensure all mechanical and electrical equipment and
fleet vehicles (their own and their Contractors’) used on the project are maintained and kept in safe,
efficient working order and good repair. An equipment register and inspection programme need to
combine pre-use inspections and detailed periodic inspections that are typically conducted on a
weekly or monthly basis. Where appropriate, checklists must be used for these inspections and all
35
checklists must be returned and retained as records of inspections having been done. Records of
completed inspection, test and repair activities must be kept for the duration of the project.
8.12. Demobilisation requirements

Users often assume control of a facility or site when a great deal of project work still remains (i.e.
partial take-over). Risks to employees and others not engaged in project work can increase
substantially, as they visit the site or spend more time there. The risks to the project employees can
also increase, owing to the presence and work of others not directly engaged or experienced in project
work. To minimise such risks, the management of this phase needs to be considered well in advance:
8.12.1. Commissioning and handover

Each Consultant must conduct a commissioning stage risk assessment and develop a
‘Commissioning SHEQ Plan’ for their scope of work, or ensure that the commissioning plan includes
guidance and details on SHEQ, before commissioning or handing the facility/structure over to the
owner/operator:
o to determine how the site will be split up and access-controlled to safeguard project
employees as well as the owner/operator’s employees and/or members of the public;
o to ensure the content of the Project Safety File is complete and it is submitted to the
Consultant and LHDA SHEQ Management for review, approval and handover to the relevant
LHDA Operating Division for retention.
Where Consultants/Contractors do partial hand-overs amongst themselves (even back and forth)
throughout the different phases of the project, they must ensure continued enforcement and
maintenance of SHEQ requirements (with emphasis on ‘live’ pieces of plant, be it
mechanically/electrically or otherwise) which are likely to pose instant risk to employees without prior
notice, or may impact on other project deliverables. Each activity shall be reassessed by both the
Consultant and the Contractor in order to maximise the protection of employees and the environment,
as well as not to compromise the quality of work, as a result of reduced SHEQ and other resources
during these partial handovers; increased frequency of risk assessments and supervision must be
planned.
8.12.2. Project site decommissioning

The Consultant shall develop a ‘Site Decommissioning SHEQ Plan’ for their respective areas to keep
the project team’s attention focused on the tasks needed to complete the project, as opposed to what
they will be doing once the project is over. This plan must include:
o a SHEQ staffing plan for the final phase of the project that plans the reduction in project
staffing levels; and
o maintaining SHEQ and legal compliance while clearing away and removing from the site all
plant, surplus materials, waste and temporary works.
8.12.3. Project close-out

The project close-out process shall be made in accordance with the fixed and time-related charges
to ensure appropriate monitoring and verification processes. Consultants shall conduct a project
closure SHEQ review with every Contractor that completes their scope of work - for submission to
their respective LHDA SHEQ Managers - before the final contract payment is approved. The
Consultant shall -
o conduct a post-project SHEQ review to solicit feedback on the project from Contractors and
other stakeholders and generate a post implementation SHEQ report, including lessons
learned, as future reference for LHDA SHEQ and project managers;
36
o archive all relevant project-related SHEQ material, such as documents and reports produced,
decisions made, issues raised, and correspondence exchanged in the project repository; and
o Issue a project closure certificate to each Contractor upon successful completion of their
decommissioning activities.
37
9. Performance evaluation
9.1. Monitoring, measurement, analysis and

evaluation
Statistics is an integral part of the Framework for measuring SHEQ performance and assist in
improving the project SHEQ performance. Measurement information sustains the operation and
development of the SHEQ management system, and the control of risk, by:
o providing information on how the SHEQ management system operates in practice;

o identifying areas where remedial action is required; and
o providing a basis for continual improvement.
9.1.1. SHEQ performance reporting

The primary purpose of reporting SHEQ performance is to provide information on the progress and
current status in achieving the defined SHEQ objectives.
2.1.1.1 Daily SHEQ Logs
The Contractor must maintain a daily SHEQ log, recording the details and time of occurrence of all
SHEQ activities/initiatives/incidents. The log must cover all important factors affecting SHEQ (such
as risk assessments completed, training done, meetings, inspections, audits, etc.) and can later be
used as a basic reference to determine the exact history of work at any given time. Monthly reviews
of the daily logs provide input to and increase the objectivity of monthly SHEQ reporting.
2.1.1.2 Weekly SHEQ Reports
The Contractor must submit a weekly SHEQ report, based on the actual occurrence during the week,
to the Consultant by the Tuesday of the following week. The Consultant shall analyse the weekly
reports to determine whether any SHEQ trends or issues are developing, and initiate appropriate
actions or initiatives to address such trends or issues.
2.1.1.3 Monthly SHEQ Reports
The Consultant shall, in cooperation with the LHDA Project SHEQ Manager, implement the following
project SHEQ reporting requirements (based on the LHDA SHEQ Reporting Template):
o The Contractor must submit a monthly SHEQ report based on the actual results as on the
last day of the reporting month (the 25th will be deemed the cut-off date for SHEQ reporting)
to the Consultant before the 27th of the month. SHEQ data must be provided for each
Subcontractor individually, where relevant, and in total for the Contractor.
o The Consultant shall consolidate the Contractor monthly SHEQ reports into their own monthly
SHEQ report for submission to the LHDA Project SHEQ Manager by the first Tuesday of
every month. The LHDA Project SHEQ Manager shall submit a consolidated project SHEQ
report, providing information on the progress and current status of SHEQ management on
the project, to the Project Manager by the last day of the month.

1. SHEQ Daily Log Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.1-1
2. SHEQ Weekly Report Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.1-2
3. SHEQ Monthly Report Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.1-3
38
9.1.2. Consultant and Contractor SHEQ performance evaluation
The LHDA Project SHEQ Manager shall complete a comprehensive, face-to-face Consultant SHEQ
performance evaluation upon completion of their contract, before issuing a Project SHEQ Closure
Certificate Form. The Consultant shall, in turn, do the same with every Contractor and Subcontractor
(involving the Contractor in this instance) upon contract completion.

1. SHEQ Performance Evaluation LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.1-4
2. Project SHEQ Closure Certificate Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.1-5
9.2. Audits
The Consultant shall establish and maintain a formal SHEQ audit programme. Audits shall be based
on the guidance on the conduct of internal or external management system audits, as well as on the
management of audit programmes, as defined in the ISO 19011:2011 Guidelines for auditing
management systems. Consultant and Contractor management shall be actively engaged in
appropriate audits and reviews to ensure that effective, visible leadership is demonstrated.
The auditee shall plan corrective actions (see 10.2.) to address the audit findings within 3 working
days after completion of the audit close-out meeting. The effectiveness of the corrective action
programme shall be monitored by LHDA, the Consultant and the Contractor - where Subcontractors
are engaged – during follow-up audits.
The scope, frequency and methodology of the audit programme shall be appropriate to the nature
and scale of the project risks, and take into account the results of risk assessments and previous
audits, but the following are minimum requirements:
9.2.1. SHEQ Plan audits

Consultants and Contractors are required to conduct self-audits on the implementation of their SHEQ
Plans on a monthly basis or when the scope of work or context (see paragraph 4) changes. A
summary of the findings and the proposed corrective actions shall be submitted to the LHDA Project
Manager on the last day of the audit. The full audit report shall be submitted within one week after
completion of the audit.
9.2.2. Internal audits to the SHEQ Framework

Consultants and Contractors are required to conduct Internal Audits, to determine their compliance
with this SHEQ Framework, at six-monthly intervals during construction. An Internal Audit Team will,
as a minimum, comprise of a Lead Auditor, an Engineer (or person with appropriate knowledge)
familiar with the plant/equipment and/or process, and a person(s) with SHEQ management system
knowledge and experience.
A summary of the findings and the proposed corrective actions shall be submitted to the LHDA Project
Manager within two days from the last day of the audit. The full audit report shall be submitted within
one week after completion of the audit.
9.2.3. Third Party Framework compliance verification audits

LHDA will schedule annual Framework compliance verification audits at Consultants and long-term
(with contracts lasting more than 18 months) Contractors. These audits may be conducted by LHDA
SHEQ personnel, but 3rd Party (i.e., people external to the project) audits may also be arranged to
gain an independent assessment.
LHDA however reserves the right to arrange/conduct unannounced audits when deemed necessary.
39
9.3. Inspection and Planned Task Observation
(PTO) programmes
9.3.1. Inspection, testing and certification
A formal inspection, testing and certification programme shall be established, documented and
maintained. The Consultant shall define the desired scope, frequency and methodology of project
inspections to be consistent with the Consultant and its Contractors’ contract size, complexity and the
nature and scale of the hazards and associated risks, taking into account the results of risk
assessments.
The required frequency of required work site inspections is given as ‘frequent and regular’ as opposed
to any specific frequency (such as weekly or monthly). The SHEQ inspections required may be
accomplished concurrent with other on-site activities. There is no specific requirement for standalone
project SHEQ inspections by the SHEQ functionaries if project personnel have the requisite skills to
perform these functions.
However, in cases where project staff lacks the necessary skills or experience, or where particularly
hazardous or complex work is ongoing, it may be that these requirements are best fulfilled by SHEQ
professionals duly tasked by the Consultant or Contractor.
Any deficient condition, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of materials containing defects,
damage through carelessness or any other cause, found by, or disclosed to, the Consultant shall be
removed and replaced by work and materials which conform to the construction and contract
documents or shall be remedied unless otherwise agreed upon by the Consultant. Upon failure on
the part of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order to remedy, remove or replace work which
is nonconforming or contains defects, the Consultant will notify the Contractor that relevant payment
shall be withheld. The Consultant may also cause such nonconforming work or deficiency to be
remedied or removed and replaced by separate Contractors employed by the Consultant at the
Contractor’s expense.
9.3.2. Planned Task Observation (PTO) programme

The frequency of PTOs is based on the risk factors. The Contractor shall develop, implement and
maintain a PTO programme, for approval by the Consultant, to periodically observe all its tasks to:
o assess the level of compliance of employees with standards, requirements, procedures and
instructions;
o identify unsafe acts and behaviours; and
o correct unsafe acts and behaviours through coaching.
All PTOs are to be recorded using the form provided to provide a record of the observation, to allow
future audits to follow up on the items discovered and to ensure that the complete range of tasks and
employees are observed.
Accurate records of PTOs conducted and actions resulting shall be retained for the duration of the
contract. The Contractor shall use the information gathered from the PTO programme as input into
the review and update of relevant SHEQ documentation (i.e., programmes, standards, requirements,
Method Statements, practices, procedures or instructions) to ensure their continuing effectiveness
and applicability, as well as input into the review of future training requirements for employees.

1. Contract - PTO Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.3
40
9.4. Management review
The Consultant shall conduct annual SHEQ management reviews to evaluate the (their own and their
Contractors’) project SHEQ performance results and determine the suitability, adequacy and
effectiveness of SHEQ practices and improvement actions.
For implementation of this Framework, this review should however not be interpreted to the
requirements as specified in the ISO Management System requirements. Due to the limited duration
and nature of projects - with weekly coordination meetings, SHEQ meetings, progress meetings,
design meetings, management meetings, etc. between all the stakeholders, where all the progress
and current issues are discussed and followed up regularly - this review should instead be based on
a “Lessons Learned” approach and agenda. This meeting should result in project SHEQ improvement
initiatives, with results further reinforcing the “Lessons Learned” meeting/workshop - and thus future
project SHEQ practices - at the end of the Project.
The minutes of the annual Consultant management reviews shall be submitted to the LHDA SHEQ
Manager by end November each year. LHDA shall, in turn, conduct an annual management review
of the Consultants’ review results, to determine the effectiveness of this SHEQ Management
Framework in managing SHEQ during the LHWP2 project.
41
10. Improvement
10.1. Incident and nonconformity management

All incidents, nonconformities and hazards/risks identified will be reported and analysed. Any person
on the project site identifying a near-miss, nonconformity or risk must immediately report such
observation to their immediate supervisor or line manager – who must complete an LHDA Incident
Flash Report.
The Consultant shall ensure that procedures and systems are in place for reporting, investigation,
corrective action, closure and communication of all incidents. When an incident occurs, the extent of
the incident must be determined and relevant internal and external parties be notified. The Consultant
shall ensure:
o all employees are aware of incident response actions and site incident notification
requirements;
o reporting the incident to the relevant LHDA Representative – and authorities (if applicable);
o LHDA ‘Incident Flash Report’ completion and distribution within 24 hours;
o recording of full incident details in an LHDA ‘Incident Report’ and distribution within 72 hours;
o an incident investigation – employing a structured root cause analysis technique – is
conducted within 14 calendar days after the incident occurred to determine root causes of
the incident; and
o appropriate corrective actions are planned, approved, implemented and tracked to closure
within 30 calendar days after the conclusion of the incident investigation.
The Consultant shall maintain and implement procedures that define methods and responsibilities for
identification, documentation, control, and processing (through corrective action processes) of
nonconformities. A nonconformity exists when equipment, parts, materials or services exhibit
deficiency in physical characteristics, functional performance, or documentation. The Consultant shall
develop a Nonconformity Report (NCR) form to document and provide the following information:
o Identification of nonconformities
o Documentation
o Evaluations/Recommendations
o Separation/removal/identification
o Recommendation for “repair”, “rework” or “use as is” dispositions
o Cause(s) of nonconformity
o Proposed corrective action (see 10.2) to prevent recurrence
The Consultant/Contractor shall apply nonconformity procedures to all items, including activities
associated with installation and construction which fail to conform as specified, or to defined product
descriptions.

1. Contract - Incident Flash Report Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 10.1-1
2. Contract - Incident Report Form LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 10.1-2
10.2. Corrective action

Corrective actions must be implemented when audits, inspections and/or observations reveal non-
compliance or nonconformity, and as a result of incident investigations. The Consultant shall establish
processes to define corrective action management, and ensure that templates and registers aimed
at facilitating implementation of these corrective actions are included in the Contractors’ contract
packs.
42
Corrective action plans must be developed and submitted to the Consultant. The Consultant shall
record all corrective actions in a manner that enables prioritisation, status tracking and reporting.
Action implementation progress and status must be reported in the weekly and monthly SHEQ
Reports. Implemented corrective actions shall be followed up and monitored to ensure their
effectiveness in addressing the nonconformity or incident root causes before closure of the action.
In the case of corrective actions in response to major incidents or significant audit/inspection

nonconformities identified, the Consultant/Contractor shall commit adequate resources (appropriate
to the effects of the incidents or nonconformities encountered) to ensure efficient and effective
implementation of the actions. Where an unsafe practice or a breach of the statutory or contract
requirements is exposed, LHDA or the LHDA nominated Representative may, in accordance with the
General Conditions of Contract, suspend the work associated with the unsafe practice or breach until
rectified.
Risk response action plans must be recorded - clearly identified as such and referenced to a risk
assessment - and then tracked and reported through the same processes as corrective actions.
10.3. Improvement
Improvement involves making changes to the design and implementation of the SHEQ management
Plans in order to improve Consultants’ and Contractors’ ability to achieve conformity with the
requirements of this Framework and meet its SHEQ objectives and policy commitments.
The Consultant and Contractors’ Management should consider opportunities for SHEQ improvement:
o As part of outputs from Management Reviews;

o When investigating and analysing nonconformities and incidents;
o When analysing data from SHEQ records and databases; and
o When considering feedback/complaints from interested parties.
Employees should be encouraged to contribute to improvement actions, specifically using the

following:
o Routine responsibilities, with individuals closest to the work, noting (potential) problems
through near-miss / nonconformity / risk observation reporting;
o Participation in development and review of SHEQ objectives; and
o Consultation meetings.
43
Annexure A – Project SHEQ Policy
Scan / Include final approved Policy (refer draft submitted) here
44
Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II
Tender – Contract-specific Supplemental SHEQ Requirements

__________________________________________________________________________________
Consultant Company Name Responsible Person Designation Date
Project/Contract Title Project/Contract No. Project/Contract Description
This document specifies contract-specific SHEQ Requirements in addition to (or superseding

relevant) requirements as specified in the LHWP2 SHEQ Framework
SHEQ
Framework Supplemental Requirements Clarification
Reference
Consultant – Developed by
Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
(Signature)
___/___/20___
Contractor – Received by
Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
(Signature)
___/___/20___
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1 Page 1 of 1

Consultant Company Name
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II (LHWP2)

Tender Phase - SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 1 - Consultant SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 2 – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 3 – Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan
Contract name
Contract number
Contract description
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Table of Contents
Part 1 – Consultant SHEQ Management Plan................................................................................. 1

Consultant Information ................................................................................................................ 1
1 Preface ................................................................................................................................ 1
2 References........................................................................................................................... 1
3 Terms and Definitions .......................................................................................................... 1
4 Context of the Consultant Work Package (Scope of Work)..................................................... 1
4.1 Baseline Risk Assessment ...................................................................................................... 1
4.2 Interested Parties .................................................................................................................. 1
4.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................... 2
4.4 SHEQ Plans............................................................................................................................. 2
5 Leadership ........................................................................................................................... 2
5.1 Leadership and commitment ................................................................................................ 2
5.2 Project SHEQ Policy ............................................................................................................... 2
5.3 Organisational roles, responsibilities and authorities ........................................................... 2
6 Planning .............................................................................................................................. 2
6.1 Actions to address risks and opportunities ........................................................................... 2
6.2 Project SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve them ....................................................... 2
7 Support ............................................................................................................................... 2
7.1 Resources............................................................................................................................... 3
7.2 Competence .......................................................................................................................... 3
7.3 Awareness ............................................................................................................................. 3
7.4 Communication ..................................................................................................................... 3
7.5 Documented information ...................................................................................................... 3
8 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 3
8.1 Method Statements............................................................................................................... 3
8.2 Task Risk Assessments ........................................................................................................... 3
8.3 Mobilisation Requirements ................................................................................................... 4
8.4 Site Establishment and Facilities Requirements.................................................................... 4
8.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response ............................................................................... 4
8.6 Safety Management .............................................................................................................. 4
8.7 Occupational Health Management ....................................................................................... 4
8.8 Environmental Management ................................................................................................. 4
8.9 Quality Management ............................................................................................................. 4
8.10 Management of Change (MOC)............................................................................................. 4
8.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ................................................ 4
8.12 Demobilisation Requirements ............................................................................................... 4
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1 i
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
9 Performance evaluation ....................................................................................................... 4

9.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation ............................................................. 4
9.2 Audits ..................................................................................................................................... 4
9.3 Inspection, Testing and Certification ..................................................................................... 5
9.4 Management review ............................................................................................................. 5
10 Improvement....................................................................................................................... 5
10.1 Incident Management ........................................................................................................... 5
10.2 Nonconformity and corrective action ................................................................................... 5
10.3 Continual improvement ........................................................................................................ 5
Part 2 – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan ................................................................................. 6
Contractor Information ................................................................................................................ 6
11 Preface ................................................................................................................................ 6
12 References........................................................................................................................... 6
14 Context of the Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work) ..................................................... 6
14.1 Baseline Risk Assessment ...................................................................................................... 6
14.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................... 7
14.4 SHEQ Plans............................................................................................................................. 7
15 Leadership ........................................................................................................................... 7
16 Planning .............................................................................................................................. 7
17 Support ............................................................................................................................... 8
17.1 Resources............................................................................................................................... 8
17.2 Competence .......................................................................................................................... 8
17.3 Awareness ............................................................................................................................. 8
17.4 Communication ..................................................................................................................... 8
18 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 8
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1 ii
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here

18.10 Management of Change (MOC) ........................................................................................ 9
18.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ........................................... 9
18.12 Demobilisation Requirements........................................................................................... 9
19.2 Audits ..................................................................................................................................... 9
19.4 Management review ........................................................................................................... 10
20 Improvement..................................................................................................................... 10
20.1 Incident Management ......................................................................................................... 10
20.2 Nonconformity and corrective action ................................................................................. 10
20.3 Continual improvement ...................................................................................................... 10
Part 3 – Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan ......................................................................... 11
Subcontractor Information ......................................................................................................... 11
21 Preface .............................................................................................................................. 11
22 References......................................................................................................................... 11
23 Terms and Definitions ........................................................................................................ 11
24 Context of the Subcontractor Work Package (Scope of Work) ............................................. 11
24.1 Baseline Risk Assessment .................................................................................................... 11
24.2 Interested Parties ................................................................................................................ 11
24.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................. 12
24.4 SHEQ Plans........................................................................................................................... 12
25 Leadership ......................................................................................................................... 12
25.1 Leadership and commitment .............................................................................................. 12
25.2 Project SHEQ Policy ............................................................................................................. 12
25.3 Organisational roles, responsibilities and authorities ......................................................... 12
26 Planning ............................................................................................................................ 12
26.1 Actions to address risks and opportunities ......................................................................... 12
26.2 Project SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve them ..................................................... 12
27 Support ............................................................................................................................. 12
27.1 Resources............................................................................................................................. 13
27.2 Competence ........................................................................................................................ 13
27.3 Awareness ........................................................................................................................... 13
27.4 Communication ................................................................................................................... 13
27.5 Documented information .................................................................................................... 13
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1 iii

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
28 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 13
28.1 Method Statements............................................................................................................. 13
28.2 Task Risk Assessments ......................................................................................................... 13
28.3 Mobilisation Requirements ................................................................................................. 13
28.4 Site Establishment and Facilities Requirements.................................................................. 13
28.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response ............................................................................. 13
28.6 Safety Management ............................................................................................................ 14
28.7 Occupational Health Management ..................................................................................... 14
28.8 Environmental Management ............................................................................................... 14
28.9 Quality Management ........................................................................................................... 14
28.10 Management of Change (MOC) ...................................................................................... 14
28.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ......................................... 14
28.12 Demobilisation Requirements......................................................................................... 14
29 Performance evaluation ..................................................................................................... 14
29.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation ........................................................... 14
29.2 Audits ................................................................................................................................... 14
29.3 Inspection, Testing and Certification ................................................................................... 14
30 Improvement..................................................................................................................... 14
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1 iv
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Part 1 – Consultant SHEQ Management Plan
Consultant Information
1. Consultant Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
4. Description of the Contract:
5. SHEQ Contact Person:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
1 Preface
Include an overview of the Scope of Work and duration of the Contract. Evaluate the need for any
contract-specific supplemental (to the LHDA Framework) SHEQ Requirements; consider the results of
the baseline Risk Assessment (refer paragraph 4.1) in this evaluation.
2 References
Where applicable, include here a list of Consultant SHEQ documentation references in addition to
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework.
3 Terms and Definitions
Where applicable, include here a list of Terms and Definitions used in this SHEQ Plan, in addition to
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework.
4 Context of the Consultant Work Package (Scope of Work)
4.1 Baseline Risk Assessment

Include results of the Baseline Risk Assessment to determine the relevant issues, both internal and
external, that have an impact on what the Consultant’s Contract aims to achieve, and the intended
outcomes.
4.2 Interested Parties

Define who the relevant interested parties (both external and internal to the Contract scope of work)
on the Project are, and what their requirements are.
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-1 Page 1

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
4.3 SHEQ Plan Scope

Determine and document the SHEQ Plan scope – what’s in and what’s out. This needs to be
appropriate to the Consultant’s Work Package and its SHEQ objectives.
4.4 SHEQ Plans

Develop the Tender SHEQ Plan as per the LHDA SHEQ Framework Requirements; attach all completed
‘Tender Pack’ documents with the SHEQ Plan. Define how to cascade (to Contractors and
Subcontractors), operate and improve the SHEQ Plan during project delivery.
5 Leadership
5.1 Leadership and commitment

Define how Consultant Leadership will develop, and uphold implementation of, a project SHEQ
strategic agenda based on - and in support of - the LHWP2 SHEQ Strategy and Implementation Plan
(July 2015).
5.2 Project SHEQ Policy

Consultant Executive Management to endorse the LHDA project-specific SHEQ Policy (see Annexure A
in the LHDA SHEQ Framework).
The Consultant may develop (optional) its own SHEQ Policy in corroboration of the Project SHEQ
Policy.
5.3 Organisational roles, responsibilities and authorities

Propose a required Contract SHEQ functional structure - (including for Contractors and
Subcontractors). Define roles, responsibilities and accountability – including formal appointment
requirements at all levels and functions to ensure the effective implementation of the SHEQ
Framework. Also define SHEQ accountabilities and responsibilities of executives and senior
management.
6 Planning
6.1 Actions to address risks and opportunities

Complete one detailed risk assessment, based on a ‘significant’ risk defined in the Baseline Risk
Assessment, and that may impact the Consultant’s contract works directly.
6.2 Project SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve them

More detailed objectives are developed from the SHEQ strategic agenda; develop and list here the
project SHEQ objectives - to be consistent with the SHEQ Policy, Framework and Plan.
7 Support

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
7.1 Resources
Adequate resources shall be made available to ensure the effective implementation of the SHEQ
Policy, Framework and Plan. Develop a SHEQ Resource Plan, identifying all the resources needed to
plan, implement and manage SHEQ during the project, e.g.: competent staff, equipment, PPE and
materials. Include a schedule indicating when each resource will be used and note any assumptions
and constraints made during the resource planning process.
7.2 Competence
Define minimum competence/registration requirements for all SHEQ personnel (incl. for Contractors
and Subcontractors).
7.3 Awareness
Provide an outline for the ‘General Induction’ (awareness for new employees and Visitors) programme
topics, the planned session duration and requirements for refreshers/repeats.
7.4 Communication
The Consultant must develop an outline plan to ensure effective consultation, participation and
communication of matters relating to SHEQ at all levels and functions. Address the following:
a) SHEQ meetings structure – at fixed, regular intervals (i.e. daily/weekly/monthly) to serve as a

forum to discuss all SHEQ information relating to the project work.
b) Attendees - include Senior and Line Management and SHEQ Managers/Officers.
c) Arrangements for personnel safety representation - to be formally defined and
communicated.
d) Formal processes for the sharing of lessons learned, good practices and opportunities for
improvement - including the sharing of information with other Consultants/Contractors.
7.5 Documented information

The Consultant must:
a) specify any documented SHEQ information, if in addition to the LHDA SHEQ Framework and
Plan documented information requirements; and
b) specify the SHEQ File contents to be maintained and/or retained by the
Contractor/Subcontractor.
8 Operation
8.1 Method Statements

No tender submission documentation required.
8.2 Task Risk Assessments


Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
8.3 Mobilisation Requirements

List the elements to be included in a mobilisation plan, should the bidder be successful.
8.4 Site Establishment and Facilities Requirements

8.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response

Provide a high level outline of the proposed emergency preparedness and response plan.
8.6 Safety Management

Evaluate the list of SWP and SOPs - that LHDA will provide to successful bidders as part of the ‘Contract
Pack’ (see paragraph 8.6 in the Framework) - and list additional SOPs/SWPs that may be required,
based on the contract scope of work and risk assessments conducted.
8.7 Occupational Health Management

Provide an overview of proposed Occupational Health Management arrangements, specifically for
HIV/AIDS management and how the occupational medicine programme will take results from the
hygiene programme into consideration.
8.8 Environmental Management

Prepare and submit a Construction EMP (CEMP).
8.9 Quality Management

Prepare and submit a Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for planning and design phases.
8.10 Management of Change (MOC)

8.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles

8.12 Demobilisation Requirements

9 Performance evaluation
9.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation

9.2 Audits

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
9.3 Inspection, Testing and Certification

9.4 Management review

10 Improvement
10.1 Incident Management

Define a clear notification/classification/reporting/investigation/closure and communication
structure for incidents and hazards/risks identified during the contract works (incl. for Contractors and
Subcontractors).
10.2 Nonconformity and corrective action

Define project nonconformity and corrective action management process/system requirements (incl.
for Contractors and Subcontractors).
10.3 Continual improvement

Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Contractor Company Name
Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
Part 2 – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan
Contractor Information
1. Contractor Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
11 Preface
Include an overview of the Scope of Work and duration of the Contract. Confirm the scope of contract-
specific supplemental (to the LHDA Framework) SHEQ Requirements with the Consultant, where
applicable. If no supplemental requirements have been included, confirm the fact, or raise any
potential additional SHEQ issues identified - based on results of the Risk Assessment (refer paragraph
16.1) conducted.
12 References
Where applicable, include here a list of Contractor SHEQ documentation references in addition to
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework, or by the Consultant.
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework and the Consultant SHEQ Plan.
14 Context of the Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work)

Include results of the Baseline Risk Assessment to determine the relevant issues, both internal and
external, that have an impact on what the Contractor’s Contract aims to achieve, and the intended
outcomes.

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here

Define who the relevant interested parties (both external and internal to the Contract scope of work)
14.3 SHEQ Plan Scope

appropriate to the Contractor’s Work Package and its SHEQ objectives.
14.4 SHEQ Plans

Develop the Contractor SHEQ Plan as per the LHDA SHEQ Framework – and, if applicable, the
Consultant’s contract-specific supplemental (see paragraph 11) SHEQ requirements. Define how to
cascade (to Subcontractors), operate and improve the SHEQ Plan during project delivery.
15 Leadership

Define how the Contractor’s Leadership will develop, and uphold implementation of, a project SHEQ
strategic agenda based on - and in support of - the LHWP2 SHEQ Strategy and Implementation Plan
(July 2015) and the Consultant’s strategies.

Contractor Executive Management to endorse the LHDA project-specific SHEQ Policy (see Annexure A
in the LHDA SHEQ Framework).
The Contractor may develop (optional) their own SHEQ Policy in corroboration of the Project SHEQ
Policy.

Define roles, responsibilities and accountability - including for Subcontractors - at all levels (including
for executives and senior management) and functions to ensure the effective implementation of the
SHEQ Framework.
16 Planning

Complete a full risk assessment based on the scope of construction works. Such an assessment must
take cognisance of the Consultant’s Baseline Risk Assessment. Describe how project SHEQ risks will be
managed during the construction phase.

Develop SHEQ objectives to align with the Consultant’s defined objectives and be consistent with the
SHEQ Policy, Framework and Plan, measurable (if practicable), monitored, communicated, and

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
updated as appropriate. Objectives and targets shall reflect applicable legal, regulatory and other
requirements and be consistent with the nature of the hazards and risks associated with the Work
Package. Detailed action plans need to be developed (and incorporated into project plans) to achieve
defined objectives.
17 Support
17.1 Resources
Review the Consultant’s a SHEQ Resource Plan (see 7.1) requirements and plan for arrangements to
comply with these.
17.2 Competence
Review the Consultant’s minimum competence/registration requirements for all SHEQ personnel and
plan to comply with these. Recruitment and selection practices shall specifically consider the SHEQ
training, awareness and competencies of all relevant personnel prior to deployment on the project.
17.3 Awareness
Contractor Management shall be accountable for developing and implementing formal site and task-
specific induction and SHEQ awareness programmes for all relevant levels and functions within their
project teams. Induction and awareness training must include the SHEQ Policy, Framework and Plan.
17.4 Communication
Review the Consultant’s outline plan for consultation, participation and communication of matters
relating to SHEQ and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Review the Consultant’s requirements for documented information to be maintained and/or retained
and plan for arrangements to comply with these.
18 Operation

Select and complete one Method Statement – based on currently available information. Reference
relevant SOPs/SWs as listed in the Framework (paragraph 8.6) and those identified, in addition, under
paragraph 18. 6 below, if applicable.

Complete and submit the Task Risk Assessment for the Method Statement completed in 18.1.

Review/update the elements to be included in the mobilisation plan (see paragraph 8.3), should the
bidder be successful.

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here



Review the list of SWP and SOPs - that LHDA will provide to successful bidders as part of the ‘Contract
Pack’ (see paragraph 8.6 in the Framework) - and additional SOPs/SWPs listed by the Consultant (if
any). Based on the contract scope of work and risk assessments conducted, list the possible additional
SOPs and SWPs to be developed.



Prepare and submit a typical Quality Control Plan (QCP) for the scope of work.




19.2 Audits


Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here

20 Improvement

Review the Consultant notification/classification/reporting/investigation/closure and communication
structure for incidents and hazards/risks and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Review the Consultant nonconformity and corrective action management, including
templates/registers to facilitate implementation and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Subcontractor Company Name
Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
Part 3 – Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan
Subcontractor Information
1. Subcontractor Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
21 Preface
Include an overview of the Scope of Work and duration of the Contract. Confirm the scope of contract-
specific supplemental (to the LHDA Framework) SHEQ Requirements with the Consultant/Contractor,
where applicable. If no supplemental requirements have been included, confirm the fact, or raise any
potential additional SHEQ issues identified - based on results of the Risk Assessment (refer paragraph
26.1 below) conducted.
22 References
Where applicable, include here a list of Subcontractor SHEQ documentation references in addition to
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework, or by the Consultant and Contractor.
those listed in the Project SHEQ Framework, or by the Consultant and Contractor.
24 Context of the Subcontractor Work Package (Scope of Work)


Define who the relevant interested parties (both external and internal to the contract scope of work)

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here

appropriate to the Subcontractor’s Work Package and its SHEQ objectives.
24.4 SHEQ Plans

Develop the Tender SHEQ Plan as per the LHDA SHEQ Framework Requirements – and, if applicable,
the Consultant’s/Contractor’s contract-specific supplemental (see paragraphs 11 and 14.4 above)
SHEQ requirements.
25 Leadership

Define how the Subcontractor’s Leadership will develop, and uphold implementation of, a project
SHEQ strategic agenda based on - and in support of - the LHWP2 SHEQ Strategy and Implementation
Plan (July 2015) and the Consultant/Contractor’s strategies.

Subcontractor Executive Management to endorse the LHDA project-specific SHEQ Policy (see
Annexure A in the LHDA SHEQ Framework).
The Subcontractor may develop (optional) their own SHEQ Policy in support of the Project SHEQ Policy.

Define roles, responsibilities and accountability at all levels (including for executives and senior
management) and functions to ensure the effective implementation of the SHEQ Framework.
26 Planning

Complete a full risk assessment based on the scope of construction works. Such an assessment must
take cognisance of the Consultant’s Baseline Risk Assessment and the Contractor’s Risk Assessment.
Describe how project SHEQ risks will be managed during the construction phase.

Develop SHEQ objectives to be consistent with the SHEQ Policy, Framework and Plan, measurable (if
practicable), monitored, communicated, and updated as appropriate. Objectives and targets shall
reflect applicable legal, regulatory and other requirements and be consistent with the nature of the
hazards and risks associated with the Work Package. Detailed action plans need to be developed (and
incorporated into project plans) to achieve defined objectives.
27 Support

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
27.1 Resources
Review the Consultant’s a SHEQ Resource Plan (see 7.1) requirements and plan for arrangements to
comply with these.
27.2 Competence
Review the Consultant’s minimum competence/registration requirements for all SHEQ personnel and
plan to comply with these. Recruitment and selection practices shall specifically consider the SHEQ
training, awareness and competencies of all relevant personnel prior to deployment on the project.
27.3 Awareness
Subcontractor Management shall be accountable for developing and implementing formal site and
task-specific induction and SHEQ awareness programmes for all relevant levels and functions within
their project teams. Induction and awareness training must include the SHEQ Policy, Framework and
Plan.
27.4 Communication
Review the Consultant’s outline plan for consultation, participation and communication of matters
relating to SHEQ and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Review the Consultant’s requirements for documented information to be maintained and/or retained
and plan for arrangements to comply with these.
28 Operation

Select and complete one Method Statement – based on currently available information. Reference
relevant SOPs/SWs as listed in the Framework (paragraph 8.6) and those identified, in addition, under
paragraph 28. 6 below, if applicable.

Complete and submit the Task Risk Assessment for the Method Statement completed in 18.1.

Review/update the elements to be included in the mobilisation plan (see paragraph 8.3), should the
bidder be successful.



Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here

Review the list of SWP and SOPs - that LHDA will provide to successful bidders as part of the ‘Contract
Pack’ (see paragraph 8.6 in the Framework) - and additional SOPs/SWPs listed by the Consultant and
Contractor (if any). Based on the contract scope of work and risk assessments conducted, list the
possible additional SOPs and SWPs to be developed.



Prepare and submit a typical Quality Control Plan (QCP) for the scope of work.




29.2 Audits


30 Improvement

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here

Review the Consultant notification/classification/reporting/investigation/closure and communication
structure for incidents and hazards/risks and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Review the Consultant nonconformity and corrective action management, including
templates/registers to facilitate implementation and plan for arrangements to comply with these.

Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II Tender - Baseline Risk Assessment
Project/Contract No.: Consultant Company Name: Project/Contract Title:

RISK IDENTIFICATION RISK ANALYSIS RISK MITIGATION
KFA LHDA Objective Risk ID Risk Description Risk Category Root Cause Consequence or Inherent Risk Rating Existing Controls Control Residual Risk Rating Further Action Performance Due Date Risk Status Update
Impact Likelihood Impact Risk Rate Effectiveness Likelihood Impact Risk Rate Indicator Owner
1
1.1
1.2
3
3.1
3.2
4
1 4.1
4.2
5
5.1 4420
5.2
6
6.1
6.2
7
7.1
1 7.2
8
8.1
8.2
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-2A
LHDA HEAT MAP
Catastrophic (VH)
Cost = ˃ M10m
Operations = ˃ 10%
Human (capacity and capability) = ˃ 10%
5 5 10 15 20 25
Stakeholders = ˃ 20%
Compliance Level = ˃ 20%
Critical (H)
Cost = M5m < cost ≤ M10m
Operations = 8% < operations ≤ 10%
Human (capacity and capability) = 8% < human ≤ 10%
4 4 8 12 16 20
Stakeholders = 10% < stakeholders ≤ 20%
Compliance Level = 10% < compliance ≤ 20%
Major (M)
POTENTIAL IMPACT

3 3 6 9 12 15
Compliance Level = 8 % < compliance ≤ 10%
Significant (L)
Cost = M500k < cost ≤ M1m
Operations = 3% < cost ≤ 5%
2 2 4 6 8 10
Negligible (VL)
Cost = < M500k
Operations = < 3%
Human (capacity and capability) = < 3%
1 1 2 3 4 5
Stakeholders = < 5%
Compliance level = < 5%
1 2 3 4 5
Rare Unlikely Moderate Likely Common
More than once in a
Once in three years Once in a year Once in six months Once in three months
month
10 – 20% 30 – 40% 50 – 60% 70 – 80% 90 – 100%
LIKELIHOOD
Tender – Generic SHEQ Risk Assessment (RA) for Contractor/Subcontractor scope of work
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tenderer Company Name Responsible Person Designation Date
Risk Assessment Team

Name Designation Contact Number E-mail
Facilitator
Team Member 1
Team Member 2
Team Member 3
Team Member 4
Team Member 5
Team Member 6
Define the scope of work

Describe the scope of work to be assessed:
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-2B Page 1 of 5

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Identify who/what may be at risk by the project work
A number of people may be at risk from any process - this may affect the risk controls required. The area where the process is executed may affect the
number of people at risk (i.e. fellow employees, visitors and the public).
Identify the risks - then rate each risk

1. The process is divided into activities. For each activity, identify the risks and associated risk events.
2. List existing risk controls and determine a risk rating using the Risk Rating Matrix – Annexure 1.
3. Additional risk controls may be required to achieve an acceptable level of risk – apply the hierarchy of controls.
4. Re-rate the risk if additional risk controls are identified.
Risk rating with Risk Rating with
existing controls* Additional risk additional
Associated risk Existing risk controls required
Activity / Area Risks controls
event controls
(Apply the hierarchy of
L C R risk controls) L C R
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
* L = likelihood C = consequence R = risk rating (L X C)

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Site Manager Approval
Name: Name:
Completed by Authorised by
Signature: Signature:
Date: Date:
Implement the additional risk controls identified

If no Action Request was raised, indicate briefly what additional risk controls as listed above were implemented, when and by whom.
Risk control: Date: Implemented by:
Review the risk assessment

Reviews should be scheduled on at least an annual basis, but it is required to also review risk assessments after incident investigations and when there is a
change in the process.
Review date: Reviewed by: Authorised by:
Documentation
List all legal and advisory documentation (Acts, Regulations, Standards and Codes of Practice) that supports this risk assessment, where applicable.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure 1 – Risk Matrix
LIKELIHOOD How likely is the risk event to realise?

Likely 3 Expected to occur in most circumstances (or may occur frequently)
Possible 2 Could occur at some time (or has occurred in the company before)
Unlikely 1 Not likely to occur in normal circumstances, only in exceptional circumstances
How severe could consequences of the event be?

CONSEQUENCES Minor Significant Major
1 2 3
Slight injuries, maybe first aid required (First Medical treatment required (Restricted Work Hospital admission required, permanent
Health & Safety Aid Injury - FAI). Minor health impact, no lost Injury - RWI). Possible medium term Incapacity disability or death (Lost Time Injury –LTI /
time, complete recovery. / illness, with likely recovery. Fatality)
No or very low environmental event - Clean-up by site staff and/or contractors - Considerable clean-up effort using external
Environmental
confined to small area. confined within facility boundary. resources - extend beyond project boundary.
Significant damage, equipment cannot be
Damage Limited, repairable damage. Extensive, irreparable damage
repaired on site
Considerable impact – Regional public concern.
Slight impact – Public awareness may exist, National public concern. Extensive adverse
Reputation Extensive adverse attention in local / national
but there is no public concern attention in the international media.
media.
Quality degradation barely noticeable / Quality reduction requires client approval / Project deliverable is effectively useless /
Project Deliverable Quality
High probability of error detection Restricted probability of error detection Limited probability of error detection
Cost Insignificant cost increase 20 - 40% cost increase > 40% cost increase
Time Insignificant time increase 5 - 20% time increase > 20% time increase

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Consequences
Minor Significant Major
Likelihood (1) (2) (3)
Medium High High
Likely (3)
(3) (6) (9)
High Intolerable - immediate action required before work continues
Low Medium High
Possible (2)
(2) (4) (6)
Medium Tolerable - action required within 2 weeks
Low Low Medium
Unlikely (1)
(1) (2) (3)
Low Acceptable - monitor risks and reduce further when practicable

Tender – Generic Method Statement (MS)

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor: Contract No. Contract Name:
Developed by: Date: ___/___/20___ Signature:

Task name should correspond with the title of the
Task: TRA.
Method Statement No.
Brief description
of activity/work: TRA No.
Part 1
SWP / SOP
Ref. Task steps in sequence (If applicable, these should align with any
Exist? Develop?
Potential Hazards Controls
# associated SWP/SOP to enable cross-referencing) Reference
(Y/N) (Y/N)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1-3 Page 1 of 3


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Part 2
Training, qualifications and experience (other than in SWPs/SOPs) required to
Inspections and tests required
complete this Task
Note: The records of qualifications and experience are held in local files
Engineering certificates/permits/approvals Equipment / Machinery / Tools / Vehicles
Codes of Practice, legislation, standards which apply to this Task
required for this Task required for this Task
Person(s) responsible for supervising work: (Inspecting and approving work areas, work methods, protective measures, plant, equipment, power tools, etc.)
Name: ________________________________________________________ Position: ___________________________________________________
Name: ________________________________________________________ Position: ___________________________________________________
Note: For a list of names and signatures of staff instructed in this MS see local training records.


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Part 3
Contractor Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
Project Manager ___/___/20___
LHDA Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
Site Supervisor ___/___/20___

Tender – Task Risk Assessment (TRA) to accompany generic Method Statement

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TRA facilitated by: Date: ___/___/20___ Signature:
Task name should correspond with

Task:
the title of SWP/SOP/MS
TRA to support a: TRA No.
Brief description SWP

of activity/work: SOP SWP/SOP/MS No.
MS
Step 1
Task Stressors (if applicable - list all):
Comments:


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Stressors include, but are not limited to, the following:
Environmental stressors Physical stressors Social stressors

 Air temperature  Lack of breaks  Availability of facilities to practice religion
 Dust  Length of workday  Quality and availability of drinking water
 Humidity  Time pressure  Type and cleanliness of toilet facilities
 Lighting (including emergency lighting)  Monotony  Availability of washing facilities (washbasins,
 Odour  Competency of co-workers showers, soap, towels, etc.)
 Moisture  Ergonomics / physical arrangement of work area &  Availability of changing rooms and lockers
 Oxygen deficiency equipment.  Responsibility for first-aid
 High or low pressure  Absence of supervisors
 Extreme temperature variation  Availability of separate eating facilities
 Extreme humidity variation  Protection of non-smokers
 Ventilation  Conflicts/hostility in the workplace
 Air speed  Infectious diseases / HIV/AIDS
 Working alone  Lack of control over the way work is done
 Conflicting or ambiguous roles
Steps Step
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 7 Step 8
4 l 5 l 6 12
Risk Ranking Residual Risk
Risk Control Measures *
Actioner / Initials
 Hierarchy of Control – Elimination,
Consequence
Consequence
Risk Rating
Risk Rating
Likelihood
Likelihood
Ref. Substitution, Isolation, Engineering,
Task Steps Potential Risks
No. Administration, Personal Protection.
 Additional information can be attached.


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Step 9 Highest Remaining Residual Risk
Step 10
* Further description of controls added to reduce Risk
Lessons learned from this Risk Assessment:
Step 11
Risk assessment
trained person
1.
Risk assessment
Date: ___ / ___ / 20___
prepared by: Other participant
2.
names
3.


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
5.
Consultation If TRA for MS – need for a
Yes No
conducted with SWP/SOP to be developed?
Approval to proceed
Name Company Designation Signature Date
Residual Risk Approval Required to Proceed Approval Signature Approval Date

Work must not proceed. It should be redefined or further control measures put in place to reduce
Extreme (E)
risk. The controls should be re-assessed for adequacy prior to task commencement.
Work can commence when the Site Project Manager and the Consultant SHEQ Manager (or their nominated
High (H)
delegates) have approved this risk assessment, and all identified control measures are in place.
Work can commence when the SHEQ Officer and Supervisor (or their nominated delegates) have approved this
Moderate (M)
risk assessment, and all identified control measures are in place.
Work can commence once the Supervisor has approved this risk assessment, and all identified control measures
Low (L) are in place.
A SHEQ Manager / Officer (or nominated delegate) must approve the TRA when used to develop a SWP/SOP.
Step 13
All Task participants must sign on before they are permitted to be involved in the Task.
By signing below, participants acknowledge they have read and understand the risk assessment and agree to comply with all steps and control measures.
Participant name Company Designation Sign on Date Time


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Consequence
Risk Calculator
Insignificant Minor Moderate Major Catastrophic
Likelihood 1 2 3 4 5
Moderate High High Extreme Extreme
Almost Certain 5
(5) (10) (15) (20) (25)
Low Moderate High Extreme Extreme
Likely 4
(4) (8) (12) (16) (20)
Low Moderate Moderate High High
Possible 3
(3) (6) (9) (12) (15)
Low Low Moderate Moderate High
Unlikely 2
(2) (4) (6) (8) (10)
Conceivable but Low Low Low Low Moderate
1
improbable (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TRA – quick guide
Step What to do More detailed information – on each TRA step
Complete company & facilitator details - give  At the top of the risk assessment record the task name, a brief description of the task, and the relevant work area and section.
0.
a short description of the task.  Keep it as simple as possible, but with enough information to identify the task.
1. Note any task stressors on the TRA form.  Stressors must be factored into the risk assessment if they are present as they will increase the likelihood of an incident.
 In the first column “Ref No.” write the step no. starting from 1 - up to until however many steps there are in the task. If
2. Detail specific task steps. applicable, these should align with any associated SWP/SOP/MS to enable cross-referencing.
 List each of the specific steps associated with the task that will be undertaken.
 In the column next to listed task steps, identify all potential SH/E/Q risks relevant to each step and record each risk on a
separate line.
 A common mistake is to refer to a risk as the actual harm or the health effect it caused rather than the risk. E.g. If the task was
3. Identify potential risks for each task step.
hosing down an area, the risk is the wet floor not the potential harm caused e.g. fall / cut knee.
 If no risks are found for a task step or the risk has been addressed in a previous step, the task step still needs to be listed to
show it has been considered, and to keep the steps in line with any associated SWP/SOP/MS.
 Simply put if the risk would realise, what would be the reasonable consequence? It is not always the “worst” case scenario;
Evaluate the possible Consequence of the e.g. if you fell 1m off a ladder you could be killed as an extreme (e.g. land on your head), but the most likely consequence
4.
risk - use Risk Calculator above would be you might sprain your wrist or break a leg. Therefore the consequence is more likely to be moderate rather than
catastrophic. Consider all of SH/E/Q risks and their consequences.
 Ask yourself if it will ever happen. If so - what factors are needed for it to happen, and how often would those factors be
Evaluate the likelihood of that Consequence -
5. around. Then ask yourself what you think the reasonable frequency would be (considering the prevailing stressors listed),
use Risk Calculator above
before determining the Likelihood.
Determine Risk Ratings - use Risk Calculator  Determine each risk’s rating by multiplying the “Consequence” and “Likelihood” levels on the Risk Calculator table (or by
6.
above intersecting the “Consequence” and “Likelihood” levels on the Risk Calculator table).
 Control measures need to reduce risk ratings to an acceptable level if the current risk level is unacceptable; aim for a low risk.
7. Identify controls to reduce risk
 Apply the Hierarchy of Control when determining control measures.
 After control measures have been identified, you need to reassess each risk’s rating to determine what the remaining risk
Evaluate the Residual Risk (risk rating with
8. would be with the controls in place from Step 7 (follow the principles in Steps 4 & 5 above).
controls in place)
 The aim is to achieve a Low Risk; if not achieved review controls again and/or ask for help.
 If the highest residual risk on the risk assessment is a Low Risk, or a Moderate Risk the task can commence once all control
measures are in place and the risk assessment has been reviewed and approved.
9. Determine highest remaining residual risk
 If a High or Extreme risk still remains, then the task must not commence and further review must be undertaken involving the
Site Project Manager and the Consultant SHEQ Manager (or their nominated delegates).


_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Exemption: In exceptional circumstances, if the “Extreme” or “High” risk rating does not apply to personal injury or environmental
damage (e.g. potential for property damage only), and the Site Project Manager, in consultation with the Consultant SHEQ
Manager, believe it is an acceptable risk for the project, the task may be approved. This does not apply for Personal injury or
Environmental risks; where a “Moderate” risk is the highest rating allowable.
Describe controls in more detail and  Expand on controls to ensure adequate detail for the person(s) responsible to implement the controls.
10.
document lessons learned  Document lessons learned to ensure it is carried forward through similar tasks on other LHDA projects.
 Once the risk assessment is complete, all participants should record their name at the bottom of the sheet, document any
consultation that was had (e.g. tabled at a HEQ meeting) and the Project Manager or delegate should sign off the task for
11. Approval & SWP / SOP development approval.
 Specify if a Safe Work Practice (SWP) or Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is required to be developed (e.g. for routine /
regular tasks).
Assign responsibility for control  Reference the initials of the person responsible for ensuring a particular control is implemented before progressing with the
12.
implementation task
 All persons involved in a task must acknowledge they have read and understood the task risk assessment and agree to comply
13. Sign on
with all task steps and associated control measures.

Tender - SHEQ Management Cost Breakdown (BoQ)

__________________________________________________________________________________
Tenderer (Consultant/Contractor)
Responsible Person Designation Date
Company Name
# of
# SHEQ Cost element Unit Cost (M) Total Cost (M)
Units
1. Human Resources
2. Systems Documentation
3. Meetings & Administration
4. SHEQ Training (incl. Awareness/Induction)
5. PPE & Safety Equipment
6. Signage & Barricading
7. Workplace Facilities
8. Emergency & Rescue Measures
9. Hygiene Surveys & Monitoring
10. Medical Surveillance Programme
11. Transport of Employees
12. Hazardous Material Management
13. Substance Abuse Testing
Control of inspection, measuring and test
14.
equipment
15. SHEQ Reward & Recognition
16. CEMP development/implementation
17.
Total SHEQ Management Cost (R)
Total Tender Value (R)
SHEQ Management Cost as % of Tender value %

SHEQ History Questionnaire

__________________________________________________________________________________
1. Safe Work Performance

1A. Injury Experience / Historical Performance
Use the previous three years injury and illness records to complete the following:
Year 20___ 20___ 20___
Number of medical treatment cases
Number of restricted work day cases
Number of lost time injury cases
Number of fatal injuries
Total recordable frequency
Lost time injury frequency
Number of employee man hours
Any occupational injury or illness requiring treatment provided by a physician or treatment
1 – Medical Treatment Case
provided under the direction of a physician
Any occupational injury or illness that prevents an employee from performing any of his/her
2 – Restricted Work Day Case
craft jurisdiction duties
Any occupational injury that prevents the employee from performing any work for at least one
3 – Lost Time injury Cases
day
Total number of Medical Treatment, Restricted Work and Lost Time Injury cases multiplied by
4 – Total Recordable Frequency
200,000 then divided by total man-hours
5 – Lost Time Injury Frequency Total number of Lost Time Injury cases multiplied by 200,000 - then divide by total man-hours
1B. Workers’ Compensation Experience

Use the previous three years injury and illness records to complete the following (if applicable):
Industry Code: Industry Classification:
Year 20___ 20___ 20___
Industry Rate
Contractor Rate
% Discount or Surcharge
Is your Workers’ Compensation account in good standing? Yes No
(Please provide letter of confirmation)


__________________________________________________________________________________
2. Citations
2A. Has your company been cited, charged or prosecuted under Health, Safety and/or
Environmental Legislation – or received public complaints - in the last 5 years?
Yes No
If yes, provide details:
2B. Has your company been cited, charged or prosecuted under the above Legislation in
another Country, Region or State? Yes No
If yes, provide details:
3. Certificate of SHEQ MS Recognition

Does your company have a Certificate of Recognition? Yes No
If Yes, what is the Certificate No: _______________ Issue Date:______________
4. SHEQ Programme
Do you have a written SHEQ programme manual? Yes No
Do you have a pocket safety booklet for field distribution? Yes No
(If Yes, provide a copy for review)
Does your SHEQ programme contain the following elements:
Yes No Yes No
Corporate SH/E/Q Policy Equipment Maintenance
Incident Management Emergency Response
Recordkeeping & Statistics Rik Assessment
Reference To Legislation Safe Work Practices (SWPs)
General Rules & Regulations Operating Procedures (SOPs)

Progressive Discipline Policy Workplace Inspections
SHEQ Roles & Responsibilities Training Policy & Programme
PPE Standards Communication Processes
Environmental Management Plans Other:
Other: Other:
Other: Other:


__________________________________________________________________________________
5. Training Programmes
5A. Do you have an orientation program for new hire employees?
Yes No
Does it include any of the following:
Yes No Yes No
General & Site Rules Fire Prevention & Protection
Emergency Reporting Weather Extremes
Injury Reporting Working Outdoors
Right To Refuse Work Personal Protective Equipment
Housekeeping Other:
Other: Other:
Other: Other:
5B. Do you have a program for training newly hired/promoted supervisors?

Yes No
Does it include instruction on the following:
Yes No Yes No
Employer Responsibilities Communication
Employee Responsibilities First Aid/Medical Procedures
Due Diligence New Employee Training
SHEQ Leadership Environmental Requirements
Work Refusals Risk Assessment
Inspection Processes Daily SHEQ Task Instruction (DSTI)
Emergency Procedures Drug & Alcohol Policy
Incident Investigation Progressive Disciplinary Policy
Safe Work Practices (SWPs) SHEQ Meetings
SHEQ Documentation Other:
Other: Other:


__________________________________________________________________________________
6. SHEQ Activities
Do you hold site SHEQ meetings for field employees? If Yes, how often?
Yes No Daily Weekly Biweekly
Do you hold site meetings where SHEQ is addressed with management and field supervisors?
Yes No Weekly Biweekly Monthly
Is a DSTI provided before to each new task? Yes No

Is the process documented? Yes No
Who leads the discussion?
Do you have a risk assessment process? Yes No
Are risk assessments documented? Yes No
Who is responsible for leading the hazard assessment process?
Does your company have policies and procedures for environmental protection, spill clean-up,
reporting, waste disposal, and recycling as part of the SHEQ Programme?
Yes No
How does your company measure its SHEQ success?
Attach a separate sheet to explain.
7. SHEQ Stewardship
7D. Does your company track Nonconformities, (non-injury) Incidents and their Corrective
Actions?
Yes No Monthly Quarterly Annually
Nonconformities
Incidents:
- Near Miss
- Property Damage
- Fire
- Security
- Environmental
Corrective Actions


__________________________________________________________________________________
8. Personnel
List key SHEQ Managers / Officers planned for this project. Attach resume(s).
Name Position/Title Designation
Supply name, address and phone number of your company’s SHEQ Representative.
Name Address Telephone Number
Does this individual have responsibilities other than Health and Safety management?
Yes No
If yes, list other responsibilities:
9. References
List the last three Clients your company has worked for that could verify the quality of, and
management commitment to, your SHEQ programme:
Client Company Address Contact Name Phone Number

Tender - List of SHEQ Documentation for Submission

__________________________________________________________________________________
Consultant Contractor Subcontractor
Consultant
Attached
# Documents to be Submitted with Tender Comment
Y N
1. Consultant SHEQ Management Plan (Part 1)
2. SHEQ Questionnaire
3. Tender SHEQ Cost Breakdown
Structure, Roles and Responsibilities of SHEQ Appointees
4.
(including requirements for Contractors)
5. SHEQ File Index
Roles, responsibilities and a detailed CV of the SHEQ Manager
6.
(and Officer(s) where applicable)
Proof of SH/E/Q management systems implementation:
 3rd Party certification, or
7.  2nd Party audit results, or
 alternatively, other adequate proof (such as internal
audit reports for the last 12 months)
SHEQ challenges envisaged for the project and how these
8.
challenges will be addressed and overcome
Additional (to the SHEQ Framework) site-specific SHEQ
9.
requirements for Contractors and Subcontractors, if foreseen
List of relevant SWPs and SOPs to be developed in addition to
10.
those provided as guidance by LHDA
11.
Contractor
Attached
Y N
1. Contractor SHEQ Management Plan (Part 2)
4. Roles and Responsibilities of SHEQ Appointees
Roles, responsibilities and a detailed CV of the SHEQ
5.
Manager/Officer(s)
Proof of SH/E/Q management systems implementation:
 3rd Party certification, or
6.  2nd Party audit results, or
 alternatively, other adequate proof (such as internal
audit reports for the last 12 months)
A completed generic Method Statement (MS) based on the LHDA
7.
template – referencing relevant SWPs and SOPs
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1.1-7 Page 1 of 2

Tender - List of SHEQ Documentation for Submission

__________________________________________________________________________________
The corresponding (to the generic MS submitted) Task Risk
8.
Assessment (TRA) based on the LHDA template
List of relevant SWPs and SOPs that may be required, in
9.
addition to those provided as guidance by LHDA
10.
Subcontractor
Attached
Y N
1. Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan (Part 3)
4. Roles and Responsibilities of SHEQ Appointees
Roles, responsibilities and a detailed CV of the SHEQ
5.
Manager/Officer(s)
A completed generic Method Statement (MS) based on the LHDA
6.
template – referencing relevant SWPs and SOPs
The corresponding (to the generic MS submitted) Task Risk
7.
Assessment (TRA) based on the LHDA template
List of relevant SWPs and SOPs that may be required, in
8.
addition to those provided as guidance by LHDA
9.
Verification submissions attached to this schedule

# Description / Title / Reference Comment
1.
2.
3.
4.
Signed Date
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 1.1.1-7 Page 2 of 2

Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II Consultant Baseline Risk Assessment
Project/Contract No.: Consultant Company Name: Project/Contract Title:

1
1.1
1.2
3
3.1
3.2
4
1 4.1
4.2
5
5.1 4420
5.2
6
6.1
6.2
7
7.1
1 7.2
8
8.1
8.2
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.1
LHDA HEAT MAP
Catastrophic (VH)
Cost = ˃ M10m
Operations = ˃ 10%
Human (capacity and capability) = ˃ 10%
5 5 10 15 20 25
Stakeholders = ˃ 20%
Compliance Level = ˃ 20%
Critical (H)
4 4 8 12 16 20
Major (M)
POTENTIAL IMPACT

3 3 6 9 12 15
Compliance Level = 8 % < compliance ≤ 10%
Significant (L)
Cost = M500k < cost ≤ M1m
Operations = 3% < cost ≤ 5%
2 2 4 6 8 10
Negligible (VL)
Cost = < M500k
Operations = < 3%
Human (capacity and capability) = < 3%
1 1 2 3 4 5
Stakeholders = < 5%
Compliance level = < 5%
1 2 3 4 5
Rare Unlikely Moderate Likely Common
More than once in a
Once in three years Once in a year Once in six months Once in three months
month
10 – 20% 30 – 40% 50 – 60% 70 – 80% 90 – 100%
LIKELIHOOD
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Lesotho Highlands Water Project – Phase II (LHWP2)

Contract Phase - SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 1 - Consultant SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 2 – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan
 Part 3 – Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan
Contract name
Contract number
Contract description
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Table of Contents
Part 1 – Consultant SHEQ Management Plan................................................................................. 1

Consultant Information ................................................................................................................ 1
1 Preface ................................................................................................................................ 1
2 References........................................................................................................................... 1
4 Context of the Consultant Work Package (Scope of Work)..................................................... 1
4.1 Consultant Baseline Risk Assessment .................................................................................... 1
4.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................... 1
4.4 SHEQ Plans............................................................................................................................. 1
5 Leadership ........................................................................................................................... 2
6 Planning .............................................................................................................................. 2
7 Support ............................................................................................................................... 2
7.1 Resources............................................................................................................................... 2
7.2 Competence .......................................................................................................................... 2
7.3 Awareness ............................................................................................................................. 2
7.4 Communication ..................................................................................................................... 2
8 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 2
8.10 Management of Change (MOC)............................................................................................. 3
8.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ................................................ 3
8.12 Demobilisation Requirements ............................................................................................... 3
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4 i
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here

9.2 Audits ..................................................................................................................................... 3
10 Improvement....................................................................................................................... 4
Part 2 – Contractor SHEQ Management Plan ................................................................................. 5
Contractor Information ................................................................................................................ 5
11 Preface ................................................................................................................................ 5
12 References........................................................................................................................... 5
14 Context of the Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work) ..................................................... 5
14.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................... 5
14.4 SHEQ Plans............................................................................................................................. 5
15 Leadership ........................................................................................................................... 6
16 Planning .............................................................................................................................. 6
17 Support ............................................................................................................................... 6
17.1 Resources............................................................................................................................... 6
17.2 Competence .......................................................................................................................... 6
17.3 Awareness ............................................................................................................................. 6
17.4 Communication ..................................................................................................................... 6
18 Operation ............................................................................................................................ 6
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4 ii
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here

18.10 Management of Change (MOC) ........................................................................................ 7
18.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ........................................... 7
18.12 Demobilisation Requirements........................................................................................... 7
19.2 Audits ..................................................................................................................................... 7
20 Improvement....................................................................................................................... 8
Part 3 – Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan ........................................................................... 9
Subcontractor Information ........................................................................................................... 9
21 Preface ................................................................................................................................ 9
22 References........................................................................................................................... 9
24 Context of the Subcontractor Work Package (Scope of Work) ............................................... 9
24.3 SHEQ Plan Scope.................................................................................................................... 9
24.4 SHEQ Plans............................................................................................................................. 9
25 Leadership ......................................................................................................................... 10
25.1 Leadership and commitment .............................................................................................. 10
25.2 Project SHEQ Policy ............................................................................................................. 10
25.3 Organisational roles, responsibilities and authorities ......................................................... 10
26 Planning ............................................................................................................................ 10
26.1 Actions to address risks and opportunities ......................................................................... 10
26.2 Project SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve them ..................................................... 10
27 Support ............................................................................................................................. 10
27.1 Resources............................................................................................................................. 10
27.2 Competence ........................................................................................................................ 10
27.3 Awareness ........................................................................................................................... 10
27.4 Communication ................................................................................................................... 10
27.5 Documented information .................................................................................................... 10
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4 iii

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
28 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 10
28.1 Method Statements............................................................................................................. 10
28.2 Task Risk Assessments ......................................................................................................... 11
28.3 Mobilisation Requirements ................................................................................................. 11
28.4 Site Establishment and Facilities Requirements.................................................................. 11
28.5 Emergency Preparedness and Response ............................................................................. 11
28.6 Safety Management ............................................................................................................ 11
28.7 Occupational Health Management ..................................................................................... 11
28.8 Environmental Management ............................................................................................... 11
28.9 Quality Management ........................................................................................................... 11
28.10 Management of Change (MOC) ...................................................................................... 11
28.11 Maintenance of Equipment, Machinery, Tools and Vehicles ......................................... 11
28.12 Demobilisation Requirements......................................................................................... 11
29 Performance evaluation ..................................................................................................... 11
29.1 Monitoring, measurement, analysis and evaluation ........................................................... 11
29.2 Audits ................................................................................................................................... 11
29.3 Inspection, Testing and Certification ................................................................................... 12
30 Improvement..................................................................................................................... 12
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4 iv
Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
Consultant Information
1. Consultant Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
1 Preface
2 References
4 Context of the Consultant Work Package (Scope of Work)
4.1 Consultant Baseline Risk Assessment
4.3 SHEQ Plan Scope
4.4 SHEQ Plans
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 4.4 Page 1

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
5 Leadership
6 Planning
7 Support
7.1 Resources
7.2 Competence
7.3 Awareness
7.4 Communication
8 Operation

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
9.2 Audits

Consultant -
Insert Company
Logo here
10 Improvement
Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
Contractor Information
1. Contractor Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
11 Preface
12 References
14 Context of the Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work)
14.4 SHEQ Plans

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
15 Leadership
16 Planning
17 Support
17.1 Resources
17.2 Competence
17.3 Awareness
17.4 Communication
18 Operation

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
19.2 Audits

Contractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
20 Improvement
Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
Subcontractor Information
1. Subcontractor Company name:

2. Contract name:
3. Contract number:
6. Contact Details
 Postal address:
 Facsimile:
 Cell:
 E-mail:
21 Preface
22 References
24 Context of the Subcontractor Work Package (Scope of Work)
24.4 SHEQ Plans

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
25 Leadership
26 Planning
27 Support
27.1 Resources
27.2 Competence
27.3 Awareness
27.4 Communication
28 Operation

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
29.2 Audits

Subcontractor -
Insert Company
Logo here
30 Improvement
Approved by (name)
Designation
Date

Contract - SHEQ Committee Terms of Reference
SHEQ Committee Membership
Name Role / Area of Representation

Ex-officio Members Title Surname First Name Position
Convenor Convenor
Secretary
Trade Union Reps
Management Reps
Subject Area Reps

SHEQ COMMITTEE – TERMS OF REFERENCE
1. Purpose
To contribute to the development of policy, and monitor performance in all areas of

occupational safety, health, environment and quality within the LHWP Phase II Project.
2. Composition
2.1. The Committee shall be comprised as follows:
(i) Ex-officio members: Resident Engineer (Consultant)/ Authorised Site

Representative (Contractor) or SHEQ Manager
(ii) Subject area representatives – Consultant/contractor staff with particular

expertise or interest in SHEQ Committee matters to reflect the range of
disciplines within and hence the risk profile of the project;
(iii) Trade Union or worker representatives: Each of the recognised Trade Union(s)
will nominate one representative to be a member of this Committee;
(iv) Up to four management representatives. These may come from the following
areas; Production, Engineering, Camp Services, Human Resources;
(v) SHEQ Officer/ Environmental Officer/Manager.
2.2. Membership is compliant with the requirements of the Labour Code Order
No. 24 of 1992.
2.3. All non-ex officio members of this Committee will be invited to join the
Committee by the Convener and will be appointed to address specific issues
on the business of the day.
2.4. The Resident Engineer/Authorised Site Representative shall be the Convener

of this Committee. The SHEQ Manager will deputise as the Convener should
the Convener be absent for the duration of the meeting.
2.5. The Safety & Health or Environmental or Quality Officer shall act as
Secretary to the Committee.
2.6. Other individuals from within or outside the subject area/project may also
be invited to attend meetings from time to time to provide the Committee
with information on specific items on the agenda.

3. Meetings
3.1. The Committee will meet at least monthly to fulfil its remit.
3.2. Minutes, agendas and papers will normally be circulated to members of the
Committee at least five days in advance of the meeting. Late papers may be
circulated up to two days before the meeting. Only in the case of extreme
urgency and with the agreement of the Convener will papers be tabled at
meetings of the Committee.
3.3. Non-contentious or urgent matters not on the agenda may be considered at

a meeting subject to the agreement of the Convener of the meeting and the
majority of members present.
3.4. Papers will indicate the originator/s and purpose of the paper, the matter/s
which the Committee is being asked to consider and any action/s required
and confirm the status of the paper in respect of agreed communications
protocols.
3.5. Eight members of the Committee shall be a quorum. This number must
include the Convener or the SHEQ Manager.
3.6. A formal minute will be kept of proceedings and submitted for approval at
the next meeting of the Committee. The draft minute will be agreed with
the Convener of the Committee prior to circulation and in the case of the
absence of the Convener at a meeting the Committee member appointed to
act as Convener for the duration of that specific meeting.
3.7. Where necessary the Committee may also function between meetings
through correspondence and any decision(s) taken formally ratified at the
next meeting of the Committee.
4. Remit
4.1. To oversee the implementation and operation of the LHDA’s SHEQ policy
and arrangements, to ensure that key risks are identified, and that
appropriate control measures are implemented.
4.2. To ensure that a suitable SHEQ Committee management structure is in

place within the project, to maximise the protection of staff, visitors and any
other affected or effected stakeholders and the areas that may be affected
by the project activities.

4.3. To encourage the sharing of best practice within the LHDA Project
Community with regard to occupational safety, health, environment and
wellbeing, and providing a forum for discussion of safety, health and
environmental issues of concern.
4.4. To monitor SHEQ management plan performance throughout the project

and to ensure satisfactory legislative compliance.
4.5. To ensure that senior management is fully informed with regard to

significant issues and developments in occupational safety, health,
environment and quality to ensure compliance with legislative requirements.
5. Other
5.1. The Committee will from time to time undertake a review of its own
performance and effectiveness.
5.2. In order to fulfil its remit the Committee may obtain external professional
advice as necessary.
5.3. Reports on the main points discussed at each meeting will be provided to
the subsequent meeting of the contract progress committee forum and
thereafter reported to LHDA.
5.4. Membership of the Committee will be published on the agreed publication

scheme.
Date: ______________________________

Contract – SHEQ Risk Assessment (RA) for Contractor/Subcontractor scope of work
Risk Assessment Team

Name Designation Contact Number E-mail
Facilitator
Team Member 1
Team Member 2
Team Member 3
Team Member 4
Team Member 5
Team Member 6
Define the scope of work

Describe the scope of work to be assessed:

Identify who/what may be at risk by the project work

A number of people may be at risk from any process - this may affect the risk controls required. The area where the process is executed may affect the
number of people at risk (i.e. fellow employees, visitors and the public).
Identify the risks - then rate each risk

1. The process is divided into activities. For each activity, identify the risks and associated risk events.
2. List existing risk controls and determine a risk rating using the Risk Rating Matrix – Annexure 1.
3. Additional risk controls may be required to achieve an acceptable level of risk – apply the hierarchy of controls.
4. Re-rate the risk if additional risk controls are identified.
Risk rating with Risk Rating with
existing controls* Additional risk additional
Associated risk Existing risk controls required
Activity / Area Risks controls
event controls
(Apply the hierarchy of
L C R risk controls) L C R
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
* L = likelihood C = consequence R = risk rating (L X C)

Site Manager Approval

Name: Name:
Completed by Authorised by
Signature: Signature:
Date: Date:
Implement the additional risk controls identified

If no Action Request was raised, indicate briefly what additional risk controls as listed above were implemented, when and by whom.
Review the risk assessment

Reviews should be scheduled on at least an annual basis, but it is required to also review risk assessments after incident investigations and when there is a
change in the process.
Documentation
List all legal and advisory documentation (Acts, Regulations, Standards and Codes of Practice) that supports this risk assessment, where applicable.

Annexure 1 – Risk Matrix
LIKELIHOOD How likely is the risk event to realise?

Likely 3 Expected to occur in most circumstances (or may occur frequently)
Possible 2 Could occur at some time (or has occurred in the company before)
Unlikely 1 Not likely to occur in normal circumstances, only in exceptional circumstances
How severe could consequences of the event be?

CONSEQUENCES Minor Significant Major
1 2 3
Slight injuries, maybe first aid required (First Medical treatment required (Restricted Work Hospital admission required, permanent
Health & Safety Aid Injury - FAI). Minor health impact, no lost Injury - RWI). Possible medium term Incapacity disability or death (Lost Time Injury –LTI /
time, complete recovery. / illness, with likely recovery. Fatality)
No or very low environmental event - Clean-up by site staff and/or contractors - Considerable clean-up effort using external
Environmental
confined to small area. confined within facility boundary. resources - extend beyond project boundary.
Significant damage, equipment cannot be
Damage Limited, repairable damage. Extensive, irreparable damage
repaired on site
Considerable impact – Regional public concern.
Slight impact – Public awareness may exist, National public concern. Extensive adverse
Reputation Extensive adverse attention in local / national
but there is no public concern attention in the international media.
media.
Quality degradation barely noticeable / Quality reduction requires client approval / Project deliverable is effectively useless /
Project Deliverable Quality
High probability of error detection Restricted probability of error detection Limited probability of error detection
Cost Insignificant cost increase 20 - 40% cost increase > 40% cost increase
Time Insignificant time increase 5 - 20% time increase > 20% time increase

Consequences
Minor Significant Major
Likelihood (1) (2) (3)
Medium High High
Likely (3)
(3) (6) (9)
High Intolerable - immediate action required before work continues
Low Medium High
Possible (2)
(2) (4) (6)
Medium Tolerable - action required within 2 weeks
Low Low Medium
Unlikely (1)
(1) (2) (3)
Low Acceptable - monitor risks and reduce further when practicable

Contract – Method Statement (MS)
Developed by: Date: ___/___/20___ Signature:

Task name should correspond with the title of the
Task: TRA.
Method Statement No.
Brief description
of activity/work: TRA No.
Part 1
SWP / SOP
Ref. Task steps in sequence (If applicable, these should align with any
Exist? Develop?
Potential Hazards Controls
# associated SWP/SOP to enable cross-referencing) Reference
(Y/N) (Y/N)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Part 2
Training, qualifications and experience (other than in SWPs/SOPs) required to
Inspections and tests required
complete this Task
Note: The records of qualifications and experience are held in local files
Engineering certificates/permits/approvals Equipment / Machinery / Tools / Vehicles
Codes of Practice, legislation, standards which apply to this Task
required for this Task required for this Task
Person(s) responsible for supervising work: (Inspecting and approving work areas, work methods, protective measures, plant, equipment, power tools, etc.)
Name: ________________________________________________________ Position: ___________________________________________________
Name: ________________________________________________________ Position: ___________________________________________________
Note: For a list of names and signatures of staff instructed in this MS see local training records.

Part 3
Contractor Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
Project Manager ___/___/20___
LHDA Responsible Person - Name Signature Date
Site Supervisor ___/___/20___

Contract – Task Risk Assessment (TRA)
TRA facilitated by: Date: ___/___/20___ Signature:
Task name should correspond with

Task:
the title of SWP/SOP/MS
TRA to support a: TRA No.
Brief description SWP

of activity/work: SOP SWP/SOP/MS No.
MS
Step 1
Task Stressors (if applicable - list all):
Comments:

Stressors include, but are not limited to, the following:
Environmental stressors Physical stressors Social stressors

 Air temperature  Lack of breaks  Availability of facilities to practice religion
 Dust  Length of workday  Quality and availability of drinking water
 Humidity  Time pressure  Type and cleanliness of toilet facilities
 Lighting (including emergency lighting)  Monotony  Availability of washing facilities (washbasins,
 Odour  Competency of co-workers showers, soap, towels, etc.)
 Moisture  Ergonomics / physical arrangement of work area &  Availability of changing rooms and lockers
 Oxygen deficiency equipment.  Responsibility for first-aid
 High or low pressure  Absence of supervisors
 Extreme temperature variation  Availability of separate eating facilities
 Extreme humidity variation  Protection of non-smokers
 Ventilation  Conflicts/hostility in the workplace
 Air speed  Infectious diseases / HIV/AIDS
 Working alone  Lack of control over the way work is done
 Conflicting or ambiguous roles
Steps Step
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 7 Step 8
4 l 5 l 6 12
Risk Ranking Residual Risk
Risk Control Measures *
Actioner / Initials
 Hierarchy of Control – Elimination,
Consequence
Consequence
Risk Rating
Risk Rating
Likelihood
Likelihood
Ref. Substitution, Isolation, Engineering,
Task Steps Potential Risks
No. Administration, Personal Protection.
 Additional information can be attached.

Step 9 Highest Remaining Residual Risk
Step 10
* Further description of controls added to reduce Risk
Lessons learned from this Risk Assessment:
Step 11
Risk assessment
trained person
1.
Risk assessment
Date: ___ / ___ / 20___
prepared by: Other participant
2.
names
3.

4.
5.
Consultation If TRA for MS – need for a
Yes No
conducted with SWP/SOP to be developed?
Approval to proceed
Name Company Designation Signature Date
Residual Risk Approval Required to Proceed Approval Signature Approval Date

Work must not proceed. It should be redefined or further control measures put in place to reduce
Extreme (E)
risk. The controls should be re-assessed for adequacy prior to task commencement.
Work can commence when the Site Project Manager and the Consultant SHEQ Manager (or their nominated
High (H)
delegates) have approved this risk assessment, and all identified control measures are in place.
Work can commence when the SHEQ Officer and Supervisor (or their nominated delegates) have approved this
Moderate (M)
risk assessment, and all identified control measures are in place.
Work can commence once the Supervisor has approved this risk assessment, and all identified control measures
Low (L) are in place.
A SHEQ Manager / Officer (or nominated delegate) must approve the TRA when used to develop a SWP/SOP.
Step 13
All Task participants must sign on before they are permitted to be involved in the Task.
By signing below, participants acknowledge they have read and understand the risk assessment and agree to comply with all steps and control measures.
Participant name Company Designation Sign on Date Time

Consequence
Risk Calculator
Insignificant Minor Moderate Major Catastrophic
Likelihood 1 2 3 4 5
Moderate High High Extreme Extreme
Almost Certain 5
(5) (10) (15) (20) (25)
Low Moderate High Extreme Extreme
Likely 4
(4) (8) (12) (16) (20)
Low Moderate Moderate High High
Possible 3
(3) (6) (9) (12) (15)
Low Low Moderate Moderate High
Unlikely 2
(2) (4) (6) (8) (10)
Conceivable but Low Low Low Low Moderate
1
improbable (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

TRA – quick guide
Step What to do More detailed information – on each TRA step
Complete company & facilitator details - give  At the top of the risk assessment record the task name, a brief description of the task, and the relevant work area and section.
0.
a short description of the task.  Keep it as simple as possible, but with enough information to identify the task.
1. Note any task stressors on the TRA form.  Stressors must be factored into the risk assessment if they are present as they will increase the likelihood of an incident.
 In the first column “Ref No.” write the step no. starting from 1 - up to until however many steps there are in the task. If
2. Detail specific task steps. applicable, these should align with any associated SWP/SOP/MS to enable cross-referencing.
 List each of the specific steps associated with the task that will be undertaken.
 In the column next to listed task steps, identify all potential SH/E/Q risks relevant to each step and record each risk on a
separate line.
 A common mistake is to refer to a risk as the actual harm or the health effect it caused rather than the risk. E.g. If the task was
3. Identify potential risks for each task step.
hosing down an area, the risk is the wet floor not the potential harm caused e.g. fall / cut knee.
 If no risks are found for a task step or the risk has been addressed in a previous step, the task step still needs to be listed to
show it has been considered, and to keep the steps in line with any associated SWP/SOP/MS.
 Simply put if the risk would realise, what would be the reasonable consequence? It is not always the “worst” case scenario;
Evaluate the possible Consequence of the e.g. if you fell 1m off a ladder you could be killed as an extreme (e.g. land on your head), but the most likely consequence
4.
risk - use Risk Calculator above would be you might sprain your wrist or break a leg. Therefore the consequence is more likely to be moderate rather than
catastrophic. Consider all of SH/E/Q risks and their consequences.
 Ask yourself if it will ever happen. If so - what factors are needed for it to happen, and how often would those factors be
Evaluate the likelihood of that Consequence -
5. around. Then ask yourself what you think the reasonable frequency would be (considering the prevailing stressors listed),
use Risk Calculator above
before determining the Likelihood.
Determine Risk Ratings - use Risk Calculator  Determine each risk’s rating by multiplying the “Consequence” and “Likelihood” levels on the Risk Calculator table (or by
6.
above intersecting the “Consequence” and “Likelihood” levels on the Risk Calculator table).
 Control measures need to reduce risk ratings to an acceptable level if the current risk level is unacceptable; aim for a low risk.
7. Identify controls to reduce risk
 Apply the Hierarchy of Control when determining control measures.
 After control measures have been identified, you need to reassess each risk’s rating to determine what the remaining risk
Evaluate the Residual Risk (risk rating with
8. would be with the controls in place from Step 7 (follow the principles in Steps 4 & 5 above).
controls in place)
 The aim is to achieve a Low Risk; if not achieved review controls again and/or ask for help.
 If the highest residual risk on the risk assessment is a Low Risk, or a Moderate Risk the task can commence once all control
9. Determine highest remaining residual risk
measures are in place and the risk assessment has been reviewed and approved.

 If a High or Extreme risk still remains, then the task must not commence and further review must be undertaken involving the
Site Project Manager and the Consultant SHEQ Manager (or their nominated delegates).
Exemption: In exceptional circumstances, if the “Extreme” or “High” risk rating does not apply to personal injury or environmental
damage (e.g. potential for property damage only), and the Site Project Manager, in consultation with the Consultant SHEQ
Manager, believe it is an acceptable risk for the project, the task may be approved. This does not apply for Personal injury or
Environmental risks; where a “Moderate” risk is the highest rating allowable.
Describe controls in more detail and  Expand on controls to ensure adequate detail for the person(s) responsible to implement the controls.
10.
document lessons learned  Document lessons learned to ensure it is carried forward through similar tasks on other LHDA projects.
 Once the risk assessment is complete, all participants should record their name at the bottom of the sheet, document any
consultation that was had (e.g. tabled at a HEQ meeting) and the Project Manager or delegate should sign off the task for
11. Approval & SWP / SOP development approval.
 Specify if a Safe Work Practice (SWP) or Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is required to be developed (e.g. for routine /
regular tasks).
Assign responsibility for control  Reference the initials of the person responsible for ensuring a particular control is implemented before progressing with the
12.
implementation task
 All persons involved in a task must acknowledge they have read and understood the task risk assessment and agree to comply
13. Sign on
with all task steps and associated control measures.

Contract – Daily Site Task Instruction (DSTI)
Consultant / Contractor Company

Name
Contract Start Date Contract End Date
Checklist - Before Work Commences

To Standard
Description Corrective Measures Date
Yes No
Safe access to work area – clean & tidy
Sufficient / correct barricading erected
Electrical equipment in good condition
Machine guarding adequate
All tools / equipment pre-inspected
Safe access & egress available and used
Scaffolding tagged accordingly
Gas cutting equipment & hoses
Correct P.P.E (Utilised & available)
Safe working platforms for elevated work
Safe Lifting & Rigging equipment
SMI board up to date
Correct permits for application
Permits valid
Lock–out required and in place
Correct materials available
All equipment/machinery/tools/vehicles available
No overhead work allowed
Employees trained/competent to execute the task
Method Statement(s)/SWPs/SOPs available
Potential environmental harm controlled
Quality inspection & hold points identified
The above list does not exclude and/or waive any other checklist and or legal requirements!
Risk Assessment Reference Number
Current Task - What are the Risks – List SOPs/SWPs/MSs/Controls

List Main Steps of the Task Task & Environment? Required/Implemented

Note:
 If tasks change, this list and the Risk Assessment must be revised before proceeding with new/changed task.
 A signed attendance register must be attached to this list.
I hereby certify that the above items were checked and all employees under my supervision received a safe task instruction:
Responsible Person: __________________________________ ____________________

(Foreman/Supervisor) Print Name Signature
SHEQ Officer: __________________________________ ____________________

(Contractor) Print Name Signature
# Attendees - Name Company No. Signature

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

DSTI Close-out - (Checklist – at end of shift)
No Description Yes No Action Required
1 Are safe access to work area reinstated

2 Sufficient and correct barricading erected where
required – no floor openings
3 No tools and equipment left at work place
4 All tools and equipment inspected end – shift
inspection / hot work inspection
5 Scaffolding tagged accordingly
6 No gas cutting equipment left at work place
7 End shift PPE inspection
8 All material removed from elevated working platforms
9 Lifting & Rigging equipment correctly stored
10 Applicable permits signed off
11 Lock-outs applied with all plant and equipment left at
work place
12 Material neatly and safe stacked
At work place / store
13 Housekeeping in good state
Remarks:
Note:
 If tasks change, this list and the Risk Assessment must be revised before proceeding with new/changed task.
 A signed attendance register must be attached to this list.
I hereby certify that the above items were checked IN MY AREA/S of RESPONSIBILITY and the area/s is safe and free of any
possible risks
Responsible Person: __________________________________ ____________________

(Foreman/Supervisor) Print Name Signature
SHEQ Officer: __________________________________ ____________________

(Contractor) Print Name Signature

Evaluation – Consultant SHEQ Management Plan
Consultant Company Name Responsible Person Designation Date
Plan Submission Date Scheduled Start Date
√ Acceptable X Needs Improvement N/A Not Applicable
# Evaluation Criteria √ X N/A Comment
1. Preface
Scope of Work and duration of the
1.1
Contract
Supplemental (to the LHDA
1.2
Framework) SHEQ Requirements
2. References
Consultant SHEQ documentation
2.1
references
Additional Terms and Definitions
3.1
used in the SHEQ Plan
4. Context of the Consultant / Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work)
Consultant Baseline Risk
4.1
Assessment
4.3 SHEQ Plan scope
4.4 SHEQ Plan
5. Leadership

Organizational roles,
5.3
responsibilities and authorities
6. Planning
Actions to address risks and
6.1
opportunities
SHEQ objectives and planning to
6.2
achieve them
7.

7.1 Resources
7.2 Competence
7.3 Awareness
7.4 Communication and Consultation
8. Operation

Emergency Preparedness and
8.4
Response
Site Establishment and Facilities
8.5 Requirements – Workplace
Standards
8.6 Safety Management – SWPs / SOPs
8.10 Management of change (MOC)

Maintenance of equipment,
8.11
machinery, tools and vehicles
8.12 Demobilisation requirements
Monitoring, measurement, analysis
9.1
and evaluation
9.2 Audits
Inspection and Planned Task
9.3
Observation (PTO) programmes
10. Improvement
Incident and nonconformity
10.1
management
10.2 Corrective action
10.3 Improvement

11. Contract-specific requirements (when applicable)
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Initial Review Completed

Reviewed by LHDA SHEQ Manager
Signature Date
(Name)
Accepted by Consultant Responsible

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for LHDA review

Plan approved
Plan approved conditionally:
1.
2.
Second Review (if required)

Signature Date
(Name)
Accepted by Consultant Responsible

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for LHDA review

Plan approved
1.
2.

Evaluation – Contractor / Subcontractor SHEQ Management Plan
Contractor Company Name Responsible Person Designation Date
Plan Submission Date Scheduled Start Date
# Evaluation Criteria √ X N/A Comment
1. Preface
Scope of Work and duration of the
1.1
Contract
Supplemental (to the LHDA
1.2
Framework) SHEQ Requirements
2. References
Contractor SHEQ documentation
2.1
references
Additional Terms and Definitions
3.1
used in the SHEQ Plan
4. Context of the Consultant / Contractor Work Package (Scope of Work)
Consultant Baseline Risk
4.1
Assessment considered
4.3 SHEQ Plan scope
4.4 SHEQ Plan
5. Leadership

Organizational roles,
5.3
responsibilities and authorities
6. Planning
Actions to address risks and
6.1
opportunities
SHEQ objectives and planning to
6.2
achieve them
7.

7.1 Resources
7.2 Competence
7.3 Awareness
7.4 Communication and Consultation
8. Operation

Emergency Preparedness and
8.4
Response
Site Establishment and Facilities
8.5 Requirements – Workplace
Standards
8.6 Safety Management – SWPs / SOPs
8.10 Management of change (MOC)

Maintenance of equipment,
8.11
machinery, tools and vehicles
8.12 Demobilisation requirements
Monitoring, measurement, analysis
9.1
and evaluation
9.2 Audits
Inspection and Planned Task
9.3
Observation (PTO) programmes
10. Improvement
Incident and nonconformity
10.1
management
10.2 Corrective action
10.3 Improvement

11. Contract-specific requirements (when applicable)
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Initial Review Completed

Reviewed by Consultant SHEQ Manager
Signature Date
(Name)
Accepted by Contractor Responsible

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for Consultant review

Plan approved
1.
2.

Reviewed by Consultant SHEQ Manager
Signature Date
(Name)

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for Consultant review

Plan approved
1.
2.

Mobilisation – Site Establishment Checklist
Consultant / Contractor
(Company Name)
Site Plan Submission Date Site Plan Review Date
Reviewed by (Company Name) Responsible Person Designation Date
Note: Attach a copy of the Site Establishment Plan
# Compliance Criteria √ X N/A Comment

Task Risk Assessment – Site
1.
Establishment
Method Statement – Site
2.
Establishment
3. Vehicle and pedestrian access routes
4. Parking facilities
5. Site traffic control
6. Security measures
Access and connections to utility
7.
supplies
8. Materials deliveries & storage
9. Materials management
10. Illumination
11. Housekeeping arrangements

Fire safety & location of First Aid and
12.
Fire Equipment
13. Emergency assembly points
14. Workplace/welfare facilities

Waste storage, handling and disposal
15.
facilities
Demarcation of the construction
16. footprint including areas not to be
disturbed by the development

Mobilisation – Site Establishment Checklist
Proposed areas for the stockpiling of

17.
topsoil and excavated spoil material
Location of sewage and sanitary
18. facilities at all localities where there
will be a concentration of labour
19. Other…
20.
21.
Initial Review
Reviewed by LHDA/Consultant SHEQ
Signature Date
Manager (Name)

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for TCP review

Plan approved
1.
2.

Reviewed by LHDA/Consultant SHEQ
Signature Date
Manager (Name)

Signature Date
Person (Name)
Plan rejected – correct and re-submit for TCP review

Plan approved
1.
2.

Mobilisation – SHEQ Site Access Certificate

Name
# Site Access Criteria Yes No N/A Comment
1. SHEQ Plan Approved?
Induction/.Awareness training
2.
completed?
3. Entry medicals done?
Proof of employees’ competency

4.
submitted?
5. Security - access cards issued?
Site establishment approved? (See

6.
Site Establishment Checklist)
Inspections of all Plant & Equipment

7.
completed?
8. MSs/TRAs/SOPs/SWPs/ approved?
Registers, inventories and checklists

9. (of equipment, machinery, tools, and
vehicles) submitted?
10. MSDSs supplied for all chemicals?
11. PPE available for all employees?
12.
13.
14.
15.

Mobilisation – SHEQ Site Access Certificate
Approved for Site Access
LHDA SHEQ Manager (Name) Signature Date
Consultant SHEQ Manager (Name) Signature Date
Contractor SHEQ Officer (Name) Signature Date
LHDA Project Manager (Name) Signature Date

Contract – SHEQ Daily Log
Report by: Signature: Report Date: _____ /_____ /20_______
Ref. # SHEQ Activity / Issue Comments Responsible Person S&H E Q

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

Contract – SHEQ Daily Log
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Ref. # Visitors to Worksite (Name) Comments Responsible Person Visit Hours

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Ref. # Other Notes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Contract – SHEQ Weekly Report
Reporting Week
Contractor: Contract No. _____ /_____ /20_______
Start Date:
Reporting Week
Report by: Signature: _____ /_____ /20_______
End Date:
Incidents (including Near-misses) during the week Near-miss Injury Damage/Spill Fatality
1.
2.
A.
3.
4.
5.
Significant Accomplishments or Issues Requiring Special Attention (log daily activities here)
1.
2.
B.
3.
4.
5.
Subcontractors on site this week

1.
2.
C.
3.
4.
5.
Weekly Inspections conducted Inspection Findings and Resolution

1.
2.
D.
3.
4.
5.

Contract – SHEQ Weekly Report
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
SHEQ Activities Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri

1. DSTIs
2. Induction - Employees
3. Induction - Sub-contractors
4. Induction - Visitors
E.
5. SHEQ-specific Training
6. SHEQ Meetings
7. Risk Assessments Conducted
8. Public/Authority Complaints Received
9. Audits Conducted
High Priority Corrective Actions Raised Source Reference Action Status Comments
1.
2.
F.
3.
4.
5.
SHEQ Suggestions
1.
2.
G.
3.
4.
5.

Contract – SHEQ Monthly Report
Contractor: Contract No. Contract Start Date: ________ / ______ /20_____
Report by: Signature: Reporting Month: ________________ /20____
Year to date -
Item # Description Reporting period Comments
cumulative
Occupational Health and Safety reporting
S1 Total number of employees
S2 Total man-hours worked (including overtime)
S3 Number of fatal accidents on duty
S4 Number of lost time accidents
S5 Number of recordable/medical treatment cases
S6 Number of first aid cases
S7 Number of near misses
S8 Number of planned H&S inspections
S9 Number of material fires and explosions
S10 New cases of occupational illness
S11 Number of vehicle accidents
S12 Man-hours lost - incl. from previous period incidents
S13 Total man-hours from lost time accidents

1)
S14 Lost time injury frequency rate (LTIFR)

Year to date -
cumulative
S15 Lost time injury severity rate (LTISR) 2)
S16 Man-hours since last lost time injury
S17 Man-hours since last fatality
S18 Compensation claims raised with Insurer
S19 Occupational Hygiene monitoring done
S20 Occupational Health assessments done
Environmental reporting
E1 Number of Environmental incidents
E2 Hazardous materials stored on site
E3 Number of hazardous spills/leaks
E4 Wastewater discharged
E5 Air emissions
E6 Solid waste generated
E7 Waste recycled
E8 Public/authority complaints received
General
G1 Risk assessments conducted
G2 Regulatory inspections received
G3 SHEQ audits performed

Year to date -
cumulative
G4 Prohibition notices/fines received
G5 Corrective action requests raised
G6 Number of visitors inducted
G7 Number of new employees inducted
G8 Number of employees trained in SHEQ-specific topics
G9 Number of training hours
G10 Number of SHEQ meetings (incl. Toolbox Talks & DSTIs)
Notes:
1) LTIFR = (LTIs x 200 000) / Hours worked
2) LTISR = (No. of days lost x 200 000) / Hours worked
Note: Possible other Frequency/Severity Rates that can be added – please advise:
1. DIFR Disabling injury/illness frequency rate = (number of disabling injuries) x 200 000 / Hours worked
2. MIFR First-aid/Minor injury frequency rate = (number of first-aid/minor injuries) x 200 000 / Hours worked
3. PDFR Property damage frequency rate = (number of property damage incidents) x 200 000 / Hours worked
4. IFR Incident frequency rate = (number of incidents) x 200 000 / Hours worked
5. NMFR Near-miss frequency rate = (number of near-misses) x 200 000 / Hours worked
6. DISR Incident severity rate = (total days lost) x 200 000 / Hours worked
7. DII Disabling injury index = DIFR x DISR / 1 000

Contract Execution/Closure – Consultant/Contractor SHEQ Performance Review

Name
Reason for Review Routine Project Closure Special Request

# Compliance Criteria √ X N/A Comment
1. Mobilisation
2. Project SHEQ Personnel
3. Employee & Visitor Inductions
4. Staff/Supervisor SHEQ Training
5. Compliance to SHEQ Plan
6. (Sub)Contractor Management
7. Risk Assessment
8. Task Risk Assessment
9. DSTIs and Toolbox Talks
10. Incident Reporting/Investigation
11. Occupational Hygiene
Medical Surveillance
12.
(Entry/Periodical/Exit)
13. Workplace Facilities
14. Housekeeping
15. SHEQ Communication/Meetings
16. Access Control & Site Security
17. Hazardous Work
18. MSDS Requirements

19. Work Permits
20. Equipment Maintenance
21. PPE
22. SWPs, SOPs & Method Statements
23. Emergency Drills
24. Audits
25. Inspections
26. Monthly Reports
27. SHEQ File contents and maintenance
28. Commissioning & Handover
29. Site Decommissioning
30.
31.
Performance Criteria √ X N/A Additional Comments
1. Response to LHDA SHEQ Requests
2. SHEQ NCRs Received
3. SHEQ Audit Results
No. of Incidents of Regulatory

4.
Noncompliance
5. No. of First-Aid Injuries
6. No. of Medical Treatment Injuries
7. No. of Lost Time Injuries
No. of Incidents resulting in

8.
Equipment Damage
9. LTIFR
10. LTISR
11.

Significant risk if considered for further work on LHDA projects
SHEQ
Acceptable performance for future work on LHDA projects
Recommendation
Consider for future work on LHDA projects with the following

provisions/conditions/limitations:
1.
2.

Signature Date
(Name)
Accepted by Consultant / Contractor

Signature Date
SHEQ Manager (Name)

Contract – SHEQ Closure Certificate
Consultant Company Name Contract Start Date Contract Closure Date
Reason for Contract Closure

Scope of Work Completed Impossibility to Perform Breach of Contract
Instances of Mistake, Fraud, or Misrepresentation Other
# Closure Criteria Yes No N/A Comment
1. SHEQ File submissions complete?
2. Exit medicals done?
SHEQ Performance Review

3.
completed? (Attach a copy)
4. Security - access cards returned?
Site decommissioned (all waste,

5.
materials, equipment removed)?
Documentation supplied? (e.g.

6. training/operation/maintenance
manuals)
# Lessons Learnt Comment
What worked well?

1. (What processes helped you with the project? Were
the SHEQ management project documents useful?
What would you do again?)
Recommendations for improvement?

(How would you change the processes for your next
2. project? What would you not do again? What
changes to the LHDA SHEQ Framework documents and
templates would you recommend?)
3. How did you collect and record the lessons learnt?
4. Other comments:

Contract – SHEQ Closure Certificate
Approval for Contract SHEQ Closure
LHDA SHEQ Manager (Name) Signature Date
Consultant SHEQ Manager (Name) Signature Date
Contractor SHEQ Officer (Name) Signature Date
LHDA Project Manager (Name) Signature Date

Contract - Planned Task Observation (PTO)
Planned Task Observation (PTO)

Task Description Department / Workplace Location
Task Instruction Number (if available) Task Instruction Exists Yes No
Other Reference Documentation (RA/SWP/etc.)
Employee Observed Supervisor/Line Manager
Occupation Time with the Task _________ Years __________ Months
Observer Name Observation Date
Observer Designation Employee notified in advance? Yes No
Planned Observation Experienced Employee
Incident Repeater Risk-taker
Reason for Observation
Incapacitated Employee Training Follow-up (new employee)
Infrequently Performed Task Other (specify)
Did the employee adhere to the instruction/practice requirements? Could observed practices/conditions lead to:
1 PPE Injury
2 Specifications Illness (dust, fumes, gas, etc,)
3 Tools & equipment Environmental harm
4 Task Instruction Steps Damage to Equipment
5 Safe Work Practice(s) (SWPs) Poor quality (nonconformities)
6 Training Costs (lower productivity/delays/etc.)
7 Other (specify) Other (specify)
Non-compliant practices / at-risk behaviour observed Comments Proposed corrective actions for deviations (controls)
1 Working at unsafe speed Compile Instruction for this Task
2 Using unsafe equipment Revise Current Instruction
3 Using equipment unsafely Retraining of Employee
4 Unsafe loading, placing and lifting Require New Engineering Controls
5 Taking unsafe position Change Work Methods / Equipment
6 Failure to use PPE Require New /Additional PPE
7 SHEQ rules ignored Contract with Employee
8 Failure to warn Placement of Employee
9 Taking chances / shortcuts Coaching
10 Failure to identify hazards Other (specify)
11 Failure to secure lock-out Other (specify)
12 Safety signs ignored
13 Task Steps not done in sequence
14 Failure to conduct inspections
15 Failure to generate records
17 Other (specify):
18 Other (specify):
Contract between Observer and Employee (employee feedback / response to non-compliant practices / at-risk behaviour observed) Comment
1
2
3
4
5
Observer Signature Date
Employee Signature Date
SHEQ Officer Signature Date
If no Task Instruction exists - list the task steps as observed

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
LHWP2-SHEQ-Form 9.3
Lesotho Highlands Water Project, Phase II
Incident Flash Report
SUBMIT FLASH REPORT BEFORE THE END OF SHIFT OR DAY OF INCIDENT
INCIDENT TYPE Safety Health Environmental Quality Labour Community
[Mark X] Other (Specify):
LOCATION:
DATE TIME
BRIEF DESCRIPTION :
INJURY First Aid / Serious /

Near Miss / Lost Time Injury
CLASSIFICATION Medical (no Permanent Fatality Not Applicable
No Injuries (shift loss)
Mark X shift loss) Injury
IN THE CASE OF A MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT
Road Condition: Weather Condition:
Vehicle Registration No.: Third Party Registration No:
Damage to Vehicle: Damage to Vehicle:
Government Member of the Other:

PARTIES INVOLVED: X LHDA Consultant Contractor
Agency Public
Full Name: Passport Number / ID: Employer:

PARTICULARS OF
PARTIES INVOLVED
PARTICULARS OF WITNESSES
Witness 1 Name: Contact number:
Witness 2 Name: Contact number:
Report by (Name):
Signed: Date:

Contract – Incident Report
Person reporting the incident must complete sections 1 – 6 on pages 1 & 2
1. Incident reporting person details
Name Date of report ____/____/20___
Nature of report Injury/Illness □ Property Loss/Damage □
Complete Parts 2 – 7 in case of an Injury/Illness or Part 8 in case of Property Loss/Damage
2. Injured person(s) details (only complete if reporting an injury or illness)

Date of birth
First name
Surname ______ / _______ / ___________
Gender
Other names
Male □ Female □
E-mail Phone No
Injured person(s) classification
Occupation Employee No
Project Area Department
Employer
Contact details
Experience in task
being performed
< 1 month □ 1–12 months □ 1–5 yrs □ > 5 yrs □ N/A □
Training in task being Internal task- External task-
performed
None □ Induction □ specific □ specific □
Surname Name
Visitor □ Host name
Add more sheets, if
Public person □ Name (if provided)
required
3. Witness details (complete if there was a witness)

First Name Employee No
Surname Telephone No
4. Incident details:
Date of event ______ / ______ / 20_____ Time of event : am/pm
Site Specific location
Describe the incident (add more sheets, if required):
Please turn over

5. Injury/Illness details
Asthma or other respiratory illness □ Amputation □
Bruise, contusion or crushing injury □ Burn □
Dermatitis or other skin conditions □ Concussion □
Effects of exposure to the elements □ Dislocation □
Nature of Foreign matter intrusion □ Electric shock □
injury/illness or
symptom Needle stick or sharp injury □ Fracture □
Poisoning or effects of substances □ Internal injury □
Psychological □ Sensory loss □
Sprain/Strain □ Superficial injury □
Other (specify)
Ear □ Hand or finger □ Back □

Location of
Eye □ Internal organs □ Neck □
injury/illness or Face □ Feet or toes □ Shoulder or arm □
symptom
Head (not ear/eye/face) □ Hip or leg □ Chest □
Other
Multiple locations □ Not applicable □ (specify)
Contact with □ Muscular stress from □
How did the injury, Exposure to □ Trapped between □
illness or symptom
occur?
Fall from □ Trapped by □
For example:
Struck by □ Tripped over □
Fall from – stairs Struck against □ Vehicle accident □
Other (specify)
6. Sign and forward report to injured person’s (or area) supervisor/line manager
Supervisor/line manager
Signature of injured person Date ___ / ___ / 20___
Signature of person reporting
Date ___ / ___ / 20___
incident
Please turn over for Section 7

Injured person’s (or area) supervisor/line manager must complete section 7
7. Immediate response (correction)

Treatment to injured First General Hospital Hospital
person provided by
Nil □ aider □ Practitioner □ (out-patient) □ (in-patient) □
Work time lost due to injury/Illness
Immediate actions (correction) taken to prevent or reduce risk of recurrence/escalation

Substitution Engineering Administration
Elimination control □ control □ control □ control □ PPE □
Detail of immediate response actions:
Corrective Action Report (CAR) reference

Supervisor/line
manager name
Date ____ / ____ / 20___
Signature
Complete Part 8 in case of Property Loss/Damage
8. Property loss/damage details
Incident details
Date of event ______ / ______ / 20_____ Time of event : am/pm
Site Specific location
Describe the incident (add more sheets, if required):

Please turn over
Immediate actions (correction) taken to prevent or reduce risk of recurrence/escalation

Substitution Engineering Administration
Elimination control □ control □ control □ control □ PPE □
Detail of immediate response actions:
Corrective Action Report (CAR) reference

Supervisor/line
manager name
Date ____ / ____ / 20___
Signature
The SHEQ Manager / Officer / Appointee must complete section 9
9. Classify the incident based on criteria listed in Incident Investigation Procedure

Minor □ Significant □ Severe □
Comments:
Assigned Investigation Facilitator Name

Name
Date ____ / ____ / 20___
Signature

Standard Operating Procedure - Portable Ladders
The use of ladders involves the following four steps:
 Selecting the appropriate ladder for the task at hand;

 Checking the ladder for defects;
 Using the ladder safely in performing the task; and
 Maintaining the ladder, to ensure that it remains safe for use and to prolong its serviceability.
Following these steps greatly reduces the likelihood of incidents occurring, and ensures that the most
appropriate, well-maintained ladder for the task is selected. This allows the user to perform the task
safely while working at an elevated position.
1. Selecting a Ladder
It is critical that the most appropriate ladder for the task at hand is selected, to allow the user to work
safely at an elevated position. This allows the user to concentrate on safely performing the task
without the distraction of having to be concerned about the ladder.
However, because there are so many available ladders, selecting the correct one is not an easy task.
Selecting a ladder should be based on a task risk assessment that studies the risks of performing a
particular task beforehand. An informed ladder selection can only be made once all the hazards and
risks that will be present during the performance of the task have been identified.
Ladders should only be used if the relevant risk assessment has shown that using more stable
equipment like scaffolding or a platform for working at an elevated position cannot be justified.
Ladders are also the first option where the features and characteristics of the working environment
do not permit the use of alternative equipment. Where possible, ladders should be substituted with
more stable equipment for working at elevated positions.
Once it has been established that a ladder is to be used, select the most appropriate ladder for the
task. It is useful to consider the following in addition to the relevant risk assessment in selecting a
ladder:
 What will the ladder be used for?

o Is it necessary, for example, to provide a tool receptacle, bucket shelf, etc.?
o How long does the ladder have to be?
 Where will it be used?
o Will the environment be, for example, corrosive, electrically live or soft underfoot?
o How high is the position that has to be reached?
 How will it be used?
o Will it be used as a platform to work from or will it be used for access to elevated positions
only?
LHWP2-SOP-E1 Page 1 of 8
 Who will be using it?

o How much weight will the ladder have to carry? (Remember to include the weight of
equipment, tools and materials to be used.)
 When will it be used?
o Will it be used during the day or at night?
o Is there a possibility of the ladder getting wet, etc.?
The answer to these questions will make it clear which ladder would be the most appropriate for
performing the task, and the ladder can then be obtained and used.
2. Pre-use Check
Ladders must be checked for any defects before they are used. This is done to identify any defects
that may exist that would render the ladder unfit and unsafe for use and that could result in incidents.
The ladder may be used only if no defects are found. The following, at the least, should be checked on
all ladders:
 Generally in good condition?

 Clean and free from paint, oil, grease and excess dirt?
 Free from corrosion and sharp edges?
 Stiles not dented, bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Rungs not dented, bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Rungs properly and tightly fixed to stiles?
 All fasteners (screws/bolts/buts/rivets) fastened tightly?
 Non-slip feet in place, properly secured, undamaged, not excessively worn and clean?
 Stable when erected?
The following should be checked specifically on step ladders:
 Spreader braces in place, properly secured, not bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Spreader brace locks functioning properly?
 Pail shelf/platform in place, properly secured, not bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Tool receptacle in place and undamaged?
The following should be checked specifically on extension ladders:
 Extension tracks not dented, bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?

 Pulleys in place, properly secured, undamaged and functioning properly?
 Rope in place, not cut, frayed or otherwise damaged?
 Rung locks in place, properly secured, not dented, bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
NOTE:
Wooden ladders may not be painted at all as a defect could easily be concealed by a coat of paint.
Defective ladders should be taken out of service and either tagged for repair or scrapped. Any defects
found are to be reported to the Safety Officer immediately. The Safety Officer marks the ladder as
“Not Safe for Use” and ensures that the ladder is removed from the storage area to prevent it from
being used accidentally.
The Safety Officer takes the necessary steps to have the ladder repaired if possible, or to have the
ladder replaced if it cannot be repaired. Personnel that are competent in this type of work should
repair ladders. The Safety Officer conducts a pre-use Inspection on the ladder once it has been
received back from maintenance. The ladder is only made available for use again once it satisfies all
the criteria of the pre-use inspection. Otherwise, any defects still present must be addressed until the
ladder does again satisfy the criteria of the pre-use inspection.
Having a safe ladder does unfortunately not necessarily mean that the activities performed with the
ladder will also always be safe. Active awareness on the part of ladder users is required to ensure the
safe use of a ladder.
3. Positioning and Securing the Ladder

Once the ladder user has established that the ladder is safe to be used, it can be taken to the place of
work. Grasp shorter ladders that can be carried alone as near as possible to the centre of the ladder.
Obtain assistance when carrying long or heavy ladders. Carry the ladder on the same side and grasp
the ladder so it is balanced between the carriers. Never hold the front of the ladder at head height
while carrying it as bumping it while doing so could result in a serious head, neck or back injury.
Exercise caution when carrying a ladder through an area where the view is obstructed, such as out of
the storage area and through passageways and doorways.
Once the workplace is reached the ladder is positioned in such a way that the possibility of incidents
occurring is minimised. A safe ladder becomes extremely unsafe if it is not positioned correctly. The
results of the risk assessment are taken into account when the ladder is positioned. This ensures that
the less obvious hazards such as unlocked doors and windows, which if opened could knock the ladder
over, are kept in mind together with the more obvious hazards such as an uneven surface and
instability. Select a safe locations to position the ladder by avoiding:
 Entry and exit doors;

 Vehicular traffic;
 Pedestrian traffic;
 Uneven flooring;
 Uneven landing points; and
 Being closer than 3m from overhead power lines.
With a safe location selected, prepare firm and level footing on which to position the ladder. Where
soil is very soft and the ladder sinks into it, place the ladder on a firm base such as a secured board or
concrete tile or stepping stone. A manufacturer-approved ladder stabilising (levelling) device is used
to level out an uneven surface.
Erect the ladder so that the angle formed between the ladder and the surface on which it is positioned
form a 75° angle. This is achieved by extending the ladder’s bottom one unit out from the base of the
supporting structure for every four units the ladder rises. Position the ladder so that it extends at least
1m past the edge of the supporting structure.
If it is at all possible, the ladder is secured once it has been positioned safely. Securing the ladder
greatly reduces the possibility of it accidentally moving and the user falling from it. Secure the ladder
once it has been firmly positioned with no movement or play in its positioning. Secure the bottom of
the ladder to ensure that it does not slip while the user is on the ladder. This could be done by tying
both stiles to an anchor point that is capable of restraining the ladder from moving. Where an anchor
point is not available a stake can be driven into the ground on the reverse side of the ladder (opposite
the side to be climbed) or stakes into the ground beside the stiles and the ladder is tied to the stakes(s).
Alternatively, a ladder bottom bracing device could be used to prevent the ladder from slipping.
Ladder bottom bracing devices can be purchased, as they are readily available, or could be self-
constructed.
Ascend the ladder to secure the top of the ladder once it has been properly positioned and secured at
the bottom. Only ascend a ladder with an unsecured top if someone else holds the ladder while the
user ascends it. Secure the ladder at the top by tying both stiles to an anchor point in the supporting
structure that is capable of restraining the ladder from moving. Assistance to hold the ladder while
using it is not needed once the top has been secured.
Make the area around the top and bottom of the ladder safe by clearing these areas of all debris,
clutter and obstructions to reduce the possibility of the user tripping and falling when getting off the
ladder. Barricade or rope off the area around the bottom of the ladder to prevent pedestrian and
vehicle traffic from accidentally bumping into and moving the ladder.
4. Climbing and Using the Ladder

The following are the major causes of ladder accidents:
 Ladders are not held, tied-off or otherwise secured.

 Slippery surfaces and unfavourable weather conditions cause workers to lose footing on rungs or
steps.
 Workers fail to grip ladders adequately when climbing up or down.
 Workers take unsafe positions on ladders (such as leaning out too far).
 Placement on poor footing or at improper angles cause ladders to slide.
 Ladders are defective.
 Ladders are toppled by high winds.
 Ladders are carelessly handled or improperly positioned near electrical lines.
The ladder may be used when it has been safely positioned and secured. Pay close attention while
climbing the ladder and keep the body centred between the stiles. Climb only the ladder’s front side
while facing it, never the rear side or facing away from it. This means that two hands and one foot or
one hand and two feet should always be in contact with the ladder. Requirements for safe climbing
on ladders:
 Personnel must be tied off with a safety harness when working 3 m or more off the ground or
when working with both hands.
 Ensure that only one person is on a single-width ladder. Only one person is allowed on each side
of a double-width ladder.
 Always face the ladder and maintain three points of contact with the ladder by keeping two hands
and one foot, or two feet and one hand on the ladder at all times.
 Grasp the rungs when climbing a ladder, not the side rails. If one foot slips on a ladder, holding
onto rungs is easier than holding onto the side rails.
 Wear protective footwear with slip-resistant soles and heels.
 Ensure that all electrical equipment used during ladder work is in good condition and properly
grounded.
 Rest frequently to avoid arm fatigue and disorientation when the work requires personnel to look
up and reach above the head.
 Drape arms over a rung and rest head against another rung or side rail if a dizzy or panicky feeling
occurs. Climb down slowly.
Safely stow all tools in the tool receptacle once the working position has been reached. Otherwise,
keep tools in a tool belt where a tool receptacle is not available. Keep both feet on the same rung
while performing the task and do not overreach. Overreaching could result in the ladder shifting and
toppling, which can be prevented by ensuring that the belt buckle is kept between the stiles at all
times.
If it becomes impossible to perform the task without overreaching, get down from the ladder and
move, position and secure it at the desired location. Never move the ladder while on it by, for
example, walking or hopping it, which should be impossible in any case if the ladder has been secured
properly.
The above also applies when a ladder needs to be extended after it has been positioned and secured.
Get down from the ladder and extent it as required, but keep the positioning and securing principles
in mind when doing so. Reposition and secure the ladder if necessary. Also keep the following in mind
while using the ladder:
 Do not overload the ladder. Use a different ladder if it appears or becomes evident that the
current ladder’s Safe Working Load (SWL) may be exceeded while being used.
 Do not do anything that could impart a sideways load on the ladder such as pushing against or
pulling on something to the side.
4.1. Preventing ladder accidents on the job site
Keep the following general ladder safety aspects in mind when using a ladder:
 Ladders are meant to be used by only one person at a time.
 Ladders should never be used in strong winds, however well secured.

 Positioned and secured ladders may never be left unattended.
 Do not climb, stand or sit above a trestle ladder’s second step from the top and a straight ladder’s
third rung from the top.
 Do not climb, stand or sit on a trestle ladder’s spreader braces or pail shelf/platform.
 Do not straddle a trestle ladder.
 Do not slide down a ladder’s stiles.
 Do not climb from one ladder to another.
 When a task must be done while standing on an extension ladder, the length of the ladder must
be such that the worker stands on a rung no higher than the fourth from the top.
 Ladders must not be erected on boxes, carts, tables, scaffold platforms, elevating work platforms
or on vehicles.
 Metal ladders or ladders with wire reinforcing must not be used in the proximity of energized
electrical conductors.
 Ladders with weakened, broken, bent or missing steps, broken or bent side rails, broken, damaged
or missing non-slip bases, or otherwise defective must not be used and must be tagged and
removed from the worksite.
 Ladders must not be used horizontally as substitutes for scaffold planks, runways or any other
service for which they have not been designed.
 Workers on a ladder must not straddle the space between the ladder and another object.
 Never straddle the space between a ladder and another object.
 Never erect ladders on boxes, carts, tables, or other unstable surfaces.
 Use fall-arrest equipment such as ladder-climbing devices or lifelines when working from long
ladders or when climbing vertical fixed ladders.
 Never use ladders horizontally as scaffold planks, runways, or any other service for which they
have not been designed.
 Stand no higher than the third or fourth rung from the top. Maintain knee contact for balance.
 Do not splice short ladders together to make a long ladder – the side rails will not be strong enough
for the extra loads.
 Do not use ladders for bracing – they are not designed for this type of loading.
 Do not set up ladders in doorways, passageways, driveways, or any other location where they can
be struck or knocked over.
 Never rest a ladder on its rungs. Ladders must rest on their side rails.
 To erect long, awkward, or heavy ladders, get help to avoid injury from overexertion.
 Before erecting, using, or working from ladders, always check for electrical hazards. Never use
aluminium ladders near live electrical equipment or wires.
4.2. Step ladder safety
As with all ladders, make sure that the step ladder is in good condition, and is right for the job to be
done. Step ladders are to be used only on clean and even surfaces.
 No work is to be done from the top two rungs of a step ladder, counting the top platform as a
rung.
 The step ladder is only to be used in the fully opened position with the spreader bars locked.
 Tops of step ladders are not to be used as support for scaffolds.
 Don't overreach while on the ladder - climb down and move the ladder over to a new position.
5. Cleaning the Ladder

A ladder must be cleaned as soon as the task it was used for has been completed or at the end of the
workday in the case of a multi-day task. Clean the ladder thoroughly when done with it or at the end
of the workday. Take care to clean off all contaminants such as paint, oil, grease and dirt. Only use
approved supplied cleaning detergents and solutions.
6. Checking the Ladder

Once the ladder has been cleaned properly it must be checked for damaged, loose and/or worn
components. The same check as before the ladder is used, is again applied at this point, to ensure
that the ladder is fit to be returned to storage. This step is critical as components may have been
damaged inadvertently or become loose or worn during use.
The ladder should be returned to storage if no defects are found. Defects are reported to the Safety
Officer immediately after they are discovered. The Safety Officer marks the ladder as “Not Safe for
Use”, ensures that the ladder is not returned to storage to prevent it from being used and takes the
necessary steps to have the ladder repaired or replaced.
Conducting post-use checks in conjunction with pre-use checks further enhances safety and reduces
the possibility of an unsafe ladder being used by half. An incident that could have been caused is
prevented by the proactive removal of the unsafe ladder from active service as soon as it becomes
known that the ladder is unsafe.
Regular inspections should be conducted on all ladders. The frequency of scheduled inspections will
depend on the frequency of use and the area/environment in which it is used.
7. Storing the Ladder

Ladders must be stored as soon as the task it was used for has been completed or at the end of the
workday in the case of a multi-day task. It is critical that ladders are stored correctly to ensure their
ongoing structural integrity and safety.
Ladder storage areas have to protect ladders from the elements. A ladder storage area should
specifically be covered, dry and well-ventilated. It should not be subjected to extreme temperatures
and has to shield ladders from direct sunlight. Good housekeeping principles dictate “a place for
everything and everything in its place”. Each ladder should therefore have its own easily reachable
allocated storage space. Keep the following in mind when preparing a ladder storage area:
 Ladders are never hung vertically from their rungs.

 Ladders are stored on their feet if stored vertically.
 Vertically stored ladders could fall over. Provide an anchor point or bracket toward the top of the
ladder, to which it can be secured to prevent it from falling over.
 Ladders are only stored horizontally when they hang from or rest on their stiles.
 Horizontally hung ladders could sag if not properly supported and are therefore stored on racks
or brackets that provide support at intervals of at least every 2m.
 Wooden ladders are susceptible to dampness and are therefore raised and kept clear of the
ground to avoid contact with damp.
 No materials should be stored on or hung from stored ladders.
The ladder may be stored once it has been cleaned, checked and cleared for storage. Take the ladder
to its storage space, taking care to not damage it or something else by bumping it against anything.
Position and secure the ladder according to its storage arrangement to ensure that it is in it right place
and does not fall over or off its rack/bracket.
Standard Operating Procedure - Welding
This SOP covers both electric arc welding as well as gas welding and cutting. This document covers
both electric arc welding as well as gas welding and cutting.
Many welding operations produce toxic fumes and gases. It is extremely important that the health
hazards of the materials worked on are known and that the appropriate precautions are taken. This
document covers safety procedures specific to welding and cutting.
NOTE: It may be necessary to consult other sources for the necessary safety practices to be followed
when working with potentially toxic metals and metal alloys.
The supervisor of the person doing the welding or other responsible person shall have employees who
handle and use welding equipment designated and trained. The supervisor or responsible person shall
ensure that necessary supplies are available to prevent accidents from occurring. The following
outlines both general procedures to be followed during all welding and cutting operations as well as
specific precautions for electric arc and gas welding.
1. Prepare for cutting/welding task

Before welding/cutting task can be started, the Supervisor must ensure that the appropriate and
required preparations have been made.
1.1. Obtain a work permit
One of the preparations that will always be required in relation to cutting and welding activities is the
obtaining of a work permit. The welding/cutting task may not be commenced before the required
permit has been issued and all of the precautions required in terms of the permit have been taken
and confirmed by the permit issuer.
The Supervisor must take care to request, in addition to the hot work permit, any other permits that
may be required for the task, such as a confined space entry permit if the task is to be performed in a
confined space.
1.2. Fire prevention and protection
Fires are real and ever-present risks when hot work is being performed. Before the cutting/welding
task is started, the work team must remove as much as possible, but preferably all, flammable and
combustible material from the job site.
The fire prevention precautions required by the work permit must also be taken into consideration
and the required actions taken to reduce the risk of a fire breaking out as far as possible. In addition
to the measures taken to prevent fires from occurring, the work team must ensure that they are ready
to react to a fire if one does break out.
The work team must consider the fires that could potentially break out at the job site as a result of
the hot work and ensure that the required fire-fighting equipment and other relevant fire protection
measures are available to allow them to react swiftly and effectively to any fires that break out.
2. Electric Arc Welding

Never carry out welding on those containers, compartments, tanks or pipework containing
combustible/flammable fluid as it poses high risk of fire or explosion, in particular if the
container/pipework is under pressure. Under the immense heat of the electric arc, the
combustible/flammable fluid may vaporise and splash the fluid out as fine aerosol under pressure,
forming flammable mixture with air.
When carrying out welding work during maintenance or dismantling of plant and equipment, special
attention has to be given to the fire and explosion hazard caused by the combustible/ flammable fluid,
vapour and residue remained in the containers, compartments, tanks, pipework, etc. of the plant and
equipment.
The points to note in providing a safe working environment for manual electric arc welding operations
include:
 Welding equipment, cables, and other equipment should be suitably placed to avoid imposing
hazards, e.g. electric shock, tripping, etc., on the welding workers and other workers;
 Proper warning signs and notices should be displayed at the welding equipment and the
workplace as appropriate to alert the welding workers the DOs and DON’Ts, e.g. use of personal
protective equipment, fire hazard, etc.;
 The welding worker and other workers in the vicinity of welding workplace should be protected
from the heat, radiation, sparks and welding spatters by suitable screens and shields; and
 Any water ponding, flooding or dripping/splashing of water in the welding workplace and its
vicinity should be avoided.
Personal protective equipment should be used to provide the following types of protection:
 electric shock protection;

 eye and face protection;
 respiratory protection;
 skin and body protection; and
 hearing protection.
2.1. Welding equipment
To ensure the safety of operators, the electric arc welding equipment should be well designed and
constructed and properly maintained. The following are crucial:
 Only proper and safe welding equipment should be selected for and used in the welding
operations. It should ensure that the current rating chosen is adequate to handle the job to avoid
overheating of welding equipment and other problems. Welding equipment should not be
operated above the rated current rating and the corresponding rated duty cycles as specified by
the manufacturer. Furthermore it should not be used for applications other than those specified
by the manufacturer.
 The welding equipment should be provided with a robust steel casing for mechanical protection.
The steel casing should be properly and effectively earthed by connecting with a separate earth
wire of suitable size to the power supply source.
 The welding cables should be properly placed and protected to avoid any accidental damage to
the insulation cover of the cables, such as excessive bending of the cables and passing the cables
over sharp objects. The cables should also be chemical resistant, and be protected against
damages by oil and grease, UV light and ageing.
 Proper cable connectors should be used for extension of the cables. The maximum rating of the
welding current set should match with the welding electrode in use. Applying excessive current
over the rating of the electrode should be avoided.
 In situations where the risk of getting an electric shock is high, e.g. welding in a confined
conductive workplace, staying on the work-piece to weld, etc., apart from the control measures,
it is strongly recommended to fix an automatic voltage regulator in the welding transformer to
reduce the open-circuit no-load voltage of the transformer output to less than 50V a.c.
 The welding equipment should be regularly inspected, maintained and tested by competent
personnel, and any damaged equipment should be clearly labelled as such and taken out of service
immediately until repair can be undertaken. The inspection and maintenance records of the
welding equipment should be kept properly.
2.2. Pre-use equipment check
The pre-use equipment check includes the following:
a) ensure that the welding equipment including the welding transformer, the welding cables, the
electrode holder and their connections/ terminations are in good conditions;
b) ensure that all welding equipment are properly connected up;
c) ensure that all necessary cable and earthing connections/terminations are firmly made and
properly insulated; and
d) ensure that all necessary protective equipment including personal protective equipment required
for the welding operation, are available and in good conditions.
For the case of MIG welding and TIG welding, ensure that all gas cylinders and associated instruments
including pressure gauges, regulators and gas hoses are in good working conditions.
2.3. Safety during the welding task
The following safe work practices should be followed to control electric shock hazard during manual
electric arc welding operation:
 During the welding operation, the welding worker should always keep the hands and the body
dry.
 Welding workers should avoid making direct contact with any exposed conductive parts of the
electrode holder, the welding electrode clamped on the holder and the exposed conductive part
of the work-piece with their bare hands or bodies.
 The welding transformer should be placed right at the welding area or its close vicinity, such that
in case of need or accident, the welding transformer can be switched off quickly to cut off the
power source. In general, the welding transformer should not be located at another room or
another floor away from the welding area.
 Welding workers, supervisors and safety personnel should know clearly the location of the
welding transformer. The welding transformer should bear clear indications on its switch and on
the “ON” and “OFF” positions.
 When the welding operation is to be suspended temporarily to take breaks for rest, tea or meal,
the welding transformer should be switched off, with the remaining welding electrode on the
electrode holder properly disposed of before leaving the welding area.
 The electrode holder should be properly placed, preferably on a container made of insulating
material, to avoid any accidental contact with the conductive live part, in particular when the
welding electrode is in place.
 When carrying out welding work at high level, the workers should stay on a safe working platform,
or if it is not practicable to do so, be wearing suitable personal protective equipment to prevent
fall. Safety measures so adopted should be able to prevent the worker from falling down even
when he unfortunately gets an electric shock.
2.4. After-use equipment check
After the welding operation, the worker should:
a) properly shut down the power supply to the welding equipment;

b) disassemble all welding equipment connections;
c) check that the welding equipment including the welding cables are in good conditions and ready
for future use;
d) return all welding equipment and personal protective equipment to the store;
e) report to the supervisor or Safety Officer should there be defects found in the welding equipment,
protective equipment and the personal protective equipment; and
f) ensure that the work-piece is cooled down and no hot slag, globules of molten metal or other
similar hot residues remain before leaving the welding area.
3. Gas Welding and Cutting

3.1. Pre-use equipment check
Notwithstanding that equipment are regularly checked for performance, it is necessary to check that
equipment and safety devices are correctly installed and in good working condition each time before
starting a welding or cutting operation. Pre-use equipment check includes:
a) ensuring that each gas cylinder is fitted with regulator of the correct type and is correctly
connected to the blowpipe;
b) checking for defective or damaged pressure gauges and replacing or repairing the gauges as
appropriate; ensuring that there is no gas leakage in the gas supply lines, such as by pressure test,
or by checking hose connections for leakage using soapy water;
c) checking for defective or damaged gas hoses such as cuts, cracks, abrasion, animal bites or
hardening of the gas hose material due to aging, and replacing or repairing the hose as
appropriate; and
d) ensuring that the routing of the gas hoses will not cause severe bending of the hose or will not be
run over by other heavy equipment so as to prevent gas flow being obscured or hose being
damaged.
3.2. Perform cutting/welding task
Before beginning the task, the Operator must perform a quick visual inspection of the cylinders,
equipment and attachments to ensure that -
 the correct gas(es) for the application are being used;

 the correct equipment and attachments (that is, regulators, hoses, couplings and torches) are
being used;
 equipment and attachments (that is, regulators, hoses, couplings and torches) are in good working
order and functioning properly;
 all valves are in good condition and open and close properly and do not require excessive force to
be opened/closed; and
 all couplings seal properly and there are no leaks.
The Operator may only begin with the task once the above has been confirmed and everything has
been found to be in order.
3.3. Open the valves
Opening the valves correctly and in the correct sequence considerably reduces the possibility of an
incident while the valve is being opened. Cylinder valves must be opened slowly with the mouth of
the valve pointing away from all persons at the job site. Slowly opening main cylinder valves eliminates
the possibility of compression heating causing an explosion within the regulator.
Wrenches or hammers must never be used to open or close hand wheel-type cylinder valves. Cylinders
with frozen/locked valves of this type that cannot be operated by hand, must be returned to the
supplier.
NOTE: Gas must remain shut off at the main cylinder valve while not being used. The main cylinder
valves must be closed as soon as the task has been completed and left closed until it is used again.
3.4. Correct light-up sequence
Most flashbacks are preventable if the correct lighting up and shutdown procedures are carried out.
The following sequence must be used when lighting up:
 Check that there is sufficient gas in both cylinders;

 Open both cylinder valves with the key supplied by the manufacturer;
 Set the fuel gas regulator pressure in the following sequence:
o Open the fuel gas valve on the blowpipe,
o Adjust the pressure regulating screw until the gauge reads correctly,
o Close the blowpipe fuel gas valve;
 Set the oxygen regulator pressure according to the same sequence;
 Open the fuel gas valve on the blowpipe and allow the gas to flow for a few seconds to purge the
hose of air or any mixture of gases;
 Close the valve;
 Open the oxygen valve on the blowpipe and purge the oxygen hose of air or any mixture of gases;
 Point the torch away from other persons and the cylinders;
 Light the fuel gas with a friction or electric lighter ONLY, never use cigarette lighters or matches;
 Adjust the valve as required – e.g. until the flame stops smoking if acetylene is being used;
 Open the oxygen valve(s) on the blowpipe gradually and adjust to the desired flame.
NOTE: Never purge hoses in a confined space. Hoses must be purged every time before lighting up,
such as following tea/lunch breaks and between tasks.
3.5. Correct shutdown sequence
The following sequence must be used when shutting down:
 Close the fuel gas valve on the blowpipe;

 Close the oxygen valve(s) on the blowpipe;
 Close both cylinder valves;
 Open blowpipe oxygen valve(s) to release the pressure in the hose and regulator and when both
gauge needles have fallen to zero, close the oxygen valve(s);
 Wind back the regulator pressure adjusting screw to release the pressure on the regulator
diaphragm;
 Repeat the above steps with the fuel gas valve and regulator.
3.6. Prevent flashbacks
Flashbacks are the unintentional and uncontrolled burning back of gas through the blowpipe mixer
that result from the presence of oxygen and a fuel gas in the same supply line. All flashbacks damage
the equipment to some extent; serious flashbacks, or several minor ones, will make equipment unsafe
for continued use if it is not properly overhauled.
Many flashbacks go unrecognised. The only sign that a flashback has occurred is often a loud crack,
followed by a puff of carbon from the welding tip when relighting. This carbon, which is produced by
the decomposition of the fuel gas, is proof that a flashback has occurred.
The least damage a flashback can do is to deposit carbon in the torch valves, which can affect their
operation and lead to more serious flashbacks. If, as is likely, the flame travels some distance along
the hoses, the bore will suffer damage and be weakened. Small particles may break loose and lodge
in the valve or mixer. Serious flashbacks can cause substantial and expensive damage to the regulator
and may even pass right through it and into the cylinder, causing a cylinder fire or explosion.
The most common causes of flashbacks are:
 Incorrect pressure, resulting in the gas flow rate exceeding the capacity of the cutting nozzle or
welding tips. The gas at the higher pressure then flows into the lower pressure line. This can occur
either if incorrect pressures are used, or if incompatible items of equipment are connected
together;
 A leak from the regulator, hose or connections results in a drop of the gas pressure in the line, and
gas from the higher pressure line back feeds into it;
 Leaking valves allow gas to seep through and mix by diffusion when the equipment is not in use,
such as during breaks and overnight;
 Lighting up with both torch control valves open, but one cylinder closed;
 When an oxygen cylinder becomes empty, the fuel gas may back-feed into the oxygen line,
regulator and cylinder. If the regulator is then placed on a new oxygen cylinder and the cylinder
valve is opened too rapidly, the pressure can increase the temperature of the mixed gas enough
to ignite it.
The use of flashback arresters can virtually eliminate this risk of fires and explosions. The fitting of
arresters is recommended, especially in situations where the Operator is not working close to the
cylinder control valves.
Possible consequences of not arresting a flashback range from a burst hose to the bomb effect of a
cylinder exploding. The functions of flashback arresters are to -
 protect against sudden or slow reverse of gas flow, by means of a non-return valve;
 arrest a flashback and extinguish the flame;
 protect against leakage and ignition of unburned gases after a flashback by automatically shutting
off the gas supply;
 show when the arrester operated, by means of an indicator;
 vent off excess pressure in hoses through a safety valve;
 shut off the gas supply if the arrester inlet pressure falls below the outlet pressure due to a leak
in any of the supply equipment.
For total protection, arresters are fitted to both gas lines, one adjacent to the regulator outlet and one
at the blowpipe. Arresters are not fitted at the blowpipe end of a hose if the blowpipe has an
integrated arrester.
3.7. Dealing with a flashback incident
Failure to use the correct nozzle size or, more often, failure to set the correct gas pressure can result
in a flashback or 'backfire' which, if no flashback arrester is fitted, could travel into the cylinder where
it may cause internal heating or even explosive decomposition of the acetylene.
To deal with a flashback:
 Close the valves on the blowpipe/torch (oxygen first);

 Close both cylinder valves;
 Check surface of acetylene/LPG cylinder with a bare hand to detect local heating, if any;
 If heating is detected, treat as the cylinder as though it has been in a fire, and evacuate the area -
o 100m from the cylinder for involved employees,
o 300m from the cylinder for all other persons,
o and activate the emergency plan;
 If no localised heating is detected on the acetylene/LPG cylinder, unwind the pressure adjustment
screws on both regulators;
 Check the torch nozzle and plunge it into hot water to cool it if it is found to be hot;
 Confirm that the nozzle is undamaged:
o Remove flashback arresters and regulators, examine them for burns and replace them if
necessary;
 Light up according to the procedure recommended by the flashback arrester supplier;
 Repeat the above procedure if a flashback occurs again and, if necessary, replace the
blowpipe/torch and the nozzle.
3.8. General gas cutting and welding safety tips
The following items are general safety tips that must be taken into consideration when gas cutting or
welding is being performed:
 Inspect equipment for leaks at all couplings with an approved leak test solution.
 Inspect hoses for leaks and damage.
 Replace damaged hoses.
 Protect hoses and cylinders from sparks, flames and hot metal.
 Use a flint lighter to ignite the flame.
 Stand to the side (away from the regulators) when opening cylinder valves.
 Open cylinder valves very slowly to keep sudden high pressures from exploding the regulators.
 Only open the acetylene cylinder valve 1/4 - 3/4 turn and leave the wrench in place so that the
cylinder can be closed quickly in an emergency.
 Open and light acetylene first, then open and adjust oxygen to a neutral flame.
 Close the acetylene torch valve first when shutting off the torch (a "pop" might occur as the
oxygen "blows out" the flame, but this eliminates the possibility of the flame burning up the
acetylene line).
 When finished, close cylinder valves, bleed the lines to take pressure off regulators, neatly coil
hoses and replace equipment.
 Have a fire extinguisher readily accessible at the welding site.
 Never fill an oxygen cylinder with compressed air from an oil-lubricated compressor, because
residual oil in the air will be deposited in the cylinder. If the cylinder then goes back into the pool,
and is refilled with oxygen, an explosion will occur. Any oxygen cylinder, regulator or hose that
has been used with compressed air must be downgraded and not used for oxygen again.
 Keep hoses and other equipment from obstructing passageways, ladders and stairways. Where
hoses are required to go over passageways, they should be protected from scuffing.
 Never wrap hoses around cylinders or regulators, as a leak or flashback could cause even more
damage.
Standard Operating Procedure – Vessels under Pressure
Compressed gases are stored in heavy-walled metal cylinders designed, produced and tested for use
with compressed gases. Cylinders are made in a wide variety of sizes and shapes. They range from
small lecture bottles, often used for demonstration purposes, to large cylinders over 3m long.
Cylinders are permanently marked, typically on the shoulder or the top surface of its neck.
Compressed gas cylinders must be connected only to regulators and equipment designed for the gas
in the cylinder. Since connecting the wrong equipment can be dangerous, a number of different
standard cylinder valve outlets are available for different classes of gas. For example, these standard
connections prevent the valve connection for a flammable gas from fitting the connections for an
incompatible gas, such as an oxidising gas. Most compressed gas cylinders have valve caps or some
other method of protecting the valve from damage during handling and transportation. A dust cap
may be placed over the valve outlet itself to help keep it clean.
Hazards associated with compressed gases include oxygen displacement, fires, explosions, and toxic
gas exposures, as well as the physical hazards associated with high pressure systems. Special storage,
use, and handling precautions are necessary in order to control these hazards. Substitution can be the
best way to avoid or reduce a hazard. But it is not always easy or even possible to find a less hazardous
substitute for a particular compressed gas used for a certain job. Speak to the chemical supplier to
find out if safer substitutes are available. For example, in some cases, methylacetylene-propadiene
(MAPP) gas, propylene, propane or mixtures of liquefied petroleum gas can be substituted for
acetylene as fuel gases for cutting, welding and brazing. These gases are more stable and can be stored
in normal cylinders.
Obtain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for all possible substitutes. Find out about all of the
hazards (health, fire, corrosivity, chemical reactivity) of these materials before making any changes.
1. Cylinder safety devices

Most cylinders have one or more safety-relief devices. These devices can prevent rupture of the
cylinder if internal pressure builds up to levels exceeding design limits. Pressure can become
dangerously high if a cylinder is exposed to fire or heat, including high storage temperatures.
There are three types of safety-relief devices. Each relieves excessive gas pressures in a different way:
 Safety- or Pressure-Relief Valves: These valves are usually a part of the cylinder. They are normally
held closed by a spring. The force holding the valve closed is set according to the type of gas in the
cylinder. The valve opens if the cylinder pressure exceeds the set safety limit. Gas is released until
the cylinder pressure drops back to the safety limit. The valve then closes and retains the
remaining gas in the cylinder.
 Rupture Discs (also known as frangible or bursting discs): These discs are usually made from metal.
They burst or rupture at a certain pressure, releasing the gas in the cylinder. The bursting pressure
is designed so that the disc ruptures before the cylinder test pressure is reached. These devices
cannot be reclosed, so the entire contents of the cylinder will be released.
 Fusible Plugs (also called fuse or melt plugs): Temperature, not pressure, activates fusible plugs.
These safety devices are used where heat could initiate an explosive chemical reaction. A
pressure-relief valve or rupture disc acts too slowly and too late to prevent rupture of the cylinder
if an explosive reaction has already begun. The fusible plug releases the gas before the hazardous
reaction can begin. Fusible plugs are made of metals that melt at low temperatures. For example,
acetylene cylinders have a fusible plug which melts at about 100°C. This temperature is safely
below the temperature at which hazardous polymerisation may occur.
Not all compressed gas cylinders have safety devices. Some gases are so toxic that their release
through a safety device would be hazardous. Cylinders for these gases are built to withstand higher
pressures than normal cylinders. When these "toxic gas" cylinders are involved in a fire, the area must
be evacuated.
2. Pre-use Activities
Choose the least hazardous material and process that can do the job effectively and safely. Well-
designed and well-maintained ventilation systems remove gases from the workplace and reduce their
hazards. The amount and type of ventilation needed depends on such things as the type of task, the
kind and amount of materials used, and the size and layout of the work area. Assess the specific ways
your workplace stores, handles, uses and disposes of its compressed gases. An assessment can reveal
if existing ventilation controls and other hazard control methods are adequate.
2.1. Emergency preparedness

Be aware of potential hazards and develop plans to cover possible emergencies. Use emergency drills
to practice implementing these plans. Inform the medical services, fire departments, and other
emergency response organisations of the gases in use so that they, too, will be prepared in the event
of an emergency.
3. Use of Compressed Gasses and Pressure Vessels

Compressed gas cylinders should be handled only by those familiar with the hazards and who are
trained in the proper handling techniques. Cylinders containing compressed gases are heavy and
awkward to move. Improper handling of compressed gas cylinders can result in sprains, strains, falls,
bruises, or broken bones. Other hazards such as fire, explosion, chemical burns, poisoning, and cold
burns could occur if gases accidentally escape from the cylinder due to mishandling.
Read the label on the cylinder and identify the contents before using. If the label is illegible or missing,
return the cylinder to the supplier. Don't rely on stencilling or colour of the cylinder. Do not use a
cylinder with unidentified contents. When opening the valve on a cylinder containing an irritating or
toxic gas, the user should position the cylinder with the valve pointing away from them and warn those
working nearby.
There are four standard types of cylinder valve outlets to prevent interchanges of gas handling
equipment between incompatible gases. Use only the proper equipment for discharging a particular
gas from its cylinder. Whether a compressed gas is a liquefied, non-liquefied or dissolved gas, the gas
supplier can give the best advice on the most suitable gas discharge equipment and the safest way to
use it for a specific job.
3.1. Receive/Transport cylinders

Inspect all incoming cylinders before storing to ensure they are undamaged and properly labelled. Do
not accept delivery of defective cylinders. Be sure they are not giving off odours, visible fumes or
hissing sounds. Check that the cylinder was last tested within the required time (usually 5 or 10 years,
but some containers may be as low as 3 years or as long as 12 years).
Also check that the cylinder labels are intact and that they match other identifying markings on the
cylinder. Do not rely on cylinder colour to identify the gas. Different suppliers may use different
colours for cylinders of the same gas. In addition, colours appear different under artificial lights and
some people are colour blind. Gases that cannot be clearly identified should not be used.
Call compressed gases by the name on the supplier label. This reduces confusion, promotes
recognition of the hazards involved and precautions to take, and can prevent accidental use of the
wrong gas. If oxygen is called "air," someone who wants air to run a tool may use oxygen with possible
serious results. Leave the valve cap securely in place until the cylinder is to be used. Inspect the
cylinder valve by looking through the ports in the valve cap. Do not accept dirty, rusted or otherwise
damaged valves and fixtures.
Always transport cylinders with valve caps or other valve protection in place. Pulling cylinders by their
valve caps, rolling them on their sides or dragging or sliding them can cause damage. Rolling cylinders
on their bottom edge may be acceptable for short distances. Never lift cylinders with magnets or chain
or wire rope slings. Transport cylinders on specially-built hand carts or trolleys or other devices
designed for this. All transport devices should have some way of securing cylinders to prevent them
from falling.
3.2. Storage
Store compressed gas cylinders separately, away from processing and handling areas, and from
incompatible materials. Separate storage can minimise personal injury and damage in case of fires,
spills or leaks. Many compressed gases can undergo dangerous reactions if they come in contact with
incompatible materials (gases, liquids or solids), so store them apart from each other. For example,
store oxidising gases at least 6 metres away from fuel gases or other combustible materials, or
separate them with an approved fire wall. Check the reactivity information and storage requirements
sections of the MSDS for details about which materials are incompatible with a particular compressed
gas.
Store compressed gas cylinders in dry, cool areas, out of direct sunlight and away from steam pipes,
boilers or other heat sources. Follow the gas supplier's recommendations for storage and use
temperatures. To prevent excessive pressure build-up, never expose cylinders to temperatures above
52°C. Do not subject them to temperatures below -29°C, unless they are designed for this. Cylinders
that become frozen to a surface can be freed by using warm water (less than 52°C). Never apply direct
heat to a cylinder.
If compressed gas cylinders are stored outside, use a well-drained, securely fenced area. Keep them
on a raised concrete pad or non-combustible rack. Protect cylinders from the weather and do not
allow them to stand directly on wet soil as this can cause corrosion.
Indoor storage areas must have walls, floors and fittings made of suitable materials. For example, use
non-combustible building materials in storage areas for oxidising gas and corrosion-resistant materials
in storage areas for corrosive gas. Make sure floors are level and protect cylinders from dampness.
Avoid overcrowding in storage areas or storing cylinders in out-of-the-way locations.
Always chain or securely restrain cylinders in an upright position to a wall, rack or other solid structure
wherever they are stored, handled or used. Securing each cylinder individually is best. Stacking of
groups of cylinders together offers some protection, but if this is done improperly, the entire group or
individual cylinders could fall.
Store compressed gas cylinders in areas which are:
 Well-ventilated and dry.

 Fire-resistant and supplied with suitable firefighting equipment including sprinklers, where
appropriate.
 Away from electrical circuits and ignition sources such as sparks, flames or hot surfaces.
 Accessible at all times, but away from elevators, staircases or main traffic routes where cylinders
may be dangerous obstacles.
 Labelled with suitable warning signs.
Always store full cylinders separately from empty cylinders. Handle "empty" cylinders safely: leave a
slight positive pressure in them. Keeping a positive pressure in an "empty" compressed gas cylinder
helps to prevent back flow or suck-back. This back flow is the drawing-back into the cylinder of
contaminants or moist air from a higher pressure system or the atmosphere.
Keep the valves on all "empty" cylinders closed. This practice maintains a positive pressure in them.
"Empty" cylinders with open valves can "breathe". Temperature increases or drops in atmospheric
pressure can force gas out of the open valve of an empty cylinder. This release could result in
hazardous conditions depending on the gas and how much is forced out. Temperature drops or
increases in atmospheric pressure can cause air to be drawn in through the open valve. Air could cause
a serious contamination and corrosion problem inside the cylinder. When a compressed gas cylinder
is "empty," handle it as though it is full since it does contain gas. Always:
 Close the cylinder valve before removing the gas discharge equipment.
 Clearly mark or label the cylinder "empty.”
 Place the cylinder in a storage area separate from that used for full cylinders.
 Keep incompatible materials away from the cylinder.
 Notify the gas supplier if the cylinder or any part of it is damaged or defective, contaminated, or
may have been exposed to a possibly hazardous condition such as a fire or electric arc.
Take care when scrapping unserviceable cylinders. Before scrapping, first destroy the cylinder as a
pressure vessel. Contact the gas supplier for advice on scrapping and disposing of unserviceable
cylinders.
3.3. Compressed gas equipment precautions

 Always follow the correct procedures for assembling and disassembling compressed gas
equipment.
 Check that all the connections are clean and do not leak.
 Never use old clips or twisted wire for hose connections. Hose-whip, which can also occur when a
hose is cut or torn, may be prevented by using whip-check protection (also known as break-away
protection), such as a short length of cable or chain attached to the hose.
 When moving cylinders, securely fasten them to a suitable cylinder transporting device. At the
site, chain or otherwise secure the cylinder in place. Remove the valve cap only after the cylinder
has been safely installed then check the cylinder valve and fixture. Remove any dirt or rust. Grit,
dirt, oil or dirty water can cause gas leaks if they get into the cylinder valve or gas connection.
 Never open a damaged valve; contact your gas supplier for advice.
 Never use homemade adaptors or force connections between the cylinder valve outlet and gas
handling equipment.
 In general, do not lubricate any cylinder valves, fittings, or regulator threads, or apply jointing
compounds and tape. Use only lubricants and sealants recommended by the gas supplier.
 Cylinders stored in cold areas may have frozen valves. Use only warm water to thaw the valve or
bring the cylinder into a warm area and allow it to thaw at room temperature.
 Use only recommended keys or hand-wheels to open valves. Never use longer keys or modify keys
to increase their leverage. Avoid using even the correct key if it is badly worn. Do not use pipe
wrenches or similar tools on hand-wheels. Any of these practices could easily damage the valve
seat or spindle.
 Always open valves on all gas discharge equipment slowly. Rapid opening of valves results in rapid
compression of the gas in the high-pressure passages leading to the seats. The rapid compression
can lead to temperatures high enough to burn out the regulator and valve seats. Many incidents
involving oxidising gases result from burned out regulator and valve seats, usually caused by
opening valves too quickly.
 Do not use excessive force when opening cylinder valves - use no more than three quarters of a
turn if possible. If a problem develops, the valve can then be closed quickly. Leave keys on
cylinders when valves are open so the valve can be closed quickly in an emergency. However,
some cylinder valves, such as oxygen valves, have double seating. These valves should be fully
opened, otherwise they may leak.
 Do not use excessive force when opening or closing a cylinder valve. When closing, turn it just
enough to stop the gas flow completely. Never force the valve shut.
 Close cylinder valves when the cylinder is not actually in use. Do not stop the gas flow from a
cylinder by just backing off on the regulator. Regulators can develop seat leaks, allowing pressure
to build up in equipment attached to the regulator. Also if the cylinder valve is left open, foreign
matter can enter the cylinder if the cylinder pressure drops lower than the pressure in attached
equipment. Close the cylinder valve first and then close the regulator.
 Use automatic pressure regulators to reduce gas pressure from the high levels in the cylinder to
safe levels for a particular job. There are two basic types of automatic pressure regulators: single-
stage, and double- or two-stage.
 Only use oxygen for its intended purpose. Never use it to purge pipelines or to provide ventilation.
Freshening the air with oxygen may make people more comfortable, but it also enriches the
oxygen content in the area which can quickly create a major fire hazard. Serious incidents have
occurred when oxygen was used to run tools designed for compressed air. High oxygen pressure
can cause the lubricant in the tool to explode.
 Use the smallest practical cylinder size for a particular job.
 Do not keep cylinders longer than the supplier recommends.
 Compressed gas cylinders are mainly shipping containers; they are built to be as light as possible
while remaining safe and durable. Do not drop cylinders or otherwise allow them to strike each
other. Rough handling, including using cylinders as hammers or as rollers to move equipment, can
seriously damage them.
 Do not strike an electric arc on a cylinder; arc burns can make the metal brittle and weaken the
cylinder.
 Never tamper with cylinders in any way. Do not repaint them, change markings or identification,
or interfere with valve threads or safety devices.
 Apart from the fact that it is illegal, it can be dangerous for non-specialists to refill cylinders or to
change their contents; explosions, cylinder contamination or corrosion can result.
 Keep the amount of compressed gases in storage as small as possible.
 Inspect storage areas regularly for any deficiencies such as damaged or leaking cylinders and poor
housekeeping; allow only trained, authorised people into storage areas.
4. Use of Compressed Air Systems

Compressed air is a versatile and powerful energy source. Most site compressors deliver air at
approximately 110 psig. Air compression is accomplished by pulling in air from the atmosphere and
decreasing its volume while simultaneously increasing its pressure. The compressed air is then stored
either in a holding tank or released into a pressure system, ready for work, e.g. to power a variety of
pneumatic tools and machinery.
Compressed air is used in a variety of applications throughout industry. It can be used to power hand
tools, to provide pneumatic power to plant and equipment and to activate automatic guarding
systems.
Compressed air installations will vary in their complexity. The simplest will be small portable
equipment, which can be moved from one location to another. The more complex installations will be
fixed and will supply air to a range of applications and incorporate numerous components such as
multiple compressors, air dryers, shut-off valves, actuators, filters, drain valves, receivers, pressure
regulators, control valves and pipe runs.
Compressed air systems include air compressors (or pumps), receivers (pressure vessels) that may be
stand-alone or contained within the compressor unit, water traps, and reticulation such as valves and
hoses supplying compressed air-powered tools and equipment. These systems represent a number of
hazards during installation and use:
 Failure of pressure vessels or pipes, flexible hoses and tools causing a sudden release of pressure;
 Incorrect installation or inadequate pressure rating of pipes;
 Stressed joints;
 Incorrect work methods, e.g.:
o Pressure not bled before working on reticulation,
o Checks not made before pressurisation,
o Uncoupling hoses under pressure, and
o Not fitting clips or safety chains;
 Unsafe acts, e.g. not wearing the appropriate PPE while cleaning with compressed air;
 Contamination of the atmosphere by oils exhausted in compressed air;
 Oil spillage into soil;
 Noise.
Ensure that, as far as reasonably practicable, all compressors are “sound-reduced” models fitted with
properly lined and sealed acoustic covers that must be kept closed whenever the machines are in use.
4.1. Air receivers

Air receivers are tanks used for compressed air storage and are recommended to be in all compressed
air systems. An air receiver acts as a reservoir for the storage of compressed air and absorbs pulsations
in the discharge line from the compressor. A steady flow of air is thus provided to the service line.
Any moisture or oil present in the air as it carries over from after-coolers to the air receiver will be
separated out in there.
Ensure that the air receiver is of sufficient capacity, or that the differential pressure switch setting is
wide enough to avoid short cycling of an air compressor, i.e., frequent start and stop. Use only
hydrostatically tested and approved tanks as air receiver. Drain the air receiver regularly to remove
the condensate accumulated in order to avoid water being carried over to the down-stream air supply
line and to prevent corrosion.
4.2. Air hoses
 Use an air hose rated for the maximum compressor pressure and flow, properly labelled and with
the direction of air flow correctly labelled with an arrow.
 Do not allow hoses to be run over by vehicles or stored improperly – cracks or weak spots are not
only wasteful, but also dangerous to the operator.
 Flexible air hoses must be kept as short as possible to minimise tripping hazards and to reduce
hose whipping action in the event of a hose failing.
 Make sure that the hose and compressor discharge fittings match and always use the safety pin
to prevent the fittings from disconnecting – if a pressurised air hose breaks loose, “hose-whip”
could injure workers and damage equipment.
 Depressurise the hose before disconnecting.
4.3. Air tools
 Inspect all air tools to ensure proper operation and make sure all components are tight and that
no parts are missing or damaged.
 Check air pressure to ensure proper working pressure of the tool.
 Never use sockets or extensions that are not specifically designed to be used with impact
wrenches.
 Always use the correct air tool lubricant to prolong equipment life.
4.4. Air receivers and compressors precautions

 Do not exceed the maximum allowable working pressures of air receivers except when being
tested.
 Install pressure vessels so that all drains, hand holes, and manholes are easily accessible; do not
bury them underground or locate them in inaccessible places. Ensure that there is sufficient access
to allow for visual inspection all around the body of the receiver.
 Locate pressure vessels, used to store compressed air, in a cool place to facilitate condensation of
moisture and oil vapours.
 Place air receivers in a clean and well-ventilated location, set off the ground on concrete blocks or
on a suitable foundation, as the dampness on the ground causes excessive rusting and corrosion
around the bottom.
 Ensure that air tanks and receivers have inspection openings, and tanks over 1m in diameter must
have a manhole.
 The intake and exhaust pipes of small tanks, similar to those used in garages, should be made
removable for interior inspections.
 A readily accessible drain valve must be available on the lowest point of every air receiver to
remove accumulations of oil and water.
 Do not allow unauthorised persons to alter or modify any tank or receiver.
 Allow only qualified personnel that have the necessary permit to repair air tanks, and ensure that
all work is done according to established safety standards.
 Protect the receiver with paint and keep it away from the hazardous environment such as hot
furnace, dripping water pipes etc., to prevent it from potential damage and accelerated
deterioration.
 Provide adequate cooling of intercoolers and after-coolers to restrict the operating temperature.
 Clean internally and externally and use specially compounded compressor oil of the correct
characteristics.
 Incorporate a suitable temperature-fusible plug designed to melt and blow at a temperature a

little lower than the closed flash point of the lubrication oil.
 Install a stop valve between the receiver and each piece of stationary equipment and also at each
outlet to which an air hose may be attached.
 Never use compressed air for quick cleaning and as a casual way to remove dirt and dust – even
the smallest piece of debris such as metal shavings, wood chips or gravel flying through the air at
this velocity can be dangerous. Use a vacuum system rather than compressed air for cleaning
whenever possible – vacuuming causes less dust and other particles than compressed air.
 The seemingly simple practice of using compressed air for "cleaning yourself off" can cause
permanent injury or even death. Air at high pressure can break an ear drum, blow out an eyeball
or penetrate the surface of the skin and cause a fatal embolism.
4.5. Operational do’s and don'ts:
 Keep other people clear of the compressor before starting it and during operation.
 Never operate air compressors at speeds faster than the manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Protect the hose – it can present a tripping hazard so it must be kept out of the way and protected
from being damaged – especially from the tools being used.
 Never use a hose that shows signs of damage.
 Never use compressed air for quick cleaning and as a casual way to remove dirt and dust – even
the smallest piece of debris such as metal shavings, wood chips or gravel flying through the air at
this velocity can be dangerous.
 Use a vacuum system rather than compressed air for cleaning whenever possible – vacuuming
causes less dust and other particles than compressed air.
 Compressor motor covers must be kept closed when the motor is running.
 Quick-disconnect fittings must be installed on flexible air hoses in high fire hazard areas so that
the hoses can be disconnected quickly; preventing whipping actions that might not only cause
injury and damage but will also stoke a fire.
 The pressure relief valve must always be directed away from work areas to reduce noise.
 Never leave a running machine unattended – turn the engine off and remove the key to prevent
unauthorised use.
 Compressed air must not be used to transfer flammable liquids – static electricity build-up can
discharge and ignite the liquid.
 Compressed air must not be used to empty containers – the container could rupture due to
excessive internal pressure.
 Direct air away from the eyes and do not point compressed air lines at people for any reason.
4.6. Storage
If the compressor will not be used for a period of two weeks or more, the operator must prepare the
compressor as follows for storage:
 Set the ON/OFF button to OFF.
 Turn the regulator counter-clockwise to set the delivery pressure to zero.

 Disconnect hoses, air tools and accessories.
 Pull the safety drain valve ring to bleed excess pressure from tank.
 Drain water from the tank by opening the drain valve on the bottom of the tank.
 Close the drain valve when all the water has been released.
 Store the compressor in its normal operating position in a cool, protected area.
Note: Water will condense in the air compressor tank. Water left in the tank can cause the tank to
weaken and corrode, increasing the risk of tank rupture.
For prolonged storage (in excess of 3 months), place a plastic cover over the entire compressor to
protect the electrical terminal box from dust and other atmospheric contaminants.
5. Inspection and Maintenance

Regular inspection of equipment can provide a warning of potential hazards and can prevent
hazardous conditions in the workplace:
 Examine regulators, pressure relief valves and cylinder connections.

 Ensure that cylinders and pressure vessels are free of exterior corrosion, denting, bulging, gouges,
leakage, pitting or dents.
Usually, cylinders and pressure vessels must be retested or inspected every five or ten years. The date
of each test must be stamped on the cylinder. Experience is important in the inspection. Users who
lack experience should return questionable cylinders to the gas supplier. Leaking regulators, cylinder
valves, or other equipment should be taken out of service.
Ensure that maintenance personnel know the possible hazards of the materials they may encounter
and any special procedures and precautions before they begin to work.
Whenever an air compressor or receiver is to be taken out of service for a long period of time, drain
the receiver and store in a dry sheltered location. Dry out the receiver after draining, inspect before
storage and re-inspect before putting back into commission. When pressure vessels are to be put into
storage, the following must be provided for:
 Prevention of mechanical damage, such as scratches, dents, dropping, etc.

 Protection against exposure to adverse environments (both internal and external) which could
cause corrosion or stress corrosion.
 Prevention of induced stresses due to storage fixture constraints.
Despite safety features such as fan and belt guards, only trained technicians may adjust compressor
components:
 Do not adjust safety, blow-off, or control valves without referring to the operating manual. For
example, improper adjustments can cause "air explosions" from the safety valve - startling and
perhaps even injuring experienced operators.
 Do not change filters or check fluids while the compressor is running - spraying fluids such as oil
can cause burns or serious injury.
 Replace worn or illegible safety stickers.
 Ensure that pressure and temperature gauges are working.
Standard Operating Procedure – Tower and Mobile Cranes
Cranes come in numerous configurations and are commonly employed in the construction industry to
move materials and are subsequently associated with a large number of construction incidents. Cranes
are distinguished from hoists which can also lift objects, but can not move them sideways.
There are two basic construction crane designs, namely mobile and tower, each of which can literally
be found in hundreds of different configurations. Most tower cranes must be assembled with the
assistance of an appropriately sized mobile crane, but many self-erecting tower cranes that are
mounted on truck or crawler track bases are however also readily available.
Cranes are designed with adequate safety factors, but overloads, fatigue or a lack of maintenance can
cause incidents. Operators and their co-employees rely on these units performing structurally,
mechanically, and functionally. A crane that fails could result in injury or death to employees, damage
to other equipment and structures, and costly downtime.
1. Definitions used in this SOP

Crane A machine for lifting and lowering a load and moving it horizontally,
with the hoisting mechanism an essential part of the machine and
includes all types of cranes.
Tower crane A crane with a boom that is mounted on a tower structure and includes
self-erecting tower cranes
Mobile crane A machine that –
 is used primarily for raising or lowering a freely suspended load;

 is capable of travelling over a supporting surface without the
need for fixed runways (including railway tracks); and
 relies only on gravity for stability, with no vertical restraining
connection between itself and the supporting surface, and no
horizontal restraining connection (other than frictional forces at
supporting-surface level) that may act as an aid to stability
Rated capacity The weight the crane can safely handle
Load charts Also called rated capacity charts, identify what a crane is able to lift
safely
Dogger Person who assists the crane Operator in the safe and efficient
operation of the crane, including the safe slinging of the load
2. Operator Training
Crane Operators are trained to understand safe crane operation (e.g. reading and comprehending
load charts) as well as the principles of setting up, rigging, hoisting and swinging a load, swing radius
and power line safety.
Crane Operator testing and certification is a prerequisite for employment. Operators must -
 meet the legal age for crane operation;

 have adequate understanding of the crane they are operating;
 demonstrate satisfactory skill in operating the crane; and
 pass a physical examination.
Additional criteria that are used to evaluate crane drivers include:
 Visual depth perception;

 Emotional stability;
 Free from habitual drug use;
 Free from seizures; and
 No other loss of physical control.
3. Mobile cranes
A mobile crane generally consists of a superstructure with prime mover, operating machinery and a
boom mounted on a base and capable of lateral movements. Its function is to hoist, lower and swing
loads at various radii.
Mobile cranes can be classified as either:
 Boom type – The boom can either be telescopic or trussed (also called latticed boom). Telescopic
booms allow the boom length, and hence the crane’s reach, to be extended or retracted. Trussed
booms are fixed in length during operation but additional boom sections can be added to the
existing boom to increase its operating radius.
 Base mounting type – Cranes can be mounted on various bases depending on the need. The
common practice is to have trussed boom cranes fitted on crawler-tracked undercarriages and
telescopic booms on wheeled undercarriages.
Mobile crane operations may present a risk of injury to employees and members of the public from:
 Structural failure – may include the failure of any crane component, such as the boom, jib,
hydraulic rams or wire rope, normally due to the crane being overloaded in the structural area of
its load chart. Structural failure usually occurs without warning.
 Overturning – if the crane has been overloaded in the stability area of its load chart. This may be
influenced by a number of factors, including:
o Poor ground conditions such as unstable ground,
o Failure to use or fully extend outriggers or stabilisers,
o Failure to level the crane,
o Rapid slewing, or
o High wind conditions;

 Contact or collision with other plant and structures – may occur where sufficient clearances are
not maintained between the mobile crane and other plant and structures such as other cranes,
buildings and overhead power lines.
 Falling objects – may result from erecting and dismantling activities and the way loads are secured
during lifting operations.
3.1. Select the mobile crane
Select the type and number of mobile cranes to suit the particular needs of a workplace. If crane
characteristics do not match job requirements, unsafe conditions could be caused before any work is
done. When selecting a mobile crane for a job, the size and characteristics of the crane are assessed
against the following criteria:
 The weights, dimensions and lift radii of the heaviest and largest loads to be lifted;
 The maximum lift height and radius and the weight of the loads to be handled at these points;
 The number and frequency of lifts to be made;
 How long the crane will be required at the workplace;
 The type of lifting to be done (e.g. precise placement of loads);
 The type of carrier required – which depends on ground conditions and machine capacity in its
various operating quadrants;
 Whether loads are to be walked or carried;
 Whether loads are to be suspended for lengthy periods; and
 The workplace conditions, including the ground on which the crane is to be set up, access roads
and ramps it must travel on, space for erection and any obstacles that may impede access or
operation.
3.2. Crane documentation and markings
The mobile crane manufacturer must provide the following documentation:
 Test certificate for stability, structural testing and pick and carry where appropriate.
 Test certificate for the winches, providing the overload test results.
 Hook test certificate.
 Wire rope test certificates.
When renting a crane, ensure that –
 the crane has been serviced and maintained in accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications;
and
 the crane is provided together with the correct Operator’s manual as well as load charts, safety
decals, maintenance, inspection and instructional decals, crane signal charts and other safety
information provided by the manufacturer.
A mobile crane and its lifting components must be marked permanently and legibly and all
Operator controls must be suitably marked to indicate their function and operation.
3.3. Pre-operation inspection
Before crane operation, the crane Operator must -
 complete the daily inspection checklist and fill out the crane logbook; and
 inspect the work area, including the ground condition.
The visual inspection and functional test before the commencement of each work shift includes the
following:
 All relevant items indicated in the operations manual;

 Operating and emergency controls;
 Brakes;
 Safety switches and interlocks, including limiting and indicating devices;
 Visual inspection of the structure; and
 Wire ropes to ensure that they are on the drum and correctly reeved on the sheave.
The results of the inspection must be entered in the logbook and kept with the crane. Any safety-
related problems must be corrected before the crane is used.
3.4. Attaching the load to mobile cranes
Make sure:
1. the load is within the specifications of the load-rating chart, except for load testing;
2. the crane is level, blocked properly, and cribbing is in place, where necessary;
3. the lift and swing path is clear of obstruction, and that all people are clear of the swing radius of
the counterweight;
4. the load lines and attachments meet the following:
 keep the hoist rope from kinking or wrapping around the load,
 keep multiple part lines from twisting around each other,
 bring the hook over the load in a way that prevents swinging, and
 attach the load to the hook with slings or other approved devices;
5. tag or restraint lines are used when rotation of the load is hazardous;
6. one appointed person is responsible for the operation when two or more cranes are used. That
person must:
 analyse the operation, and
 instruct all personnel about the proper positioning, rigging, and moving of the load.
Note: Before lifting, the effect of ambient wind on the load and on crane stability should be considered.
3.5. Operation
Planning is the first step in ensuring that work is done safely. Issues to be considered when planning
for mobile crane operations include:
 Determining crane requirements appropriate to the work to be undertaken;
 Ensuring there is adequate workplace access;

 Identifying the most appropriate location to site the mobile crane in relation to other buildings,
structures and plant at the workplace;
 Liaising with electricity entities regarding control measures for working around overhead power
lines;
 Ensuring that the ground conditions are adequate to support the mobile crane; and
 Ensuring that the appropriate number of persons is available to support safe mobile crane
operations.
The number of Operators and Doggers in the crane crew must be based on a risk assessment and a
consideration of the size and complexity of the lift(s) to be performed. The crane crew must be
appropriate to ensure the safe operation of the crane at a workplace, especially in relation to
minimising the risk of collisions between the crane and other plant and loads contacting other
structures, overhead power lines or employees.
Crane Operators must have a comprehensive knowledge of the operating capabilities of the crane and
be competent to carry out the lifting operation. The Operator has the final say about whether a lift
should proceed and must be satisfied that –
 the crane is adequately supported on the ground and the crane is level to within the tolerance
specified by the manufacturer;
 materials placed under the outrigger feet or crawler tracks are set up to comply with the crane
manufacturer’s specifications or the crane owner’s specifications, if the former does not exist or
is not available;
 the suspended load will remain within the rated capacity of the load chart;
 the crane is functioning properly, including all crane motions, brakes, load moment systems and
indicators; and
 the wind speed is not too high for the load being lifted, particularly for loads with large surface
areas and high above the ground.
To ensure that the crane maintains stability and does not overturn, the following factors must be
addressed:
 The stabilising moment of the crane – the crane counterweight generally provides the primary
stabilising moment;
 The overturning moment applied by the suspended load, the part of the crane boom that is
outside the tipping point of the crane, and the wind;
 The ground conditions and means of supporting the outrigger pads or the crane tyres;
 Crane proximity to excavations and trenches – considering potential wall collapses;
 Setting of outriggers according to the manufacturer’s operating instructions – outriggers are
also used to help level the crane;
 Materials that can be used to distribute the mass of the mobile crane and the suspended load to
the ground;
 The slope of the ground – both side slopes and slopes in direction of crane travel (this particularly
applies to pick-and-carry cranes); and
 Wind conditions – this will vary depending on the size and shape of the suspended load and size
and configuration of the crane boom.
Mobile cranes must only be sited after careful consideration of the likelihood of –
 the crane overturning due to failure of the crane to withstand the forces likely to be imposed on
it; and
 collision between the crane and other plant and structures in the vicinity.
During crane operation, the crane Operator must –
 check that no unauthorised persons are present on or in the vicinity of the crane;
 monitor the ground condition during repetitive crane lifts in the same location;
 check that each motion to be performed is safe and without risk; and
 complete the daily inspection checklist, including filling out the crane logbook.
Audible and discernible voice communication is essential for safe crane operation and must be
maintained with the Operator at all times. If this cannot be accomplished, a signalling system that is
familiar to and understood by both the Operator and the Dogger must be agreed upon as the method
of signalling between the crane Operator and Dogger. An effective means of communication is
particularly important where –
 the crane Operator cannot see the load;

 the crane Operator cannot see the load’s landing area;
 the crane Operator cannot see the path of travel of the load or the crane;
 the crane Operator is not in a position to make an accurate judgment of distance; and
 it is possible for the crane to come into contact with overhead power lines or other structures and
plant in the vicinity.
Operators using radio equipment must be familiar with the manufacturer’s operating instructions. A
dedicated radio frequency must be selected for the duration of the crane operations to prevent
interference to or from other radio equipment being used in the vicinity of the crane. Work must be
stopped immediately if there is a loss of radio communication.
During crane operation, ensure:
1. The Operator, before starting the engine or closing the switch, checks that:
 all controls are in the off or neutral position, and
 all people are in the clear.
2. The Operator tests the controls at the start of each shift. If any controls don't operate properly,
they must be adjusted or repaired before beginning operations.
3. The Operator tests the brakes every time a load approaching the rated load is handled by raising
the load a few inches and then applying the brakes.
4. The Operator consults with the supervisor whenever there are any safety questions before
handling the load.
5. The Operator doesn't engage in any practice that diverts their attention while actually engaged in
operating equipment.
6. The Operator obeys any stop signal, no matter who gives it.
7. During lifting:
 the load doesn't suddenly accelerate or decelerate, and
 the load doesn't contact any obstructions.
8. Boom lowering is done only under power control in a rope supporting and elevating arrangement.
Free-fall lowering of the boom is not allowed.
9. The Operator engages the boom-hoist pawl or other locking device when operating at a fixed
radius.
 The Operator knows when ropes are being handled on a winch head. Make sure the Operator
stays within convenient reach of the power unit control lever while the winch head is being
used.
10. The Operator activates the positive controllable means to keep the drum from rotating in the
lowering direction when the load is going to remain suspended for a considerable length of time.
11. The Operator rotates the crane:
 without sudden starts or stops, and
 at a speed that does not cause the load to swing out beyond a controllable radius.
12. The Operator does not perform side-pulls, except when loads are freely suspended.
13. The Operator does not allow anyone to ride on the load or hook.
14. The Operator does not lower the boom or the load to where less than two full wraps of rope are
on the drum.
15. The ballast or counterweight recommended by the manufacturer is not exceeded.
16. Outriggers and stabilisers, when required, are used according to manufacturer's
recommendations:
 where floats are used, they must be securely attached to the outriggers, and
 blocking and cribbing used to support outriggers and stabilisers must be:
o Strong enough to prevent crushing.
o Free from defects.
o Big enough to support the float, transmit the load to the supporting surface, and prevent
shifting, toppling, or excessive settling under load.
o Only under the outer bearing surface of the extended outrigger beam, when blocking is
used
17. The Operator does the following any time the power fails:
 Sets all brakes and locking devices.
 Moves all clutches and power controls to the off or neutral position.
 Sets down any suspended load under brake control, if practical.
18. The Operator does not leave the controls while a load is suspended.
19. The Operator does the following before leaving the crane unattended:-
 Sets down the load, bucket, lifting magnet, or other device.
 Disengages the master clutch.
 Sets travel, swing, boom brakes, and other locking devices.
 Puts controls in the off or neutral position.
 Secures the crane against accidental travel.
 Stops the engine.
Note:
 When crane operation is frequently interrupted during a shift and the Operator must leave the
crane, the engine may remain running if the following conditions, in addition to the bullets above,
apply:
o The Operator must be situated where unauthorized entry of the crane can be observed
o The crane must be located within an area protected from unauthorized entry
 When a local weather storm warning exists, consideration shall be given to the recommendations
of the manufacturer for securing the crane.
3.6. Moving the crane
With a load - Make sure an appointed person determines and controls the safety of moving a crane
with a load. They are responsible for making decisions about:
 Position of the load.

 Boom location.
 Ground support.
 Travel route.
 Speed of movement.
Without a load - Make sure, when the crane is moved over roads:
 The crane is moved according to the manufacturer's recommendation.

 The boom is carried in line with the direction of motion.
 The superstructure is secured against rotation, unless:
o There is an Operator in the cab when turning.
o The boom is supported on a dolly.
o The empty hook cannot swing freely
3.7. Leaving the crane unattended
Before leaving the crane unattended, the Operator must –
 land any load, bucket, lifting magnet or other device;

 disengage the master clutch;
 set travel, swing and boom brakes and other locking devices;
 put controls in the off or neutral position;
 secure the crane against accidental travel; and
 shut the engine down.
Not shutting the engine down is permitted only when crane operations are frequently interrupted
during a shift and the Operator must leave the crane. Under these circumstances, the engine may
remain running and the following conditions, including the items mentioned above, apply:
 The crane is situated where unauthorised entry of the crane can be observed; and
 The crane is located within an area protected from unauthorised entry.
When a local weather storm warning exists, follow the recommendations of the manufacturer for
securing the crane.
3.8. Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
Crane inspections are inherently linked to safe crane use as the inspections provide information in
respect of the general wear and tear of the crane and any problems that require immediate correction.
Crane inspections can range from a major inspection carried out by a competent person to a daily
inspection carried out by a Crane Operator.
Inspecting and testing mobile cranes include:
 Pre-operational inspections by the Operator;

 Routine inspection and maintenance – carried out in accordance with the crane manufacturer’s
instructions and typically includes a programme of weekly, monthly and quarterly inspections;
 Annual inspections – by a competent person, including all items specified by the crane
manufacturer for annual inspection, as well as all items included in the routine inspection and
maintenance programmes; and
 10-year major inspections – are intended to assess the crane’s suitability for continued operation
and must be certified by an engineer experienced in the inspection of mobile cranes.
Crane repairs can be divided into four distinct categories:
1. Repairs required due to normal operational wear and tear;

2. Repairs required due to poor design or inadequate product quality assurance during manufacture;
3. Repairs required due to equipment malfunction; and
4. Repairs required due to accident damaged, overloading or general neglect.
Cranes that have undergone structural repairs must be tested to verify that the equipment is capable
of performing safely and reliably in various configurations within its safe working capacity.
Worn or damaged crane parts that constitute a hazard or impairs the operation of the crane, or that
may constitute a hazard before the next routine inspection, must be repaired or replaced. New and
repaired parts must comply with the crane manufacturer’s specifications and instructions or, where
these are not available, the new or repaired parts must comply with the recommendations of a
competent person.
4. Tower Cranes
Tower cranes are common fixtures at all major project sites and are used to lift a wide variety of
materials and equipment. Tower cranes consist of the following basic parts:
 The base to support the crane

 The mast or tower connected to the base, which gives the tower crane its height
 On top of the mast is the slewing unit, that allows the crane to rotate
 Three parts connect to the top of the slewing unit, namely:
o The long horizontal working arm jib. The working arm carries the load and the trolley runs
along the working arm to move the load in and out from the crane's centre;
o The shorter horizontal arm, which contains the counter weights and the hoisting
equipment;
o The Operator’s cab (single control point), which is normally positioned directly on top of the
slewing unit.
Tower cranes are widely used for lifting operations in the construction industry and are available in a
variety of types, configurations and assembly and dismantling methods. Tower crane designs either
have fixed or slewing towers. Mono tower designs carry the jib on a single tower structure while
double tower designs with inner and outer towers allows the inner tower to be lifted while being
supported by the outer tower. Telescoping towers are usually limited to smaller tower cranes. The
primary types of jibs (booms) used on tower cranes are saddle jibs that are supported by pendants in
a horizontal position, luffing jibs that are supported by luffing cables, fixed-luff jibs, rear-pivoted jibs
and articulated jibs. Tower cranes are also characterized according to their mounting configuration as
static base, rail-mounted base or mobile base designs. Static base cranes either have a fixed height or
are climbing cranes
4.1. Tower crane risks
Tower crane operations may present a risk of injury to persons from:
 Structural failure – this may include the failure of any crane component, such as the boom, jib,
hydraulic rams or wire rope. Crane overloading is a major cause of structural failures that typically
occur without warning.
 Collapse – if it becomes unstable through overloading. A collapse may be influenced by a number
of factors, including:
o Incorrectly used counterweights,
o Incorrectly torqued crane tower bolts,
o Incorrectly installed crane ties, or
o Poor tower crane base design;
 Contact or collision with other plant and structures – that may occur where sufficient clearances
are not maintained between the tower crane and other plant and structures such as other cranes,
concrete pumping booms, buildings and overhead power lines.
 Falling objects – present a risk of injury to employees and members of the public and may result
from erecting and dismantling activities and the way loads are secured during lifting operations.
 Falling from an elevated position – persons may be at risk of falling from elevated positions when
undertaking activities associated with erecting and dismantling tower cranes.
4.2. Selecting a crane
Each class of crane possesses certain basic characteristics that will usually dictate the one most suited
to a particular application. Tower cranes must be selected to suit the job. If the crane's basic
characteristics do not match the job's requirements, then unsafe conditions are created and incidents
are bound to happen.
The operating characteristics of a tower crane are determined by its mounting method and tower and
jib type. Factors to consider when selecting a tower crane include:
 Weight and dimension of loads

 Height of lift and distance/area of movement of loads
 Number and frequency of lifts
 Length of time for which the crane will be required
 Site conditions, including ground conditions for crane standing, and space available for crane
access, erection, operation and dismantling
 Any special operational requirements or limitations imposed, including the existence of other
cranes in close proximity.
A competent person must inspect and test tower crane components before delivery to the workplace
as well as once delivered to the workplace, for possible damage and wear that could have been caused
during transport.
4.3. Erecting the crane
When selecting the appropriate site for a tower crane, consider the following factors, as they may
present a risk of injury to people, that is, including employees and members of the public in the vicinity
of the crane:
 The crane overturning due to failure of the crane to withstand the forces likely to be imposed on
it
 Collisions between the crane and other plant and structures at the workplace
 The location of –
o common access areas for employees and other persons at the workplace; and
o public access areas, such as footpaths, roadways and railways in the vicinity of the crane.
To ensure safe assembly of a tower crane, all assembly procedures must be carefully planned and
performed under the supervision of a competent person and/or professional engineer.
Crane assembly must follow the correct procedures, using the correct parts, and following the correct
sequence of assembly as specified by the crane manufacturer. In addition to following the crane
manufacturer’s assembly instructions, general safety precautions, which should be implemented
during tower crane assembly, include:
 A professional engineer must design the foundations supporting a tower crane and all shoring,
bracing and tie-ins to supporting structures.
 Keep all personnel not directly involved with the crane assembly away from the assembly area.
 Provide adequate clearance for the mobile “assist” crane and trucks delivering tower crane
components.
 The manufacturer’s assembly manual must be readily available to all erection personnel.
 Maintain a list of the weights of each crane component at the site.
 Conduct a pre-assembly meeting to ensure that all erection personnel understand their roles and
responsibilities.
 Crane component rigging must be designed to avoid swinging or unstable loading.
 Allow sufficient curing time for concrete used for foundations, ballast or counterbalance to
achieve the desired strength.
 Pre-load (tension) high-tensile bolt connections on masts, jibs, and slew rings and ensure that
tools and equipment used (i.e. torque wrenches, etc.) are calibrated.
 Monitor wind speed at the site before and during assembly operations and terminate assembly
operations whenever wind gust speeds exceed the manufacturer’s limits.
4.4. Commissioning
Once the crane has been successfully erected, a competent person who is sufficiently independent
and impartial and was not involved in the erection process undertakes a thorough examination of the
crane and performs the required commissioning inspections and tests before it is put into service. The
crane is only put into service once the commissioning inspections and tests have satisfactorily verified
the performance of the crane.
Crane owners must develop a commissioning report that reflects the crane type and model and
references the relevant design drawings and test certificates.
4.5. Pre-operational inspection
A visual inspection and functional test of the crane must be carried out by the crane Operator before
the commencement of each work shift. This includes inspecting and testing the following:
 All items indicated in the operations manual;

 Operating and emergency controls;
 Brakes;
 Safety switches and interlocks, including limiting and indicating devices and instruments;
 Visual inspection of the structure;
 Wire ropes to ensure they are correctly wound onto the drum and correctly reeved on the sheave;
and
 Wire ropes for visible damage.
The inspection results are entered into the crane’s inspection logbook and kept in/at the crane. Safety-
related problems must be recorded and corrected before the crane is used.
4.6. Operation
Tower cranes must have safe means of access and egress. Suitable access ladders with safety hoops
must be provided for access to the Operator cabin from ground level or the lowest level of the tower
mast, with suitable rest platforms provided at intervals of not greater than nine metres. Suitable
access must also be provided between the building/structure and the tower mast.
Only the crane Operator and authorised maintenance staff are allowed to climb onto the crane
structure, and then only to gain access to the cabin or to carry out authorised tasks such as
maintenance or inspection.
Tower cranes must be operated within their engineered design capacity. Limiting and indicating
devices must be fitted to tower cranes as an aid to crane Operators. The purpose of limiting devices is
to stop a specific crane motion before the crane moves into an unsafe situation outside of its designed
safety limits. Indicating devices and instrumentation are used to warn the crane Operator by visual or
auditory means that the crane may be approaching an unsafe situation or its designed safety limits.
These devices may be used individually, or in combination, for specific crane motions. The devices
must however not be relied upon to replace the use of the crane’s load chart and operating
instructions under any circumstances. Sole reliance on these devices, rather than following good
operating practices, could quite possibly result in accidents.
Adequate precautions should be taken during adverse weather conditions, such as rainstorms and
lightning, to prevent personnel involved in the use of the crane from being endangered. To ensure the
stability of a tower crane in windy conditions, the following factors must be addressed:
 The crane manufacturer must state the maximum wind speed at which the crane can be operated
safely; and
 An anemometer (wind speed gauge) must be installed on each tower crane, in an appropriate
location (not shielded from the wind) to provide an accurate wind speed reading.
Particular attention must be paid to the provisions of proper rigging procedures and precautions to
ensure that every part of any load to be raised or lowered by the crane is –
 securely suspended or supported; and

 adequately secured so as to prevent danger to people or property arising as a result of the slipping
or displacement of any part of the load.
The Contractor has an obligation to ensure the overall coordination of lifting operations on an ongoing
basis and must ensure that Crane Operators adhere to the following practices when handling a load:
 Crane motions must be operated with extreme care when loads that approach the maximum
working load for an operating radius is handled. The load must initially be lifted just clear of the
supporting surface and brought to rest for the slings and balance of the load to be checked before
proceeding with the lift.
 Proper care must be exercised by the Operator at all times to avoid shocks to or side loadings on
the jib.
 No load is allowed to be left suspended, unless a competent person is in charge of the crane during
the period of suspension. The Operator must additionally remain in the driving position and the
machine must be fully operational to meet any emergency that may arise. A crane may under no
circumstances be left unattended with a suspended load.
 Extreme care must be exercised and adequate clearances allowed when loads have to be handled
in the vicinity of people. Lifting of loads over highways, railways and other places to which the
public have access must be avoided as far as possible.
 A reliable communication method between the crane Operator and other persons assisting with
the lift is essential for safe crane operation, especially for overlapping areas of work.
 Failure to maintain sufficient clearance between tower cranes and other plant and structures
could increase the risk of injury as a result of a collision between the crane and/or its load and
other plant or structures.
 Contact with overhead power lines can pose a risk of electrocution when operating a tower crane.
It can be extremely difficult for crane Operators to see power lines and to judge distances from
them.
4.7. Leaving the crane unattended
Failure to take adequate safety precautions to secure an unattended tower crane may encourage
unauthorised use of the crane by persons who are not competent to operate it. In no instance, not
even for short periods, may a crane be left unattended, unless the following actions have been taken:
 All loads have been removed from the hook;

 The hook has been raised to a position where it is safely clear of other operations;
 All powered motions have been disabled; and
 The keys have been removed from the crane.
For longer periods and for out-of-service conditions, isolation should be more permanent, i.e.,
switches locked out, fuel supplies cut off and any doors giving access to machinery or control cabins
locked to prevent unauthorised access.
Where there is no risk of the tower crane boom contacting other structures, the crane must be left to
weathervane in accordance with the crane manufacturer’s instructions when unattended. Where it is
necessary to restrict the movement of the boom of a tower crane, the method of tethering (i.e.
securing the boom to prevent slewing) must be determined by an engineer.
Where the crane has warning lights fitted to the top of the tower or to the jib, these should be
switched on if it is to be left unattended overnight. For details of methods to safeguard particular
types of cranes, reference should be made to the crane manufacturer’s instructions.
4.8. Extending the crane height
The process of extending the height of a tower crane by adding sections at the top is commonly called
“jumping”, “jacking”, or “climbing”. This process has the potential for crane failure or collapse and has
been the cause of many catastrophic crane accidents.
Most crane climbing procedures involve the use of an externally fitted climbing frame that surrounds
the tower (mast) and contains the mechanical jacking system to raise the frame and superstructure of
the crane (turntable, cab and horizontal boom) for insertion of an additional tower section.
Another method employs a sliding tower section within the top of the main or outer tower which
carries the jib/counter-jib/head assembly. The crane’s height is extended by attaching additional
sections to the top of the outer or main tower and then raising the sliding tower section by sliding it
up the added sections.
In addition to following the crane’s and climbing frame’s manufacturer assembly instructions, general
safety precautions that should be implemented for a tower crane climb include:
 All climbing procedures must be performed under the supervision of a competent person and/or
professional engineer.
 Consult with the climbing frame manufacturer to determine if they offer a certified training
programme, and ensure that employees are trained in climbing procedures.
 Develop a written risk assessment for each jump, including detailed operational procedures for
the safe transport, assembly, erection, use and dismantling of the climbing frame.
 Conduct a pre-jump meeting to review the rigging plan, sequence of operations to be followed,
equipment and tools to be used, fall protection procedures and means of communication. Ensure
that all personnel involved in the jump understand their roles and responsibilities.
 Prepare and train personnel for emergencies and develop contingency procedures to be followed
in the event of an emergency arising during a climb.
 Balance the crane in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications before climbing.
 Secure the area surrounding the climb to protect other employees and members of the public.
 Lock the jib in position before climbing to prevent uncontrolled slewing of the jib.
 Direct reading measurements of the wind speed at the crane top must be made before and during
all climbing operations, and the jump must be terminated whenever the wind gust speeds exceed
the limit set by the crane manufacturer or climbing frame manufacturer.
 Hydraulic cylinders used to support the crane during climbing must be equipped with check valves
to hold the crane in the event of power or pressure failure.
Tower cranes have a maximum height (approximately 70 - 80 metres) at which they can stand free
without lateral support. They can rise higher, e.g. as a building progresses, if they are tied back to the
building. General safety precautions to be implemented whenever tying back a tower crane include:
 The site-specific safety plan must include the maximum freestanding height of each crane (as
determined by the crane manufacturer) and plans for tying back any tower crane.
 Balance the tower crane in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications before any ties are
attached.
 Follow the manufacturer’s specifications on the method of tying back the crane (i.e. type and
number of tie frame bracing members to be used, position of tie frames relative to the tower
joints and the maximum forces the crane will transmit to the ties).
 A competent person and/or professional engineer must determine whether the support structure
is able to withstand the additional forces.
4.9. Dismantling
With most tower cranes the dismantling procedure is the reverse of the erection procedure.
Dismantling a crane is however more complicated than erecting it, because of the space restrictions
imposed by the structure which the crane has been used to construct and the proximity of other
buildings. It is essential therefore that the requirements for dismantling and removing the crane are
considered at the outset of a project when selecting the type, size and position of the crane to be
used.
Equipment used to lower dismantled assemblies must be of adequate capacity to enable these to be
lowered to the ground well clear of the building or structure. Whatever procedure and means for
lowering is used in dismantling the crane, sections to be dismantled and lowered must be secured to
the hook or lifting attachment of the lowering equipment before any bolts or locking devices are
released. Taglines, to steady any load that has to be lowered, must be attached before lowering
commences.
4.10. Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
Crane inspections are inherently linked to safe crane use as the inspections provide information in
respect of the general wear and tear of the crane and any problems that require immediate correction.
Crane inspections can range from a major inspection carried out by a competent person to a daily
inspection carried out by a Crane Operator.
Inspection and testing of tower cranes include the following:
 Pre-erection inspection and tests;

 Commissioning inspection and tests;
 Pre-operational inspections;
 Routine inspections and maintenance (monthly inspection checklist available);
 Annual inspections; and
 10-year major inspections.
A programme of routine weekly and monthly inspections and maintenance must be performed by
competent persons in accordance with the crane manufacturer’s instructions. The annual inspection
must include all items specified by the crane manufacturer for annual inspection, as well as relevant
items covered in the routine inspection and maintenance programmes. Further thorough
examinations are performed by competent persons following major alterations or repairs, or after the
occurrence of exceptional circumstances that could possibly jeopardise the safety of the crane.
Tower cranes must undergo a major inspection every ten years. The ten-yearly major inspection must
include an inspection of the crane’s structure and mechanical components.
A tower crane preventive maintenance programme based on the working environment and the
frequency and severity of use of the crane must be established. All replacement parts and components
must be identical or equivalent to the crane’s original parts or components. Where parts are sourced
from suppliers other than the original manufacturer, a competent engineer should assess the selected
parts and confirm that they meet the original manufacturer’s specifications and are fit for purpose.
5. Lifting procedures
Where the person responsible for slinging a load is required to judge the suitability and condition of
lifting gear and the method of attaching the sling (including sling accessories) to the load or crane,
such a person must hold a Dogger’s license or be an adequately supervised trainee. A Crane Operator
may only supervise a trainee in performing the class of high risk work of a Dogger if the Operator also
holds a Dogger’s license.
Lifting loads may present a risk to the health and safety of persons in the vicinity of the tower crane
from:
 Damaged lifting gear;

 Crane overload; and
 Unsecured and dropped loads (falling objects).
More detailed guidance on lifting and the use and inspection of lifting equipment is provided in
the SOP for Rigging, Slinging and Lifting.
6. Inspection and Test Reports

All inspections as well as checks, adjustments, replacement of parts, repairs performed and
irregularities or damage concerning a crane’s safe use must be recorded and provided to the crane
owner.
Each crane must have a file containing the following documentation, as applicable, that is retained for
the life of the crane:
 Current dated periodic inspection records (the most recent records are retained in the file and the
past records are retained for analysis);
 Load test reports;
 Operational test reports;
 Documentation of altered, replaced and repaired load-sustaining parts;
 Records of special inspections on safety-related items such as brakes, crane hooks, ropes,
hydraulic and pneumatic cylinders and hydraulic and pneumatic relief pressure valves;
 Copies of waivers, exemptions, hostile environment plans and similar documentation applicable
to the crane (to include manufacturer's safety bulletins, safety alerts and product recall
information);
 Documentation for replacement ropes; and
 Wire rope manufacturer’s certification of replacement ropes.
Standard Operating Procedure – Scaffolding
There are at least 25 types of scaffolds in general use, of which the three most common types are:
 Fixed scaffolds;
 Suspended scaffolds; and
 Mobile scaffolds.
Scaffolding is a temporary platform/frame used to support people and material. It is constructed for
reaching heights above arms' reach for the purpose of building, construction, maintenance or repair.
Scaffolding has a variety of applications. It is used in construction, alteration, routine maintenance and
renovation. Scaffolding offers a safer and more comfortable work arrangement compared to leaning
over edges, stretching overhead and working from ladders. Suitable and sufficient scaffolding must be
supplied for work at elevations that cannot be accomplished safely by other means. Properly erected
and maintained, scaffolding provides workers safe access to work locations, level and stable working
platforms, and temporary storage for tools and materials for performing immediate tasks.
Scaffolding hazards rank high on the list of the most frequently mentioned standards in the
construction industry and account for a significant number of fatalities in the construction industry.
More construction employees die from falls than from any other accident in modern industry. Working
safely on scaffolds is not an art. It takes awareness and willingness to follow good safety practices.
1. Hazards related to scaffolding

Individuals exposed to scaffolding hazards include scaffold erectors and dismantlers, personnel
working on scaffolds, and employees and the general public near scaffolding. Scaffold erectors and
dismantlers are at particular risk, since they work on scaffolds before ladders, guardrails, platforms
and planks are completely installed.
Hazards related to scaffolding includes:
 Injuries:
o Mostly hand, foot and head injuries sustained during the erection and dismantling of the
scaffolding; and
o Failing to use the correct PPE;
 Falls due to:
o Incorrect use of scaffolding;
o Unsafe accessing scaffolding;
o Improper housekeeping;
o Incorrect placement of building material and other objects; and
o Failing to use safety harnesses;
 Falling objects:
o Failure to install toe-boards on platforms, resulting in severe injuries to employees working

below;
 Incorrect method of raising and lowering material;
 Unsafe access:
o Failure to include ladders when erecting scaffolding leads to the incorrect method of accessing
scaffolding, e.g. employees accessing the scaffold by climbing the framework;
 Danger of electrocution:
o Failure to introduce permit/lock-out procedures before erecting scaffolding near electrical
equipment;
 Inadequate control measures/procedures; and
 Scaffold collapse due to:
o Overloading of work platforms;
o Failure to do independent ties to structures;
o Failure to ensure a stable base before erection; and
o Failure to do regular inspections.
2. Guidance for Use

When planning for work at heights, it is essential that a safe working platform is provided for all phases
of a project. A safe working platform is usually provided by erecting scaffolding, with a compulsory
risk assessment by a competent person preceding the erection.
The use of scaffolding involves the following steps:

1. Establish scaffold requirements;
2. Assemble and erect the scaffold;
3. Conduct a pre-use inspection;
4. Use the scaffold;
5. Dismantle/alter the scaffold; and
6. Inspect and maintain scaffolding to ensure that it remains safe for use.
Following these steps in accordance with the provisions of the procedure on Working at Elevated
Positions, greatly reduces the likelihood of incidents occurring, and ensures that the user performs
the task safely while working at an elevated position.
2.1. Establish scaffold requirements
In addition to the relevant risk assessment, the following factors must be considered:
 Type of scaffold to be used;

 Location where the scaffold will be used;
 Duration for which the scaffold will be used;
 Classification to be adopted for the scaffold (this must be for the worst case if several trades are
to make use of the scaffold);
 Maximum number of working platforms;
 Requirements for scaffold ties and other factors affecting the stability of the scaffold;
 Volume and extent of the scaffolding to be supplied;

 Access positions for ladders or staircases;
 Arrangements for the safety of the scaffold and the required inspections during use;
 Range of weather conditions;
 Requirements for pedestrian traffic; and
 Emergency procedures to deal with any emergency that might affect the safety of employees
working on the scaffold.
The scaffold must be capable of supporting its own weight and at least four times the maximum
intended load to be applied or transmitted to the scaffold and components. Suspension ropes must
be capable of supporting six times the maximum intended load.
2.2. Assemble and erect the scaffold
When the area is selected where the scaffold must be erected and the necessary risk assessments
were done:
 Check the location for:

o Ground conditions:
 Erect scaffold on a base that will support all the loads that will be applied, including
materials and equipment; and
 Ensure that the backfill is compact and level - replace mud and soft soil with gravel or
crushed stone;
o Overhead wires;
o Obstructions; and
o Changes in surface elevation.
 Inspect all scaffolds and components upon receipt at the erection location and return, tag “Do Not
Use” or destroy defective components.
 Erect all scaffolding parts according to the manufacturer's instructions.
 Use a safety harness that is tied off the scaffold to a building or lifeline.
 Assemble scaffolds together with another person so that one person is on the scaffold and one is
passing materials from the ground.
 Provide adequate sills for scaffold posts and use base plates - do not use concrete blocks, bricks
or scrap lumber.
 Use jackscrews to eliminate hazards created by temporarily jacking up the erected scaffold to add
shims when sections are not level.
 Brace both sides of every frame for the vertical plane (install horizontal bracing at the joint of
every third tier of frames – this bracing is often attached to the point where the scaffold is tied to
the structure).
 Do not force braces to fit – level the scaffold until a proper fit can be made easily.
 Use coupling devices to join frames and prevent the joints from pulling apart.
 Build a rest platform - for every 10 metres height - next to the ladder.
 Ensure the scaffold is securely attached to the building structure.
 Inspect locking devices frequently during assembly.

 Install ladders as the erection proceeds – when scaffolds are to be in place for an extended period,
install a stairway.
 Complete the platform fully at each working level before assembling the next level.
 Inspect planks before use.
 Install guardrails consisting of:
o A top rail 1 metre above platform;
o A mid-rail about halfway between the platform and the top rail on the inside of the posts;
o A toe-board 100 mm high – fastened to inner side of posts; and
o Posts and rails capable of withstanding a force of at least 900 N (92 kg) applied at any point,
or withstanding any load likely to be applied.
Suspended scaffolds must meet the following specific requirements in so far as such requirements are
applicable:
 Platforms are designed and built with dimensions that are compatible with the stability of the
structure as a whole, especially the length.
 The number of anchorages is compatible with the dimensions of the platform.
 The safety of employees is guarded by an extra rope with a point of attachment independent of
the anchorage arrangements of the scaffold.
 The anchorages and other elements of support of the scaffold are designed and built in such a
way as to ensure sufficient strength.
 The ropes, winches, pulleys or pulley blocks are designed, assembled, used and maintained
according to the requirements established for lifting gear, adapted to the lifting of persons
according to national laws and regulations.
 Before use, the whole structure is checked by a competent person.
2.3. Pre-use inspection
Before using the scaffold, an inspection must be conducted to ensure that the –
 base is sound, level and adjusted;

 legs are plumb and all braces are in place;
 locking devices and ties are secured;
 cross members are level; and
 planks, decks and guardrails are installed and secure.
Inspect to ensure that –
 the scaffold is of suitable type and adequate for the task;

 materials used in its construction are sound and of sufficient strength;
 it is of sound construction and stable; and
 the required safeguards are in position.
Pre-use inspection check:
 Is the scaffold erected under the supervision of a person competent in scaffold erection?
 Is the framework without bends?
 Is the footing of the scaffold sound, rigid, and capable of carrying four times the maximum
intended load?
 Is the work platform secured?
 Does the pitting due to rust not exceed 0.5 mm?
 Is the independent scaffold secured to a structure?
 Has the scaffold not been left partly constructed?
 Is the ladder secured?
 Are guardrails provided on scaffolds more than 3 metres above the ground?
 Is planking of sufficient stress grade or scaffold grade timber?
 Is planking of platforms overlapped not less than 15mm or more than 30mm or secured from
movement?
 Are poles, legs or uprights of scaffolds plumb and securely braced to prevent swaying and
displacement?
 Are guardrails and toe-boards installed on all open sides and ends of scaffold platforms?
 Are scaffolds equipped with toe-boards wherever there is a possibility that falling material could
cause a hazard?
 Are toe-boards at least four inches in height?
 Is the appropriate signage posted?
Attach a tag stating the time and date of pre-use inspection.
2.4. Use the scaffold
Scaffolds are a common means of providing a safe work platform for working at height, provided that
a few basic safety rules are followed, namely:
 Scaffold users must read scaffold tags before using any scaffold and then follow the instructions
or warnings outlined on the tag.
 An access ladder must be used, not the scaffold frame, unless it is specially designed to be climbed.
 Measures must be taken to eliminate slippery conditions from all platforms and access areas.
 Consider the effect of increased winds when scaffolds are covered (hoarded).
 Adequate ventilation must be supplied for the work activity inside if the scaffold is completely
hoarded.
 Do not –
o jump on planks or platforms;
o work on scaffolds during storms or high winds;
o use ladders or makeshift devices on top of scaffolds to increase height;
o overload scaffold frames or platforms;
o rest materials or equipment on guardrails;
o work below a scaffold without head protection; and
o use scaffolds near electrical wires.
 Materials, tools and equipment that cannot be carried safely, must be raised/lowered in a safe
manner to and from the working platform.
Provide competent supervision to ensure that all scaffolds are used appropriately and only for the
purpose for which they are designed or erected.
2.5. Dismantle/alter the scaffold
When the need arises for dismantling, altering or moving a scaffold, the following must be adhered
to:
 Measures must be taken to ensure that the structure remains stable at all times.
 The platform must be cleared of all materials and debris before dismantling.
 Proceed in the reverse order of erection – each tier must be dismantled completely before starting
on the one below.
 Work from full platform decks while removing braces and frames.
 Jammed or rusted components must be removed with caution – tugging or pulling on stuck parts
often causes a loss of balance, thus a safety harness and lanyard, which is properly tied off, must
be worn.
 No boards or parts must be thrown or dropped from heights.
 All scaffold parts must be checked and maintained, and damaged pieces must be repaired or
discarded immediately.
 Moving parts of all fittings must be lubricated.
2.6. Scaffold tagging system
The most effective means of communication between the scaffold erector and the scaffold user is a
scaffold tag. During use, building or dismantling of a scaffold, a tag system must be in place that
provides the user information on completeness of a scaffold and any hazards specific to the scaffold
that the user may be warned about. The scaffold erector must complete and attach the scaffold tag
at eye level on or near the access ladder so that it is easy to locate, and clearly visible.
Tags must be made of materials (and completed with ink) that will withstand the environment in which
they are used, be legible and must include:
 The Competent Person’s name and signature;

 Date erected/tagged;
 Inspection date;
 Expiry date of label; and
 Dismantling date.
A three tag system is used, which includes a red or “Danger” tag in conjunction with yellow and green
tags:
 A red tag means the scaffold is being dismantled, not yet completely erected, or for some reason
not safe and may not be used.
 A yellow tag is completed and attached to scaffolds that cannot be erected with all components
complete. A yellow tag also informs the user that a fall protection device is required while on a
scaffold with incomplete guardrails or deck openings.
 A green tag is completed and attached by the erecting crew to scaffolds that have complete
handrails, mid-rails, toe-boards, and decking. A green tag informs all users that the scaffold is safe
to use.
Note: Any scaffold that is not tagged may not be used.
3. Training
All employees involved in erecting, using, dismantling, maintaining and inspection on a scaffold must
be trained by a competent person on the –
 hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used; and

 procedures to control or minimise those hazards.
The training must include the following (as applicable):
 The nature of any electrical hazards, fall hazards and falling object hazards in the work area;
 The correct procedures for –
o dealing with electrical hazards; and
o erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems and falling object
protection systems being used;
 The proper use of the scaffold as well as the proper handling of materials on the scaffold; and
 The maximum intended load and the load carrying capacities of the scaffolds used.
Retraining is required when –
 there is reason to believe that the employee lacks skill/understanding;

 changes in the worksite present a hazard on which employees have not yet been trained;
 there are changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection systems or other equipment that could
present hazards; and
 inadequacies in an employee’s work indicate that the required ability/skill has not been retained.
4. Inspection, Testing and Maintenance

Scaffolds must be inspected by a competent person and the results recorded:
 Before being taken into use;

 At periodic intervals thereafter as prescribed for different types of scaffolds; and
 After any alteration, interruption in use, exposure to weather or seismic conditions or any other
occurrence likely to have affected their strength or stability.
A file must be kept for each type of scaffolding, recording the following:
 Particulars such as manufacturer, agent and purchase date;

 Maintenance history, including manufacturer/agent maintenance; and
 Inspection history.
Maintain scaffolds in good repair. Only replacement components from the original manufacturer must
be used; intermixing scaffold components from different manufacturers must be avoided. Fabricated
scaffolds must be repaired according to the manufacturer’s specifications and guidance.
Store all scaffolding parts in an organised manner in a dry and protected environment. Examine all
parts and clean, repair or dispose of them as necessary before use.
Standard Operating Procedure – Elevating Work Platforms
Elevating work platforms (EWPs) are equipment designed to elevate employees and their tools to
carry out temporary work. They are used as an alternative to scaffolding, since erecting scaffolding
could be a long process and may not be considered a safe action for the particular type of work.
EWPs include scissor lifts, boom lifts, extending arm lifts (cherry pickers) and truck-mounted EWPs
(travel towers). EWPs are primarily designed so that a person may work at an elevated position, on a
structure from within the confines of the EWP platform or basket.
When work must be performed for extended periods at elevation and there is no guarded, fixed work
surface available, it is generally appropriate to use an elevating work platform (EWP) or mobile
elevating work platform (MEWP).
EWPs provide an efficient access system and are preferable to other methods that involve the use of
fall-arrest systems, because they reduce the risk of a fall occurring.
EWPs are not specifically designed for an employee to move from the platform to gain access onto
another elevated surface, although they are sometimes used in this application instead of other more
conventional forms of access, such as scaffold stair access towers.
1. Types of Elevating Work Platforms

There are two basic types of EWPs:
 Boom-type EWPs
 Scissor-type EWPs.
Both types of EWPs are available in –
 on-slab models for smooth hard surfaces, for e.g. pavements, concrete, etc.; and
 rough terrain models for firm surfaces, for e.g. compacted, soil/gravel, etc.
Boom and scissor EWPs are available in –
 trailer-mounted EWPs;
 self-propelled EWPs with scissor arms;
 self-propelled EWPs with telescoping boom; and
 vehicle-mounted EWPs.
1.1. Unpowered EWPs
Unpowered EWPs are usually smaller, have no motive drive and require external force to move them.
Depending on their size and whether they are wheeled or otherwise supported, they can be moved
either by hand or may require a vehicle for towing or transport.
1.2. Self-propelled EWPs
Self-propelled EWPs are able to drive themselves around a site. In some instances they will be able to
move while the task is in progress, although this is not possible on equipment that requires secure
outriggers. The power can be almost any form of standard mechanical drive system, for example
gasoline-powered or a hybrid (where it may be used inside and outside).
1.3. Vehicle-mounted EWPs
Vehicle-mounted EWPs can be mounted on a vehicle, usually a truck or a flat back pick-up van, but
can also be mounted on railway cars. This type of EWP provides mobility and is stabilised through
outriggers.
2. Use an EWP
In relation to the operation of EWPs, a safe system must be implemented to control risks to health
and safety arising from hazards such as, but not limited to:
1. Contact with live apparatus or conductors

2. Poorly maintained EWPs / equipment
3. Falls and falling objects.
2.1. EWP Controls
The power-assisted drive (if fitted) and lift functions of a EWP are controlled by an Operator. These
controls can be situated either on the work platform itself, or at a control panel at the base of the unit.
Some models are fitted with a panel at both locations or with a remote control. A control panel at the
base functions as a safety feature if for any reason the operator is at height and becomes unable to
operate the controls. Models not fitted with a control panel at the base are usually fitted with an
emergency switch, which allows manual lowering of the lift (usually by the release of hydraulic or
pneumatic pressure) in the event of an emergency or power failure.
Controls vary by model, but are normally either in the form of buttons or a joystick. The type and
complexity of these will depend on the functions the platform is able to perform. The controls can
control features such as:
 Vertical and lateral movement;

 Rotational movement (cardinal direction);
 Platform / basket movement. Normally, the system automatically levels the platform regardless
of boom position, but some allow overrides, tilting up to 90◦ for work in difficult locations; and
 Ground movement (in self-propelled models).
However, it is important that employers and everybody involved in selecting, specifying,

placing/setting up and operating EWPs understand the risks involved. Therefore it is imperative that
a competent person conduct a risk assessment before use.
The use of EWPs involves the following steps:
1. Establishing EWP requirements or selection criteria

2. Conducting a pre-operation / daily inspection
3. Placing / setting up EWPs
4. Operating EWPs
5. Inspecting, supervising and maintaining EWPs to ensure that it remains safe for use.
Following these steps in accordance with the provisions of the procedure on Working at Elevated
Positions, greatly reduces the likelihood of incidents occurring, and ensures that the user perform the
task safely while working at an elevated position.
2.2. Establish EWP selection criteria
Various aspects are considered before selecting an EWP to gain access to work at height and the risks
to be managed while the EWP is in use. There are various EWPs available with various rated capacities,
working heights and outreaches.
Before a decision is made on the type of EWP to be used, consider the following (this list is not
exhaustive):
 Task requirements:
- Location of the task;
- Who is going to operate the EWP;
- At what stage of the task the EWP will be needed;
- Numbers of employees to be lifted;
- Weight of material to be lifted;
- Required height/reach;
- Manual handling issues;
- Time in which the task is to be completed;
- Work priorities, i.e. if the work involves a number of tasks and the order in which the tasks
will be undertaken;
- The most appropriate time of the day for the task to be done.
 Site conditions/requirements:
- Access to the site;
- Ground conditions;
- Maximum ground bearing capacity;
- Operating requirements, i.e. overhead structures/power lines;
- Type of fuel allowed on site and refuelling requirements.
Note: Conduct an inspection of the site before considering the type of EWP to be used for the task. If
this is not possible, gather as much information about the site to assist in selecting the correct
equipment for the task.
2.3. Typical mistakes in selecting an EWP
 Using an on-slab machine on rough terrain;

 Using a unit undersized with respect to height, reach and lifting capacity;
 Lifting large materials that overhang the platform;
 Using a scissor lift where the reach of a boom-type machine is needed; and
 Extending the platform with planks, ladders, or other devices because the machine cannot reach
the required height.
3. Pre-operational/daily inspection of the EWP

The operator must conduct a pre-operational/daily inspection of the EWP (see Annexure 1: Pre-
Operational/Daily Inspection). These inspections must be conducted in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications, usually found in the service log book. Check the following:
 Each section of EWP’s logbook, whether it contains -

- records of regular service checks;
- pre-operation checklist; and
- records of any faults or defects – If a service is overdue, do not use the machine.
 Safe working load (SWL) – it must be clearly marked on the platform. Estimate the total weight of
materials and employees to be carried, including all PPE, to ensure that the SWL is not exceeded.
If the SWL are exceeded, it could lead to a structural failure to the boom or the machine could tip
over.
 A visual inspection must be conducted of mechanical systems, fluid levels and safety equipment
to ensure that it is securely in place and in operating condition.
4. Use the EWP

4.1. Place / set up the EWP
Once the risk assessment, site inspection and pre-operation inspection are completed, the EWP must
be set up. To decide where the EWP must be set up, the stability and safety of the EWP must be
checked in relation to use at the site. Consider the following:
 The area must be flat and able to stand the weight of the EWP. If ground is loose/unstable, the
required ground cover must be used, e.g. steel plates.
 Ground bearing capacity at the work position and along the route to and from it:
- Is there enough space for outriggers to be deployed?
- Are spreader plates required?
 The work area must be checked for manholes, potholes and obstructions.
 The EWP must be set up as close as possible to the work required to be done.
 Appropriate safe signs and, notices must be displayed.
 Barricades and road marker cones must be placed along the side of the EWP.
 If the EWP does not have outriggers/stabilisers, one pair of its wheels must be chocked by placing
suitable obstructions against each wheel to prevent it from moving.
 If the EWP have outriggers, the front wheel must be chocked and the outriggers set onto a firm
surface:
- Clear the area before lowering outriggers/stabilisers.
- Do not rearrange outriggers while EWP is elevated – it will render the EWP unstable and it
may overturn.
 If the EWP is being set up on a sloping surface, the outriggers/stabilisers must be positioned on
the lower sloping side first.
 Communication systems must be agreed between operators and supervisors/other employees.
 Limits for safe operation must be established, e.g. maximum wind speed.
 Does the EWP have to pass beneath any overhead power lines? If so, there must be enough
clearance and the area must be demarcated.
 If the EWP has to be lifted into position by a crane, the weight must be known and the lifting points
well indicated.
 Measures must be taken to ensure that, if the EWP has to operate on elevated floor slabs, it will
not run off the edge.
 Other traffic must be separated from the work area, e.g. delivery vehicles. Ensure that the EWP
does not protrude into roads or other transport routes.
 Permits must be obtained and complied with where applicable, e.g. chemical plants.
 A rescue plans must be in place.
 All necessary PPE, e.g. safety harnesses must be available and in good working order.
 The work platform must be fitted with toe boards or other suitable barriers.
 Anchor points for the lanyards must be rechecked – they must not be bent/broken and of the
correct length from their anchor points on the EWP.
 The employees must be clear of the basket and boom while the basket is being lowered to the
entry position.
 Alternative work methods or equipment must be assessed before operating near a steep slope or
edge, e.g. can barriers be provided.
 If the EWP is required to work in the vicinity of an excavation or embankment, a competent person
must evaluate the possibility of slip or collapse of the supporting surface.
4.2. Start-up check
Before commencing with the work, a further check is conducted to ensure that all the
controls/movements of the machine are functioning correctly.
The following is checked:
 Each of the ground control levers

 The emergency lowering system
 The platform/basket.
4.3. Operating an EWP
For the specific EWP in use, the operator must be familiar with the –
 manufacturer’s operating manual;

 manufacturer’s warning/caution signs on the machine;
 location of all emergency controls and procedures; and
 daily maintenance checks to perform.
To ensure safe operation of EWP, the following must be considered:
 The EWP must be operated in accordance with the working crew’s instruction or signals.
 The working crew may operate the EWP themselves, provided they hold a valid certificate of
competence or license.
 Use of railings or planks, ladders or any other device on the work platform for achieving additional
height is prohibited.
 Defects or malfunctions that become evident during operation must be reported immediately and
use of the platform must be stopped until corrections have been made.
 The altering or disabling of safety devices or interlocks is prohibited.
 EWPs may not be -
- used to push/pull;
- tied to a building; or
- linked/joined together to form a bridge.
 Before each elevation of the work platform, the operator must -
- ensure that outriggers and stabilisers are used, if the manufacturer's instructions require their
use;
- ensure that gates or openings are closed;
- ensure that employees maintain a firm footing on the platform while working on it, unless
they are secured by safety harness and lanyard devices fixed to manufacturer-approved
points;
- take care to prevent ropes, electric cords, hoses, etc., from tangling with the work platform
when the platform is being elevated, lowered or moved;
- never use it for any purpose other than that it was designed to perform;
- not use EWP when the wind speed is more than 50 km/h; and
- ensure that the area surrounding the work platform is clear of employees and equipment
before lowering the platform.
 All employees in boom-type EWPs must wear a full body harness and energy absorber type
lanyard attached to an anchorage point in the basket. Other PPE may be required based on the
specific hazards of the task.
 Fuel tanks must not be filled while the engine is running and spillage must be avoided.
 Batteries must not be charged except in an open, well-ventilated area, free of flame, smoking,
spark or fire.
 When working where other vehicles/pedestrians pass or where other persons work, the operating
area must be kept clear and cordoned off by means of cones or barrier and warning signs.
 Never –
- climb out of the EWP while elevated – except in an emergency;
- carry loads on the handrails unless specified by the manufacturer; and
- stand on the handrails – always stand with both feet firmly on the platform floor.
 When working with an EWP on an upper floor of a multi-storey building, ensure that the floor can
stand the weight.
 Lighting must be adequate – be aware of darkened areas or fading daylight.
 If the platform/basket drops slightly for no apparent reason, work must be stopped immediately.
4.4. Use of a Mobile Elevating Work Platform (MEWP)
Apart from the requirements for using an EWP, the following must also be considered regarding the
use of MEWPs:
 The mid and top chains, railing and gate enclosures must be closed before elevating the device.
 The control panel must be turned off after the MEWP has been moved into the final work position
to prevent inadvertent movement thereof.
 The maximum operating weight capacity must not be exceeded.
 MEWPs may not be used as cranes.
 The employee on the platform must be in control of the movement of the platform wherever
possible. Where travelling controls are at ground level, as in the case of a road vehicle, travelling
must be done with the platform lowered and unmanned.
 A safety harness with line attached to a suitable anchor in the platform must be worn by all
employees in the platform, except where the travelling controls are in the platform and the MEWP
is travelling with the platform fully lowered.
 Recharging of batteries on a battery-powered MEWP must be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications in a suitable location.
 The MEWP may not travel with employees in the basket while it is elevated, unless it is designed
for this activity.
4.5. Control panels and interlocks
MEWP control panels require dual activation by the operator to activate the directional (horizontal or
vertical movement) controls:
 Time-delay ramping feature activation controls must not be permitted.

 Controls must be clearly and permanently labelled.
 Traversing controls for powered carriages must have a consistent pressure and must be
weatherproof.
 When multiple controls are provided, it must be arranged to permit operation from only one
control station at a time.
 An emergency stop device must be provided on each end of a powered carriage for interrupting
power to the carriage drive motors.
 The operating control/s must be connected to ensure that, in the event of suspended equipment,
traversing of a carriage is not possible until the suspended portion of the equipment is located at
its uppermost designed position for traversing and is free of contact with the face of the building
or building guides.
 All protective devices and interlocks must be in the proper position to allow traversing of the
carriage.
5. Fail-safe requirements
The safe operation and use of EWPs may be affected by a wide variety of factors. In addition to the
risk assessment, pre-inspection and other requirements, the following must also be considered
regarding the safe use of EWPs:
 A competent person must be available at ground level to lower the platform in the event of
malfunction.
 Where the elevation of the platform is accomplished by -
- an electromechanical assembly, the system is designed to prevent free descent in the event
of a generator or power failure;
- a hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder assembly, the system is equipped to prevent free descent
in the event of failure of a hydraulic or pneumatic line;
- a single hoist cable, the system is protected by a broken-cable safety device, which will
prevent free descent of the platform.
 Where the platform is horizontally extendable beyond the base of the machine, the system is
equipped to prevent descent in the event of failure of a hydraulic or pneumatic line, wire rope or
chain.
 The control system is designed so that a single malfunction in the control system will not result in
unintended machine motion.
 Hydraulically or pneumatically actuated outriggers or stabilisers, or both, are constructed to
prevent retraction in the event of failure of a hydraulic or pneumatic line.
 Control panels require two points of contact by the operator to activate the directional (horizontal
or vertical) controls. The activation mechanism requires continuous physical contact by the
operator during MEWP movement.
Note: Any work platform equipped with a powered elevating assembly must be supplied with clearly
marked emergency lowering means readily accessible from ground or floor level.
6. Moving / Parking an EWP

Special care is required when moving or “mobiling” an EWP because of the greater risk of destabilising
the machine.
 Never move an EWP with its outriggers/stabilisers extended.

 The area must be free of employees.
 All warning devices must be operating.
 Tyres must be inflated to the correct pressure.
 Be alert for pot holes, obstructions and other equipment/machinery.
 All warning devices must function properly.
 Steering movements must be smooth.
 When moving an EWP with an elevated platform, -
- tools, equipment and employees must not exceed the SWL;

- tools must be kept in a tool bag away from the door;
- if the ground is uneven, the EWP must be lowered to increase its stability;
- if the EWP is truck-mounted; tyres must be inflated to the correct pressure; and
- the EWP must not be moved across the slope of a hill unless the slope is extremely gentle (i.e.
1˚ - 2˚).
After moving the EWP –
 all gauges, lights and switches must be checked to ensure that they are functioning correctly;
 emergency stop controls much be checked; and
 the emergency lowering systems must be checked to ensure they are still operational.
6.1. Park the EWP
To prevent accidental movement of the EWP after it has been moved into the final work position, the
control panel must be turned off. The working platform must be lowered to its parking position and
the brakes applied. If it has to be parked on a gradient, the wheels must be chocked. It must only be
activated again during moving/positioning the platform from one work location to the next.
6.2. Store the EWP
EWPs must be stored in a designated area away from high traffic areas and effectively barricaded
where necessary. Baskets must be positioned in such a way as to prevent unauthorised access to the
basket as well as the controls. The basket must be fully lowered to prevent upset during stormy or
windy conditions.
When not in use, all keys must be removed to ensure that it cannot be used by unauthorised
employees. Some EWPs can also be isolated using a security keypad with a designated PIN number.
7. Post-operation safety checks

Once the task is completed, the machine must be checked for any damage, breakages or leaks. The
following must be checked:
 All hydraulic arms – to ensure that they have not been damaged/bent during operation;
 The boom – for dents/cracks in its welds and joints;
 The slew ring – for any bending or other damage;
 The basket – to ensure that it is in good working order and not damaged;
 The outriggers/stabilisers – to ensure that they are in good order; and
 All safety devices – to ensure that they are undamaged and operational.

EWPs are inspected, maintained, repaired and kept in proper working order in accordance with the
manufacturer's maintenance and repair manuals.
EWPs must be inspected by a competent person and the results recorded –
 before being put into operation;

 post-operation;
 at periodic intervals thereafter as prescribed for different types of EWPs; and
 after any occurrence likely to have affected their strength or stability.
Any platform found not to be in safe operating condition is removed from service until it is repaired.
Standard Operating Procedure – Builders’ Hoists
Builders’ hoists are also known as goods lifts, man-lifts or construction elevators. This type of hoist is
commonly used on large-scale construction projects, the purpose being to carry personnel and
materials quickly between the ground and higher levels, or between upper levels.
The builders’ hoist is made up of one or two metallic cages that travel vertically along stacked mast
tower sections. For controlled travel along the mast sections, most modern builders’ hoists use a
motorised rack-and-pinion system mounted onto the mast sections, while some older hoists still use
a system of counterweights.
1. Design and assembly requirements
Builders’ hoists must be designed, constructed, erected, disassembled, inspected, maintained and
operated as specified by the manufacturer or a professional engineer. Ensure –
 compliance with the manufacturer's (or engineer’s) specifications and limitations applicable to the
operation of hoists;
 that no person enters a hoist way or similar enclosure in which the hoist is installed and
functioning unless the power source operating the systems is locked out; and
 that rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds and special hazard warnings or
instructions are posted on structures and platforms.
Builders’ hoists may only be assembled on an appropriate load-bearing surface, taking allowable
surface stress into consideration. Means must be in place to allow for the horizontal positioning of the
hoist at the base frame. In order to ensure that the hoist remains level through the entire hoist way,
it is essential to provide for balanced travel mechanically by using two or more masts.
Ties may only be performed on load-bearing components of structure that are able to accommodate
the resulting stress reliably. In the event of a deviation from the anchoring raster of the operating
instructions, or doubt about the load-bearing capacity of the tie surface, a static test is required.
Each hoist must have a load chart in the manual, specifying the rated (maximum) capacities for every
permissible configuration and situation. The load chart also specifies the hoist’s operational
limitations and the conditions necessary for safe operation. This is essential information in connection
with the extension of the life cycle of the hoist. In no circumstances must the hoist be operated beyond
the maximum safe working load.
Builders’ hoists must be equipped with a platform of fixed dimension. Any platform alterations must
be performed in such a manner that the side protectors remain at the platform edges. The surface of
the platform must be stable and slip-resistant.
The following information of the manufacturer must be posted permanently on the builders’ hoist, in
a conspicuous place:
 Name and address of the manufacturer or vendor;

 Classification type;
 Serial number or lot number;
 Year of manufacture;
 Lift speed (m/s);
 Maximum assembly height;
 Maximum allowable free-standing height (m);
 Maximum allowable wind speed during assembly and disassembly (m/s);
 Maximum allowable wind speed during operation (m/s);
 Details for power supply; and
 Allowable load and allowable number of persons, as well as the required distribution of weight,
corresponding to the specific configuration.
2. Operating requirements
Ensure continued safe operation:
 Barricade areas around hoist operations to prevent injury to pedestrians and other employees;
 implement precautionary measures such as warnings, barriers or flashing lights as appropriate
when other moving equipment is present;
 Post rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, special hazard warnings, operating
rules, signal systems and operating instructions conspicuously at the operator's station for the
hoist;
 Protect all entrances of the hoist ways with substantial gates or bars, equipped with a latching
device, guarding the full width of the landing entrance; and
 Paint all hoist way entrance bars and gates with diagonal contrasting colours, such as black and
yellow stripes.
The hoist operator must test the functioning of the end switch daily, before the beginning of the
workday, and make a visual assessment of the entire hoist, including the hoist way, the ties and the
information and warning signs. The operator must ensure that, during hoist operation –
 control of the hoist is carried out only from the platform;

 the emergency release is not used during normal operations;
 the maximum number of persons and the maximum allowable load is not exceeded;
 hoist ramps and other components of the enclosure are only opened at access points;
 employees are not permitted to ride on top of hoists, except for purposes of inspection,
maintenance, installation or dismantling work;
 in the event of any defect that might compromise safety, operation is halted;
 correction of defects is only carried out by qualified and authorised personnel; and
 no one is permitted underneath the platform during operation and this area is kept clear.
The elevator machine and controls must be housed in for protection against accidents and the
weather, and the door kept locked against unauthorised entry when the operator is not in attendance.
Internal combustion engines are not permitted for direct drive.
The following safety devices must be in place to ensure the safety of employees during operation:
 An overload device is required, which warns the hoist operator and shuts down all operations.
 In the event of the malfunction of the end switch, a broken pulley, or a broken pinion, the hoist
must not be able to become separated from its track work.
 If the drive system fails, some means is required to bring the hoist to the lowest landing position,
or some other landing position that allows persons located on the platform to exit safely. This can
only be ensured if the emergency procedure can be operated by a single person.
 A possible crash of the hoist must be prevented using, for example, a speed-dependent safety
catch.
 Unintended opening of the side enclosure protectors of the platform, and of the access point
safety features, must be prevented. This may be achieved, for example, by requiring that opening
be allowed only after performing two independent actions.
 Safeguards, which may not be circumvented, must be in place at all access points. A mechanical
safeguard must be provided between access point safeguards and the hoist ramp – folding ramps
extending to the structure must not exceed 20º from horizontal.
 Normal and final terminal stopping devices must be provided.
 An emergency stop switch must be provided in the car and marked "Stop."
2.1. Personnel hoists
 Personnel hoists must provide for access and egress on all multi-storey buildings where vertical
travel exceeds twenty (20) metres from a ground-level access point.
 Hoist towers outside the structure must be enclosed the full height on the side or sides used for
entry to and egress from the structure.
 Towers inside of structures must be enclosed the full height on all four sides.
 Towers must be anchored to the structure at intervals not exceeding eight (8) metres.
 Hoist way doors or gates must be not less than 1.85 metres high, with mechanical locks that
cannot be operated from the landing side, accessible only to persons in the car.
 Cars must be permanently enclosed on all sides and on top, except sides used for entry and exit
and that have car gates or doors.
 A door or gate must be provided at each entrance to the car and must protect the full width and
height of the car entrance opening.
 Overhead protective covering made of wood or other solid material of equivalent strength must
be provided on the top of every personnel hoist. Don't allow barrows or material to be moved on
or in the personnel hoist.
 Doors or gates must have electric contacts that do not allow movement of the hoist when the
door or gate is open.
 A signal device must be installed in the elevator car and only operated by an attendant who gives
signals for operation, when transporting employees.
 An electrical pushbutton signalling device or other approved signalling system must be provided
at each floor landing connected to an enunciator in the car. The signal code must be posted
adjacent to the signal device at each work level, including the operator's work level. All wording
must be black on a white card, in large clear letters.
2.2. Material hoists
 Operating rules must be established and posted at the operator's station of the hoist. Such rules
must include signal system and allowable line speed for various loads. Rules and notices must be
posted on the car frame or crosshead in a conspicuous location, including the statement "No riders
allowed".
 All entrances of the hoist ways must be protected by substantial gates or bars, equipped with a
latching device, guarding the full width of the landing entrance.
 Overhead protective covering of wood or other solid material of equivalent strength must be
provided on the top of every material hoist cage or platform to prevent objects falling on the
employees loading or unloading the hoist.
 The operator's station of a hoisting machine must be provided with overhead protection
equivalent to tight planking not less than 50 mm thick. The support for the overhead protection
must be of equal strength.
 When a hoist tower is enclosed, it must be enclosed on all sides for its entire height with a screen
enclosure. When it is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car must be totally enclosed (caged) on
all sides for the full height between the floor and the overhead protective covering.
 Materials in transit do not exceed the area of the platform floor.
 Materials in transit are to be placed on the platform so as to exclude the dangers of shifting or
falling over. To this end, additional safety measures must be taken as necessary.
3. Inspection and testing
Following assembly and erection of hoists, and before being put in service, an inspection and test of
all functions and safety devices must be made under the supervision of a competent person,
appointed in writing. A similar inspection and test is required following major alteration of an existing
installation. All hoists must be inspected and tested at not more than three-month intervals.
Hoist inspection and maintenance records are maintained and kept on file for the duration of the
project.
Standard Operating Procedure - Machine Guarding
The first step in effectively guarding machines is the identification of machines and machine points
that need to be guarded. The rule of thumb in the case of machine guarding is that points of operation
and power transmission should be guarded. In some cases it is however necessary to guard entire
machines, such as robotic welders.
1. Guarding Machines
In general, there are basic three areas of dangerous moving parts that require guarding:
 The point of operation

- The point where work such as cutting, shaping or boring is performed on the material.
 Power transmission apparatus
- Those components of a mechanical system such as flywheels, pulleys, belts, connecting rods,
couplings, cams, spindles, chains, cranks and gears that transmit energy to the part of a
machine performing the work.
 Other moving parts
- Those parts of a machine that move while the machine is working, such as reciprocating,
rotating and transverse moving parts, as well as feed mechanisms and auxiliary parts of the
machine.
Typical machine parts and features that are generally guarded include:
 Clutches
 Collars
 Couplings
 Driving belts, ropes and chains
 Friction drums
 Gears
 Key or bolts on revolving shafts
 Other shaft and spindle ends projecting more than a quarter of its diameter
 Pulleys
 Set screws
 Shafts
 Sprockets
 Square projecting shaft and spindle ends
 The undersides of driving belts, ropes and chains above passages/workplaces
 Wheel.
LHWP2-SOP-M1 Page 1 of 5
The basic types of hazardous mechanical motions and actions that must be guarded to prevent contact
are:
 Motions
- Rotation (including in-running nip points);
- Reciprocation;
- Transversion (cross-directional)
 Actions
- Cutting
- Punching
- Shearing
- Bending
The organisation must ensure that all machines and machine points that require guarding are
identified. A risk assessment forms the basis for identifying guard points. Once the guarding
requirements have been identified, the appropriate guards for eliminating or reducing the identified
hazards have to be selected. Select the guard most appropriate to the requirement while keeping in
mind that the guarding of one hazard should not create another.
Machine guards, in order to achieve maximum efficiency, must:
 Prevent contact
- To ensure that no part of an operator’s and/or maintenance person’s body is able to make
contact with dangerous moving parts, the possibility for any person’s body to be in close
vicinity to hazardous moving parts must be eliminated.
 Be secure
- Guards must be tamper-proof and not easily removable. Guards and safety devices must be
made of durable material that is able to withstand normal use conditions and must be firmly
secured to the machine.
 Do not create new hazards
- Guards that create new hazards, such as jagged edges or unfinished surfaces, defeat the
purpose of machine guarding. For example, sharp guard edges must be eliminated through
rolling or bolting.
 Prevent objects from falling into the machine
- Guards must prevent objects from accidentally falling into a machine’s moving parts.
 Do not interfere
- Operators may not override, disregard or even remove guards that hinder and prevent them
from performing a job quickly and comfortably.
 Allow safe in-operation servicing and maintenance
- In-operation servicing and maintenance that may be required, such as lubrication, must be
able to be performed with guards in place. This can be achieved by, for instance, locating oil
reservoirs outside the guard, with a line indicating the lubrication point.
Selecting the correct guard is, after identifying the need for machine guarding, the most crucial aspect
of machine guarding. In this respect it is useful and recommended that expert assistance and advice
be obtained in selecting the best possible guard for the job. Companies or individuals specialising in
machine guarding are usually up to date with the latest developments in the field of machine guarding
and would be able to give advice on which guard would best suit a need. This is especially important
when guards are used in combination with one another.
Once the required guards have been identified, they have to be sourced. It can be sourced from a
number of suppliers or can be manufactured in-house, but is not recommended. Guarding companies
spend lots of time and money on researching and developing properly engineered and manufactured
guards. Purchase guards from a manufacturer with a proven track record. This not only provides
assurance that the guards have been soundly manufactured, but also ensures that guards are specific
to the purpose for which they are required.
All machine guards must be painted the same colour. Use a highly visible colour (like yellow) so that
it can be clearly seen when a guard has been removed or when it is not in its proper place. The surfaces
behind the guard must preferably also be painted a different colour, so that when the guard has been
removed, the exposed colour is clearly visible.
Only install guards according to the manufacturer’s instructions and specifications. Incorrectly
installed guards may turn out to be useless and not provide the required protection when required.
Every installed guard must be tested to ensure that it functions as required and expected before
normal operation of the machine is resumed. An ineffective or incorrect guard should immediately be
adjusted if possible or replaced if not.
2. Operating Guarded Machinery and Tools

Having the best available machine guards unfortunately does not guarantee safe machine operation.
Operators have to understand what guards are for, how they work and how they must be used,
handled and maintained in order to ensure their ongoing integrity.
Improperly used and neglected guards themselves become almost as dangerous as the machine or
machine part they are meant to protect the user from. It is therefore crucial that operators use and
maintain guards as intended and required to realise the maximum protection from them.
The two types of employees exposed to guarded hazardous machine parts are generally the operators
and maintenance personnel. Both of these groups of employees therefore have to be aware of what
they are required to do in relation to guarded machines. Operators of guarded machinery are by far
the most exposed group of employees in any organisation. It is therefore critical that operators of
guarded machines are familiar with, understand and comply with the machine guarding practices that
are intended to protect them.
2.1. Select the appropriate guard for the task
Guard selection is only applicable for some multi-purpose machines on which guards are
interchangeable and that are for instance able to perform numerous tasks by interchanging bits, such
as a lathe or drill press. Selecting the appropriate guard for a job is critical as the use of an
inappropriate guard could not only endanger the health and safety of the user, but also of anybody in
close vicinity of the machine.
Guard selection must be based on a task risk assessment, which studies the risks of performing a
particular task before the task is started. Guards must not be used for tasks for which they were not
designed and intended, even if it appears as if it may be possible to perform the task safely with it.
2.2. Check the guard
Guards must be checked before being used to identify any defects that may exist. Pre-use checks are
an important part of proactive risk management as the majority of potentially dangerous faults and
damage that would threaten a guard’s integrity and effectiveness and render a guard unfit and unsafe
for use can be detected during such checks. Check the following, as a minimum, before using guards:
 All guards present, in place, properly fitted and securely fastened?

 In good condition and not bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Start and stop controls clean, accessible and not damaged?
Report any defected to the Safety Officer immediately. The Safety Officer marks the guard as “Not
Safe for Use” and ensures that it is removed to prevent it from being used accidentally. The machine
on which the guard is required is also marked as “Not Safe for Use” unless a replacement guard is
available.
The Safety Officer takes the necessary steps to have the guard repaired, or replaced if it cannot be
repaired and inspects the guard once it has been received back from maintenance and only makes it
available for use again once it satisfies all the inspection criteria.
Having an intact and in place guard does not necessarily mean that no incidents will result from the
use of the machine. Active input and awareness from users are required to ensure the safe use of
machinery and the effectiveness of guards.
2.3. Perform the task
Operators may not bypass or remove guards while operating guarded machines. Explain the
importance of every guard to all operators in detail. Operators must be clearly made aware of the
possible consequences that they may suffer if they ever bypass/remove guards. The addressed
consequences must not only cover the obvious injuries they may suffer, but must also include the
possible disciplinary steps they may face if they bypass or remove guards.
Operators must immediately stop the machine whenever a guard becomes loose or is damaged.
Emergency stops must be used to immediately stop suddenly unguarded or not efficiently guarded
machines, if it is not safe to let the machine run its normal course with a routine shutdown. Machines
with loose or damage guards may only be used again once the loose/damaged guard has been
properly secured or repaired/replaced as may be required.
3. Servicing and Maintaining Guarded Machinery and Tools

All machinery and tools must only be serviced and maintained while properly locked/tagged out. This
is however not always possible and in some instances in-operation servicing and maintenance may be
required.
When safeguarded machinery and tools are in need of servicing and maintenance and such servicing
and maintenance has to be performed while the machine/tool is in operation, the feature or part of
the machine/tool to be serviced/maintained must be locked/tagged out if possible. Where such
partial lock-out/tag-out of the machine/tool is not possible, the servicing/maintenance may not be
performed. The required maintenance may only be carried out when the machine/tool can be taken
out of operation temporarily in order to allow for it to be properly and effectively locked/tagged out
to prevent servicing and maintenance personnel from being harmed by hazardous energies.
Where provision has been made for servicing and maintenance to be carried out without having to
lock/tag the machine/tool out or remove a guard to reach the point where the servicing/maintenance
has to be performed, such as lubrication and the changing of blades/bits, the required servicing and
maintenance may be carried out without having to lock/tag the machine/tool out. Service and
maintenance personnel may however never remove guards preventing access to hazardous
machine/tool features/parts that have not been locked/tagged out properly.
When a guarded feature/part of a machine/tool has to be serviced or maintained, the following rules
apply:
 Lock/tag the machine/tool out in accordance with the procedure for the Control of Hazardous
Energy (Lock-out/Tag-out);
 Confirm the effectiveness of the lock-out/tag-out before commencing with the
servicing/maintenance of the machine/tool;
 Remove the required guard(s) to enable the required servicing/maintenance to be done;
 Carry out the required service/maintenance activities in accordance with requirements and
specifications;
 Replace the removed guards, ensure that they are properly positioned and securely attached/
fastened;
 Conduct the required tests to confirm the effectiveness of the service/maintenance performed;
 The lock-out/tag-out is removed and the machine/tool returned to normal use and operation if it
is functioning properly.
Standard Operating Procedure - Conveyors
Conveyors are used to transport materials horizontally, vertically, at an angle, or around curves.
Hazards depend on the type of conveyer, the material conveyed, the location of the conveyor, and
how close the conveyer is to employees.
Typically, employees do not spend much time around conveyors. Most of the work done around
conveyors involves inspections, cleaning up or maintenance. Generally this work occurs infrequently
and the belt is (usually) turned off when it does occur. Also, walkways next to conveyors are used to
access crushing and screening plants. Conveyors eliminate or reduce manual material handling tasks,
but they introduce amputation hazards associated with mechanical motion.
1. Conveyor Hazards
Conveyor‐related injuries often involve an employee’s body parts getting caught in nip points or shear
points when:
 Cleaning or maintaining a conveyor, especially when it is still operating.

 Reaching into an in‐going nip point to remove debris or to free jammed material.
 A cleaning cloth or clothing gets caught in the conveyor and pulls fingers or hands into the
conveyor.
Other conveyor‐related hazards include improperly guarded gears, sprocket and chain drives,
horizontal and vertical shafting, belts and pulleys, and power transmission couplings. Overhead
conveyors warrant special attention because most of the drive train is exposed. Employees have been
injured or killed while working in areas underneath conveyors and in areas around lubrication fittings,
tension adjusters, and other equipment with hazardous energy sources.
Because conveyor hazards vary, each conveyor should be evaluated to determine what primary
safeguarding methods and energy control (lockout/tag-out) practices are required. Some conveyors
need mechanical guards to protect employees from nip points, shear points, and other moving parts,
including power‐transmission apparatus. Guards may include barriers, enclosures, grating, fences, or
other obstructions that prevent physical contact with operating machine components, such as point
of operation areas, belts, gears, sprockets, chains, and other moving parts.
2. Typical Conveyor Hazards and Safeguarding Methods

2.1. Belt Conveyors
Hazards:
• belt‐conveyor drive mechanisms and conveying mediums;

• conveyor take‐up and discharge ends;
• where the belt or chain enters or exits the in‐going nip point;
• where the belt wraps around pulleys;
• snub rollers where the belt changes direction, such as take-ups;
• where multiple conveyors are adjoined; and
• on transfers or deflectors used with belt conveyors.
Controls:
• Nip and shear points must be safeguarded.

• Side guards (spill guards) can prevent contact with power transmission components, in‐going nip
points, and the conveying medium.
• Secondary safeguards include railings or fencing, or safeguarding by distance (location), and
hazard awareness devices, such as prestart‐up signals and warning signs.
2.2. Screw Conveyors
Hazards:
Screw conveyors are troughs with a revolving shaft with a spiral or twisted plate. In‐going nip points
for the entire length of the screw conveyor exist between the revolving shaft and trough. Because the
trough may not be covered and the conveyor may be located at or near floor level, screw conveyors
can be particularly dangerous.
Controls:
• A screw conveyor housing must completely enclose moving elements (screw mechanism, power
transmission apparatus), except for loading and discharge points. Permanently affixed grids or
polycarbonate can be installed for visibility purposes to allow the operator to see the operation.
• Alternatively, trough side walls should be high enough to prevent employees from reaching into
or falling into the trough.
• If open troughs are used, employees must be protected by secondary safeguarding methods, such
as a railing or fence. Feed loading and discharge points can be guarded by enclosures, screening,
grating, or some other interruption across the openings which allow the passage of materials but
do not allow entry of a part of the body.
2.3. Chain Conveyors
Hazards:
Nip points occur when a chain contacts a sprocket. Nip points also occur at drives, terminals, take‐ups
(automatic take‐ups may also have shear points), and idlers. Clothing, jewellery, and long hair may
also get entangled and caught in the moving chain conveyor.
Controls:
• Enclose moving chains if possible.
• If moving chains cannot be enclosed without impairing the functioning of the conveyor, barrier
guards can be installed around moving parts, or nip and shear points can be eliminated by a guard
at the nip point or shear point.
• Other secondary safeguarding options include safeguarding by distance (location) and the use of
awareness devices.
2.4. Roller Conveyors
Hazards:
Roller conveyors are used to move material on a series of parallel rollers that are either powered or
gravity-fed. Powered roller conveyors can snag and pull hands, hair, and clothing into the area
between the rollers and the stationary components of the conveyor.
In‐going nip points may exist between the drive chain and sprockets; between belt and carrier rollers;
and at terminals, drives, take‐ups, idlers, and snub rollers.
Controls:
• Enclose roller conveyors if possible.

• Install permanent barrier guards to protect employees from nip and shear points. For example,
the unused section of rollers closest to the employee should be guarded when transporting small
items on a roller conveyor that do not require the use of the entire roller width.
• Eliminate or minimise projections from the roller through the use of pop‐up rollers.
• Other secondary safeguarding options include safeguarding by distance (location) and the use of
awareness devices.
3. Secondary Controls for Conveyors

Secondary safeguarding methods, work practices, and equipment can be used to supplement primary
safeguarding, or alone or in combination when primary safeguarding methods are not feasible.
Caution secondary methods are less protective than primary methods:
• Safeguarding by safe distance (by location) — where possible, locate unguarded moving parts
away from employees or employees away from unguarded moving parts.
• Use awareness devices such as warning signs or lights.
• Allow only qualified employees to operate or maintain conveyors.
• Visually inspect the entire conveyor and immediate work area prior to start‐up to ensure that
operation will not cause a hazard.
• Inspect and test conveyor safety mechanisms, such as alarms, emergency stops, and safeguarding
methods.
• Install emergency stop devices on conveyors to enable employees to shut off the equipment in an
emergency.
• Install only emergency devices that they cannot be overridden from other locations.
• When conveyors are arranged in a series, all should automatically stop whenever one stops.
• Emergency stop controls must require manual resetting before resuming conveyor operation.
• Install clearly marked, unobstructed emergency stop buttons or pull cords within easy reach of
employees.
• Provide continuously accessible conveyor belts with emergency stop cables that extend the entire
length of the conveyor belt to allow access to the cable from any point along the belt.
• Ensure that conveyor controls or power sources can accept a lockout/tag-out device to allow safe
maintenance.
4. Operating a Conveyor
4.1. Training
During the training of conveyor operators, care should be taken to ensure that each operator
understands the safe operation of the conveyor and all safety precautions, including:
• the method of stopping and starting the conveyor;

• the hazards in the course of normal working of the conveyor;
• the hazards from bad practices, inattention, and misuse;
• the purpose of the guard or safety device, and how the guard or device may fail; and
• informing the person in charge if any faults or defects arise, and the danger to the operator in
attempting to correct any faults.
During the training period a conveyor operator should be closely supervised by a worker with a
thorough knowledge of conveyors to check they adhere to the following requirements:
• Ensure that all personnel are equipped with the correct Personal Protection Equipment (PPE)
relevant to the task and work area. Using PPE shall be strictly monitored by the appropriate safety
officer.
• Ensure that all STOP/START and emergency controls are clearly marked and that maintenance
staff are familiar with the location of these safety systems.
• Keep the area around the belt clean and tidy and apply good housekeeping practices to minimise
potential hazards.
• Lock out, isolate and tag all areas before working on any part of the conveyor.
• Do not climb on, over or crawl under any conveyor.
• Do not ride on any conveyor unless the conveyor is approved and licensed for man-riding
purposes.
• The only action that can be undertaken with the belt in motion is tracking of the belt.
• Ensure that pre-start alarm is working correctly and if not, isolate the conveyor and request that
it be repaired.
4.2. Pre-Start warning
All conveyors must be equipped with an audible and visual system that provides a pre-start warning
along the entire length of the conveyor. These include horns, sirens, flashing lights or strobes, or a
combination of two or more warning signals. The start warnings are activated for a period after a start
is requested, but before initiating motion of the conveyor.
4.3. Basic checklist prior to re-starting a conveyor
Ensure that:
• nobody is working on the belt;

• guards have been re-fitted and that all the safety interlocks are operational;
• the area is clean and clear of equipment and /or debris or spillages;
• all the firefighting and fire suppression devices and equipment are in place and operational;
• all clamps are removed or released;
• all other spragging devices have been removed; and
• the take-up system is operational.
4.4. Working with portable/movable conveyors
• Use only weatherproof electrical components.

• Make sure power cables are located where they will not be walked on or run over.
• Make sure that sideboards are high enough to prevent large items from falling and smaller items
from being thrown by the wind.
• Chock the wheels on trucks and rail cars that are being loaded or emptied by portable conveyors.
• Do not exceed the rated load capacity of the conveyor.
• Install barrier guards, guardrails and/or mark the ground to indicate operating area of the
conveyor.
4.5. Housekeeping standards
Tools, rocks or rubbish lying around can lead to trip hazards, fires, conveyor damage and so on.
Maintaining good housekeeping standards involves:
• Any rubbish (rags, tramp metal and so on) that is deposited around a conveyor system is to be
cleaned up immediately.
• Any spillage should be cleaned up as soon as is practicable. (This could be at the end of a shift
after crushing and conveying is finished or during a maintenance period when the conveyors
aren’t running)
• All tools required for maintenance should have racks or holders etc., so that they are not lying
around on walkways or leaning loosely against handrails.
5. Conveyor Maintenance
Equipment must be designed in such a way that maintenance (adjustments, greasing, cleaning,
unjamming, unclogging, etc.) can be accomplished away from danger zones. Therefore, all adjustment
and grease points must be accessible without having to remove guards or other protective devices.
When it is necessary to open or remove guards, or even to neutralise protective devices in order to
carry out a maintenance procedure, safeguards must be implemented to ensure employee safety in
the areas transformed into danger zones.
When maintenance is required on a conveyor system, it is important to remember the danger

presented by residual energy stored within the system and to address this adequately. Thus it is
necessary to isolate the stored energy from the work area or to completely release all stored energy
from the system, so that work can be performed in a safe environment. When any work is carried out
on the conveyor, whether to the belting, components, or to the structure, the responsible person
must ensure that the system is properly locked out, following the prescribed lockout procedures. This
can be done by applying clamps to isolate this energy from the work area or releasing the energy
applied by the take-up system. The system tensions may also be relieved by the controlled lifting of
the counterweight, or the controlled pay-out of the take-up winch system.
Where belt clamps are utilised, these must be securely anchored to the structure. This applies to both
permanent clamps and temporary belt pulling clamps. Belt clamps must be inspected and tested
before attachment to ensure that they are able to withstand the belt tensions in the localised area.
The prohibition of work on moving machinery relates to tasks such as belt cleaning, house-keeping
and the removal of spillage at localised points. Where build-up of carry-back material occurs on the
face of pulleys and idler shells, the removal of this build-up is only permitted when the conveyor
system has stopped and been safely locked out. To keep the pulleys and rollers clean, suitable
mechanical devices must be installed.
In instances where work needs to be carried out on the conveyor while the belt is running, such as
belt training or the adjustment of material stream deflectors, it is important that this be performed
by competent teams, in accordance with approved risk assessments and safe working procedures
pertaining to the task being performed. While undertaking the necessary task, it’s important for
operators to be on the alert and to stop the conveyor by activating a pull key or an emergency stop
button which must be readily accessible.
Standard Operating Procedure - Hand Tools
Working with hand tools poses the threat of injury to the user. The injury may result due to improper
use of the tool or could be the result of a substandard or improperly maintained tool. It is therefore
essential that hand tools are properly maintained and used in order to prevent serious injuries and
damage to equipment.
1. Select the Right Tool

Selecting the right tool for a job is critical as the use of an inappropriate tool could not only endanger
the health and safety of the user, but also of anybody in close vicinity of the worksite. Also, tasks are
more easily performed when the correct tool is used.
However, because of the versatility of hand tools and the vast variety of different and similar tools
available, selecting the right tool for the job is not an easy task. This is further complicated when a
tool needs to be selected if the specifics of the job are not known. It is almost impossible to select the
correct tool if it is not known what the selection should be based on.
The activities to which hand tools can be applied are identified and the appropriate tool for performing
each activity is selected. A tool may not be used to attempt to perform a task it cannot be used for.
Tools are designed for specific purposes and should only be used for their designed purpose. Obtain
the correct tool if it is not available.
Tool selection should be based on a task risk assessment, which studies the risks of performing a
particular task before the task is started. A correctly performed risk assessment will reveal the
different activities involved in performing the task together with those activities to which hand tools
can be applied.
It is useful to consider the following in addition to the relevant risk assessment in selecting a tool.
Answering these questions will reveal which tool would be the most appropriate for performing the
task:
 What will the tool be used for - will the task involve drilling, cutting, sanding, sawing, etc.?
 What material will be worked - steel/aluminium/wood/concrete/etc.?
 Where will it be used - in- or outdoors, at floor level or an elevated position, etc.?
 The environmental conditions - is it dusty, cold, wet, etc.?
 How will it be used - tools may only be used for what they were designed to do as specified by the
manufacturer.
 Who will be using it - is the operator trained, strong enough, etc. to use the tool?
 When will it be used - will it be used during the day or at night?
A properly designed, high-quality hand tool fits the hand comfortably and is fit for the purpose for
which it is to be used. It enables an improved work posture that assists in the prevention and
LHWP2-SOP-T1 Page 1 of 5
reduction of work-related stress, resulting in an improvement in work quality. Such hand tools can be
used to their full extent, realise a return on investment and ensure fewer and less severe accidents.
2. Pre-use Checks
Hand tools are checked before being used to identify any defects that may exist. Pre-use checks are
an important part of proactive risk management as the majority of potentially dangerous faults that
would render a tool unfit and unsafe for use can be detected during such checks. At least the following
is checked before using any hand tools:

 Clean?
 Moving joints adequately oiled/greased?
 Handle in place, properly fit and securely fastened?
 Handle appropriate to protect user’s hands?
 Handle not cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Tool not bent, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Hammer/hammered tool (chisel/punch/etc.) head not mushroomed?
 Cutting/screwing edges sharp?
 Pliers/wrench jaws square and undamaged?
Report any detected defects to the Safety Officer immediately – who will mark the tool as “Not Safe
for Use” and ensure that it is removed from the storage area to prevent it from being used
accidentally. Once the tool is repaired or replaced, it is only made available for use again once it
satisfies all the inspection criteria.
Having a safe tool does not necessarily mean that the activities performed with the tool will also be
safe.
3. Use Hand Tools

The selected hand tools can be used now that it has been established that they are safe for use. A few
preparatory steps must however be taken before the equipment is used.
3.1. Take equipment to worksite
The dangers posed by hand tools taken to the worksite must always be borne in mind. Hand tools are
carried only by their handles. A tool belt is used to hold tools in and keep the sheaths/covers/holders
on tools at all times when carrying them or while they are not being used. Tool belts contribute to
injury prevention by facilitating the proper and safe carrying of hand tools, and preventing tools from
injuring the user if the user or the tool should fall. Keep the following in mind when selecting a tool
belt - a tool belt should –
 be strong enough for the tools that are being carried;

 protect the tools from damage;
 have sufficient pouches;

 hold tools firmly with adequately deep pouches; and
 not have pouches that are too deep, preventing easy access to and a firm grip on tools.
Sharp tools not held in the tool belt, such as chisels, punches, knives, hatchets and axes, are carried
with their sharp edges pointed away from the body and covered by the sheath or cover supplied by
the manufacturer.
3.2. Prepare worksite
It is crucial to prepare the worksite properly before starting work. The worksite must be safe for the
workers working there, and any passers-by, workers or otherwise, must be protected from hazards
present as a result of the work being done at the site.
The worksite must be cleaned and dried as well as is possible. Debris and clutter pose slipping and
tripping hazards and debris could become projectiles. Temporary lighting is installed if the worksite is
not lit well enough to work safely.
If required, a workbench or similar flat area on which to work is erected once the worksite has been
cleaned and tidied. Stabilise the workbench to ensure that it will not wobble or become unbalanced
while being used.
Bystanders and people who could possibly pass by the worksite must be protected if it is possible that
dust, flying debris, etc. could be created. Appropriate signage and safety symbols are erected around
the worksite to warn passers-by of the work being done and the hazards involved.
Barricades and shields are erected to prevent passers-by and unauthorised persons from entering the
worksite and to protect such persons from dust, flying debris, etc. that could possibly be generated.
3.3. Execute the task
The task can begin now that the equipment has been found to be safe and all the necessary
preparations have been made. Having safe equipment and having completed the necessary
preparations do not guarantee a safe job without any incidents. Users need to exercise great care
while operating the equipment in order to prevent incident from occurring.
The object that will be worked is secured with clamps, a vice or other fixing equipment if it is loose
and can possibly move while it is being worked. This will prevent the object from accidentally moving
and causing damage or injuries while being worked.
Take up a position at a point that provides a stable platform from which to work. An unstable working
platform could cause a fall that could result not only in injury, especially if the person is using a tool,
but also in uneven or excessive application force, which could result in damage to the tool and its
attachments and poses an associated health and safety risk.
The task is started, observing the following simple hand tool work rules to reduce the likelihood of
health and safety incidents and equipment damage:
 Use the right tool for the task.

 Do not use tools for tasks they are not supposed to be used for.
 Use tools only as they were intended and designed to be used.
 Use the correct size tool for the job.
 Grip the tool properly while using it.
 Ensure that there is a large enough open area around the workspace to be able to safely wield
larger tools such as sledge hammers and axes.
 Do not use damaged tools and maintain tools in a generally good condition throughout the day.
 Do not keep or carry sharp tools in clothing pockets.
 Cut and drive sharp tools away from the body.
 Do not try to catch sharp tools if they fall.
 Secure tools from falling down while working at an elevated position.
 Always wear the appropriate PPE for the task being performed and the tool being used.
 Secure objects while working on them and do not hold them in one hand while working on them
with a tool in the other hand.
 Do not allow anyone to clean the work surface while it is being worked on.
The following tool-specific work rules must be observed while using them to reduce the likelihood of
health and safety incidents and equipment damage:
 Wrenches/Spanners:
- Do not increase the leverage of a wrench with an extension – use a larger wrench.
- Use a socket wrench for final tightening, not an adjustable wrench.
- Pull wrenches toward the body rather than pushing them away.
- Never alter wrenches in any way.
 Pliers
- Do not increase the leverage of pliers with an extension – use larger pliers.
 Hammers
- Strike surfaces squarely and not at an angle.
- Use a hammer with a face 10mm larger in diameter than the striking tool’s face.
- Replace hammers with damaged heads – do not weld, heat or regrind hammer heads.
- Carpenters’ (claw) hammers are for driving and drawing nails only and is neither for use with
hammered tools (chisels/punches/etc.), nor is the claw to be used as a wedge/pry/crowbar.
 Vices and Clamps
- Tighten vices and clamps by hand only – do not strike them with a hammer to gain additional
holding strength.
 Saws
- Do not tighten hacksaw blades excessively.
 Screwdrivers
- Do not increase the leverage of a screwdriver with a wrench or pliers – except with
screwdrivers specifically designed to be used together with wrenches.
All employees must be made aware that the user must not be distracted from what is being done as
any distraction could result in a misplaced action and possible injury.
3.4. Clean and Check Hand Tools
Clean all hand tools once the task it was used for has been completed or at the end of the workday in
the case of a multi-day task. Take care that all contaminants such as paint, oil, grease and dirt are
cleaned off. Only use approved supplied cleaning detergents and solutions.
Once the equipment has been cleaned properly it must be checked to ensure that it has not been
damaged. It is critical that this is done as some components may inadvertently have been damaged
or become loose or worn during use. This check is the same as the pre-use check.
Equipment must be returned to storage if no defects are found. Defects must be reported to the
Safety Officer immediately after being discovered.
Post-use checks in conjunction with pre-use checks enhance safety and significantly reduce the
possibility of unsafe equipment being used.
4. Store Hand Tools

Good housekeeping principles dictate “a place for everything and everything in its place”. Provide
adequate storage space such as shelves, racks, hooks, shadow boards and cabinets in the storage area
on or in which to store the equipment.
Each tool is stored in its place and as indicated or required after it has been cleaned. Sheath blades
and other sharp points are covered properly to prevent someone from being injured by them and to
protect blades and sharp points from becoming blunt from unintended contact with other objects.
It is critical that hand tools are stored correctly to ensure that they remain fit and safe for use. A
covered and secure storage area that is dry, well-ventilated, not subjected to extreme temperatures
and shields the equipment from direct sunlight must be provided for hand tools.
Standard Operating Procedure - Portable Electrical Tools
Working with portable electrical tools poses two distinct threats to the user. A user of a power tool
can firstly be injured by the tool itself when care is not exercised while the tool is used. This typically
happens when the blade/bit/belt/disc applied through the tool comes into contact with the user while
the tool is being used. Secondly, the user can be electrocuted when the electricity used to power the
tool comes into contact with the user. This typically occurs when the tool’s plug, cord and/or electrical
wiring is faulty, resulting in the user experiencing an electrical shock that could very easily be fatal.
1. Select the Right Tool

Selecting the right tool for a job is critical as the use of an inappropriate tool could not only endanger
the health and safety of the user, but also of anybody in close vicinity of the worksite. Also, tasks are
more easily performed when the correct tool is used.
However, because of the versatility of portable electrical equipment and the vast variety of different
and similar tools available, selecting the right tool for the job is not an easy task. This is further
complicated when a tool needs to be selected if the specifics of the job are not known. It is basically
impossible to select the correct tool if it is not known what the selection should be based on. Identify
the activities to which portable electrical equipment can be applied and select the appropriate tool
for performing each activity. Do not try to use a tool for a task for which it should not be used, even
if it appears possible to perform the task successfully with it.
Tool selection should be based on a task risk assessment, which studies the risks of performing a
particular task before the task is started. A correctly performed risk assessment will reveal the
different activities involved in performing the task together with those activities to which portable
electrical equipment can be applied.
It is useful to consider the following in addition to the relevant risk assessment in selecting a tool.
Answering these questions will reveal which power tool would be the most appropriate for performing
the task:
 What will the tool be used for - will the task involve drilling, cutting, sanding, sawing, etc.?
 What material will be worked - steel/aluminium/wood/concrete/etc.?
 Where will it be used - in- or outdoors, at floor level or an elevated position, etc.?
 The environmental conditions - is it dusty, cold, wet, etc.?
 How will it be used - tools may only be used for what they were designed to do as specified by the
manufacturer.
 Who will be using it - is the operator trained, strong enough, etc. to use the tool?
 When will it be used - will it be used during the day or at night?
2. Pre-use Checks
Portable electrical equipment should be checked before use to identify any defects that may exist.
Pre-use checks are an important part of proactive risk management as the majority of potentially
dangerous faults that would render a tool unfit and unsafe for use can be detected during such checks.
Equipment must be de-energised before being checked, by unplugging it from the power supply or
detaching the battery pack if it is a cordless piece of equipment. Check the following as a minimum
before using any portable electrical equipment:

 Clean?
 Body casing not loose, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Handles all present, not loose, cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Switch and trigger lock functioning properly?
 Guard/shield present, not loose and not cracked or otherwise damaged?
 Auxiliary equipment (bits/blades/discs) clean and not blunt, bent, cracked, split or otherwise
damaged?
Check the following on mains-powered equipment:
 Tool cord jacket securely held in place?

 Cord not abraded, cracking, brittle, nicked, cut, burnt or otherwise damaged?
 Plug not loose, cracked, burnt or otherwise damaged?
 Plug prongs not missing or loose?
 Cord wires connected to correct prongs? (Not applicable to moulded plugs)
 Moulded plug fuse (if fitted) securely fit and not blown?
 Plug cord jacket securely held in place?
 Plug fits snugly into socket?
 Tool effectively earthed? (Continuity tester/ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI))
Check the following on battery-powered (cordless) equipment:
 Correct battery fitted?

 Battery not loose-fitting?
 Battery not dented, cracked or otherwise damaged?
Check the following auxiliary electrical equipment such as extension cords and multi-plugs:
 Socket cord jacket securely held in place?

 Cord not abraded, cracking, brittle, nicked, cut, burnt or otherwise damaged?
 Plug not loose, cracked, burnt or otherwise damaged?
 Plug prongs not missing or loose?
 Cord wires connected to correct prongs? (Not applicable to moulded plugs)
 Moulded plug fuse (if fitted) securely fit and not blown?
 Plug cord jacket securely held in place?

 Plug fits snugly into socket?
 Multi-plug/cord effectively earthed? (Continuity tester/ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI))
Report any detected defects to the Safety Officer immediately – who will mark the tool as “Not Safe
for Use” and ensure that it is removed from the storage area to prevent it from being used
accidentally. Once the tool is repaired or replaced, it is only made available for use again once it
satisfies all the inspection criteria.
Having a safe tool does not necessarily mean that the activities performed with the tool will also
always be safe. Active input and awareness from users are required to ensure the safe use of portable
electrical equipment.
3. Use the Equipment

The selected portable electrical equipment can be used now that it has been established that it is safe
for use.
3.1. Evaluate personal protective equipment (PPE)
Some very specific hazards to the user and bystanders arise while portable electrical equipment is
used. In some cases, generally issued PPE is not effective in protecting users and bystanders from
these hazards. A correctly performed task risk assessment would indicate what PPE will be necessary
for the task at hand. It would further indicate whether current PPE will be adequate and identify the
required PPE as a control measure.
Additionally consider the equipment that will be used and the material that will be worked. Evaluate
whether current PPE would effectively protect the equipment user as well as any bystanders, such as
helpers, required to be present at the worksite. Obtain and supply PPE that would protect the user
and bystanders from arising hazards if current PPE proves not effective.
3.2. Prepare worksite
Carry equipment to the worksite by carrying handles (if provided or gripped on the body casing. Take
care not to carry any electrical equipment (auxiliary equipment included) by its cord or plug. Doing so
would eventually cause a loose cord in the equipment/plug/socket, which could result in an
electrocution incident.
Take care not to get equipment dirty or wet on the way to the worksite. Dirty tools are prone to
heating up and could malfunction as a result, while the likelihood of an electrical short is increased
greatly by wet tools.
It is crucial to prepare the worksite properly before starting work. The worksite should firstly be safe
for the employees actually working there. Any passers-by, employees or otherwise, should secondly
be protected from the hazards pre-set as a result of the work being done at the site.
Clean and dry the worksite as well as is possible. Clear away any debris, clutter, excessive dust, oil
solvents and water. Debris and clutter pose slipping and tripping hazards and debris could become
projectiles. Oil and solvents could damage the insulation of equipment and extension cords and result
in short circuits and electrocution. Use appropriately designed cords if all solvents and oils cannot be
cleared away.
Electricity should (as far as possible) never be used in the presence of water to prevent short circuits
and electrocution. Dry the worksite and take the necessary steps to prevent it from getting wet again.
Install ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) when the worksite cannot be dried completely.
Install extension cords of sufficient length to prevent extensions from being pulled on because they
are too short. Suspend extension cords overhead to eliminate stumbling or tripping hazards. Install
power cords so that vehicles do not drive and people do not walk over them. Take the necessary steps
to protect the cords from damage when this cannot be avoided by for instance temporarily burying
the cord in a conduit. Consider the following when installing extension cords:
 Extension cords are only a temporary measure to supply power to an area without an outlet and
may not be used as permanent wiring.
 Extension cords may not be spliced or connected to reach a desired length, as the resultant cord
may not be able to supply power safely.
 Uncoil extension cords fully before energising them.
 Do not pass extension cords through windows or doors.
 Keep extension cords away from heat, sharp edges and moving parts as the insulation could be
damaged, resulting in short circuits or electrocution.
 Do not secure extension cords with staples or hang them in a way that could damage the
insulation.
 Use only extension cords of proper wire size for the length of cord and power requirements of the
electric tool to prevent the cord from overheating.
 Extension cords used with earthed equipment must also be suitably earthed by means of an earth
circuit.
Take care not to connect single-phase equipment to three-phase outlets. Consult a suitably qualified
person, such as an Electrician, to determine the appropriate type and size of cord to be used.
Ensure that sufficient power points are available for all the equipment to be used to avoid overloading
sockets. Use multi-plugs/power bars/distribution strips with built-in short circuit protection when a
number of sockets are required. Do not energise power cords until the power they supply is actually
needed. Connect power cords as required, but do not switch on the power source until the equipment
is needed.
Electrical equipment sparks internally owing to the way they function. These sparks could ignite
explosive dusts, gases and vapours. Vent the worksite to an extent where the atmosphere is no longer
explosive when explosive dusts, gases or vapours are present in a worksite. Select appropriate
alternative equipment when it is not possible to rid the worksite atmosphere of the explosive
elements.
Passers-by need to be protected once the employees who will be doing the work are protected. Erect
the appropriate signage and safety symbols around the worksite to warn passers-by of the work being
done and the associated hazards.
Erect barricades and shields to prevent passers-by and unauthorised persons from entering the
worksite. In addition, barricades and shields protect passers-by from flying debris, hot metal, dust, an
arc welder’s arc, etc. Station an observer to warn individuals about the hazards and turn them away
from the worksite if required.
Secure the object that will be worked with clamps, a vice or other fixing equipment if it is loose and
can possibly move while it is being worked. This will prevent the object from accidentally moving and
causing damage or injuries while being worked. It does additionally also allow the use of both hands
for a better grip and therefore better control of the tool, and reduces the possibility of an incident
occurring as a result of a tool that is out of control.
3.3. Connect the equipment
Attach all attachments (bits/blades/discs/guards) before connecting equipment and ensure that the
tools used for adjusting the tool or attaching the attachments is removed. Use only undamaged
attachments that are approved and specified by the manufacturer of the tool. Ensure that the
attachment is securely fastened and fits the tool properly. Incorrect, damaged or loose attachments
of the wrong size can seriously damage the tool and break up during use and seriously threaten the
health and safety of the operator and bystanders.
The tool(s) to be used can be connected now that the site has been adequately prepared for working
with portable electrical equipment. Only connect the tool(s) to be used at that point, to prevent
connected and energised equipment from being accidentally activated. Tools that will be used in due
course but that are already connected and lying around, also pose a tripping hazard.
Verify that the tool’s plug and the socket are of the same design and that the plug would indeed fit
into the socket before connecting the tool to the socket. Do not force a plug into a socket to prevent
damage to the plug and the socket. Obtain a suitable adapter to fit to the plug to connect it to the
socket.
Ensure that the plug fits snugly into the socket once it has been connected. Report a loose-fitting plug
or socket to the responsible Safety Officer immediately in order for a corrective action to be taken to
replace the faulty plug or socket. A loose-fitting plug and socket could result in a short circuit and
electrocution and the faulty unit needs to be replaced immediately.
Make sure that tools are switched off and have the appropriate guards in place before connecting
them. Furthermore, confirm that the circuit to which they are being connected is not energised and
has had all the required safeguards, such as a GFCI, installed.
The circuit can be energised once the tool has been prepared for use. Only energise the circuit while
holding on to the tool to prevent it from being accidentally activated and running out of control when
the circuit is energised. Obtain assistance to energise the circuit if it is not possible to do so while
holding the tool. Do not leave energised equipment unattended and inform all bystanders of the fact
that the equipment is energised. Energise the tool and check that it is not wobbling/vibrating
excessively.
3.4. Execute the task
The task can be started now that the equipment has been found to be safe and all the necessary
preparations have been made. Having safe equipment and having completed the necessary
preparations do not guarantee a safe job without any incidents. Users of portable electrical
equipment need to exercise great care while operating the equipment in order to prevent incidents
from occurring.
Take up a position at the point of work that provides a stable platform from which to work. An
unstable working platform could result in a fall that could be fatal with a power tool in the person’s
hand. It could furthermore result in the application of uneven or excessive force, which could result
in damage to the tool and its attachments and an associated health and safety risk.
Perform the required task with the power tool but take care to use it only as it was intended and
designed to be used. Be mindful of the path the tool will take through the object being worked and
keep it clear on both sides of the object to prevent damage. Keep power cords clear of the tool’s path.
Keep clear of the moving parts of tools while they are running. Guards are designed to prevent
incidents and should be used for that purpose. Do not bypass guard systems and do not brush waste
away from the tool’s attachment while it is running.
Do not adjust the tool or change attachments while the tool is running or energised. Switch the tool
off and unplug it completely before making any adjustments to the tool or changing the tool’s
attachments. A tool could be activated unintentionally and accidentally while it is being worked on,
which could result in very serious injuries to anyone in close proximity of the tool. Keep the following
in mind while working with portable electrical equipment:
 Keep all fingers away from the trigger/switch of the tool while moving about with it.
 Do not leave a running tool unattended. Switch it off, wait for it to stop completely and unplug it
before leaving it.
 Do not handle any electrical equipment with wet hands.
 Do not work in or close to water.
 Avoid the possibility of body contact with earthed metalwork by avoiding situations where there
may be a risk of touching earthed metal while working with live equipment.
 Do not wear unapproved gloves, loose clothing or jewellery while using revolving power tools, and
tie back long hair or wear appropriate hair protection to prevent hair from getting caught.
Also keep the following tool-specific aspects in mind when using these tools:
 Circular saw
- Ensure that the rated blade speed matches the tool’s rated load speed.
 Disc grinder:
- Only use high-strength, bonded wheels and reinforced abrasive discs and wire cup brushes.
- Ensure that the rated disc speed matches the tool’s rated load speed.
- Bending, pinching, or twisting the disc in the cut may result in a kickback.
 Drill:
- Use the correct bit for the application; e.g. metal/wood/masonry.
- Do not grind down large-diameter bits to fit small chucks.
 Arc welding machine:
- Ensure that welding clamp cables are connected to the correct terminals.
- Ensure that oil-cooled welding machines contain sufficient oil.
- Ensure that the rod clamp is in a good condition and sufficiently isolated.
All employees should be made aware not to surprise or unexpectedly touch a power tool operator
while he/she is using a tool. It could easily result in an incident if the operator is startled and reacts
with a running power tool in hand.
3.5. Disconnect Equipment
Switch the tool off immediately upon completion of the task and let it come to a complete stop before
setting it down. Do not press or hold it against something to make it stop faster; let the motor run
down until it stops by itself. Forcing it to stop could damage the attachment and the tool and result
in an injury to persons in the vicinity.
Do not leave energised tools lying about. Disconnect and de-energise tools immediately once they
have come to a stop. Disconnect the tool by pulling on the plug, not the cord. Pulling on the cord
could cause hidden damage to the cord, the tool and the plug, which could result in incidents in the
future.
4. Clean and Check the Equipment

Clean all portable electrical equipment and their attachments (bits/blades/discs/etc.) as well as any
auxiliary equipment such as extension cords as soon as the task it was used for has been completed
or at the end of the workday in the case of a multi-day task. Take care that all contaminants such as
paint, oil, grease and dirt are cleaned off. Only use approved supplied cleaning detergents and
solutions as the use of water and inappropriate chemicals could weaken and damage the equipment
and cause short circuits.
Once the equipment has been cleaned properly it must be checked to ensure that it has not been
damaged. It is critical that this is done as some components may inadvertently have been damaged
or become loose or worn during use. This check is the same as the pre-use check.
Equipment must be returned to storage if no defects are found. Defects must be reported to the
Safety Officer immediately after being discovered. The Safety Officer marks the defective equipment
as “Not Safe for Use”, ensures that it is not returned to storage to prevent it from being used and takes
the necessary steps to have it repaired or replaced.
Post-use checks in conjunction with pre-use checks further strengthen the safety net and significantly
reduce the possibility of unsafe equipment being used. An incident that could have been caused is
prevented by the proactive removal of unsafe equipment as soon as it is noticed.
5. Store Equipment
Portable electrical equipment is stored as soon as the task it was used for has been completed or at
the end of the workday in the case of multi-day task. It is critical that portable electrical equipment is
stored correctly in order to ensure its ongoing suitability for use and its associated safety.
Provide a designated storage area for portable electrical equipment and its attachments. Any
attachments are removed from portable electrical equipment and stored separately. Situate the
covered storage area so that it is dry, well-ventilated, not subjected to extreme temperatures and
shields the equipment from direct sunlight. Furthermore, ensure that the storage area is free from
any fumes and dust that could weaken the casings and insulation of the equipment.
Good housekeeping principles dictate a place for everything and everything in its place. Provide
adequate flat storage space in the storage area to store the equipment on and do not hang portable
electrical equipment by their cords. Hanging a tool by its cord could damage the cord and cause it to
become loose, which could result in incidents in the future. Do not tie a knot in power cords as this
can cause damage to the cord and result in short circuits and electrocution. Loop long cords or secure
them by means of twist lock plugs to store them safely and neatly.
Remove the batteries when storing cordless equipment. Store the battery packs safely so that no
metal parts such as nails, screws, wrenches, etc. can come into contact with the battery terminals,
since it could cause short circuits and sparks that could result in a fire. Recharge cordless portable
electrical equipment batteries only with chargers that are supplied with the equipment or
recommended by the battery manufacturer.
Ensure that attachments are stored according to their manufacturers’ specifications in order to
protect the attachments from being damaged and ensure their ongoing integrity and suitability for
use. Protect attachments from extreme temperatures, damp, fumes and gases and prevent them
from falling or being struck by falling objects as this could cause hidden or unknown damage to the
attachments. Damaged attachments are extremely dangerous if used and could break up during use
and result in serious injuries.
Standard Operating Procedure – Angle Grinders
Angle grinders are used for cutting, grinding and polishing work. The type of attachment placed on an
angle grinder depends on the task being performed and the materials being used. The most common
uses for angle grinders include grinding (with abrasive discs), cutting (with cut-off discs) and polishing
(with wire brushes). However attachments will vary depending on whether the operator is working
with metal, stone, tiles or other materials.
It is one of the most dangerous tools in any workplace; most angle grinder injuries are from metal
particles lodging in the operator’s eye. However, the most serious injuries are from kick-back, where
the disc is thrust back violently towards the operator. Angle grinders used with cutting discs expose
workers to a range of severe additional hazards. Discs can shatter or explode, sending pieces flying in
all directions. Ensure the angle grinder is an appropriate tool for the task. Where a safer alternative
cutting tool is available or can be obtained, an angle grinder should not be used as a cutting tool.
The use of grinders shall be minimised. Angle grinders used with cut-off wheels must have an anti-
kickback safety clutch and a braking system to stop the disc quickly (unless it is an air grinder) and
must be used with guards designed for use with cut-off wheels. Grinders shall be used with all handles
and guards in place with one hand on the trigger and one hand on the handle. All angle grinders must
have an automatic cut-out or ‘dead-man’ switch as part of the handgrip, cutting off the power as soon
as finger pressure is released.
1. Main hazards
Grinding hazards to address include:
• Cuts from grinding disc (proper hand and finger protection).

• Wheel binding up causing kickback.
• Wheel still spinning when move away from work-piece.
• Foreign body in eyes from particles given off during grinding.
• Wheels shattering, causing flying particles.
• Soft tissue injuries due to vibration, gripping of the grinder, and body position.
• Respiratory hazard from materials in particles given off (e.g. lead): Avoid inhalation of dust
generated by grinding and cutting operations. Exposure to dust may cause respiratory ailments as
well as irritation to eyes and skin. In most cases, the greater hazard is the exposure to the
dust/fumes from the base material being ground or paint or coatings applied to it. Refer to the
MSDS before using the grinding disc.
• Combustible materials in the work environment.
• Long hair and dangling objects such as jewellery.
• Long sleeves and loose clothing.
When intending to use an angle grinder, focus on the hazards and risks that could arise and put in
place the necessary control measures. Elimination of the hazards or substitution with safer equipment
should always be the first option. Questions to ask include:
• Is the grinding work necessary or could a different tool be used with less risk?
• Is the correct size of grinder used for the job? Is there a risk of losing control of a heavier, more
powerful tool? Could a smaller model be used for some or all of the work?
• Does the guard cover half the wheel between the operator and the wheel?
• Is the correct wheel used for the job, depending on the type of material being worked on and the
size of the wheel? (Accessories must be rated for at least the speed recommended on the tool
warning label; wheels and other accessories running over rated speed can fly apart and cause
injury.)
• Is the correct flange and locking nut in place for the type of wheel being used?
Angle grinding operations will often result in the generation of significant heat and sparks, and
especially if carried out in direct contact or in close proximity to flammable or combustible substances
or atmospheres there is a risk of fire or explosion, with the potential to cause serious injury or damage
to property. It is therefore important to have a Hot Work Permit in place to reduce the associated risks
to an acceptable level.
2.1. PPE
Is appropriate protective equipment provided and used? For example:
• wide vision goggles, or safety glasses and a face shield;

• a hood for extra protection against particles rebounding in a confined space;
• ear muffs;
• safety boots with steel toe caps
• overalls or other close fitting clothing; and
• well-fitting gloves that allow a good grip of the tool.
2.2. Pre-use inspection

• The cord is in good condition
• All guards are in place
• Handles are in place
• Body/housing is in good condition and ventilation openings are clear
• The clamp nut is in place and secure
• Wheel rpm matches the grinder rpm
• The grinding wheel/cutting disc is in good condition, is not contaminated, has not been subject to
impact and cutting edges are sharp
• The dead-man (on/off) switch is working
• Moving parts are not in a binding situation, it’s not vibrating
Ensure adequate lighting, a good working surface (level ground, use scaffolds rather than ladders as
working surface), and that barriers and guards to protect other workers (such as welding screens) are
in place.
3. Operating an Angle Grinder

Before energising the grinder, determine the position you will hold the tool to perform the work -
ensure proper guard and handle adjustment. Hold the tool by insulated gripping surfaces when
performing an operation where the cutting tool may contact hidden wiring or its own cord. Contact
with a “live” wire will make exposed metal parts of the tool “live” and shock the operator. Hold the
tool firmly and keep hands away from rotating parts. Make sure the cord is clear of the wheel. DO
NOT wrap the cord around your arm or wrist, if control of the tool is lost, the cord may become
wrapped around you and cause personal injury.
Grinders must be used with guards in place and both hands on the grinder. If the grinder is designed
with two handles then both handles must be used. One hand is required to be on the body and trigger
and the other hand has to be on the second handle. When working with an angle grinder, the work
should be performed in the best working zone, this is between the worker’s shoulders and knees.
Make sure the wheel is not contacting the work-piece before the switch is turned on. Before using the
tool on an actual work-piece, let it run for a while. Watch for vibration or wobbling that could indicate
poor installation or a poorly balanced wheel.
After work has been completed, a fire check must be carried out in the work area.
3.1. Grinding
Use the specified surface of the wheel to perform the grinding. Watch out for flying sparks - hold the
tool so that sparks fly away from you and other persons or flammable materials. Always adhere to the
following operating guidelines:
• Position the guard to direct sparks away from you, based on your body position.
• Allow the grinder to come up to full speed before applying to the task.
• Recognise pinch points where the grinder wheel could bind.
• Don’t force the wheel against the surface; let the grinding wheel do the work.
• Use outer edge of the wheel (but not the side of the wheel), working it away from your body.
• Keep grinding wheel at a 15 to 30 degree angle to the work, unless wheel manufacturers specify
otherwise - then follow their specifications.
• Inspect the wheel as you work to ensure it does not need to be changed due to damage or wear
• Do not set grinder down until wheel has stopped turning. Do not use the work-piece to stop the
wheel, as grinding below full speed will tear grit out of the wheel, reducing its life.
• Keep the slag and dust cleaned up in the work area.
• When using a tungsten grinder, a tungsten holder should be used to hold and secure the wheel.
3.2. Cutting
The use of cut-off wheels requires a Mini Risk Assessment and approval by a Supervisor. Angle grinders
shall not be used for the cutting of materials such as concrete, masonry, ceramics, stone, metal or
plastic. The cutting of these materials is to be undertaken using purpose-designed cutting tools.
Circular saw blades should NEVER be fitted to an angle grinder. Angle grinders are NOT designed to
operate as power saws, as they:
• are not fitted with sufficient guarding to protect the operator if the blade jams, disintegrates or
kicks back;
• are not fitted with retractable guards that provide the same safety a power saw provides and
rotate at faster speeds and generate greater torque than power saws.
Always adhere to the following operating guidelines:
• Machines must have adequate power transmission and capacity, spindle speeds and proper
guarding of the disc. It is best to have extra power to insure good cutting efficiency.
• Check the speed of the machine spindle against the maximum speed specified for the disc by the
manufacturer. The maximum specified speed for the disc should never be exceeded.
• Flanges should be clean, straight and of equal diameter so the disc will run true. For diameters
above 225mm it is recommended that the flange be at least 1/3rd the diameter of the disc.
• The bore size of the disc is so constructed that the disc should fit freely on the machine spindle
without any slack. Never attempt to force a disc on the spindle!
• Always use blotter, when supplied with the wheels, between flanges and the disc to help prevent
damage caused by tightening.
• Be sure that the flanges are tightened securely but not too tightly to avoid springing the flanges
and changing the pressure area.
• Be sure the work-piece is securely held down, including both side of the cut, if practical. Cut-off
wheels withstand a great deal of radial stress but not side stress. Even reinforced wheels are not
completely unbreakable. Side pressure must be avoided to insure straight cuts and avoid possible
disc breakage.
• The disc must be brought into contact with the work-piece without “bumping” or impact. The disc
should cut freely without forcing and the speed of the disc should be reduced by the cutting
operation.
• Kickback is a sudden reaction to a pinched, bound or misaligned disc causing an uncontrolled cut-
off tool to lift up and out of the work-piece toward the operator. Cut the piece so that it does not
pinch in towards, and bind the disc.
o Support large panels to minimise the risk of disc pinching and kickback. Large panels tend to
sag under their own weight. Support must be placed under the panel on both sides, near the
line of cut and near the edge of the panel.
o In the case of pipe, start at the bottom and end up on top. By finishing at the top rather than
the bottom, the weight of the piece won’t cause it to bind against the disc.
• Abrasive cutting generates a great deal of localised heat, which causes rapid expansion. Speeds
significantly below efficient speed and wheels fed through the cut too slowly will generate
excessive heat, resulting in rapid disc wear, fraying around the edge of reinforced wheels, and disc
breakage.
3.3. Operating precautions

• Do not use portable grinders as bench grinders by securing the grinder in a vice or similar. Instead,
secure your work-piece in a vice.
• Stay alert and watch what you are doing. Do not use a tool while tired or under the influence of
drugs, alcohol or medication. A moment of inattention when operating power tools may result in
serious personal injury.
• Loose clothes, gloves, jewellery or long hair can be caught in moving parts. Keep them away.
• Don’t stand directly in front of a grinding wheel when a grinder is started.
• Avoid accidental starting. Be sure switch is off before plugging in.
• Do not overreach, keep proper footing and balance at all times. Proper footing and balance enable
better control of the tool in unexpected situations.
• Ensure that sparks produced during work do not constitute a risk to the user or other personnel
and are not able to ignite inflammable substances. Endangered areas must be protected with
flame-resistant covers. Make sure that fire-risk areas are always provided with suitable fire
extinguishers.
• Carry out a test run after every tool change, ensuring that you are holding the angle grinder firmly
with both hands. Hold the angle grinder away from your body. Ensure that there is no-one
present in the area at risk. Run the angle grinder for approximately 30 seconds.
• Don’t use mounting flanges which are warped, nicked, sprung, or which are not clean.
• The angle grinder runs on for approximately 5 seconds after switch-off. Do not attempt to touch
the moving tool due to risk of injury.
• Do not touch the work-piece immediately after operation; it may be extremely hot and could burn
your skin.
• Never use cutting discs for grinding purposes. Cutting discs must not be subjected to any lateral
pressure.
• Ensure that the accessories used always fulfil the following minimum requirements: Respect the
maximum grinding wheel diameter. The diameter of the central hole in the grinding wheel must
fit the inner flange without any play. Do not use any adapters or reducers.
• Use clamps or other practical way to secure and support the work-piece to a stable platform.
Holing the work by hand or against your body is unstable and may lead to loss of control.
• Do not force the tool - use the correct tool for your application. The correct tool will do the job
better and safer at the rate for which it is designed.
• Disconnect the plug form the power source before making any adjustments, changing accessories,
or storing the tool. Such preventive safety measures reduce the risk of starting the tool
accidentally.
• Use only accessories that are recommended by the manufacturer for your model.
• Do not use a grinding wheel or cutting disc that has been dropped; the impact may result in
breakage.
4. Inspection and Maintenance

Mount discs and wheels on the grinder in the manner described by the manufacturer with the
appropriate hardware (flanges, nuts, and blotters), but be careful not to over-tighten the spindle nut.
Too much pressure will deform the flange and put stress on the disc.
To ensure reliable and trouble free operation, it is the user’s responsibility to maintain the machine in
the best possible condition. Such a machine will produce accurate consistent results; problems will be
less frequent and less severe. Ensure all grinders are regularly checked for electrical safety and that
all defects are repaired by a qualified technician.
Proper storage of grinders and discs to prevent damage: Make sure grinders are stored to prevent
damage from being dropped. Grinding wheels and discs need to be stored out of the weather; make
sure no materials are piled on top of them - that could cause damage.
Guards on angle grinders must be kept in place and should only be removed for maintenance and
storage.
Standard Operating Procedure – Light Vehicles
Light vehicles include passenger cars and LDVs (light delivery vehicles – also known as pick-up trucks).
The company will ensure all vehicles are well maintained and that the equipment promotes driver,
operator and passenger safety by:
 ensuring all vehicles are driven in designated construction areas with headlights on, a strobe light
on the roof and a buggy whip fitted;
 servicing the vehicles according to manufacturers’ recommendations;
 setting up procedures where employees check vehicles’ oil, water, tyre pressures and general
cleanliness on a monthly basis, then record the inspections;
 keeping maintenance schedules in the glove boxes of all vehicles, which are completed each time
the vehicles are serviced in any way;
 following the maintenance schedules in the vehicles’ manuals; and
 setting up a procedure to identify and rectify faults as soon as practicable.
While driving company vehicles or own vehicles for work purposes, staff must comply with traffic
legislation, be conscious of road safety and demonstrate safe driving and other good road safety
habits. The following actions in company vehicles will be viewed as serious breaches of conduct:
 Drinking or being under the influence of drugs while driving.

 Driving while disqualified or not correctly licensed.
 Reckless or dangerous driving causing death or injury.
 Failing to stop after an accident.
 Acquiring demerit points leading to suspension of licence.
 Any actions that warrant the suspension of a licence.
To mitigate some of the risks associated with driving, it is important to plan your journey. More
planning needs to go into long-distance trips, travelling in unfamiliar areas and driving at abnormal
times and conditions. Consider the route you are going to take as well as factors listed below that may
have an influence on travel time. Consider traffic volume and plan stops for breaks, fuel and meals on
long-distance journeys. It is a good idea to take cash with you, especially if you don’t know if the
area you are travelling to/through has ATM machines or stores that may not accept credit
cards.
Consider security and safety issues, especially if you’re travelling alone. When driving in rural areas at
dawn or dusk, consider the risk of collision with animals. Factor the lower speed into your journey
time. Ensure you have the ability and contact information to communicate with your
manager/supervisor, other colleagues, business appointments and request assistance if necessary.
Consider mobile phone or communication access in the areas in which you will travel. Consider time
LHWP2-SOP-V1 Page 1 of 11
of day and position of the sun, possibility of fog, etc. and the weather to plan clothing, sun protection
and water as well as visibility and road conditions (see instructions for driving in snow, fog or rain).
In some cases, it may be safer to use alternatives, such as taxis, public transport or technological
options, such as video conferencing.
1. Inform and Supervise Drivers

Part of the normal induction training for any new employee doing work related driving is coverage of
the organisation’s driver and vehicle safety policies and procedures.
A driver induction should include:
 legal requirements, such as duty of care, speed limits and drugs and alcohol
 company requirements, such as pre-start checks and incident reports
 policies to be applied where drivers breach safety rules (e.g. retraining, discipline)
 understanding the causes and effects of fatigue
 understanding road conditions and driving precautions
 what to do in the case of a crash or emergency
 what records must be kept.
Induction is not only relevant to new employees, but also to those who move into positions with
significant driving involved or with responsibility for the fleet (e.g. supervisors).
In addition to induction training, a ‘handover’ may be done for employees using a car for the first time
or using a different make of car. The handover should cover the safety features of the car, basic
operation and any individual adjustments for the driver (e.g. seats, steering wheel and mirrors).
More specialised training may be required for some instances depending on the type of work and
amount of driving involved. Training for special vehicles, such as four wheel drives in rough terrain,
may be required. Training for driving in adverse conditions may also be appropriate.
As part of the program to promote safe driving, information about vehicle and driver safety should be
provided. Information may include:
 information about the driving hazards (e.g. impact of wet road conditions on safe following
distances)
 statistical information about crash risks (e.g. percentage of fleet vehicles involved in crashes)
 information about how drugs and alcohol affect driving (e.g. relationship between Blood Alcohol
Concentration (BAC) levels and reaction times)
 information about the effect of medications on driving (e.g. impact of drowsiness on driving)
 information about fatigue and driving (e.g. how the body clock works)
 information about the use and effectiveness of safety features (e.g. adjusting headrests).
Direct supervision of drivers is rarely possible, so the emphasis must be on monitoring the procedures
designed to reduce risks. Supervisors need to respond to any incidents/infringements, feedback from
drivers or issues raised in forums such as work group meetings. In addition, supervisors need to
actively promote safe driving and address any evidence of unsafe driving.
2. Personal Safety
The following precautions are recommended to reduce the risk of car hi-jacking:
 Do not stop to help a disabled motorist unless involved in a vehicle accident. A safer alternative is
to contact a service station or the police.
 Keep your doors locked and windows rolled up (at least part-way, if it is hot and you don't have
air conditioning), no matter how short the distance or how safe the neighbourhood that you are
travelling in may appear.
 When stopped at a red light, leave enough room between you and the car in front so that you
won't be blocked in and can get away if necessary.
 Be suspicious of anyone approaching the car with brochures/papers, etc., asking for change or
directions. Be ready to leave, even if it means running a red light or a stop sign.
 While driving, if struck from behind or in any suspicious way, stay in your vehicle with the doors
locked and windows closed until the police arrive. Activate your vehicle's emergency flashers. Be
aware of “road rage” and its implications. Make every attempt to be a courteous driver and do
not stop or leave the vehicle to confront an angry driver.
 If you think you are being followed, drive immediately to an area with good lighting and people.
If possible, drive to the nearest police station.
 If you have one, use your cellular phone to call for help.
3. Plan Trips to Minimise Risks

For regular driving journeys, planning can be done to minimise risks. Time should always be allocated
to account for common delays, such as traffic and weather conditions. If a safer route is available,
then drivers should be instructed to use it.
The time allocated to reach destinations should not require the driver to compromise compliance with
road rules (e.g. speed limits or fatigue requirements). Work involving extended driving periods should
have some built in time to allow for changing conditions and traffic hold ups. Trips using roads in poor
conditions and extreme weather conditions should only be carried out with the appropriate vehicles
(e.g. 4WD vehicles in mountainous regions).
The safe handling and storage of any luggage or equipment should be included in trip planning. Where
work related equipment has to be removed from the vehicle, it should be possible without requiring
awkward postures and heavy lifting. Any equipment should be secured to minimise damage and to
ensure it does not become loose in transit.
Trip planning should also include emergency response aspects, such as an assessment of the type of
first aid kit needed, protective equipment (e.g. reflective vests) and emergency contact numbers.
Work related driving is associated with a number of risk factors that alone or in combination increase
both the likelihood and the severity of an incident. The measures in the previous section should
operate to limit the frequency and severity of these risk factors.
In this section, the nature of these risk factors is examined further and the ways to eliminate or reduce
these risks is outlined. Despite planning, there may still need to be risk assessments that address
conditions on the road.
4. Pre-operational Inspections
 Employees who operate company passenger cars and/or LDVs (Light delivery vehicles) and
equipment, and/or company fleet vehicles are required to perform a pre-operational inspection
to check the readiness of the vehicle before the trip begins.
 Employees should visually inspect the inside and the outside of the vehicle and immediately report
any defects, deficiencies, or damage.
 All seat belts and/or shoulder harnesses or similar safety restraint devices shall be inspected
during each pre-operational check of the vehicle or equipment.
 If problems arise during operation, they should be reported when the passenger vehicle is
returned to the pool dispatcher or fleet operator.
 Employees with an assigned vehicle are also required to conduct a pre-operational inspection and
arrange for minor servicing including lubrication, oil changes, or other routine services performed
at frequencies stated on the manufacturer’s service interval records.
 They are also responsible for the safe operation, condition, and appearance of their assigned
vehicle.
A pre-operational checklist must be completed before each trip – or daily.
5. Factors Impacting on Safe Driving

5.1. Speed
Speed contributes to road trauma, and there is a clear relationship between speed and potential crash
frequency and severity. A 5km/h reduction in a 60km/h zone can result in a 31% reduction in crashes,
and the risk of crashing increases by nearly six times when travelling 20km/h more than the average
speed. Research has demonstrated that a 10% reduction in mean travel speed is likely to result in a
36% reduction in fatalities.
Risk can be reduced by:
 observing speed limits

 driving at a speed appropriate for the conditions
 responding to speed warning alerts
 adjusting arrival times to compensate for delays
 planning trips on the basis of time within speed limits.
5.2. Drugs and alcohol

Use of drugs and alcohol impair a driver’s ability to safely use a vehicle. A driver with a BAC level of
0.05 is twice as likely to be involved in a crash, and the presence of alcohol increases the susceptibility
to injury if involved in a crash.
The presence of cannabis and the drug methyl-amphetamine increases the risk of being involved in
fatal crashes. Drivers also need to be aware of the influence of any medications prior to driving.
 adopting a zero drugs and alcohol policy for work related driving
 avoiding or minimising the use of alcohol prior to driving
 complying with road rules in relation to the prescribed level of alcohol
 using transport alternatives at functions with alcohol (designated driver, taxis)
 taking into account the influence of medications before driving.
5.3. Fatigue
Fatigue is mental or physical tiredness that affects a person’s ability to function. It may impair
performance by reducing attentiveness, slowing reaction times, affecting judgement and reducing
performance on skilled control tasks. It is estimated that fatigue is a factor in up to 25% of crashes.
Being awake for 17 hours is estimated to cause a similar level of impairment to a 0.05 BAC level.
Fatigue is associated with the following factors:
 sustained mental or physical effort

 inadequate rest breaks
 environmental stresses (such as heat, noise and vibration)
 disruption of circadian rhythms (the normal cycles of daytime activity and night sleep)
 long periods awake
 inadequate amount or quality of sleep over an extended period.
Signs of driver fatigue, such as lane drifting, variations in speed, delayed reactions and reduced
concentration, indicate there is already a risk. Individuals are unreliable judges of their level of fatigue.
Consequently, the role of the employer in planning and scheduling work to minimise fatigue is
paramount.
 sharing the driving

 using alternatives, such as public transport or taxis
 planning longer trips to allow for regular breaks
 encouraging drivers to take power naps if sleepy
 minimising night driving (avoid driving at times when you’d normally be sleeping)
 enabling staff to sleep overnight in accommodation where necessary
 providing information on sleep, nutrition and drinks, such as water and coffee.
5.4. Mobile phone use

The use of mobile phones while driving creates distractions to the primary task of driving. The ability
to react to other vehicles, judge separation distances and maintain a constant speed are compromised
by using a mobile phone. Hands free calls should be kept to a minimum and reserved for emergency
type calls.
Handheld mobile phone use is illegal and should not be considered under any circumstances while
driving. Texting or reading texts or caller ID should not be done at any time whilst driving. Evidence
shows using a mobile phone when driving results in a number of performance impairments, including
longer reaction times, impaired lane position awareness, shorter following distances and reduced
functional field of view.
 adopting a policy to ban the use of mobile phones while driving

 complying with the ban on use of hand held phones
 allowing calls to go to a message bank
 answering calls only after the car is pulled over to the side of the road
 leaving a message on voicemail advising incoming callers that you are driving and cannot take
calls.
5.5. In-vehicle distractions

Distractions divert the driver’s attention from the driving task and impact on safety critical measures,
such as stopping distances. Common in-vehicle distractions are other passengers, drinking and eating,
reaching for objects, personal grooming and being distracted by in-vehicle technologies (such as
mobile music devices) or loose objects.
 not eating or drinking while driving

 pre-setting music/radio and climate controls
 securing any loose objects
 pulling over to adjust equipment, check maps or attend to personal grooming
 asking passengers to help with tasks (e.g. checking the map/GPS for the driver).
To remain effective, a vehicle and driver safety program needs to be monitored and regularly
reviewed. Some matters, such as incidents, require immediate response, whereas others should be
part of routine checks.
6. Driving in Adverse Conditions
Driving on rough or unsealed roads or on roads subject to extreme conditions, such as snow, ice, fog
or bushfires, presents increased risks.
 using alternative routes

 rescheduling trips to times of less extreme conditions
 providing information about driving techniques in adverse conditions, such as driving slowly in fog
conditions
 using specialist vehicles suitable for conditions
 where appropriate, providing specialist training for driving in adverse conditions.
6.1. Driving in fog

Don’t drive on high beam. High beam light reflect back from the fog and impair visibility by creating a
‘white wall’ in front of you. Drive on low beam or fog lights. Low beams direct light down onto the
road and also help other drivers to see you.
Reduce speed and keep liberal following distances. Drive as slow as possible to avoid crashing into
stationary or other slow-moving vehicles. Listen for traffic you cannot see. Avoid playing loud music
and open your window a little to hear well.
Never stop in the middle of the road. If your car stalls or becomes disabled, turn your vehicle’s lights
off, and take your foot off of the brake pedal. People tend to follow tail lights when driving in fog,
which may result in a crash. Switch on your parking lights or hazard lights. Move away from the
vehicle to the side of the road to avoid injury.
In case of zero-visibility (less than 20m), it is better to get off the road. If this is not possible or you
cannot leave the road safely, follow painted lane markings or the central verge of the road as a guide.
Reduce speed drastically. Watch out for vehicles that may have stalled. Be patient. Do not overtake
vehicles or pass lines of traffic. Indicate well in advance if you are going to turn.
6.2. Driving in wet weather

If possible, stay off the road during heavy thunderstorms. Large flashes of lightning can
temporarily blind and disorient drivers, and accompanying high winds and heavy rain can
create deadly driving conditions.
Increase the following distance. Slow down as it takes longer to stop or adjust in wet weather
and stay toward the middle lanes - water tends to pool in the outside lanes. When weather
conditions warrant the use of windshield wipers, vehicle headlights shall also be turned on. Turn your
headlights on (not high beam) even in light rain or in overcast conditions.
Keep windows clear. Turn up the heat and direct airflow to clear foggy windows. Use the air-
conditioning and/or defroster and windscreen wipers to keep the windows clear.
Drive in the tracks of the car ahead of you. Avoid following large trucks or busses too closely.
The spray created by their large tires reduces your vision. If you must pass, only do so if you
can do it quickly and safely.
Never drive through fast-flowing water. Do not drive through moving water if you can't see
the ground through it; your car could be swept off the road. When driving through water of
uncertain depth, go slow. If it's deeper than the bottom of your doors, turn around and find
another route unless your vehicle is purpose-built to drive through water and you can do so
safely. After passing through deep water, test your brakes. They may be saturated. Drive
very slow and brake lightly to dry them out. Make sure they are pulling evenly before
speeding up.
Avoid using your brakes heavily. If possible, take your foot off the accelerator to slow down.
If hydroplaning occurs, do not apply brakes and avoid steering in any direction but straight ahead.
Don’t apply brakes in a curve, brake before entering the curves then steer and brake with a
light touch. If you find yourself in a skid, remain calm, ease your foot off the petrol pedal, and
carefully steer in the direction you want the front of the car to go. This procedure, known as
"steering into the skid," will bring the back end of your car in line with the front. For cars
without anti-lock brakes, avoid using your brakes. If your car has ABS, brake firmly as you
"steer into the skid."
Take care when driving through intersections because of possible oil on the road.
6.3. Driving in snow/icy conditions

Tips for driving in the snow:
 Accelerate and decelerate slowly. Applying the accelerator slowly to accelerate is the best method
for regaining traction and avoiding skids. Don’t try to get moving in a hurry. And take time to slow
down – remember, it takes longer to slow down on icy roads.
 Drive slowly. Everything takes longer on snow-covered roads. Accelerating, stopping and turning
– nothing happens as quickly as on dry roads. Give yourself time to maneuver by driving slowly.
 The normal dry road following distance of three to four seconds should be increased to eight to
ten seconds. This increased margin of safety will provide the longer distance needed if you have
to stop.
 Know your brakes. If you have anti-lock brakes (ABS) and need to slow down quickly, press hard
on the pedal - it’s normal for the pedal to vibrate a bit when the ABS is activated. In cars without
ABS, use “threshold” breaking, keeping your heel on the floorboard and using the ball of your foot
to apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal.
 Don’t stop if you can avoid it. There’s a big difference in the amount of inertia it takes to start
moving from a full stop versus how much it takes to get moving while still rolling. If you can slow
down enough to keep rolling until you need to accelerate again (e.g. at a traffic light), do it.
 Don’t power up hills. Applying extra gas on snow-covered roads just starts your wheels spinning.
Try to get a little inertia going before you reach the hill and let that inertia carry you to the top. As
you reach the crest of the hill, reduce your speed and proceed down-hill as slowly as possible.
 Don’t stop going up a hill. There’s nothing worse than trying to get moving up a hill on an icy road;
get some inertia going on a flat roadway before you take on the hill.
 Don’t tempt fate: If you don’t have somewhere you have to be, stay and watch the snow from
indoors.
Tips for long-distance trips to areas with expected snow/icy conditions:
 Watch weather reports prior to a long-distance drive or before driving in isolated areas. Delay
trips when especially bad weather is expected. If you must leave, let others know your route,
destination and estimated time of arrival.
 Always make sure your vehicle is in peak operating condition.
 Keep at least half a tank of fuel in your vehicle at all times.
 Pack a cellular telephone, plus blankets, gloves, hats, and food, water and any needed medication
for three days in your vehicle.
 If you become snow-bound, stay with your vehicle. It provides temporary shelter and makes it
easier for rescuers to locate you. Don’t try to walk in a severe storm. It’s easy to lose sight of your
vehicle in blowing snow and become lost.
 Don’t over-exert yourself if you try to push or dig your vehicle out of the snow.
 Tie a brightly colored cloth to the antenna or place a cloth at the top of a rolled up window to
signal distress. At night, keep the dome light on if possible. It only uses a small amount of electricity
and will make it easier for rescuers to find you.
 Make sure the exhaust pipe isn’t clogged with snow, ice or mud. A blocked exhaust could cause
deadly carbon monoxide gas to leak into the passenger compartment with the engine running.
 Use whatever is available to insulate your body from the cold. This could include floor mats,
newspapers or paper maps.
 If possible, run the engine and heater just long enough to remove the chill and to conserve fuel.
6.4. Driving off the road

The following guidelines are for drivers when driving off-road:
 Inspect vehicles in accordance with operator’s manual and manufacturer’s specifications prior to
the trip.
 If carrying a load, be sure that the load is properly balanced. Heavy items should be placed forward
of the rear axle for better traction. Avoid using roof racks as this could lead to vehicle instability
in steep terrain.
 If available, acquire a map of the area in which you will be travelling.
 Alert the supervisor about the travel plans including time of departure, estimated time of arrival
and planned route.
 When conditions appear difficult, stop and park the vehicle. Get out and survey the area on foot
to help in determining the safest route.
 When negotiating slopes, keep the use of the clutch (if applicable) and brake to a minimum. This
reduces chances of sliding and losing control of the vehicle.
 When descending steep slopes, use first gear. Braking should be provided by the engine. Apply
the accelerator carefully so that you do not cause the wheels to spin.
 Avoid any existing wheel ruts and obstacles which may not be cleared by the chassis. Be aware of
the need to maintain ground clearance.
 If the ground is soft, you may reduce the tire pressure to a minimum and clear clogged tire treads
to improve traction.
 As a rule, do not take chances in dangerous terrain. Choose another route or turn back.
6.5. Driving on rural roads

Extra caution is required when driving on “rural roads” because they are often not designed for
efficient high-speed travel like urban roadways. The following safety hazards are more likely to be
found on rural roads:
 Lack of signs or accurate maps

 Blind curves
 Narrow width (not sufficient for vehicles to pass safely)
 No shoulder or guard rails
 Soft surface (un-compacted gravel or dirt)
 Rough or damaged road surface
 Obstacles on road (slow-moving vehicles, animals, debris)
 Unusually steep hills or sharp curves
Since help may often be difficult to reach or unavailable in the event of an accident, it is particularly
important to exercise caution when driving in remote areas. Never exceed posted speed limits and
remember that some circumstances require driving well below the posted speed.
Beyond exercising normal driver safety, travel on rural roads may also warrant specific additional
precautions due to the hazards listed above.
6.6. Railroad crossings

Railroad crossings, especially unprotected crossings in remote areas, can pose a hazard to
drivers. At railroad crossings all drivers shall:
 Slow the vehicle to allow time to look in both directions of the crossing for an oncoming train.
 Listen for the sound of a train whistle. This may require turning down or turning off the vehicle’s
radio and/or interior fan.
 Proceed through the crossing with caution.
7. Emergency Response
In order to respond to driving related incidents, a basic emergency system should include:
 a suitable first aid kit

 procedures for responding to a vehicle breakdown
 procedures for responding to a crash or related incident
 procedures for assisting others
 emergency contact numbers kept in the vehicle
 equipment such as reflective vests and reflective triangles.
7.1. Recovery and reporting

Following any incident, support should be provided to drivers who may have been involved in a crash
or witnessed a crash. Depending on the severity of the incident, support may be provided by work
colleagues - by a “buddy system” - or through the use of professional counsellors, who can de-brief
and assist drivers.
Internal crash report or incident forms should be completed and forwarded to the person responsible
for investigating and taking follow up action. Incidents resulting in injury or the potential for serious
injury must be reported to the Police. Once reported, incidents should be investigated and immediate
action taken to prevent future incidents.
7.2. Investigation
‘Incidents’ related to work related driving includes matters other than crashes that might require
investigation. An incident also includes a “near-miss” (i.e. any ‘incident’ that might have resulted in
injury). Investigation of an incident within the company should be undertaken by someone with
training, and involve management, particularly in making recommendations to remedy the problems
identified. Incidents typically have multiple causes, and the focus should be on conditions that were
responsible for the incident occurring.
Standard Operating Procedure – Forklifts
Forklifts are used to lift, stack and transfer loads in warehouses, factories, shipping yards, freight
terminals and other workplaces. While forklifts offer a practical materials handling solution for many
businesses, each year they continue to be associated with workplace injuries and deaths.
As forklifts must be manoeuvrable, they are designed to be compact. However, when carrying loads,
they can become unstable. Fully laden, a standard two tonne forklift can weigh approximately five
tonnes. With lower stability and greater manoeuvrability, combined with uncontrolled traffic areas in
workplaces, it is understandable why forklifts are involved in so many incidents.
Even at low speeds, forklifts can cause serious injuries and fatalities. It’s not just the forklift operator
who can be injured; pedestrians can be struck by a forklift or its load.
The selection of a forklift should take into consideration the capacity and safety features specific to
your workplace needs. Determining these needs before you buy or hire a forklift is the most effective
way of reducing the risk of forklift-related injuries. The risk of forklift-related injuries can be further
reduced by having:
• a safe work environment;

• effective employee training;
• well-maintained machinery;
• a traffic management plan;
• policies and procedures; and
• effective supervision.
Tipping over is the biggest danger for a forklift operator. If an operator jumps from a tipping forklift,
the chances of serious injury are high. Seatbelts save lives and must be worn. A forklift can tip over by
rolling or overturning sideways, or by pitching forward when the back wheels lift off the ground.
Forklifts can tip over if you:
• accelerate quickly in reverse

• brake too quickly, especially on a loaded forklift
• brake or accelerate while cornering
• brake or accelerate down a slope
• carry a load facing down a slope
• carry an unevenly balanced load
• collide with another vehicle
• drive across inclines or uneven ground, such as potholes (particularly with a height difference
greater than 20mm across the front wheels)
• drive with the forks raised too high (loaded or unloaded)
• strike low doors or overhead structures
• turn too fast
• use a forklift, which is not designed for it, to tow (pushing or pulling).
1.1. Operator rules
Always adhere to the following rules:
 keep hands & feet clear of the mast assembly - NEVER reach through the mast for any reason;
 always watch out for other people and equipment;
 if a load blocks your vision, drive in reverse using caution, or have someone else guide;
 carry loads as close to the floor as is practicable - don’t drive with the load raised as it decreases
stability;
 check load weights and always be sure of the position of the load centre;
 only handle loads within the rated capacity of the forklift - never lift a load if unsure of its weight;
 never lift a load above other people or allow anyone to stand under raised forks;
 constantly check the load clearance on both sides and above while travelling;
 ensure a load backrest and overhead guard is in place;
 watch rear-end swing - remember the rear end swings wide when turning; and
 always drive at a safe speed and watch out for slippery or uneven ground or other dangerous
conditions.
2. Pre-operation
1. Before issuing keys, check qualifications of operator against register of operators.
2. Complete pre-operation checklist before first use each day forklift is used.
3. Check route to be taken is clear of hazards and door openings suitable.
4. Use unloading and loading designated areas, if this is not possible ensure the ground the forklift
is used on is firm and secure and a clear working area.
3. Safe Forklift Operation

A copy of the manufacturers operating instructions must be kept in a readily available place for
operators. Procedures should be in place for reporting and investigating dangerous occurrences or
any variations from normal operation.
3.1. Operation
 Use 3 points of contact to get onto forklift.

 Fasten the seat belt.
 Start the forklift and check mechanical operation including audible and visual warnings.
 Drive at slow speed.
 Do not exceed your ability when operating the forklift.
 Check weight of the load against the weight capacity of the forklift.
 Familiarise yourself with the load.
 Check pallets are in good condition and have bottom stringer in place.
 Set appropriate fork width.

 Check that people and/or objects are well out of the way of the forklift.
 Commence lift and check stability of load on forks.
 Carry load with forks just below axle level or at a safe height.
 Sound the horn near intersections and going through doorways.
 If the load obscures your view, use another person as a guide but STOP immediately if the guide
cannot be seen.
 Check convex mirrors, if applicable, at doorways for pedestrians and vehicles.
 If the forklift is to be operated on unsealed surface, park forklift on level surface, lower the forks,
apply the park brake, check the condition of ground for uneven areas, mud and/or unstable
ground - using 3 points of contact to get off the forklift.
 Under NO circumstances is a forklift to be used in an area signed ‘No Forklifts Beyond this Point’.
 Do not operate a forklift for extended periods of time - rotate tasks.
 DO NOT:
o accelerate quickly in reverse
o brake too quickly
o brake or accelerate while cornering
o brake or accelerate down a slope
o carry a load facing down a slope
o carry an unevenly balanced load
o drive across inclines
o turn too fast
o exceed maximum load specifications
o jump from the forklift if it overturns
o allow people to stand, walk or work under raised forks
o allow people to walk beside forklift when in operation
o use a mobile phone
o smoke
3.2. Carrying the load
• Know how to read load capacity data plates. Load capacity data plates detail the load each forklift
can safely lift at different mast orientations, or when fitted with an attachment.
• Know the capacity of your forklift and do not exceed it. Check the marked weight of an object, or
use a weight gauge or scale to weigh loads. Do not pick up a load if you do not know its weight.
• If the load is not placed safely and correctly, reload it.
• If the pallets are damaged, remove them.
• If the load is particularly long or wide, see if you need to take an alternative route.
• If the load comprises different lengths of material, ensure the point of balance is in the middle of
the forks when the load is lifted.
• Set the width of the forks to provide the greatest support for the load, and position the load so
that it is balanced evenly on the forks. Take special care with irregular loads or loads that may
slide e.g. steel on steel. Ensure the forks and the loads are centred
• Insert the forks fully beneath the load.

• Check around the load before lifting to ensure it does not affect anything or anyone around it.
• Ensure each load is carried, lowered and set down according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations and your safe work procedures.
• When operating the forklift on an incline, the load must be tilted back and raised only as far as
needed to clear the road surface. The load must be facing up the incline. Do not try to turn on an
incline.
3.3. Forklift operating precautions
 Forklifts shall not be driven up to anyone standing in front of a bench or other fixed object.
 No person shall be allowed to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any forklift, whether
loaded or empty.
 Personnel (other than the operator) shall not be permitted to ride on forklifts.
 Arms or legs shall not be placed between the uprights of the mast.
 Arms or legs shall not be placed outside the running lines of the forklift.
 Where seatbelts are provided, they must be worn.
 When a forklift is left unattended:
o load-engaging means must be fully lowered;
o controls must be neutralised;
o power must be shut off; and
o parking brakes must be set.
 Wheels must be blocked if the forklift is parked on an incline.
 A forklift is unattended when the operator is 10 m or more away from the vehicle, which remains
in his view, or whenever the operator leaves the vehicle and it is not in his view.
 When the operator of a forklift is dismounted and within 10 m of the forklift still in his view, the
load engaging means shall be fully lowered, controls neutralised, and the brakes set to prevent
movement.
 Additional counter weighting of forklifts may not be done unless approved in writing by the forklift
manufacturer.
3.4. Tips for forklift operators
To ensure your own safety, and that of others, always drive and operate forklifts safely. However, if
tipping occurs you should:
• stay in the cabin with the seatbelt on

• brace yourself with your feet pressing down and your arms pushing you back into your seat
• stay with the forklift and lean in the opposite direction of tipping.
Jumping from an overturning forklift often results in serious injury or death.
If the forklift touches an overhead power line, stay in the forklift and warn others to stay away. Keep
still and avoid touching anything in the forklift. Wait as long as it takes for confirmation that the power
has been disconnected/isolated before leaving the forklift. Then, if it is safe to do so, move the forklift
off the power line.
3.5. After use
 Park forklift on level surface, lower the forks, apply the parking brake, place controls in neutral
and check condition of the ground for uneven areas, mud and/or unstable ground.
 Turn off engine and remove key.
 Use 3 points of contact to get off forklift.
 Return the key to the designated area.
4. Prohibited Practices
The following practices are prohibited - it is the responsibility of everyone in the workplace to ensure
that these practices do not occur.
 A forklift must not be used as a towing or push device, unless appropriate attachments are fitted.
 A tow rope must never be attached to the mast to pull or drag loads.
 Unless of an authorised design, fork extensions should not be fitted.
 A person should not push on the point of one or both forks. Nor should a person stand or walk
under the elevated forks, even when a load is not being carried.
 The back-rest extension and overhead guard of the forklift truck should not be removed, unless
specifically authorised.
 A forklift should not be left stationary, with the engine running, in confined spaces.
 A forklift must not be parked or stacked on an incline, or operated on gradients with the load
elevated more than necessary.
 A passenger must never be carried on the forks or load.
 An operator's arms, hands, legs and head must not leave the confines of the cab or be placed
between the uprights of the mast.
 A forklift should not cross railway lines, unless the lines are recessed into the surface; or be driven
over a bridge plate, unless it is securely fixed and can support the total weight.
 There must be a strictly enforced no smoking policy in a refuelling or battery charging area.
 Naked flames should not be used when checking the level of electrolyte in battery cells.
5. Maintenance
Forklift maintenance programs should include a regular schedule of servicing, preventative
maintenance, inspection and cleaning:
• Maintenance programmes and pre-operational checks should be completed according to the

manufacturer’s recommendations and relevant standards.
• Components added to the forklift (e.g. attachments, control and warning devices) must also be
maintained and serviced.
• Only licensed gas fitters may repair and/or replace parts on LPG powered forklifts.
• Only suitably qualified and trained persons may inspect, maintain or repair forklifts. Unauthorised
changes to forklifts (e.g. drilling holes in forklift tines) should not be undertaken.
• Only qualified tyre fitters should remove and fit tyres. To prevent injury should the assembly fail,
use a safety cage when inflating and/or fitting tyres on split rim wheel assemblies. Fit the hose for
the compressed air with a clip-on chuck so the fitter does not have to be in front of the wheel rim
while inflating the tyre.
• Keep forklifts clean so it is easier to detect worn or defective parts. Clean with water, not
flammable liquids.
• Keep detailed records of every inspection, service, maintenance, repair and modification carried
out on a forklift. Record dates, names of authorised people involved, meter readings etc.
• Establish a procedure for dealing with unsafe or damaged forklifts. The procedure should include
isolating and tagging the vehicle, and reporting the problem to the appropriate person.
• Use only a qualified person to inspect and assess damage, and do not use an unsafe or damaged
forklift until the qualified person has rendered it safe and removed the tags.
• Document full details of damage (e.g. cause, nature, the repairs required, assessment of the
forklift's safety, etc.). A copy of this should form part of the inspection and maintenance records.
Standard Operating Procedure – Trucks & Tippers
Truck and tipper drivers have a very demanding job of delivering goods and materials day in and out.
Driving a truck involves a great deal of skill and loads of responsibility for the safety of others and the
driver. It requires full concentration while on the road. Not only must truck drivers contend with other
motorists, dangerous weather conditions, and wandering wildlife, but they must do so while operating
large vehicles, often carrying heavy and sometimes dangerous cargo. One mistake carries possible
huge repercussions. The most important part of a moving truck is the driver!
1. Safe Vehicle Operation

Many driver fatalities have occurred from:
 drivers attempting to jump from a truck that is out of control;

 trucks going over the edge at dump points due to over-travel or the collapse of the edge of the
slope;
 drivers being run over after parking their truck when the truck rolled; or
 loss of control due to equipment failure
Many other fatalities and injuries have been avoided through skilled operation of the vehicles,
knowledge of potential hazards, and the proper use of safety equipment. Truck drivers should
consider the following points, to be prepared to avoid or minimise accidents:
 Have you received training for the piece of equipment you are operating?
 Do you know what to do in case of:
- Runaway/Rollover
- Engine failure
- Steering problem
- Brake failure
- Tyre failure
- Fire
 Always wear your seatbelt. It's perhaps the single most important thing you can do to avoid being
badly injured or killed while operating a truck.
 Don't rely on a berm to stop your vehicle. The typical axle-height berm will not, by itself, prevent
a haul truck from leaving the roadway.
 Test brakes before going down a grade.
 If you lose control of the truck or roll it over, stay in the cab; don't attempt to jump free of the
truck. Staying in the cab with your seatbelt fastened is your best chance to avoid serious injury.
 Know and follow safe loading and unloading or dumping procedures.
 Do not drive if you are tired or drowsy; operating safely takes alertness and concentration.
 Do not drive if you are under the influence of drugs or alcohol; impaired judgment increases the
chances of an accident.
 Know and follow traffic patterns and rules.

 Reduce your speed where conditions warrant, such as at steeper grades, longer grades, around
curves, at night, in congested areas, and under wet, snowy, icy, or foggy conditions.
 Communicate, such as by sounding the horn, before passing.
 Keep a safe following distance.
 Follow safe parking procedures. When parked on a grade, the wheels should be adequately
chocked and turned toward bank.
If not sure of any procedure, such as a traffic pattern or a dumping practice, stop and ask.
Report any unusual or potentially dangerous roadway conditions, such as a boulder on the roadway,
to the appropriate person.
2. General Hazards
2.1. Hazards when driving to a destination
 Colliding with low bridges, overhangs structures, building entrances etc. The driver must:
(i) Be aware of exact load height before driving to destination;
(ii) Ensure sufficient clearance before driving under bridges, overhangs, building entrances; and
(iii) If possible, study route and bridge clearances before departure.
 Cabinet doors, roll out battery drawers, outriggers of transportation vehicle etc. extending beyond
the width of the vehicle during transit and colliding with other vehicles, structures, personnel.
Ensure doors, drawers, outriggers etc. are properly locked in place before driving vehicle.
2.2. Hazards when Towing Trailers
 Trailer fish-tailing and rolling over:

(i) Drive at appropriate speed (max 80 km/h) to prevent the trailer fish-tailing.
(ii) Reduce speed when cornering, especially on gravel roads.
2.3. On-Site Hazards
 Collision with personnel, vehicles, structures and protrusions, or collapse of ground,

embankments, trenches, underground services when driving on site or unloading equipment:
(i) Follow the relevant site speed limits at all times.
(ii) Driver to report to Site Office/Management for instructions re authorised loading/unloading
areas.
(iii) On unmanaged sites, the driver to assess site for hazards prior to loading/unloading.
 Head/other injuries from falling objects when on a construction site - wear appropriate PPE, such
as a hard hat at all times when on construction sites.
 Not being visible to other drivers/operators on site and being run over - look, listen and wear
appropriate PPE, such as a reflective safety vest on any site with mobile equipment.
3. Driver and Operator Rules

Drivers and operators should be aware of the following work practices:
 Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings pertaining to the equipment being
operated.
 Be familiar with the legal regulations applicable to the work being performed and the layout of
the work site.
 Only operate vehicles if you are competent and authorised to drive them.
 Always operate vehicles in designated construction areas with both headlights and the strobe light
on.
 Do not drive when your abilities are impaired by ill health, poor vision, prescribed or illegal
drugs, or alcohol.
 Keep the equipment and cab clean and free of unnecessary material.
 Make sure you fully understand the operating procedures of the vehicle you control.
 Know the site emergency procedures.
 Know the system of signals used on site for controlling equipment operations.
 Know the safe operating limitations of your vehicle, particularly relating to safe maximum loads
and gradients.
 Carry out daily checks on your vehicles and report all defects immediately to your supervisors.
 Follow site procedures and comply with all site rules.
 Do not drive at excessive speeds.
 Follow established site traffic routes.
 Ensure that windows and mirrors are kept clean and clear.
 Keep the vehicle tidy and free from items which may hinder the operation of the vehicle controls.
 Do not allow passengers to ride on vehicles unless safe seating is provided.
 Park vehicles on flat ground wherever possible, with the engine switched off, the handbrake and
trailer brake applied, and where necessary use wheel chocks.
 Do not reverse without checking behind the vehicle for pedestrians, vehicles or obstructions.
 Where visibility from the driving position is restricted use visibility aids or a
spotter/banksman/signaller. Stop if you lose site of the spotter/banksman/signaller or the
visibility aid becomes defective.
 Do not remain on vehicles during loading operations, unless the driver’s position is adequately
protected.
 Ensure that the vehicle is not overloaded and that loads are secure.
 Do not attempt to get on or off moving vehicles.
 Do not make adjustments with the engine running and guards removed.
 Do not smoke during refuelling operations.
3.1. Pre-use activities
Operators should ensure all covers and guards are in place and secure and carry out a documented
pre-use inspection prior to operation of any truck/tipper - by using and completing the prescribed pre-
operating checks - before placing the equipment in service. Check for proper operations of all controls
and protective devices while moving slowly in an open or designated area:
 Left and right steering.

 All brakes.
 Engine governor control level.
 Other devices such as lights, backup alarms and horns.
Any equipment with a defect, that could affect safe operation in any manner, must be removed from
service. The defective equipment must be tagged in accordance with company practices, and the
defect/s reported to the supervisor.
3.2. Park the equipment
Station the equipment in a place away from the work area or access road, when finished with the
required operation. Ensure the following:
 Park only in designated areas - use parking ditches (swales) where provided.
 Avoid parking near edges of slopes and excavations.
 Park on level ground, with the parking brake firmly applied.
 Chock the wheels with suitable wedges if on an incline.
 Remove the ignition key and hand it back to the supervisor for safe custody.
3.3. Move equipment from parked position
Use the following horn signals when moving mobile equipment from a parked position (i.e., hardstand,
parking area, workshop, after lunch or rest breaks or when light vehicles or persons on foot are in the
vicinity):
 One (1) blast and pause - about to start engine;

 Two (2) blasts and pause - about to move forward;
 Three (3) blasts and pause - about to reverse; and
 Pause five (5) seconds before commencing the appropriate action.
3.4. Measures to be taken in case of a breakdown
Apply the following if a vehicle becomes inoperable:
 Operate hazard warning lights (if fitted) if broken down on a road and, when it is dark, leave
parking lights on.
 Turn the front wheels into the side of the road, apply the park brake, and chock the wheels.
 Place road hazard markers 50 metres in front of and behind the vehicle.
 Arrange for repair/removal of the vehicle as soon as practicable.
3.5. Precautions while operating vehicles
 Apply the parking brake during the start-up operation.

 Apply the parking brake, switch off the engine and remove the key when leaving the driver’s seat.
 Avoid fanning the brake pedal when operating machines equipped with air braking systems -
repeat light applications of the brake will exhaust the air pressure faster than the compressor can
replenish it.
 Avoid operating the machine close to overhangs, deep ditches or holes and be alert to potential
caving edges, falling rocks, slides, rough terrain, obstacles and overhead and underground utility
supplies such as electricity lines and water pipes.
 Avoid side hill travel whenever possible when working on slopes and avoid slopes that exceed the
vehicle’s capability.
 Check for people and objects that might be in the way.
 Check that loads are evenly distributed and that they do not obscure visibility from the driving
position.
 Do not chock the wheels with rocks.
 Do not enter or leave mobile equipment whilst the equipment is switched on, the key is in the
ignition or attachments are raised.
 Do not mount or dismount a machine unless it is stationary.
 Do not operate the machine in areas that are not adequately lit.
 Do not operate the machine unless a spotter/banksman/signaller is available for giving signal for
safe operation in case of restricted view.
 Do not use the machine for any purpose other than it is designed for.
 Drive at appropriate speeds for site conditions.
 Ensure adequate ventilation in the cabin.
 Ensure that the cabin door is securely closed.
 Ensure that roll-over protection structures and seat belts are installed when operating on steep
slopes or moving on inclined roads to reduce the hazard to the operating personnel.
 Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation at that area for effective dispersion of the engine exhaust
when operate in a building or other enclosed area.
 Equipment left unattended at night, adjacent to a public road in normal use, or adjacent to areas
where work is in progress, must have appropriate lights or reflectors, or barricades equipped with
appropriate lights or reflectors, to identify the location of the equipment.
 Follow directions given by traffic signs and a spotter/banksman/signaller.
 Keep to designated vehicle routes and follow site traffic rules.
 Know the different handling and braking characteristics of the vehicle in wet or icy conditions.
 Mount and dismount vehicles using steps and grab handles.
 Select the proper gear when climbing or descending steep slopes before proceeding to the slope
to assure adequate power or engine braking.
 Take extra care when moving on sloping ground and particularly if the ground is rough or uneven.
 Understand the differences in performance when loaded and unloaded, particularly relating to
braking and stability on slopes.
 Operators must not get into or alight from the cab while loading is in operation.
 Remain cautious of any load spillage, as it may present a hazard to other employees and/or other
mobile plant/vehicle tyres.
 Materials must only be loaded when the surface under the truck is stable and as flat as possible
to avoid rollover.
 Materials must be loaded to ensure that they do not project beyond the body of the truck.
4. Loading and Unloading

Loading and unloading materials, goods, and products from trucks are daily activities in many
businesses. These activities are also a regular and frequent source of workplace injuries and fatalities.
Loading and unloading are among the most hazardous transport activities in the workplace. People
can be hit by objects falling from vehicles, struck by lift trucks, or fall from vehicles.
4.1. Deliveries and collections
Good communication, co-operation and planning are crucial for safe deliveries and collections
because there are usually several people involved, often working for different employers and
sometimes speaking different languages. Where possible, safety arrangements should be agreed
when the order is placed. These should be confirmed in writing, making it clear who has responsibility
for what during loading and unloading. Include details of the load being transported.
It is important to remember that drivers are not the only people responsible for the safety of the
vehicle and the load. The consignor (the person or company who actually places the load onto the
vehicle) and those in control of work-sites must ensure the loading is carried out safely and that the
load will remain in a safe and stable condition until it reaches its destination. Those in control of work-
sites where unloading takes place must also ensure unloading is carried out safely. Hauliers are
responsible for ensuring the correct equipment and vehicles are used and their drivers are properly
trained and monitored.
Drivers are often injured during deliveries and collections. Ensure they are given adequate safety
information beforehand. Simple delivery safety checklists may help them decide whether there are
sufficient precautions in place, and to establish criteria for when they can reasonably refuse to
continue with a particular delivery or collection. Drivers should be made aware that they are
authorised to refuse or stop loading or unloading for safety reasons. This should be confirmed with
the recipient when organising the delivery or collection.
When organising deliveries and collections, also make sure:
 drivers know what to expect when they arrive at a work-site, for example any restrictions on
vehicle size or type, or when goods should be delivered or collected;
 there is a safe system of work for deliveries and collections;
 there is a safe place for drivers to wait during loading and unloading;
 suitable equipment is available to allow safe loading and unloading;
 there is enough time allowed for drivers to check loads are secure and sheeted properly; and
 instructions (in writing) are provided for all those involved.
Consider scheduling collections and deliveries to avoid the start and end of shifts so that large
numbers of pedestrians and passenger vehicles do not conflict with heavy goods vehicles traffic.
4.2. Visiting drivers
Visiting drivers should report to the relevant responsible person for any appropriate instructions such
as the work-site layout, which route to follow, and where to park, load and unload. They may not have
visited the work-site before and may not be fluent in English, so consider, for example, providing a
plan of the workplace at the entrance with clear and concise instructions in several languages, possibly
including pictures.
It is important for the relevant responsible person to co-operate with the employers of visiting drivers,
to co-ordinate the measures required to help them both meet their health and safety responsibilities.
4.3. Overhead power lines
The most effective way to prevent vehicles coming into contact with overhead lines is by not carrying
out work where there is a risk of contact with, or close approach to, the wires. If a vehicle does make
contact with an overhead power line and the situation cannot be made safe immediately, drivers
should:
 leave the vehicle by jumping as far clear as possible;

 never make contact with the ground and the vehicle (or anything touching the vehicle) at the same
time as this could complete an electrical circuit and may cause serious injury or death;
 immediately make sure no one else comes into contact with the vehicle, or anything touching it,
while it is still touching the power line and make sure the surrounding area is demarcated or
barricaded;
 contact the local electricity supplier to arrange for the power supply to be cut off.
4.4. Unloading
4.4.1. Shifted loads

Loads that have shifted while being transported can fall from a vehicle. Every driver needs to know
how to deal with a load that has moved into an unsafe position. If the load appears to have shifted:
 assess the safety, stability and security of the load before any restraints are removed;
 quarantine the vehicle in a safe area, away from other work, until a competent person has decided
on a safe system of work for unloading (a competent person is someone with the necessary skills,
knowledge and experience to do the work safely); and
 do not open a bulging curtain on a curtain-sider as the load could fall out -access the load
compartment using another route, such as the back door or the curtain on the other side of the
vehicle.
4.4.2. Unloading equipment or materials

The Following standards must be applied when performing the task of unloading any vehicle:
 If not inducted, visiting truck drivers as a minimum must report to site security for visitor induction
and be escorted when on site.
 The person escorting is to ensure that the truck driver is fully aware of, and adhere to, entry
regulations and the Traffic Management Plan at all times.
 The truck driver must be wearing correct PPE in accordance with site standards.
 Drivers are to obey instructions of the LDM responsible person for unloading activities at all times
 Visiting truck drivers are not to operate forklifts or cranes.
 A load assessment must be conducted to determine the most appropriate unloading methods and
equipment required, as well as any possible hazards. If a hazard is identified during the load
assessment, the SHE Officer and area supervisor is to be contacted to assist in an agreed corrective
action.
 Trucks are to be unloaded on level surface, or a safe surface that is as close to level as practicable.
 Truck wheels are to be chocked and the truck be fundamentally stable.
 Truck engine must be switched off, keys removed from the ignition and the truck be made
fundamentally stable.
 Forklift and crane operators are to ensure that their equipment is of suitable capacity to unload
the freight (visiting forklift and crane operators must be trained, tested and licensed and follow
applicable LDM SWPs).
 Once unloading is complete, drivers are to physically check that their truck is empty, ensure that
consignment notes are checked off against material unloaded and verify that there is no damage
sustained to the consignment.
 Any damage is to be reported to the LDM responsible person, who in turn is to inform the
transport company.
 Drivers are to ensure that all load restraint equipment is secure before driving off.
 If only part of the freight has been off-loaded the driver is to ensure the remaining freight is fully
restrained.
4.4.3. Tipping
Reduce the likelihood of tipping vehicles (including rigid-body trucks, tipping trailers and tankers)
overturning, consider using vehicles that avoid the need for tipping, for example those with ‘walking
floor’ load bodies and single-door containers with side-release locking mechanisms.
Tipping vehicle overturns can be caused by:
 poorly maintained tipping vehicles;

 poorly trained operators;
 imbalanced loads or loads becoming stuck in the tipping body (‘freezing’), making vehicles
unstable;
 loads shifting around and settling while being transported;
 uneven tipping surfaces or unsuitable ground putting a vehicle off balance;
 vehicles reversing too far;

 turning with a raised body;
 striking overhead obstructions; or
 high winds.
a) Planning
When tipping is being organised, it is important that the haulier and the person receiving the load
exchange written information, including details of the load, safe tipping procedure, characteristics of
the tipping site (for example uneven ground and overhead cables) and where the load should be
tipped. They should also agree their responsibilities and make those who will actually do the work
aware of this information.
Drivers should be able to refuse to begin tipping if they are not satisfied that it would be safe, with the
confidence that their decision will be supported by their supervisor.
b) Tipping sites
Tipping should take place in well-lit areas on ground that is level and stable and clear of overhead
hazards such as power lines, conveyors and pipework. There should be sufficient clearance between
the top of the tipped trailer and any obstacle overhead.
At sites where level and stable ground conditions cannot always be guaranteed (such as waste disposal
sites), make sure tipping faces are suitable and safe, for example well compacted with no steep side
slopes. Reduce the need to reverse as much as possible and use suitably sized wheel stops to help
position vehicles correctly. If other machinery (e.g. an excavator) is handling the tipped load, make
sure the tipper driver is not exposed to risks from that machinery or load.
c) Before tipping
Before tipping starts, the driver should check that the load is distributed evenly across the vehicle.
This is particularly important where:
 the load might have slipped sideways or too far forwards, as this may overload the tipping gear;
 the load has shifted sideways or backwards, which could make the vehicle topple over;
 there is a risk of the load ‘freezing’ down one side as a result of movement or settling, which could
cause an imbalance.
Make sure only those who need to be there are in the tipping area.
d) Unloading
When tipping, take account of the following:
 If the vehicle has not been properly prepared, discharging loads while tipping can damage parts
such as hatches or tailgates.
 Make sure the tractor unit and trailer of articulated vehicles are aligned.
 Make sure there is enough space for a vehicle to manoeuvre.
 If loads are tipped too quickly a vacuum can be created behind the load, damaging both the
sheeting and the vehicle. Loosen sheets enough to make sure a vacuum does not form.
 If a load is too high for the bar across the discharge area, it can stick or break the bar.
 Open the tailgate before tipping and remove it if necessary. If a load strikes the tailgate it could
break it, or force the tipping body to break away from the tipping ram and be thrown backwards.
 Secure rear doors of the ‘barn door’ type safely in the open position before tipping as they can
move uncontrollably in the wind.
Some tipper vehicles have partitioned bodies to keep sections of the load separate. If a vehicle with
partitioning doors has a load which takes up more than one compartment, always use the doors and
lock them to control the weight in accordance with the design. If this is not done, the rear doors can
spring open under the pressure of the load. Never release partitions while the body is being tipped.
Drivers should:
 never use the ‘power take-off’ (PTO), which shifts power to the tipping pump if the vehicle is in
gear;
 not leave the control position when raising or lowering the body and not apply straps to hold
controls in position;
 be able to tell when the body is fully tipped and stop the tipping pump as soon as possible before
releasing the tipping gear;
 drive a few metres forward to make sure the load is clear, after checking that the load is at the
bottom of the tipped body - if having to leave the cab to carry out this check, fully apply the brakes,
turn off the engine and (if possible) remove the keys;
 never stand or walk immediately behind the vehicle when the body is raised during tipping;
 never go beneath a tipped trailer unless it has been securely propped with a suitable body prop;
 never jump out of a truck that is falling over.
e) Freeing stuck loads

When the load becomes stuck while tipping, create a safe zone around the vehicle in case a stuck load
suddenly moves. Never:
 try to dislodge the load without lowering the body first;

 drive the vehicle and stop it suddenly (‘jogging’); or
 enter the body of a tipper truck while it is raised.
4.5. Loading
4.5.1. Loading vehicles safely

Anyone responsible for loading should be given clear instructions and training on how to distribute
loads safely on the vehicle so it is safe to drive. Follow these principles where possible:
 Loads must be suitably packaged. When pallets are used, the driver needs to check that:
o They are in good condition
o Loads are properly secured to them.

o Loads are safe on the vehicle. They may need to be securely attached to make sure they
cannot fall off.
 Always check the floor or deck of the loading area before loading to make sure it is safe; look out
for debris, broken boarding, etc.
 Spread loads as evenly as possible during loading, moving and unloading as unbalanced loads can
make the vehicle or trailer unstable, or overload individual axles.
 Place the load as close as possible to the bulkhead or headboard. Fill any gap with appropriate
dunnage (using inexpensive or waste material) where this is not possible. However, avoid loading
drawbar trailers too far forwards – this can lead to a snaking effect as the combination moves.
 Avoid loading to the back of the trailer, because this can cause the trailer to tip backwards
(especially for single-axle trailers), reducing the vehicle’s grip on the road surface.
 Arrange loads close to the middle of the trailer and slightly forward of it to place enough
downward force on the tow bar to keep the trailer coupled, but not putting too much pressure on
the tow vehicle suspension or hitch.
 Balance loads across the axle (or axles) of a drawbar trailer so that coupling or uncoupling can be
managed easily and safely, and the trailer remains stable.
 Load in a way that will allow for efficient unloading (for example in reverse delivery order) and
reduce double handling.
 Tailgates and sideboards must be closed when possible - if over-hang cannot be avoided, it must
be kept to a minimum and the over-hanging part of the load must be clearly marked.
 Vehicles must never be overloaded. Overloaded vehicles can become unstable, difficult to steer
or be less able to brake.
4.5.2. Load trimming and covering

a) Trimming
Some loads will need trimming to make sure they are properly balanced before being transported,
sheeted or netted. Trimming is common where loading using a bucket or hopper has left a load
unevenly spread.
Avoid walking on loads while trimming. As well as the risks of falling from height, they are often uneven
or unstable. They may appear to be solid even though there are gaps or ‘voids’ under the surface
(common with aggregate loads), causing danger of engulfment (SWP21 - Working in Danger of
Engulfment). Use the working platform of a vehicle or a site-based working platform instead.
b) Covering loads
There are a number of reasons to cover a load, including:
 keeping materials dry, such as quicklime;

 to protect the environment and comply with the Environmental Protection Act;
 to prevent loss of load during transit and comply with road traffic legislation; and
 protection from the weather.
Sheeting and netting can involve risks from working at height and manual handling. To reduce these
risks, consider other ways of covering the load, such as protecting each unit separately, using pre-
packed loads, or using alternative vehicles such as curtain-siders or closed containers that do not
require sheeting.
When covering a load, consider, in order of preference:
 manual, automated or mechanical sheeting systems which do not require people to go up onto
the vehicle;
 work platforms to provide safe access to carry out sheeting from the platform without having to
access the load; and
 a gantry with a work-restraint system to prevent a fall.
Nets are easier to handle than sheets and can be thrown over the load from the ground. If nets are
used:
 never use them to secure a load beyond their maximum rated capacity;
 make sure they are properly tightened, according to the manufacturer’s instructions;
 the mesh size needs to be less than the smallest item the net is expected to hold (although this
will not always apply to nets used over loose bulk loads).
If there are no fall-prevention measures in place at the site, drivers should refuse to sheet or un-sheet
the vehicle. This decision should be supported by their supervisor. Whatever method of sheeting or
un-sheeting is used:
 Make sure vehicles are parked on level ground with their parking brakes on and the ignition key
removed.
 Use designated sheeting areas away from moving vehicles and pedestrians, preferably sheltered
from strong winds and bad weather.
 Regularly check that the sheets and the straps and ropes used for pulling and securing the sheet
are in good condition and replaced when necessary.
 Regularly inspect, repair and maintain sheeting mechanisms, platforms, gantries and personal fall-
protection equipment (like harnesses and lanyards).
 Make sure there is enough time and space to safely sheet the load before leaving the site.
 Train and instruct staff on how to operate and maintain sheeting systems and personal fall-
protection equipment and monitor how they are used.
 Always consider how to un-sheet the load safely at its destination.
5. Reversing
Many incidents involving vehicles at work happen during reversing, with poor visibility being the main
cause. There are several measures that can help to reduce the risk of reversing accidents, but
removing the need for reversing is the most effective.
Adopting a one-way system is one of the best ways to reduce reversing operations. If a one-way
system is not possible, consider -
 establishing drive-through loading and unloading zones, and parking areas with entrances and
exits on either side;
 providing turning areas to allow vehicles to turn and drive forwards for most of the time, ideally a
roundabout type.
5.1. Alternatives
If reversing cannot be avoided:
 establish and clearly mark dedicated ‘reversing areas’ using longitudinal guides or white lines that
are clearly signposted for both drivers and pedestrians;
 design or modify existing reversing areas, for example by making them larger, to improve visibility
for both drivers and pedestrians;
 exclude non-essential personnel from areas where vehicles are reversing;
 fit fixed mirrors or other visibility aids in the workplace to improve visibility around vehicles;
 consider installing reversing aids on vehicles, such as CCTV and reversing sensors;
 use a trained banksman (signaller), but only when all other options have been exhausted.
5.2. Banksmen (signallers)
Banksmen should only be used when there is no other way to control reversing risks. Because they
often have to stand relatively close to a vehicle when it is reversing, it is very important that they are
properly trained and competent. Banksmen must only be used in exceptional circumstances because
of the size of vehicles involved.
Banksmen should use the standard hand signals based on existing signalling practice and agreed upon.
They need to be visible to drivers at all times. Precautions for visibility are especially important in low-
light conditions and should include, where appropriate:
 high-visibility equipment, such as bats, batons or flags;

 a high-visibility vest that will distinguish them from other site workers;
 vehicle- or site-fixed visibility aids (such as mirrors, cameras etc.).
They need to stand in a safe position where they can guide the reversing vehicle and be visible to the
driver at all times. If a driver loses sight of a banksman they should stop immediately. In some
circumstances, portable radios or similar communication systems can be helpful, although the
banksman should still be visible to the driver at all times.
6. Parking
Parking areas should:
 be clearly signposted;
 not impede traffic routes;
 ensure pedestrians and vehicles are kept apart;
 allow drivers and pedestrians to see clearly;
 be firm, level and well drained;
 be well lit, if possible;
 be as close as possible to where people need to go when they leave their vehicles.
Consider providing drive-through parking areas for larger vehicles to eliminate the need for reversing.
If this is not possible, then consider reverse parking with the parking bays at an angle to reduce the
number of vehicles reversing into the flow of traffic.
Bays or lay-bys, where vehicles can be left safely, may be used for parking, as long as they are offset
from the flow of traffic and people. They should be firm, level, well-lit and clearly marked.
6.1. Hard-standings
Hard-standings are hard-surfaced areas where vehicles and their trailers can be parked. They should
be robust enough to safely support the weight of the vehicle, trailer and load, and they should also be
able to withstand the corrosive effect of any spillages, such as fuel, oil and other pollutants. Cement
concrete surfaces are preferable to asphalt or bitumen, particularly where vehicles load or unload.
6.2. Safe parking
Vehicles should be parked on firm and level ground, preferably in a dedicated parking area. No vehicle
should be left unattended unless the parking brakes have been firmly applied, the engine has been
switched off, the starter key has been removed, and any mounted equipment has been lowered to
the ground or secured.
6.3. Parking on a slope
Although a working surface such as a goods yard may appear level, it will nearly always have a slight
incline for drainage. This can cause a vehicle and/or trailer to move if the parking brakes have not
been applied. When parking on a slope:
 apply all brakes;

 leave vehicles in gear (if it is safe to do so);
 use wheel chocks or stops where appropriate;
 park vehicles facing up or down the slope, not sideways on.
7. Maintenance
A pre-start check shall be conducted by the driver prior to vehicle use. Regular inspections must be
conducted by a competent person on all trucks and tippers to ensure all safety features and warning
devices on the vehicle are tested and maintained regularly. Trucks and tippers are required to be
inspected and maintained in accordance with applicable legislation and manufacturers’ specifications.
Qualified personnel should carry out documented maintenance procedures in accordance with the
manufacturers’ specifications. Inspection and maintenance documentation must be readily available
for review by operators and service personnel. It may become necessary to vary maintenance
schedules because of the differences in equipment and conditions of assembly, installation and
operation.
During maintenance activities, equipment shall be locked out or when lock-out is not possible a sign
posted on controls identifying that the equipment is not operational. Raised booms or other
equipment components shall be secured with blocking or approved safety supports during
maintenance.
Standard Operating Procedure – Earthmoving Equipment
Earthmoving equipment includes any wheeled or tracked vehicle that is engine- or motor-powered,
together with attached or towed equipment, but not a vehicle operated on fixed rails or tracks. The
most common pieces of earthmoving equipment that are typically used on site include, but are not
limited to:
 front-end loaders;
 tractor-loader-backhoes (TLBs);
 excavators and backhoes;
 dozers and graders; and
 skid-steer loaders.
Note: Trucks and tippers are covered in a separate SOP.
Operators are not only responsible for the equipment's movement, but often are involved with
equipment work tasks like grading, material movement, and compaction. Most earthmoving
equipment manoeuvres at relatively low speeds, but their power and suspension systems often
provide operators with little tactile feedback about contact with many objects they may potentially
encounter while operating.
Due to the size of earthmoving equipment and the nature of the operations for which earthmoving
equipment is used, the incidents that could potentially result from the use of earthmoving equipment
could be quite severe. Besides the nature of the operations for which earthmoving equipment is used
being inherently dangerous, earthmoving equipment could be quite hazardous to people and other
equipment if the equipment were to come into contact with people and/or other equipment or
property. In relation to the operation of earthmoving equipment, a safe system is to be implemented
to control risks arising from hazards and issues such as, but not limited to:
 rollover;
 falling debris;
 contact with utility services, scaffolding, etc.;
 contact with personnel; and
 exposure to excessive noise and/or vibration.
The common causes of accidents are often due to the absence of a safe system of work for the
operation, inappropriate selection on the use of the equipment, operators being not properly trained
and incompetent, poor maintenance of the equipment and failure in observing the necessary safety
precautions.
Another very important aspect of the use of earthmoving equipment to consider is the limited visibility
that operators are faced with. Operators are often faced with large blind spots as a direct result of the
size and shape of most pieces of earthmoving equipment. This increases the risk of running over or
LHDA- Page 1 of 7
colliding with people, materials and other pieces of equipment/property quite drastically. To counter
this problem, spotters/banksmen/signallers must be provided to direct the operators of earthmoving
equipment and prevent people from coming in the way of the equipment. Another effective way of
combating this issue is effective barricading and demarcation.
1. Equipment Suitability
Equipment must be suitable for the place in which they are to be used and for the work they carry
out. The selection of suitable work equipment can reduce or eliminate many risks at the site. Starting
with the right equipment is essential and much easier and cheaper than to modify it later.
Factors to consider when choosing equipment:
 The effectiveness of the braking system, bearing in mind the slopes it is expected to work on;
 All round visibility for the driver;
 Stability under all foreseeable operating conditions;
 Protection for the operator and any passengers from falling objects (falling object protective
structures) and overturning (roll-over protective structures and seat belts);
 Safe access to and from the cab and other areas to which access may be required - handholds and
handrails properly oriented with steps should be provided and maintained so personnel can
maintain three-point contact while climbing on, off and around a machine.;
 Lights, windscreen wipers, horn and other warning devices;
 Guarding for dangerous parts during use or maintenance work;
 Protection for the operator and any passengers from rain, high and low temperatures, noise, dust
or vibration; and
 Suitable seating for the driver and any passengers.
Loading and unloading machines always involves potential hazards. The site personnel should develop
a method statement for the correct loading and unloading for the machine in the site. The procedure
recommended by the manufacturer should always be followed.
Operators should ensure all covers and guards are in place and secure and carry out a documented
pre-use inspection prior to operation of any piece of earthmoving equipment - by using and
completing the prescribed pre-operating checks - before placing the equipment in service. Check for
proper operations of all controls and protective devices while moving slowly in an open or designated
area:
 Left and right steering.

 All brakes.
 Engine governor control level.
 Other devices such as lights, backup alarms and horns.
LHDA- Page 2 of 7
Any equipment with a defect, that could affect safe operation in any manner, must be removed from
service. The defective equipment must be tagged in accordance with company practices, and the
defect/s reported to the supervisor.
2.1. Operator competence

Competence is the main measure when selecting an operator. Every operator of a piece of
earthmoving equipment is required to have a certificate of training for that equipment. The certificate
verifies that the operator is trained in all operating procedures for that particular piece of equipment.
Visiting operators must seek appropriate authority to enter the site and operate earthmoving
equipment.
Competence of operators is not evaluated on one criterion only. Experience, recognised training,
testing of knowledge, ability and a person’s general health, for example eye sight, physical ability and
co-ordination, requirements for prescribed drugs, etc., are all to be included within the evaluation
criteria.
Operators should be aware of their own responsibilities and avoid taking risks and short-cuts. Under
no circumstances should any person be permitted to drive or operate earthmoving equipment if
that person is under the influence of illegal drugs or alcohol. Any person taking prescribed drugs
that may affect their ability to work safely should seek approval from their employer before
driving/operating.
Competence should be monitored throughout an operator’s employment. Monitoring of competence

should be such that management is confident with an operator’s ongoing ability to work safely and
is alerted to any deficiencies in individual competence as soon as it occurs.
2.2. Site preparations

Before any earth moving operation is commenced, site personnel should carry out site preparations
for safe operation of the earthmoving machinery. The following safety measures should be observed:
 provision of temporary fencings and warnings at edges of embankments, excavations and pits
against risks of roll over;
 provision of goal posts and warning signs in the vicinity of overhead power lines;
 arrangement of site traffic controls;
 provision of adequate site access roads; and
 provision of safety system for other site vehicles such as provision of flashing lights or flags for
smaller vehicles in large earth moving site.
3. Operate Earthmoving Equipment

A safe system of work should be established prior to any earth moving operation and this system
should be followed by all personnel engaged in the earth moving operation. The system should be
prepared and endorsed by the owner / contractor, under the advice of project engineer, service
engineer, mechanic, safety officer and other relevant personnel. In particular, both written and verbal
LHDA- Page 3 of 7
instructions about the safe system of work should be provided to the machine operator prior to the
earth moving operation.
3.1. Operation
During the operation of the machine, the following precautions should be adopted by the operator:
 Walk around the machine once more just prior to mounting it. Check for people and objects that
might be in the way.
 Just before starting, check all controls such as forward and reverse, steering and transmission to
ensure they are in the correct start-up position. The parking brake should be applied during the
start-up operation.
 Check for proper functioning of all operating and shut-down controls.
 After starting the engine, check gauges, instruments and warning lights, all controls and all
warning and safety devices and indicators - always operate vehicles in designated construction
areas with both headlights and the strobe light on.
 Check operation of service brakes (in both forward and reverse operation) and parking brakes on
level ground, if possible, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Particular attention should
be focused on abnormal noise, undue vibration and smell.
 When operating a machine, always stay in the operator's station and fasten the seat belt if so
provided. Never mount or dismount a machine unless it is stationary. If the machine is equipped
with a cabin, ensure that the cabin door is securely closed.
 Operators should not allow other personnel to ride on equipment while the equipment is in
motion, except for training purposes, and then only when a seat is provided. No one should be
allowed to climb onto equipment in motion.
 Always operate the machine slowly until fully familiarised with its control.
 Where earthmoving equipment is operated on a public road, it is to be operated in accordance
with the Traffic Regulations.
 Prevent asphyxiation. If you must operate in a building or other enclosed area, be sure that there
is sufficient ventilation at that area for effective dispersion of the engine exhaust. If your machine
is equipped with an enclosed cabin, be certain there is adequate ventilation.
 When working on slopes, avoid side-hill travel whenever possible. The danger of sliding and
tipping during side-hill travel is always present, regardless of how heavy or stable your machine
may appear to be.
 Always fasten the seat belt if your machine is equipped with a roll over protection structure.
 When climbing or descending steep slopes, always select the proper gear before proceeding to
the slope to assure adequate power or engine braking. If your machine has a gear shift, select a
low gear. If your machine has a hydrostatic drive, the speed control should be in the slow travel
position, close to neutral. Never engage in the fully displace position.
 When climbing or descending slopes, on machines that have a gear shift and a hydrostatic control,
both controls must be in their slow travel position. Always be sure that manually operated gear
type transmissions are fully engaged before proceeding to the slope.
LHDA- Page 4 of 7
 Avoid operating the machine too close to an overhang, deep ditch or hole and be alert to potential
caving edges, falling rocks and slides, rough terrain, obstacles and overhead lines. When operating
any earthmoving equipment, employers must provide a safe system of work to manage the
significant risks of operating near overhead electrical assets.
 In case of restriction of the view of the operator, do not operate the machine unless a banksman
is available for giving signal for safe operation.
 Under wet or rainy conditions when the ground became too slippery for the machine, stop the
earth moving operation.
 Never operate the machine in any place of inadequate lighting. Adequate lighting should be
arranged in confined areas and during operation at night time.
 Never swing a load over a vehicle cab.
 Never leave the machine while the engine is running and ignition key is on the machine.
 Never use the machine for any purposes other than it is designed for. No item of earthmoving
equipment or plant shall be used as a crane, or to lift people, unless it has a certificate of
registration as such.
 In clearing operations, operators should expect the greatest danger to occur from falling limbs or
timber. In general excavation work, operators should be alert to dangers from overhanging dirt
and rocks.
 Operators should ensure that all employees are standing clear before pushing over trees,
bulldozing rocks and rolling logs. During clearing operation, operators should take care to keep
tree trunks rolling parallel to each other, especially when stacking cleared trees. Small green trees
8-15mm in diameter can bend and then spring loose with great force. This force can cause injury
to operators or nearby ground workers.
It is critically important that earthmoving equipment operators consider the following aspects related
to the individual pieces of equipment while operating them:
 Front-end loaders
o a level area must be created when work is required on a steep grade;
o if the above is not possible, the machine must be operated slowly;
o downhill movements of the boom must be restricted and minimised as much as possible; and
o turns must be taken slowly and in a wide arc when travelling on a steep slope.
 Excavators, backhoes and TLBs
o during the excavation of trenches, material must be placed as far as possible (minimum 600
mm) away from the trench, where it is not likely to subside back into the trench or jeopardise
the stability of the trench wall;
o during excavation activities, the ground beneath the machine must be not undercut;
o jerky slewing movements and sudden braking must be avoided to keep the machine stable
and to minimise the possibility of overloading machine components;
o earthmoving machines with quick-hitch implements must not be operated under any
circumstances without the safety pin locked in position;
o when ascending/descending an incline, the bucket must be placed in a safe position to
counterbalance the machine; and
LHDA- Page 5 of 7
o buckets must not be to be slewed over/above personnel under any circumstances.

 Dozers and graders
o dozers/graders must not be operated in unsafe locations adjacent to edges of banks, ditches,
cuts or fills or near overhanging material where vibration and/or the weight of the
dozer/grader may cause the edge to give way or overhanging material to fall;
o travelling across a slope must be avoided wherever possible. If not possible, the operator must
take extreme caution to prevent a rollover. If the machine starts to slide sideways when
working across a slope, the operator must turn the dozer/grader downhill and drop the blade
carefully; and
o dozer/grader blades must be kept close to the ground to maintain balance when the machine
is travelling around site, and in particular when travelling up a slope.
 Skid-steer loaders
o safety devices to lock bucket arms must be in the raised position and used where necessary;
and
o protective cabin screens must be used.
3.2. Parking
Having finished the earth moving operation, the machine should be stationed in a place off the work
area or access road. The following points should be noted:
 Avoid parking near edges of slopes and excavations.

 Park on level ground, with the parking brake firmly applied and blocked by suitable wedges, where
appropriate. For wheeled machines, the wheels should be chocked by suitable wedges and never
chock the wheels with rocks.
 Lower the attachments or working tools to the ground.
 Remove the ignition key and hand it back to the supervisor or site personnel for safe custody.
4. Maintenance
Routine / preventative maintenance is to be carried out on all earthmoving equipment, by the
manufacturer, supplier or other qualified person, as per manufacturers’ instructions. The machine
should be repaired by competent mechanic and service engineer and only genuine spare parts should
be used.
All safety features and warning devices on earthmoving equipment are to be maintained and tested
regularly by a competent person. During earthmoving equipment maintenance activities, or the fitting
of attachments to machines, precautions such as the following are to be ensured as relevant:
 sound placement of machine;

 locking of brakes;
 stopping of engine; and
 appropriate tags are to be positioned in conspicuous locations to prevent the use of the
earthmoving equipment, (i.e. ‘Danger’ or ‘Out of Service’ tags). The individual that positions the
LHDA- Page 6 of 7
tags during maintenance activities is to be the only person to remove them once that person has
ensured that the earthmoving equipment is ready for safe operation.
Log books are to be kept with all earthmoving equipment (or other designated area), and are to be
maintained by the operator(s) or another designated competent person. These log books are to
contain details of all maintenance and repairs undertaken on a particular machine.
LHDA- Page 7 of 7
Safe Work Practice - Work Permits
A safe work permit is required for any maintenance, repair or construction work within the company
facilities. Permits are generally not required for work performed in office buildings and maintenance
workshops, except for confined space entry and hot work on equipment that has been in service.
Cold work performed by owning area personnel does not require a work permit. This procedure
covers work permits in cases where an activity or task to be performed involves:
1. hot work (welding, cutting, brazing, etc.);

2. confined space entry;
3. excavation;
4. lifting over 5 tons; and
5. non-routine work.
The Supervisor that will be supervising the task completes Part 1 of the work permit which defines:
 a brief description of the work to be done;

 location where the work will be done;
 the duration, stating date and time when work will commence and finish;
 the equipment to be used;
 the hazards posed and the control measures required to perform the task safely;
 the conditions, preparations, precautions and limitations related to the specific work permit;
 the steps to be taken to prepare the equipment, building/area for the work; and
 the safety precautions, safety equipment, or specific procedures that must be followed to
enable personnel to complete the work safely.
The authorised person as well as the Supervisor involved, evaluates the work permit request for
completeness and correctness. All special precautions must be listed in Part 2 of the permit. The
authorised person approves the permit conditionally.
1. Typical Preparatory Actions

1.1. Hot work
The following actions are typically taken in preparation for the commencement of hot work tasks:
 Confirm that the task cannot be achieved by alternative means;

 Evaluate whether it is possible to perform the work in a less hazardous area;
 Isolate the area with safety barricades;
 Perform a flammable gas test where hot work is to be done in hazardous zones or confined
spaces;
 Take all practical measures to reduce the risk of fires and explosions within 15m of the hot work;
LHWP2-SWP1 Page 1 of 8
 Cover flammable and combustible materials in the vicinity of hot work to prevent the ignition
thereof;
 Properly ventilate the hot work area;
 Where hot work is conducted near grass or bushes, the immediate area must be cleared or
wetted;
 Consider all risks, including at least the following:
o Building materials
o Flammable materials floating on water in drains or trenches
o Flammable materials soaked into insulation/padding/filling or ground
o Hot work equipment safety device malfunctioning
o Lack of containment of sparks from welding or cutting
o Latent and radiant heat after welding or cutting (cool down period)
o Leakage of oxygen from equipment
o Possibility of hot work igniting residual process material in equipment
o Possibility of hot work initiating a chemical reaction
o Possibility of hot work releasing fumes
o Presence of combustible solids or dusts
o Presence or leakage of flammable gases, vapours or dust
o Residual material remaining after isolation/washing/purging/testing
o Rubbish or packaging
o Sampling or draining of flammable materials
o Spills or leakage of flammable or combustible liquids
o Uncontrolled sparking from failure to attach welding set earth return leads close to the
work;
 Washing, purging and testing to verify that all equipment is free of dangerous contaminants;
 Provide adequate fire protection equipment such as appropriate portable fire extinguishers in
the immediate vicinity of the work area;
 Take measures to ensure that the public are adequately protected from welding flashes.
1.2. Confined space entry
Confined space entry requirements are aimed at protecting employees entering confined spaces
where they may be exposed to:
 Hazardous atmospheres
 Engulfment by materials
 Conditions that may trap or asphyxiate due to converging or sloping walls
 Any other safety or health hazards.
The following actions are typically taken in preparation for entering a confined space:
 Complete a risk assessment;

 Erect barricades and/or signs to prevent unauthorised entry;
 Electrical isolation and lock-out of pipes;
 Clean and purge spaces of hazardous solids and liquids;

 Secure materials as well as practically possible to prevent engulfment;
 Perform required pre-entry checks such as testing for hazardous atmospheric conditions;
 Place notices at each confined space, stating that a confined space pre-entry checklist and
permit must be obtained before entry;
 Confirm the suitability of equipment to be used inside the confined space e.g.:
o Electric-powered tools and lighting must be low voltage and connected to a ground fault
circuit interrupter,
o Equipment must be inspected, tested and fitted with a current approval tag of 32V or less, or
o Equipment must be fitted with a flexible supply cable not inferior to a heavy duty type
complying with legal requirements;
 Confirm the competence of Supervisor(s) and worker(s) and ensure that only suitably trained
personnel enter confined spaces and act as safety watchmen;
 Expand about equipment (e.g. lifeline and breathing apparatus, etc.) to be available with safety
watchman;
 Provide the required personal protective equipment (PPE) such as safety harness or lifeline;
 Remove all solids and liquids that could present a hazard;
 Obtain any additionally required work permits, e.g. hot work permit;
 Confirm and communicate standby, emergency preparedness and rescue plans; and
 All employees must confirm that all required checks have been undertaken all isolations made
and all precautions are in place prior to entry.
1.3. Excavation
Take the following actions when preparing for excavations:
 Confirm the location of underground utility installations, e.g. sewer, telephone, water, fuel,
electric and gas lines;
 Confirm and communicate safe entry and exit arrangements;
 Confirm the competence of Supervisor(s) and worker(s) (Supervisors must be able to read site
service plans and know how to use them);
 Consider all risks, including at least the following:
o Slides or cave-ins and relevant protective systems
o Accumulation of groundwater and rainwater
o Hazardous atmosphere
o Materials falling into excavations – provide toe boards where necessary
o Employees, public and vehicles falling into excavation
o Employees struck by plant
o Undermining nearby structures/foundations – provide temporary support where necessary;
 Storage of excavated ground and building materials;
 Safe removal of protective systems (shoring, bracing, etc.);
 Ensure that all employees involved in digging is conversant with safe digging practices;
 Safe ingress and egress from excavations;
 Take all measures regarding backfill and compaction;

 Confirm and communicate standby, emergency preparedness and rescue plans.
1.4. Lifting over 5 tons
The following actions are typically taken in preparation for tasks involving lifting over 5 tons:
 Compile a lifting plan and discuss it with the employees involved in the lift;
 Identify potential hazards and prevention measures;
 Identify restricted areas;
 Select competent employees;
 Communicate lifting requirements and hazards;
 Take measures if the lift plan must be changed;
 Implement emergency, recovery and contingency plans;
 Site must be clear of obstructions, including overhead power lines;
 Lifting machine and gear must be in a good state of repair and safe to carry out the lifting
activity;
 Assess the load to determine the type of lifting appliance and gear to be used. Assess –
o whether the load is chemical/hazardous material,
o the shape/number of pieces to be lifted at a time,
o whether the load is self-supporting or requires additional support,
o whether the load has particular conditions that need to be taken into account, i.e. fragile,
hot, cold, corrosive, etc.,
o the compatibility of the lifting point with lifting gear,
o the weight of the load,
o the centre of gravity of the load before lifting,
o whether the load is fixed down or free to lift. If it is fixed, whether it will be stable when the
fixings are released or will it need support;
 Take measures against slips, trips and falls;
 Consider traffic routes, pedestrians, etc.;
 Consider environmental factors, e.g. strong winds, etc.;
 Safe ingress and egress.
1.5. Non-routine work
The following actions are typically taken in preparation for non-routine work:
 Compile safety plans, safe work practices/procedures and ensure they are followed;
 Assign responsibilities;
 Ensure that employees, environment, equipment, etc. are protected;
 Inspect the site and take the necessary precautions;
 Ensure that work is performed only on the specified equipment;
 The location, all employees and types of work being performed on the site, are always known
and managed, especially in the event of an emergency;
 Consider the appropriate PPE, tools and equipment, notices and signs, etc.;
 Monitor all work being done;
 Promote problem-solving approaches that address hazards before the jobs are performed;
 Ensure that employees are competent and understand the working conditions.
2. Issue Work Permit

The permit issuer formally approves the permit if the inspection reveals that the necessary
preparations have been completed acceptably, thereby authorising the work to begin. An issued
permit remains valid for the duration of the task or as otherwise stipulated on the permit.
Where the duration of the work spans more than one shift, the current shift Supervisor hands the
permit over to the new shift Supervisor. The Supervisor taking over the permit informs the permit
issuer that that the permit has been handed over.
3. Execute the Work

Before the task is begun, the Supervisor discusses provisions and requirements of the work permit in
detail with the worker(s) who will be involved in the task.
3.1. Hot Work
The following are typical precautions that are taken while hot work is being done:
 Monitor heat transfer through walls, along pipes, etc.;

 No dangerous substances may enter the area during the operation;
 Atmosphere testing for flammable gases every two hours on ongoing jobs to ensure the
atmosphere remains at a flammability of less than 10% of the lower explosive limit (LEL);
 Ropes must be protected from heat of any flame, arc, sparks, slag and hot metal.
 Control and contain flames and sparks as well as possible to prevent them from igniting
flammable and combustible materials;
 Isolate hazardous energies;
 Designate a fire watchman to be responsible for –
o being in attendance for the entire duration of hot work,
o stopping hot work operations if new hazards are introduced,
o monitoring the work area for at least one hour after completion of the hot work to detect
and extinguish any fires that may occur as a result of the hot waste / latent heat following
the hot work,
o returning to the work area at least hourly for four hours after completion of the hot work to
check that no fires are smouldering or have subsequently started;
 All employees associated with hot work must be conversant with the precautions to be taken;
 Welders must not work alone.
3.2. Confined space entry
The following are typical precautions that are taken while work is being done in a confined space:
 Smoking is not permitted in the confined space or near the entrance/exit area;
 At least one watchman is present at all times;
 Personnel entering the confined space and watchmen remain in constant visual contact if
possible;
 Where constant visual contact isn’t possible, constant voice communication is maintained;
 Bottom or side entries are not made below the level of hanging material as this could cause
engulfment;
 Work is not conducted below the level of hanging material which could cause engulfment;
 The atmosphere in the confined space is constantly monitored for oxygen, explosive gas and
carbon monoxide levels and work only continues –
o without the use of respirators if the oxygen level in the air remains between 19,5% - 23,5%;
o if explosive gases are –
 less than 50% of the lower explosive limit (LEL) when no hot work is to be performed;
 less than 10% of the LEL when hot work is to be performed;
 Suitable respirators are used when oxygen levels are above 23,5% or below 19,5%;
 Additional ventilation and oxygen level monitoring is performed when hot work is being
performed in the confined space;
 Entrances to confined spaces are barricaded to prevent unauthorised entry and to prevent
personnel from falling down holes;
 Safety harnesses and lifelines must be worn when –
o work is done at 2m or more (relative height);
o rescue arrangements require lifting by a safety line;
o entry is into a space containing solids capable of shifting and suffocating;
 The lifeline, emergency self-contained breathing apparatus, etc. are left with the watchman.
3.3. Excavation
The following are typical precautions that are taken while excavations are taking place:
 The locations of underground utility installations (e.g. sewer, telephone, water, fuel, electric, and
gas lines) are clearly marked on drawings/plans;
 Measures are taken to prevent underground utility installations from being damaged
accidentally;
 Measures are implemented to enable the removal of any rain- and groundwater that may be
entered/ accumulated in the excavation;
 The accumulation of hazardous atmospheres is prevented as far as possible;
 Excavations are sloped sufficiently to prevent cave-ins or slides;
 Excavations are shored when sloping is impractical and whenever the excavation is deeper than
1,5m;
 Open excavations are covered when handrails or barricades do not provide adequate protection
against people or vehicles failing into the excavation;
 Tripping hazards are sufficiently marked to be clearly visible in the day or night;
 Excavations by means of powered/motorised equipment are not allowed closer than 1,2m from
underground utilities.
3.4. Lifting over 5 tons
The following are typical precautions that are taken while lifting over 5 tons is being done:
 Ground conditions must be suitable to support the load;

 The path from the lifting site to the landing site must be safe and clear;
 The landing site must be level and strong enough to take the load;
 Measures must be taken regarding excessive floor loading, soft ground and hidden weak spots,
that is, ducts and drains;
 The proximity of live process plant and other machinery must be taken into consideration;
 Measures must be taken regarding environmental factors;
 Measures must be taken to ensure that, when slinging the load, it remains stable;
 When the load is “turned over” in the air or position at an inclined altitude, special consideration
must be given to the balance and stability at all stages to ensure that the load remains balanced,
stable and securely attached without overloading.
3.5. Non-routine work
The following are typical precautions that are taken while non-routing work is being done:
 Work must be monitored at regular intervals to ensure that employees adhere to the safety plan
and safe work practices/procedures;
 Measures are taken to stop work immediately when a condition is identified that poses danger
of serious injury or impairment to employees;
 Consideration must be given to all the hazards identified;
 Measures must be taken in the job/task change.
4. Monitor Work
The permit issuer must inspect work area at least once a day. More hazardous tasks, like hot work in
explosive environments, may have to be inspected more frequently. Inspection is done to confirm
the ongoing suitability thereof. The issuer may stop all work if anything is found to be unsatisfactory
or if there is a risk of an incident. The responsible Supervisor is required to take the necessary action
before the work can continue.
5. Cancel Work Permit

Following completion of the task and the permit closeout actions, such as the final fire-watch
inspections, the Supervisor signs off the work permit to indicate that the task has been complete.
The Supervisor then submits the work permit to the permit issuer, who inspects the work performed
and the work area to confirm whether –
 works have ceased;

 all tools and equipment have been removed; and
 the area has been left in satisfactory and safe condition.
The permit issuer signs the work permit to confirm that the work has indeed been completed
satisfactory, thereby cancelling the work permit.
6. Incomplete Works
Where the Supervisor indicates that the permitted works are incomplete, the permit issuer
accompanies the Supervisor to the works area to ensure that –
 works have ceased; and

 the area has been left in a satisfactory and safe condition.
The permit issuer signs the work permit to confirm the satisfactory completion of the above, thereby
cancelling the work permit. The permit issuer then issues another permit for the work still to be
completed. The original risk assessment, conditions, preparations, precautions and limitations may
still be valid and applicable, but are first confirmed and verified by the permit issuer and the
responsible Supervisor.
Where a delay is likely between the expiration of the current permit and the issuing of the new
permit, the permit issuer ensures the total withdrawal of all personnel, tools and equipment from
the work area.
Safe Work Practice - Lock-out and Tag-out

The unexpected and uncontrolled energising, start-up or release of stored energy during the
servicing or maintenance (e.g. inspection, repair, adjustment, cleaning) of machinery and equipment
can lead to serious injuries and needs to be avoided as far as possible. Most of the injuries (and even
fatalities) are electrocutions, but employees are sometimes crushed, have amputations or other
injuries.
Typical sources of hazardous energy that need to be controlled include the following:
 electricity;
 fluid pressure, i.e. hydraulic systems;
 air pressure, i.e. pneumatic systems;
 kinetic energy, i.e. energy of a moving object or materials (moving object may be powered or
coasting);
 potential energy, i.e. energy stored in an object with the potential for release due to its position;
 pressurised liquids and gases (including steam and chemicals); and
 heat, radiant, and laser sources.
The unexpected and uncontrolled energising or start-up of machinery and equipment or the release
of stored energy is prevented by isolating the energy source(s) of the machinery/equipment being
worked on. It is however not enough to merely isolate the energy sources. Energy isolation
switches/valves/etc. must be prevented from being operated inadvertently by personnel not aware
that they have been isolated or turned off intentionally. Energy isolation devices are prevented from
being operated inadvertently by locking and tagging them out.
Lock-out/tag-out is accomplished by placing a lock-out and/or a tag-out device on a switch, valve,

breaker, etc. to prevent reactivation of the equipment and to warn that servicing or maintenance
activities are in progress.
Equipment is considered “locked out” when the flow of hazardous energy has been blocked and
operation of the equipment is prevented until the lock-out device is removed; and “tagged out”
when a warning tag is placed on the equipment warning others that the equipment is being serviced
and must not be operated. These safety measures should be used together to provide the maximum
level of protection for those performing the service.
1. Lock-out and Tag-out Devices

A lock-out device is a device such as a padlock that physically prevents a machine or equipment
being worked on from being energised. Individually marked and keyed lock-out devices, together
with all but one of the keys for the device, are provided to each employee involved in service and
maintenance activities. A register is kept of all issued lock-out devices and the employees to whom
they were issued. Authorised employees’ supervisors retain one key for each of the issued locks to
provide for the removal of locks if, for some or other reason, an authorised employee is not in a
position to do so. Retained keys are kept in a safe and secure location that remains locked at all
times.
A tag-out device is a device such as a tag or sign that provides information about the nature of the
lock-out and warns employees not to operate the particular machine/equipment/device. Tag-out
devices, along with additional protective measures to ensure maximum employee protection, are
also used when an energy isolation device is not lockable.
It is important that lock-out and tag-out devices are –
 durable for the environment in which they will be used;

 sturdy enough to minimise early or accidental removal;
 unique, distinctive, easily recognisable and clearly visible;
 standardised in colour, shape, size, type or format; and
 identifiable according to the employee(s) authorising or applying them.
Tags must in addition –
 be made of non-conducting material;

 state the reason for energy isolation and lock-out; and
 state the date on which the machine/equipment was locked out.
To prevent the accidental release or transmission of energy, appropriate procedures must be

implemented to:
 deactivate machinery or equipment;

 isolate it from its energy source; and
 locking and/or tagging out the energy-isolating device (e.g. breaker, switch, valve, blocks,
disconnect switch) to prevent it from being removed.
2. Prepare for Isolation

In preparation for shutting down the machine/equipment to be serviced or maintained, the
authorised person(s) examines the machine/equipment in order to identify –
 the hazardous energy sources that are present; and

 the energy control/isolation devices that are needed to control these energies.
The authorised employee(s) who will be shutting down the machine/equipment notifies all affected
employees that the –
 machine/equipment will be isolated;

 reason for the isolation;
 time and duration of the isolation; and
 fact that the machine/equipment will be locked/tagged out.
3. Isolate Equipment
Written lock-out/tag-out schedules specific to a particular machine or equipment, or similar
groupings of machines and equipment, are required to ensure the effective isolation and lock-
out/tag-out before service/maintenance of all machinery and equipment employed by the
organisation.
Lockout/tag-out schedules are developed following a lock-out/tag-out survey in which the following
aspects of each machine or equipment (or groups thereof) are identified –
 energy sources;
 location of isolation devices (disconnects);
 type of disconnect;
 special hazards; and
 special safety procedures.
Control of hazardous energy is, under normal conditions, only required for non-routine service and
maintenance activities. Activities that are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of machinery
and equipment and which take place during normal production operations (e.g. minor tool changes,
adjustments, minor servicing activities, etc.) are not covered by this procedure. Personnel are usually
protected from the hazardous energies associated with such activities by means of machine guards
and other safeguards.
3.1. Electrical equipment
When isolating electrical equipment:
 Shut off power at the machine;

 Lock/tag “disconnect means”;
 Press start button to verify that correct systems are locked/tagged out; and
 Return all controls to their safest position.
3.2. Hydraulic/pneumatic equipment
When isolating hydraulic/pneumatic equipment:
 Shut off all energy sources. If pumps and compressor supply energy to more than one piece of
equipment, the valve supplying energy must be locked/tagged out.
 Drain/bleed stored pressure from hydraulic/pneumatic lines; and
 Ensure controls are returned to their safest position (off, stop, etc.)
3.3. Fluids and gases
When isolating fluids and gases:
 Identify the type of fluid/gas;
 Close valves to prevent flow;

 Determine isolating device, close and lock/tag out;
 Drain and bleed lines to zero energy state and purge when required; and
 Check for zero energy at the equipment.
3.4. Mechanical energy
When isolating mechanical energy (gravity activation, stored in springs, etc.):
 Block out using die safety blocks or die ram safety chain;
 Lock/tag out safety device;
 Shut off, lock/tag out electrical system;
 Check for zero energy; and
 Return controls to their safest position.
4. Lock-out/Tag-out
Once isolated, every authorised employee that will be servicing/maintaining the
machine/equipment affixes their own assigned personal locks and tags to the energy isolating
devices in the appropriate energy isolating locations.
Lockout devices are affixed in a manner that will hold the energy isolating devices in the “safe” or
“off” position. Affix the tag-out device to the same point as where the lock-out device is attached
and clearly indicate that the operation or movement of the energy isolating device from the “safe”
or “off” position is prohibited.
Authorised employees must carry the keys to their locks on them at all times.
4.1. Group lock-out/tag-out
When a group lock-out/tag-out is required, one of the authorised employees that will be
servicing/maintaining the machine/equipment is designated to oversee the group lock-out/tag-out,
and is responsible for:
 affixing the group lock-out device or maintaining control of the lock-out board/box;
 ensuring that lock-out/tag-out procedures are followed, including verifying that equipment is de-
energised;
 ensuring all the isolation and lockouts required to do the work have been carried out;
 appropriately documenting the isolations;
 placing all the locks for the isolation in the lock-out board/box;
 ensuring that all authorised persons working on the task attach their locks and tags to the lock-
out board/box;
 continually monitoring the work to ensure that employees on the crew are not exposed to lock-
out/ tag-out hazards;
 ensuring that no authorised person removes a lock until all other personnel are ready to remove
theirs;
 verifying that all procedures for returning the equipment back into service are completed before
lock-out; and
 tag-out devices are removed.
5. Release Stored Energy

Stored energy can be made safe by –
 blocking/repositioning machinery/equipment components such as moving, rotating and

elevated parts (e.g. elevated members, rotating fly wheels);
 (safely) discharging stored electrical energy (e.g. capacitors);
 bleeding/releasing pressured lines such as hydraulic, air, steam, gas and water; and
 releasing spring-loaded equipment.
Before any work is performed on the machine/equipment, the authorised employee verifies that the
system has indeed been effectively isolated. Before testing the effectiveness of the isolation, the
authorised employee (or group overseer) assures that no employee is exposed to danger.
6. Perform the Service/Maintenance Activity

Required service/maintenance activities may only commence once the effectiveness of the
isolation(s) has been confirmed.
6.1. Testing or positioning of equipment/machines
The following sequence for temporarily removing lock-out/tag-out devices and re-energising
machines/ equipment is followed where a machine/equipment or part thereof must be moved for
testing or positioning for servicing/maintenance and it is required to be re-energised:
 Clear machine/equipment of tools and all other materials;

 Remove all employees from the machine/equipment area;
 Remove lock-out/tag-out devices;
 Energise and proceed with testing or positioning; and
 De-energise machine/equipment and reapply lock-out/tag-out devices.
6.2. Shift changes
Incidents often occur shortly after shift changes and are often the result of
no/insufficient/ineffective communication. The lock and tag must remain in place until the work on
the machine/equipment is 100% complete. Any lock-out/tag-out in place should be handed over
between shifts in a proper and controlled manner.
Where a single authorised employee has locked/tagged a machine/equipment out, the authorised
employee going off duty discusses the lock-out/tag-out with the authorised employee coming on
duty, informing him of any problems or concerns. The employee going off duty removes their lock-
out/tag-out device and the employee taking over affixes theirs. The same applies for group lock-
out/tag-out.
7. Remove Lock-out/Tag-out
7.1. Inspect the area
Inspect the area to confirm that all tools and other items that are not required for the operation of
the machine/equipment have been removed. The machine/equipment is then checked to ensure
that –
 it has been fully reassembled;

 it is in fully operational state;
 all guards and safeguards have been replaced and properly secured; and
 all controls are in the neutral/off position.
Ensure all employees are clear of the machine/equipment before re-energising it.
7.2. Remove lock-out/tag-out device(s)
Only the authorised employee can remove the lock-out/tag-out device.
When the authorised employee is unable to remove his/her lock-out/tag-out device, the employee’s
supervisor is responsible for it. The supervisor is required to take the following steps before
removing any lock-out/tag-out devices –
 verify that the authorised employee, who attached the device, is not available to remove the
device;
 take all reasonable steps to notify the employee that their device will be removed; and
 ensure that the authorised employee knows that their lock-out/tag-out device(s) had been
removed before the employee resumes work.
8. Re-energise the Machine/Equipment

Inspect the machine/equipment and the area surrounding it once more to ensure that it is safe to re-
energise the system and notify all relative parties that the machine/equipment will be re-energised
shortly.
Restore energy to the machine/equipment and conduct the necessary tests to ensure that the
machine/equipment is operating normally, correctly and safely.
After determining that the machine/equipment is operating normally, correctly and safely, notify
affected employees that the servicing/maintenance of the machine/equipment has been completed
and that it is once again ready for use.
The service/maintenance is considered complete once all the above actions have been taken and
completed. The responsible area/line manager signs the service maintenance off on the Lock-
out/Tag-out Control Form, which is retained as a record by the responsible service/maintenance
manager.
Safe Work Practice – Explosives
Using the drill and blast method for tunnelling work is often limited by environmental constraints
characteristic of many tunnel locations. In particular dust, noise and vibration concerns often limit
blasting activities in the vicinity of inhabited areas.
Three factors influence developments in tunnel blasting technology:
1. safe handling of explosives reduction of accidental detonation risk;

2. reduction in toxicity post blast gases, nitrous oxides, and carbon monoxide; and
3. rapid and straightforward loading/charging of the bore holes.
Explosives laws require the storage, use and handling of explosives to be licensed. The person
conducting a business or undertaking has responsibility for the control, safe and secure storage, use
and handling of the explosives.
Explosives are controlled in Explosives Proclamation of 1956, together with any requirements and
conditions published by the commissioner of mines. If explosives are to be stored and used at a tunnel
construction site, the contractor is responsible for the control and safe storage and use of those
explosives.
The explosives legislation in Lesotho requires that anyone who handles explosives must be licensed to
do so. To obtain a licence to store explosives, a person or company must apply to the Commissioner
of Mines. The licence to store must be accompanied by a security plan.
The explosives legislation also requires that explosives are handled safely and requires compliance
with conditions/standards laid out by the Commissioner of Mines. These conditions/standards provide
details on methods of safe storage and safe use. Site procedures and Method Statements for
controlling and the handling of explosives must conform to these standards, e.g. when storing
explosives, detonators must never be stored in the same magazine as other explosives.
The main objective in safe behaviour and handling of explosives is to keep primary explosives, such as
detonators and fuses, at safe distance from other explosives. Only a competent certificated Blaster
should be allowed to handle and use explosives. A blasting plan should be drawn up before blasting is
carried out.
The Consultant shall give specific instruction as to:
 Where to place the storage

 How to build the storage
 How to run the storage
 What type of explosives can be stored in the same place
 The trustworthiness of the responsible person
 The skill and age of the persons handling explosives
 How to rebuild/repair the storage in a safe way
Control measures should be implemented to eliminate or minimise, so far as is reasonably practicable,

the risks associated with excavation by drill and blast. Some control measures to consider are provided
in the Table below.
Table: Specific hazards, risks and control measures - drill and blast:
Hazards and risks Control measures

 storage, transport and use of  providing:
explosives o a coating of shotcrete, known as a ’flash coat’, for
 unsupported ground including immediate ground support
ground support requirements o protection exclusion zones and safe places
 ground vibrations and o adequate ventilation
overpressures from blasting o geotechnical inspection and mapping
 fly rock o defined procedures for explosive handling
 competence of explosives  undertaking:
contractors and operators
o scaling to minimise risk of rock fall
 effect on surrounding strata
o drilling of lifter holes first where necessary
 face instability
o vibration monitoring
 injury from drilling and charging o smooth blasting
faces
o muck out using operators and spotters with
 firing times and preventing entry traffic management plans
to firing areas
o gas monitoring
 blasting fumes and dust
 controlling entry to the face
 misfires
 using:
 plant hitting people, plant or
o mechanical scaling
structures, like muck out loaders
o explosive management systems including
 water entry including flooding and
computer control electronic blasting, blast and
collapse
initiation design and approval processes
o dust suppression sprays
o competent, experienced and licenced employees
o re-entry procedures
o lighting
o deck loading
o using split face excavation - heading and bench
 PPE like hearing protection
1. Use of Explosives
The Contractor shall comply with the latest regulations of South Africa or Lesotho, whichever is the
more stringent – and as approved by the Consultant - as well as such additional requirements as may
be imposed by the applicable authority in terms of regulations involving the use of explosives during
construction of the Works.
Notwithstanding any requirements of the regulations, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant,
for his consent, a full and detailed Method Statement for the use of explosives in the construction of
the Works. This shall be submitted at least 28 days before any blasting work is commenced, and shall
include details of:
 Locations of blasting works;

 Location and size of storage magazines, explosives register, security fencing ,earthling of building;
 Danger signs in English and Sesotho that shall be prominently displayed at all areas where
explosives are stored or used;
 Transportation of explosives to and from the magazine(s);
 Licences required for the place of use;
 Use of explosives and dealing with misfires;
 Types of explosives and detonators contemplated;
 Method of ensuring that all excavation spoil is free of undetonated caps;
 Fencing off excavation spoil dumps and preventing unauthorised entry; and
 Names, qualifications and experiences of all personal responsible for the handling and for the use
of explosives. In addition to the blasting licence referred to in the Explosives Act No.41 of 1958,
personnel who shall be responsible for supervising the blast shall have documentary proof that
they have least five years’ experience in supervising the loading and firing of charges, in surface
works such as quarries or underground works such as tunnel excavation, depending on where it
is proposed that they shall be employed.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the Explosives Act:
 Any person who is licensed in the storage, handling and in the use of explosives shall be literate,
of good sight and hearing and well experienced in the work he is to carry out.
 The Consultant shall have the right of access to storage areas and all registers.
 The contractor shall accept a decision of the Consultant to suspend the holder of a blasting
certificate for an act of negligence or a contravention of the Explosives Act, as if he, as the
“Contractor” of the holder of the certificate had made the decision.
 The Contractor shall keep on site the originals of licences. All licence holders will carry
acknowledged copies on their person when at work.
 The contractor shall install and operate at each point, where a blast is to take place, a siren of
sufficient volume to be easily heard above the general site noise from all points within a 1 km
radius of any blast. Sirens shall be sounded continuously for at least 5 minutes before any blast
takes place and shall continue for one minute after the blast has taken place. In addition to the
above, the Contractor shall station personnel on roads and elsewhere with red flags to prevent
persons, animals and traffic entering or remaining within the danger zone.
 Care shall be taken to ensure that all possible approach routes to the danger zone are covered by
these warning arrangements. Blasting shall not be carried out unless occupants of any nearby
building or working area have been notified by the Contractor at least 24 hours in advance. After
blasting, no person shall approach the area until it has been examined by the blasting supervisor
or other responsible person and declared safe.
The Contractor shall provide for the consent of the Consultant details of each and every blasting
operating at least 24 hours before that operation is to be carried out. The details shall show the
location and the intended time of each blast, the number, size and length of each blast hole, the
quantity and types of explosives and detonators to be used and the name of the licensed Blaster and
supervisor responsible.
2. Precautions when using Explosives

2.1. General precautions
No person shall:
 smoke while handling explosives, or within eight (8) m of a place where explosives are stored or
being handled;
 take or make an open flame in a magazine or within eight (8) m of a place where explosives are
stored or being handled;
 abandon or leave any explosive unattended except in a magazine or designated storage place;
 commit a dangerous or careless act with an explosive or where explosives are stored or being
handled; or
 store explosives within eight (8) m of flammable liquids or compressed gas.
2.2. Storage of explosives
Explosives shall, at all times, be stored in magazines constructed and maintained in accordance with
a storage standard approved by the Consultant.
The maximum amount of explosives allowed to be stored in a tunnel system is 3000 kg, divided into
two equal units. An explosion in one unit must not ignite the other one. In case of emergency during
use of a charging truck, the charging operation shall allow a fast evacuation from the work face. If
explosives are burning, one shall not try to extinguish, but evacuate the area immediately.
2.3. Transportation of explosives
Only enough explosives for immediate use should be transported to the working face. Explosives
should be transported in containers and vehicles specially designed for the purpose. They should be
clearly marked and should always be accompanied by a competent person. Vehicles should be
checked regularly to ensure they do not present a risk when transporting the explosives.
Where explosives are to be transported on surface, the Contractor shall ensure that transportation
occurs in accordance with relevant legal requirements.
2.4. Precautions before drilling
No person shall commence drilling in a workplace until a Blaster has:
 carefully examined the exposed faces for misfires and cut-off holes;
 washed the previously blasted area;
 washed and cleaned out any bootlegs with rigid non-sparking scrapers or wash pipes;
 conspicuously identified the bootlegs; and
 inserted lifter sticks or plugs into the lifters or remnants of lifters.
2.5. Handling of stored explosives
The Contractor shall ensure that:
 when explosives are removed from a storage place, explosives that have been stored the longest
are used first;
 explosives in a storage place that are found to have deteriorated are promptly removed from the
storage place and disposed of without delay;
 tools and equipment for opening and handling explosive containers and for the preparation and
capping of safety fuses are of a type designed for the purpose;
 no article of iron or steel, other than articles on a person, is taken into a place where explosives
are stored; and
 every storage place for explosives is kept clean.
2.6. Warming of explosives
No person shall use an open fire, a steam boiler or direct contact with steam or hot water to warm
explosives.
2.7. Primers
The Blaster in charge of the blast site shall ensure that primers are made up:
 as near as is practicable to the place where they are to be used; and

 only in sufficient numbers for the immediate work at hand.
2.8. Fuses
Where safety fuses are used in a blasting operation, the Contractor shall:
 supply a capped fuse of uniform, standard length designed for the operation at hand;
 identify the uncapped ends of the fuse as to its length.
2.9. Abandonment of blast site
The Contractor shall ensure that each site, before work is discontinued, has the rock broken at the
firing of the last round cleared from the face, and the whole face of the site is washed down and
examined for misfires or cut-off holes.
3. Procedures for Loading and Blasting

Charging should not start until drilling is completed and electric plant like water pumps are switched
off and removed from the area. Every Blaster shall implement the following procedures for the loading
of explosives and blasting:
 all drill holes shall be of sufficient size to permit the easy and unobstructed insertion of the
explosive charge to the bottom of the hole;
 no hole shall be charged with explosives:
o in any face where drilling is being performed, or
o in any bench where drilling is being performed, within eight (8) m of the hole to be charged.
 before charging a hole with explosives, the hole shall be clear of obstruction;
 an explosive in cartridge form shall be left in its original wrapper;
 in charging holes for blasting, no iron or steel tool, rod or pipe shall be used, and no iron or steel
tool shall be inserted in a hole containing explosives;
 when holes are loaded pneumatically with explosives:
o only a semi-conductive hose manufactured for such a purpose shall be used;
o loading equipment and mobile equipment designed for loading shall be adequately grounded;
o loading equipment shall not be in electrical contact with the grounding system; and
o where electrical blasting detonators are used in the hole:
 no plastic or other non-conducting liners shall be used; and
 the detonator shall not be placed in the hole until pneumatic loading of the hole is
completed, unless an alternative safe work procedure has been detailed in writing by the
Contractor.
 each hole charged with explosives shall have a detonating agent placed in the charge;
 each charge shall be fired in its proper sequence in the round;
 all holes that are charged with explosives in one loading operation shall be fired in one blasting
operation;
 no safety fuse shorter than one (1) m shall be used in a blasting operation, and no safety fuse shall
be trimmed or ignited except at the end;
 the burning time of a timing device shall be less than that of one-half the length of the shortest
fuse used, and persons lighting the blast shall retreat immediately after the first timing device
goes out;
 in a workplace where primary blasting is not performed, secondary blasting shall not be conducted
using tape fuses; and
 A Blaster must ensure that an employee does not use excessive force when tamping explosives.
3.1. Interval before return to scene of blast
No employee shall enter or return to, and no Contractor shall cause or permit an employee to enter
or return to, a workplace affected by a blasting operation:
 when a safety fuse is used in connection with a blast, until a time in minutes that is equal to seven
times the number of metres in the longest fuse used in the blasting operation elapses after the
last shot is heard;
 when the firing is done by means of delay-action detonators and any shot has fired, until ten (10)
minutes elapses from the time at which the blast is initiated;
 when a single shot is detonated electrically, until smoke or lack of visibility do not create a hazard;
 when a misfire occurs or is suspected in the blasting operation:
o where a safety fuse is used, until a time in minutes equal to ten (10) times the number of
metres in the longest fuse, or 30 minutes, whichever is the greater, elapses from the time the
last shot is heard;
o where electric detonators are used, until 30 minutes elapse from the time of closing the
blasting circuit; or
 when a misfired hole is re-blasted:
o until 30 minutes elapse from the time of closing the blasting circuit;
o where more than one shot is involved, until 30 minutes elapse from the time the last shot is
heard; or
o where a tape fuse is used, until a period of time equal to ten (10) times the number of metres
in the longest fuse, or 30 minutes, whichever is the greater, elapse from the time the last shot
is heard.
3.2. Repair of electrical circuit
Where a faulty circuit is indicated when an explosive charge has been fired electrically and no shot is
heard, the circuit may be repaired immediately after the requirements under ‘Precautions when
blasting by electricity’ are complied with.
3.3. Electrical storms
At a surface operation upon the approach of an electrical storm, the Blaster:
 shall not permit loading of explosives to be commenced or continued; and

 when holes are charged with explosives, shall ensure that all employees are withdrawn from the
area and remain at a safe distance until the danger from the electrical storm passes.
3.4. Distance of machinery from loaded holes
The Blaster shall ensure that every employee maintains a distance greater than:
 8 (eight) m from an internal combustion engine, other than a vehicle used to transport explosives,
to a location where explosives are placed;
 8 (eight) m from any part of any machinery, other than the vehicle used to load explosives or
stemming, to the collar of a hole which is loaded or being loaded with explosives. This does not
apply where a vehicle under the supervision of the Blaster in charge of blasting is being used:
o to clear a blocked hole;
o to drill a hole for re-blasting a misfire according to the safe work procedures;
o while loading a hole that is likely to cave in if the drill is moved; or
o to condition the ground.
3.5. Blasting of heated material
Where explosives are used to blast or break up material that by reason of its heated condition might
cause a premature explosion, the Contractor shall:
 use only explosives manufactured for blasting in heated conditions; and

 ensure that only such methods are used as part of the safe work procedures developed.
3.6. Certified Blaster to be in charge of blasting
A certified Blaster, appointed by the Contractor, shall be in charge of every blast, and shall:
 ensure that, when using tape fuse, at least two employees are present at the blasting operation;
 In an tunnel operation, ensure that the employees referred to above carry lights, unless the
blasting operation is conducted on the surface in daylight or under artificial light:
o fix the time for blasting so that the employees are exposed as little as possible to dust, fumes
and smoke;
o maintain a clock keeping accurate time to enable the employees to check their watches before
entering the tunnel; and
 where it is necessary for the safety of the employees, coordinate times of blasting with times of
blasting at connecting or adjacent property.
3.7. Area affected by the blast
The Blaster shall determine the size of the danger area and ensure that, before the final connection
to lead wires is made or the charge is initiated, all persons have moved to a suitable shelter or to a
safe distance.
3.8. Posting of the blast area
At fixed blasting operations, including surface mines and quarries, the Contractor shall ensure that the
warning procedure and blasting signal code are conspicuously posted.
3.9. Warning of blast
Before any blast is fired, the Blaster responsible for firing the blast shall ensure that:
 all persons leave the blasting site and any vicinity endangered by the blast, including any possible
intersection of a drill hole;
 all approaches to the blasting site and other places endangered by the blast are guarded by an
employee to prevent access until the blast is fired and until the interval set out in the safe work
procedures developed;
 due warning is given in every direction by shouting "Fire";
 sufficient audible and visual warning is given to all persons in or near the danger area;
 all roads and approaches to the danger area are guarded or barricaded in order to prevent anyone
from entering;
 all machinery and equipment are clear of the effects of the blast; and
 all persons in the vicinity have moved to a safe distance.
3.10. Loaded holes to be guarded
The Contractor and Blaster must ensure that when loading crews are not present at the place where
holes have been loaded with explosives, an authorised person is physically present to ensure that
unauthorised entry is prohibited.
3.11. Precautions when blasting by electricity
Where a blasting operation is being done by means of electricity, every Blaster shall cause to be
implemented, and every employee shall implement the following precautions:
 the ends of the firing cables or wires leading to the blasting site are short-circuited while the leads
from the blasting caps are being connected to each other and to the firing cables or wires;
 the short circuit referred to above are not removed until all employees have retreated from the
blasting site, and it is so located that any premature explosion would be harmless to the employee
opening the short circuit;
 before any employee enters or re-enters the blasting area:
o the firing cables or wires are removed from the source of electricity, and shall be short-
circuited, and
o the blasting switch if used is locked in the open position.
 where a portable blasting device is used as the source of electricity:
o the firing cables or wires are not connected to the blasting device until the area is cleared and
the leads are required for the immediate firing of shots; and
o the firing cables or wires are disconnected and short-circuited immediately after the shots are
fired.
 where electric blasting is energised by a power distribution system:
o each workplace has its own switch, which is kept in the open position until the blast is ready
to fire; and
o the system is designed with switches at all cable junctions suitable to give the protection
required above.
 the blasting circuit cables or wires are not permitted to come in contact with lighting or power
cables, or other metallic conductors of electricity.
3.12. Precautions regarding radio transmitters
No person shall use, and no Contractor shall permit an employee to use, electrical blasting caps,
electric squibs or electric starters in the presence of radio transmitters or other radio frequency fields,
except in accordance pre-determined arrangements approved by the Consultant.
3.13. Blasting-machines
Blasting-machines shall be inspected regularly and kept in good mechanical condition. The rated
capacity of blasting-machines shall never be exceeded unless in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4. Misfires
Safe ignition of all blast holes is important also from a safety point of view. Remaining explosives from
misfires in the ignition pattern, or otherwise remaining unexploded in the rock or muck pile, can be a
large risk. Firstly, for the people involved in loading of the muck pile and subsequently during the other
steps of muck handling.
Where an explosive charge has misfired or is suspected of having misfired, the Contractor, at a safe
time and without undue delay, shall cause the charge to be:
 Re-blasted; or
 washed out, unless the charge contains an explosive that is:
o nitroglycerine sensitised;
o not water soluble;
o not identified by the Contractor and the Blaster in the procedures for re-blasting; or
o containing a detonator.
4.1. Marking of misfires
The Blaster making the examination shall mark each misfire:
 conspicuously with paint or crayon; and

 with a single capital M in a conspicuous paint or crayon.
4.2. Blasting procedure for misfires
The Contractor and the Blaster shall develop safe work procedures for re-blasting that will identify:
 the type of explosives that may be washed out of a hole; and

 the equipment and method to be used.
4.3. Misfires not re-blasted or checked before end of shift
Where at the end of a shift, there is, or is suspected to be, a misfire that has not been re-blasted or, if
re-blasted, has not been checked:
 that fact, together with the location of the hole if known, shall be reported by the employee to
his or her supervisor who shall report to the supervisor in charge of the next shift of employees
going into the blasting site; and
 in addition to any verbal communication, the report referred to above shall be recorded in the
shift log by the supervisor and countersigned by the oncoming supervisor before work is
commenced by that shift of employees.
4.4. Drilling near misfires and bootlegs
No employee shall drill a hole or cause or permit a hole to be drilled:
 in a tunnel operation on:

o a face containing a misfire;
o within 1.5 m of a muck pile which might conceal a misfire;
o a face adjacent to a face containing a misfire where any part of the hole to be drilled could
come within 1.5 m of the misfire; or
o less than 160 mm from a bootleg as measured from the original perimeter of the drill hole
socket;
 at a surface location:
o less than 4.5 m from a hole containing explosives, or a misfire; or
o less than 300 mm from a bootleg.
4.5. Application to hole drilled to blast misfired charge
A hole may be drilled for the purpose of providing an additional hole for the blasting of a misfired
charge if the hole is drilled under the direct supervision of a supervisor.
Furthermore, that supervisor must determine the location, the angle of the hole and the depth to
which it is drilled.
4.6. Drilling near trace hole
A hole may be drilled within 160 mm of the trace of a hole that has been blasted with a water soluble
explosive when the trace is washed to ensure that no residual explosive remains.
4.7. Remote controlled drilling for misfire or re-drilled hole
Where it is impractical to make a thorough examination for a possible misfire, or where a hole that
has been blasted has to be re-drilled, the Contractor shall implement a remotely controlled procedure
for drilling which shall provide:
 remote controls at a distance established by a competent employee in consultation with the

workplace SHEQ committee representative; or
 shielding to ensure the safety of the driller.
5. Management and Control of Explosives

The bulk supply of explosives is managed by the Contractor individually as required to suit their usage
rates and storage capabilities.
5.1. Stock checks
All managers of explosive storage facilities shall conduct stock checks of explosives in their control
once a month. Any discrepancies in stock holdings shall be reported in accordance with legal
requirements. Records of stock checks shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall be made
available for inspection by the Consultant and LHDA, as required.
5.2. Explosive accounting
The Contractor shall maintain accurate records of explosives issued, explosives expended and current
stocks. All explosives used shall have signed certifications from the demolition supervisors of the items
expended by item and unit of measure. The record shall include the name and signature of the
supervisor certifying that the explosives have been expended. These certifications shall be reconciled
against stock figures at the end of each month and checked against explosives remaining in stock. Any
discrepancies shall be investigated.
5.3. Loss of explosives
As soon as the Contractor suspects that explosives have been lost, it shall initiate a complete stock
check of all explosives held against its records. If the loss is confirmed the matter shall be immediately
reported to the Consultant and LHDA with full details of the extent of the loss. The loss shall be further
reported to the Lesotho Police, who will determine what follow-up action shall be taken.
5.4. Theft of explosives
When the theft of explosives occurs, the area where the theft occurred shall be immediately secured
without disturbing the site. The details shall then be reported to the Consultant and the Lesotho
Police, through LHDA. The extent of the theft may not be able to be determined until an investigation
is started. The Lesotho Police shall determine what follow-up action needs to be taken.
5.5. Explosive defect reporting
The Contractor shall notify the Consultant, in writing, of any defects identified with explosives supplied
to the project. If the defect affects safety then the report shall be made immediately by radio or
telephone so that other demining organisations using the same explosives can be warned. When this
occurs, a written follow-up report in writing shall be submitted by the Contractor.
Safe Work Practice – Tunnelling
A tunnel is any excavation that is approximately horizontal and starts at the surface or from within
another excavation. Tunnelling work is often highly complex and involves the use of a range of
engineering and construction techniques, plant and equipment.
There are a number of risks with tunnelling work, including the risk of collapse, contaminated
atmospheres (toxic, flammable, etc.), and risks associated with heavy plant or equipment. Injuries
from rock works can be fatal (rock-falls, drilling into remaining explosives, etc.). The accidents that
cause injuries to personnel may cause damage to material or the external environment. All such losses
are undesirable. Most accidents, however, causing injuries to personnel and/or material damage can
be prevented.
There are often a range of activities taking place inside a tunnel that are not directly associated with
the boring or tunnelling component. These include building support and other internal structures,
installing services, and constructing the surface. Employees carrying out these activities are exposed
to a number of additional risks that must be managed, including:
 noise, which can be amplified in an enclosed space

 heat stress
 air quality
 the movement of vehicles and mobile plant in an enclosed space.
In addition, issues that might usually be straight forward to manage (e.g. pedestrian routes, facilities
and amenities) are complicated by the enclosed and limited space in a tunnel construction
environment.
1. Managing risk during tunnelling

The contractor and subcontractors have an obligation to provide and maintain a workplace that is safe
and without risks to health for their employees and others in relation to those matters over which
they have control.
Control measures to prevent persons being injured during all stages of the tunnel construction and fit
out must be provided and maintained as part of a safe system of work.
1.1. Risk controls in common tunnelling methods and activities
The common hazards and areas of potential risk in most, if not all, tunnels under construction are
closely related to, or exacerbated by, the confines of the underground workplace. They include the
following:
• tunnel stability – rock or earth falls and rock bursts

• changing conditions – strata and stress field fluctuations
• limited space and access

• level of expertise – even long-term tunnellers may lack experience in certain specialised aspects
or methods
• air contamination or oxygen depletion
• fire or explosion
• the use and maintenance of fixed and mobile plant
• close proximity to electrical supplies and circuits
• use of compressed air and high pressure hydraulics
• projected particles from rock breaking, drilling or cutting
• manual handling
• large scale materials handling, spoil out, and materials and equipment
• uneven surfaces
• wet or other slippery surfaces
• heights
• falling objects
• overhead seepage, ground and process water
• ground gas or water inrush
• contaminated groundwater
• reduced visibility
• loss of power, including lighting and ventilation
• noise levels
• vibration
• hazardous substances and dangerous goods.
The systems of work and control measures selected are generally determined by individual job factors
identified in the consultation and risk assessment process. The following table outlines common
hazards, risks and control measures. This may be used to identify some of the common workplace
hazards.
Common tunnelling and excavation activities

Examples of specific hazards or risks Example risk control measures
Rock falls • More frequent inspection and scaling
• Mechanical scaling and bolting
• Mark out bolting pattern by laser survey
• Timely installation of ground support
• Change ground support methods/density
• Overhead protection whilst installing ground support
manually
Failure of floor or roadway • Concrete the floor/roadway
High water inflow • Grout old drill holes
• Injection grouting ahead of the face
• Probe drill and drain
• Pumping from surface bores
Scaling • Mechanical equipment

• Work from elevating work platform basket
• Overhead protection
Gas inrush • Probe drill hazard areas through check valves
• Wet drilling and gas monitoring
• Increased face extraction ventilation
Falls from height • Maintenance platforms with guardrails
• Fall arrest
• PPE
Moving plant • Planned vehicle movement procedures
• Isolate moving plant from pedestrians
• Operator to ensure clear path before moving
• Stop plant, pedestrians to walk past
• Restrict access
• Provide lighting
Loss of lighting • Emergency lighting and cap lamps
Manual handling, e.g. handling air tools, • Engineering assessment of tasks
drill rods, supports, cutters, grout. • Use mechanical equipment with automatic feed
• Use lifting aids
• Team lifting
• Select light weight rock drills, smaller bags
• Use vibration insulation on handles
Heat stress • Increase ventilation
• More frequent rests and cool water
• Cool suits
• Reduce use of high heat output equipment
Noise • Insulation of plant
• Hearing protection
Dust • Increase face extraction ventilation
• Water sprays on cutting equipment or over muck
heaps and spoil conveyors
2. Excavation methods
The site investigation, including geotechnical investigations and risk assessment, the tunnel design,
access limitations and other local factors should be used to establish the appropriate excavation
methods. It is usual for a number of different excavation methods to be used on a single project.
The tunnel design will usually assume particular excavation and support methods, but other methods
may be used provided they are confirmed as not compromising the safety of the tunnel. The methods
of excavation should permit the designed ground support to be installed as planned, and allow for the
installation of additional ground support should ground conditions be found to be worse than
considered in the design.
Factors to include in determining appropriate excavation methods would include the following:
• the tunnel design, including the dimensions, shape, excavation tolerance of the excavation, and
the tunnel support and lining design
• the expertise of the contractors

• available access
• the nature of the ground e.g. reclaimed ground
• the water table level
• historical excavation experience in the area under similar conditions
• the possibility of flooding from:
• surface run off, tidal water, rivers, dams, reservoirs, lakes or swamps
• leaking storm water drains, water mains or flooded communications conduits
• intersection of old flooded workings or an underground water-bearing structure, such as a fault,
• cast or perched water table
• the proximity of existing underground services, such as water mains, sewer, drainage, electricity,
gas and telephone
• soil nails, rock anchors, basement underpinning, or other pre-existing ground support
• adjacent excavations e.g. shafts, tunnels or trenches
• other hazards, either natural or man-made, such as:
• heavy loadings, above or adjacent to the tunnel e.g. roadways, railway lines, buildings, rivers or
• planned or existing spoil stockpiles
• chemical contamination e.g. from past dumping or natural deposits
• the presence of methane, or other hazardous gases e.g. where coal seams are present or
• vegetation has decayed in the soil
• dynamic loads or ground vibration near an excavation, including:
• traffic (highway or rail)
• excavation equipment
• explosives.
2.1. Hand excavation
The use of hand methods of excavation is generally limited to small sections of work within larger
projects e.g. a small shaft, sump or drive-in area with limited access and limited possibility for
mechanisation. Many of the common underground construction hazards described above will apply.
Hazardous areas that should be considered in greater detail include the following:
• manual handling e.g. additional physical lifting and activity

• falls from heights e.g. non mechanised access
• falling objects e.g. proximity to the worked face
• vibration effects on the body-use of hand tools e.g. rock drills or jack-picks
• impact - e.g. air leg kick-out or broken steel
• noise e.g. proximity to air tools and drills
• dust e.g. closer proximity to the face
• heat stress e.g. due to physical exertion.
2.2. Machine excavation
Most tunnelling excavation is mechanised to a considerable extent, therefore, the implications of

plant use are very significant in risk management, Plant use in itself presents significant hazards and
risks that must be identified and controlled
The hazard areas that should be considered in addition to, or in greater detail to, those common
hazards include the following:
• moving plant and moving components on plant e.g. crush, nip or shear
• height e.g. elevated areas of plant including service access points
• restricted operator visibility and communication e.g. controls including audible warning sounds,
hazard lights, operating lights
• ergonomics – visibility, seat belts, hand rails, seating, controls, stairs, manual handling
• locking and security mechanisms, including power isolation
• fire e.g. flammable liquids and materials
• high-pressure liquids or gases
• heat e.g. burns from localised heat sources or heat exhaustion for general heat
• air contamination e.g. from excavation dust or exhaust emissions
• radiation from lasers.
2.3. Drill and blast methods
Drill and blast methods for tunnel construction are less widely used with the continued evolution of
continuous excavation methods and the environmental impact constraints inherent in many tunnel
locations. For shorter tunnels, or where ground conditions are very hard, drill and blast is often the
only alternative. The drill and blast method has particular hazards that require a number of controls
for the associated risks.
The hazard areas to be considered in the assessment and control of risks include the following:
• storage, transport and use of explosives

• ground support requirements
• the effect on surrounding strata and existing ground support
• drilling of faces
• firing times and prevention of access to firing areas
• clearance of blasting fumes and dust
• dealing with misfires.
Explosives are controlled in Explosives proclamation of 1956 (refer the SWP on Explosives), together
with any requirements and conditions published by the Commissioner of Mines.
2.4. Portal protection
Portal entries, if below the ground surface and not constructed with the final concrete or other
permanent structure at the commencement of tunnelling to provide protection, will require other
support and protection. This support will vary but should, at a minimum, include the following:
• ground support of the high wall, if any, above the portal entrance;
• support of the portal brow or lip; and
• protection at the portal, protruding sufficiently out from the tunnel to protect persons entering
or leaving the tunnel from material that might be dislodged off the high-wall above the portal
entrance.
A fence or other barricade should be provided above the portal to retain people and objects if there
is access or work being carried out above the portal. Drainage should be provided to prevent heavy
run off entering the tunnel.
2.5. Scaling and inspections
Inspection of the roof and walls, and scaling of loose rock, should be conducted immediately after
excavation. As the effects of time can cause deterioration to rock surfaces, periodic follow-up
inspection and scaling should be conducted on unlined areas. A risk assessment, with ongoing revision
based on the inspection results, should be used to determine an appropriate period for initial and
regular inspection and scaling.
At shift changes, there should be a handover discussion to pass on information on the status of
inspection and scaling, including the areas not yet inspected and the location of any identified
‘drummy’ ground still in need of supporting.
Scaling should take place:
• for drill and blast excavation – after every blast when the face area and spoil heap have been
washed down;
• for other excavation methods – at intervals as determined by the risk assessment;
• during the support cycle if more loose rock is revealed and as the support installation moves
forward from supported ground; and
• whenever inspection reveals the possibility of loose rock on any wall or roof.
The excavation should be thoroughly washed down prior to the initial inspection. Regular inspections
should continue in the unlined tunnel areas, to a schedule determined by the risk assessment.
Inspections and scaling should be conducted from supported and scaled areas. Where practical,
machine scaling is preferred to hand scaling. Where hand scaling is used it should be from an elevated
platform (basket).
Particular attention should be taken at breakthroughs, as the previous excavation and associated
stress changes may have weakened the ground. Drummy ground that cannot be scaled down should
have additional support installed.
3. Ground support controls

Most tunnels require some form of permanent ground support. The permanent lining can be installed
directly as the excavation progresses, or temporary support installed initially, followed by a
permanent lining. This may be followed by the installation of a non-structural secondary lining.
An adequate system of safety, involving shoring, earth retention equipment or other appropriate
measures, must be in place to control risks to health and safety arising from one or more of the
following:
1. the fall or dislodgment of earth and rock;

2. the instability of the excavation or any adjoining structure;
3. the inrush of water;
4. the placement of excavated material; and
5. instability due to persons or plant working adjacent to the excavation.
If a system of shoring is used, the contractor must ensure that an adequate supply of shoring
equipment and material is provided and used to prevent a fall or dislodgment of earth, rock or other
material that forms the side of or is adjacent to the excavation work. The contractor must ensure that
adequate measures are taken in the immediate vicinity of excavation work so as to prevent the
collapse of the work. In particular, the contractor must ensure that no materials are placed, stacked
or moved near the edge of excavation work so as to cause the collapse of the work.
Because unsupported ground is often a high risk of falling materials, all tunnels should have some form
of ground support or overhead protection during the construction phase. It is usual for the planned
ground support to vary throughout the project as the tunnel dimensions or ground conditions vary,
and the locations of changes should be included in the design documentation. The support actually
installed as a tunnel progresses will often alter with exposure and assessment of the actual ground
conditions and experience gained from the monitoring of the performance of the supports.
Unless robotically installed, ground support should be installed from supported areas or using plant
which provides overhead protection for the installers. The design for advance and ground support
systems may result in the area between the last support and the face as being considered as
supported; if so, this should be specified in the design.
The ground conditions should be inspected as the excavation progresses, in accordance with the
inspection plan. The results from the inspections should be assessed and the ground support system
reassessed and changed, if necessary, when ground conditions deteriorate from that allowed for in
the design or the ground support system is not performing as designed. Similarly, changes could be
made if the ground conditions are better than allowed for in the design.
Inspection and assessment of the performance of the support system and, if appropriate, changes to
the specification, should be carried out by competent persons. Each ground support method or type,
despite being a control for the hazards of ground conditions, has its own hazards and risks attached
to the process of installation, which need to be controlled.
3.1. Ground support of portal and subsidence areas
Portal openings and access areas must be guarded by shoring, fencing, head walls, shotcreting or
equivalent protection to ensure that employees and equipment have a safe means to access these
areas. Subsidence areas must be similarly guarded by shoring, filling in, or placing barricades and
warning signs to prevent entry. Adjacent areas must be scaled or secured to prevent loose soil, rock,
or fractured materials from endangering portal, subsidence, and access areas.
3.2. Ground support of underground areas
The competent person must inspect the roof, face, and walls of the work areas at the beginning of
each shift and as often as necessary to ensure ground stability. The competent person tasked with
such inspection responsibilities must be protected from loose ground by location, ground support, or
equivalent means. The ground conditions along all haulage ways and travel ways must also be
inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure safe passage and loose ground considered to be
hazardous to employees must be scaled, supported, or taken down.
The competent person must determine how often rock bolts need to be tested to ensure that they
meet the necessary torque, taking into consideration ground conditions, distance from vibration
sources, and the specific bolt system in use. Only torque wrenches should be used when torsion-
dependent bolts are used for ground support.
Employees involved in installing ground support systems must be adequately protected from the
hazards of loose ground. The bottoms of any support sets installed must have sufficient anchorage to
prevent ground pressures from dislodging the support base. Lateral bracing (including collar bracing,
tie rods, or spreaders) must be provided between immediately adjacent sets to increase stability.
Any dislodged or damaged ground supports that create a hazardous condition must be promptly
repaired or replaced. The new supports must be installed before removing the damaged supports.
Some type of support, such as a shield, must be used to maintain a safe travel way for employees
working in dead-end areas ahead of any support replacement operations.
3.3. Ground support of shafts
Shafts and wells more than 1.5 m in depth entered by employees must be supported by steel casing,
concrete pipe, timber, solid rock, or other suitable material. The full depth of the shaft must be
supported except where it penetrates into solid rock that will not change as a result of exposure.
Where the potential for shear exists, where the shaft passes through earth into solid rock in either
direction, or where the shaft ends in solid rock, the casing or bracing must extend at least 1.5 m into
the solid rock.
The casing or bracing must also extend 100 (± 10) cm above ground level unless a standard railing is
installed, the adjacent ground slopes away from the shaft collar, and barriers exist to prevent mobile
equipment operating near the shaft from jumping over the bracing. If these conditions are met, the
casing or bracing may be reduced to 30 cm above ground.
4. Site control procedures

4.1. The need for a "competent person"
A “competent person” – i.e. one capable of identifying existing and predictable workplace hazards and
who is authorised to take corrective action to eliminate hazards – must be appointed for tunnelling
operations. The competent person is responsible for the following:
• Monitoring air quality.

• Testing the atmosphere for flammable limits before restoring power and equipment and before
returning to work after a ventilation system’s been shut down due to hazardous levels of
flammable gas or methane.
• Inspecting the work area for ground stability.
• Inspecting all drilling equipment prior to each use.
• Inspecting hauling equipment before each shift and visually checking all hoisting machinery,
equipment, anchorages, and rope at the beginning of each shift and during hoisting.
4.2. Control of access and egress
Contractors and must ensure safe access to and egress from all workstations at the worksite to protect
employees from potential hazards, such as being struck by excavators, haulage machines, or other
moving equipment. Three hazards are introduced when dealing with access and egress from a shaft
or tunnel excavation:
1. The first hazard deals with personnel entering and exiting the shaft or tunnel.
2. The second hazard deals with equipment entering or exiting the shaft or tunnel.
3. The third deals with removing excavated material from the shaft or tunnel.
Specific requirements must be followed when employees enter or exit a shaft or tunnel excavation.
The access way provided must be the full depth of the shaft that the person is required or permitted
to enter. This will ensure an employee is able to exit the excavation at any time from any work area.
The access way must be completely separate from a hoist way that is or could be transporting
materials or equipment. This prevents the risk of contact between employees and materials or
equipment. It also ensures that an employee is not stranded in an excavation while materials or
equipment are brought into or out of the excavation. The access way must also have rest platforms
every five metres or less, or have a suitable cage or safety device to allow the employee a rest break
or protection while entering or exiting the shaft or tunnel excavation.
To help control access, completed or unused sections and openings, including chutes and man-ways,
must be tightly covered, bulk headed, barricaded, or fenced off, and posted with warning signs that
read, "Keep Out" or similar language.
Emergency procedures to remove the employee from the shaft or tunnel excavation must be in place
and clearly communicated to all employees in and around shaft or tunnel excavations.
4.3. Check-in/check-out procedures
The contractor must maintain a check-in/check-out procedure to ensure that above ground personnel
maintain an accurate accounting of the number of persons underground and to prevent unauthorised
persons from gaining access to the site. This is especially important in the event of an emergency but
is a common sense requirement at all times.
Any time an employee is working underground, at least one designated person must be on duty above
ground. This person is responsible for calling for immediate assistance and keeping an accurate count
of employees who remain underground in the event of an emergency.
Note: A check-in/check-out procedure is not required once the underground construction is completed
to the point that there is effective permanent environmental controls in place, and when remaining
construction activity won’t cause an environmental hazard or structural failure.
4.4. Machinery and equipment
Machinery and equipment used in shaft and tunnel excavations may create additional hazards that
need addressing. Specifically, internal combustion engines are of concern, if used in shaft and tunnel
excavations, because of the hazards they introduce. Engines must be equipped with properly
maintained exhaust conditioners and engines must be shut down if the ventilation system fails or
ceases to operate.
Testing must be conducted at least once per shift to ensure no harmful gases are in the work area,
and appropriate fire extinguishers must be kept near the engine. If haulage locomotives are used, they
must be equipped with properly maintained braking systems, interlocking power controls that only
operate from the driver's station and appropriate fire extinguishers.
4.5. Communications between the surface and underground
Employees must be able to communicate between the surface and underground in an emergency.
This could be by verbal communication through radio or telephone. A simple yes/no tap code on
communication devices enables employees using self-contained self-rescuers to provide basic
information in response to prompts from the surface.
Provide communication systems where employees will be situated underground. Make

communication systems available in changeover stations, refuge chambers and at quick-fill stations.
This enables employees wearing self-contained self-rescuers or compressed air breathing apparatus
to communicate verbally and share details of the emergency. This is particularly important for
employees withdrawing from the face reaching the first changeover station or refuge chamber.
4.6. Escape ways
Tunnel operators must provide adequate means of escape from underground. Identify the means of
escape in the risk assessment, explaining the reasons for the final choice and be kept as part of the
SHEQ records.
Escape ways trafficable on foot must be provided; walkable escape ways should take precedence over
vertical shafts where practicable. Make sure that escape ways are suitable for the:
 maximum number of employees likely to be in the tunnel at any one time;

 need for employees to escape in an emergency;
 hazards identified in the risk appraisal and assessment; and
 need for rescue teams to access the tunnel in an emergency.
During escape way design, consider the use of emergency safety equipment, including:
 breathing equipment;
 self-contained self-rescuers;
 refuge chambers, changeover stations and secure areas; and
 wayfinding systems.
4.7. Fire prevention and control
In addition to the basic fire prevention and control guidance set forth in the relevant Safe Work
Procedure, underground construction operations are subject to several specific requirements:
 Open flames and fires are prohibited in underground construction areas, except as permitted for
welding, cutting, or other hot work operations.
 Smoking is prohibited - signage prohibiting smoking and open flames should be placed throughout
work areas.
 Suitable fire extinguishers, with adequate rating must be available at the head and tail pulleys of
underground belt conveyers.
All underground structures and those within 30 metres of an opening to the underground must be
constructed of materials with a fire resistance rating of at least one hour. Also, no flammable or
combustible material may be stored above ground within 30 metres of any access point to an
underground operation. If space limitations make this unfeasible, the material must be positioned as
far as possible from the entrance with a fire resistant barrier that has at least a one-hour rating
between the material and the opening. Alternative precautionary measures may be adopted from
industry practices used under similar working conditions or measures recommended under industry
consensus standards. A site hazard analysis may be helpful to determine the effectiveness of
precautionary measures. Any spill of flammable or combustible material must be cleaned up
immediately.
Gasoline may not be underground at any time for any purpose due to its volatile qualities. Internal
combustion engines (except diesel-powered engines on mobile equipment) are prohibited
underground. Acetylene, liquefied petroleum gas, and methyl acetylene propadiene stabilised gas
may be used underground for welding, cutting, and other hot work only under work permit conditions.
Only enough fuel gas and oxygen cylinders for welding, cutting, or hot work during a 24-hour period
are allowed underground. Non-combustible barriers must be installed below such activities if they are
performed in or over a shaft or rise.
Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground must be kept in tightly sealed containers in fire-
resistant areas at least 100 metres from underground explosive magazines, and at least 30 metres
from shaft stations and steeply inclined passageways. Storage areas must be positioned or diked to
ensure that if a container breaks open, any fluids will not flow out of the storage area. Any
hydraulically-actuated underground machinery must use fire-resistant hydraulic fluids, unless it is
protected by a fire suppression system or multi-purpose, correctly rated fire extinguisher of sufficient
capacity for the type and size of equipment involved.
Several specific requirements apply to the use of diesel fuel in underground construction operations,
as follows:
 A surface level tank holding diesel fuel to be pumped to an underground storage site must have a
maximum capacity no greater than the amount of fuel required to supply underground equipment
for 24 hours.
 A surface level tank must be connected to the underground fuelling station by an acceptable pipe
or hose system controlled at the surface by a valve and at the bottom by a hose nozzle.
 The transfer pipe must remain empty at all times except when transferring diesel fuel.
 All hoisting operations in the shaft must be suspended during refuelling operations if the supply
piping in the shaft is not protected from potential damage.
4.8. Housekeeping
Good housekeeping helps to prevent injuries near excavation sites. Shaft and tunnel excavations need
particular attention. Keep work areas free of mud and debris, including access landings, the bottom
of the shaft or tunnel and other work areas. Scrap materials inside the shaft or tunnel must be
removed daily and must not be allowed to accumulate.
5. Illumination requirements
Proper illumination must be provided during tunnelling operations. When explosives are handled, only
acceptable portable lighting equipment may be used within 20 m of any underground heading. For
general tunnelling operations, a minimum illumination intensity of 0.5 lux must be maintained,
although 1 lux must be provided for shaft heading during drilling, mucking, and scaling.
6. Ventilation requirements
Fresh air must be supplied to all underground work areas in amounts sufficient to prevent any
dangerous or harmful accumulation of dusts, fumes, mists, vapours, or gases.
A minimum of 6m3 of fresh air per minute must be supplied for each employee underground.
Mechanical ventilation with reversible airflow must be provided in all of these work areas, except
where natural ventilation is clearly adequate. In blasting, drilling, or other operations that may cause
harmful amounts of dust, fumes, vapours, etc., the airflow velocity must be at least 10 m/minute.
For gassy or potentially gassy operations, ventilation systems must meet additional requirements;
ventilation systems used during gassy operations also must have above-ground controls for reversing
airflow.
7. Special air monitoring requirements

7.1. Hazardous classifications
The rule provides classification criteria for gassy or potentially gassy operations and identifies
additional requirements for work in gassy operations.
Potentially gassy operations
Potentially gassy operations occur under either of the following circumstances:
• When air monitoring shows, for more than a 24-hour period, 10 percent or more of the lower
explosive limit (LEL) for methane or other flammable gases measured at 30 cm + 0.6 cm from the
roof, face, floor, or walls in any underground work area.
• When the geological formation or history of the area show that 10 percent or more of the LEL for
methane or other flammable gases is likely to be encountered in the underground operation.
Gassy operations
Gassy operations occur under the following conditions:
• When air monitoring shows, for three consecutive days, 10 percent or more of the LEL for
methane or other flammable gases measured at 30 cm + 0.6 cm from the roof, face, floor, or walls
in any underground work area.
• When methane or other flammable gases emitting from the strata have ignited, indicating the
presence of such gases.
• When the underground operation is connected to a currently gassy underground work area and
is subject to a continuous course of air containing a flammable gas concentration.
Gassy operations require additional safety precautions, including the following:
• Using more-stringent ventilation requirements.

• Using only diesel equipment approved for use in gassy operations.
• Posting each entrance with warning signs and prohibiting smoking and personal sources of
ignition.
• Maintaining a fire watch when hot work is performed.
• Suspending all operations in the affected area until all special requirements are met or the
operation is declassified.
Additional air monitoring is also required during gassy conditions. When the rule requires monitoring
of airborne contaminants “as often as necessary,” the competent person is responsible for
determining which substances to monitor and how frequently, taking into consideration factors such
as the:
• location of the worksite (its proximity to fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, etc.);
• geology of the site, including soil type and permeability;
• history of the site and the construction operation (changes in levels of substances monitored over
time);
• work practices at the site (use of diesel engines, explosives, and fuel; hot work, welding, and
cutting); and
• physical reactions of employees to working underground.
The atmosphere in all underground areas must be tested quantitatively for carbon monoxide, nitrogen
dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, and other toxic gases, dusts, vapours, mists, and fumes as often as
necessary to ensure that prescribed limits are met. Quantitative tests for methane must also be
performed in order to determine whether an operation is gassy or potentially gassy.
A record of all air-quality tests (including location, date, time, substances, and amount monitored)
must be kept above ground at the worksite and must be made available to client representatives upon
request.
If the competent person determines that air contaminants may present a danger to life at any time,
the contractor must immediately take all necessary precautions and post a notice at all entrances to
the underground site about the hazardous condition.
7.2. Test for oxygen first
The competent person charged with air monitoring must test for oxygen content before testing for air
contaminants. All underground work areas must be tested as often as necessary to verify that the
atmosphere at normal atmospheric pressure remains within the acceptable parameters of 19.5 and
22 percent oxygen.
After verifying oxygen levels, the competent person must test all underground work areas for carbon
monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, and other toxic gases, dusts, vapours, mists, and
fumes as often as necessary to ensure that levels remain within permissible exposure limits.
7.3. Testing for methane and other flammable gases
The competent person must also test all underground work areas for methane and other flammable
gases to determine whether the operation must be classified as potentially gassy or gassy. If the
atmosphere meets the criteria for these designations, the precautions listed in the section discussing
gassy or potentially gassy operations above must be followed. Other precautions to take when testing
for methane or other flammable gases include:
• If 20 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is
detected in any underground work area or in the air return, all employees must be evacuated to
a safe location above ground (except those employees required to eliminate the hazard). Electrical
power (except for acceptable pumping and ventilation equipment) must be cut off to the area
until concentrations reach less than 20 percent of the lower explosive limit.
• If 10 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane gas or other flammable gases is
detected near any welding, cutting, or other hot work, the work must be suspended until the
concentration is reduced to below 10 percent of the lower explosive limit.
• When 5 percent or more of the lower explosive limit for methane or other flammable gases is
detected in an underground work area or in the air return, steps should be taken to increase
ventilation air volume or otherwise control the gas concentration (unless all requirements of
operating under potentially gassy or gassy operations are met).
When the competent person determines that there are contaminants present that are dangerous to
life, the contractor must post notices of the condition at all entrances to underground work areas and
ensure that necessary precautions are taken:
• In cases where 5 percent or more of the LEL for dangerous gases is present, steps must be taken
to increase ventilation air volume to reduce the concentration to less than 5 percent of the LEL
(except when operating under gassy/potentially gassy requirements).
• When 10 percent or more of the LEL for methane or other flammable gases is detected in welding,
cutting, or other hot work areas, work must be suspended until the concentration is reduced to
less than 10 percent of the LEL.
• Where there is a 20 percent or more LEL for these gases, all employees must be withdrawn
immediately to a safe above-ground location, except those necessary to eliminate the hazard.
Electrical power, except for power to pumping and ventilation equipment, must be cut off to the
endangered area until the concentration of the gas is less than 20 percent of the LEL.
7.4. Hydrogen sulphide levels
When air monitoring reveals the presence of 5 ppm or more of hydrogen sulphide, the affected
underground areas must be tested at the beginning and midpoint of each shift until the concentration
is measured at less than 5 ppm for three consecutive days.
Employees must be notified if hydrogen sulphide is detected in amounts exceeding 10 ppm and a
continuous sampling and indicating monitor must be used to keep track of levels. If the concentration
of hydrogen sulphide reaches 20 ppm, the monitor must be designed to provide both visual and
audible alarms to warn that additional measures (respirator use, increased ventilation, evacuation)
may be appropriate.
7.5. Other precautions
Potentially gassy and gassy operations require additional air-monitoring steps, including the following:
• Testing for oxygen in the affected work areas

• Using flammable-gas-monitoring equipment (continuous automatic when using rapid excavation
machines; manual as needed to monitor prescribed limits)
• Performing local gas tests prior to and continuously during any hot work
• Testing continuously for flammable gas when employees are working underground using drill and
blast methods, and testing prior to re-entry after blasting
8. Special conditions for drilling and blasting underground

Before initiating any drilling operation underground, the competent person must inspect all drilling
and associated equipment as well as the drilling area and correct any hazards. Employees are not
allowed on a drill mast when a drill bit is in operation or a drill machine is being moved. Also, when
moving a drill machine, all associated equipment and tools must be secured and the mast placed in a
safe position.
Working on or around jumbo decks involves special safety precautions, including the following:
• Locate all receptacles or racks to store drill steel on jumbos.

• Warn employees working below jumbo decks when drilling is about to begin.
• The top deck of a jumbo must have a mechanical way to lift unwieldy or heavy items.
• Only employees assisting the operator may ride on the jumbo unless it is equipped with seating
for each passenger and protection from crushing or catching hazards.
• Jumbo decks more than 10 feet high must be equipped with guardrails on all open sides unless an
adjacent surface provides fall protection. Jumbo decks and stair treads must be slip-resistant,
secured, and maintained to prevent slip, trip, and fall hazards.
• Jumbos must be chocked so they will not move when employees are working on them.
• Whenever an underground blasting operation in a shaft is complete, a "competent person" must
check the air quality and make sure that no walls, ladders, timbers, blocking, and wedges have
been loosened as a result of the activity. If repairs are required, only employees involved in repair
activity may be in or below affected areas until repairs are complete.
• All blasting wires must be kept clear of electrical lines, pipes, rails and other conductive material
(except earth), to prevent explosions or exposure of employees to electric current.
9. Special requirements for using cranes and hoists underground

In addition to provisions in the SOP that apply to all construction activities using cranes or hoists,
cranes used in underground construction must be equipped with a limit switch to prevent over-travel
at the top and bottom of the hoist way. The limit switch should only be used when operational controls
malfunction. Hoist controls must be arranged so the operator can reach all controls and the
emergency power cut-off without reaching beyond his/her normal operating position.
Underground hoists must be designed to allow powering of the hoist drum in both directions and so
that brakes are automatically applied upon power release or failure. The hoist operator must have a
closed-circuit voice communication system with speaker microphones to communicate with individual
landing stations. Also, hoists must be equipped with landing level indicators (marking the hoist rope
is not adequate) and suitable fire extinguishers in each hoist house.
Before using a hoist that has been out of operation for a complete shift or after repair or service, the
operator must test run the equipment and correct any unsafe conditions before use. Inspections and
load testing to 100 percent of capacity must be performed at least annually and after any repairs or
alterations affecting the structural integrity of the hoist.
For material hoists, wire rope used in load lines must support at least five times the maximum
intended load or the factor recommended by the rope manufacturer, whichever is greater. Personnel
hoists must have at least two means to stop the load, each able to stop and hold 150 percent of the
hoists' rated line pull. For personnel hoisting, a broken-rope safety, safety catch, or arrestment device
are not adequate means of stopping.
9.1. Other aspects of hoist safety that apply to underground construction include:
• Employees may not ride on top of any cage, skip, or bucket unless inspecting or maintaining the
system and wearing a safety belt or harness.
• Personnel and materials must be hoisted separately (except small tools and supplies secured in a
non-hazardous manner).
• When sinking shafts 25 m or less, cages, skips, and buckets that may swing, bump, or snag against
shaft sides must be guided by fenders, rails, ropes, or a combination. If the shaft is more than 25
metres, hoisted objects must be rope- or rail-guided for the full length of travel.
Additional safety requirements for personnel hoists in underground operations include:
• The operator must be able to see and hear signals at the operator's station.
• All cages must be equipped with a steel-plate protective canopy that slopes to the outside and
can be pushed up for emergency egress and have a locking door that opens only inward.
• The sides of personnel cages must be enclosed by 12 mm wire mesh to a height of at least 1.8 m.
If the cage is being used as a work platform and is not in motion, the side height may be reduced
to 1 m.
• During sinking operations in shafts where guides and safeties are not used, the personnel platform
may not exceed 60 m/minute and governors must be used during personnel hoisting. The speed
may increase to 180 m/minute when guides and safeties are used and greater speeds when shafts
are complete.
10.Emergency procedures
The following are defined as dangerous incidents and must be notified to the LHDA project manager:
 the collapse or failure of an excavation or of any shoring supporting an excavation;

 the inrush of water, mud or gas in workings, in an underground excavation or tunnel; or
 the interruption of the main system of ventilation in an underground excavation or tunnel
Whenever an employee is working underground at least one designated person must be on duty
above ground, responsible for maintaining an accurate count of the total number of employees that
are underground and summoning emergency aid if needed. Every employee working underground
must have a portable hand lamp or cap lamp for emergency use unless natural light or an emergency
lighting system provides adequate illumination for escape. Contractors must provide approved self-
rescuers in all underground work areas where employees might be trapped by smoke or gas.
If 25 or more employees work underground at one time, the contractor must provide at least two 5-
person rescue teams, one at the worksite or within 30 minutes travel time from the entry point to the
site and the other team within two hours travel time. If less than 25 employees work underground,
the contractor must have one 5-person rescue team at the worksite or within 30 minutes travel time.
In both situations, advance arrangements can be made for local rescue services to meet this
requirement.
Rescue team members must be trained in rescue procedures, the use and limitations of breathing
apparatus, and the use of firefighting equipment with qualifications reviewed annually. When
flammable or noxious gases are anticipated at a worksite, rescue teams must practice using self-
contained breathing apparatus once a month. The rescue teams must be available through the
duration of a construction project.
If a shaft is used as the means of egress, the contractor must arrange for a readily available power-
assisted hoisting capability in case of emergency, unless the regular hoisting means will function in the
event of a power failure.
10.1. Equipment for rescue, recovery or escape
The emergency plan needs to include the equipment needed for rapid and continuous rescue in
situations where there is:
• reduced visibility;
• an irrespirable atmosphere; or
• an irritant atmosphere.
The amount and type of equipment required depends on the:
• nature of the hazards as identified in the risk assessment;

• size of the underground part of the tunnelling operation; and
• distance from the nearest emergency services, including the project’s rescue provider and the
time it will take to reach the site.
Make sure that equipment is pre-checked and ready to deploy at all times. Tag equipment to show it
is ready for use, and an expiry date where regular timetabled maintenance is required.
10.2. Personal protective equipment
Provide suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) for use in emergencies, including:
• self-contained self-rescuers (i.e. compressed air breathing apparatus – or CABA) to all employees
and other persons;
• spare self-contained self-rescuers at a ratio determined by risk assessment, but no less than 1.25
per employee in each changeover station;
• cap lamps, including spares for support teams, unless suitable alternative lighting is provided, for
example battery powered lights in tunnels; and
• other PPE identified in the risk assessment, for example:
- breathing apparatus, depending on the nature of the tunnelling operation - this may be
compressed air breathing apparatus or closed circuit breathing apparatus, and
- PPE for use in firefighting.
Breathing apparatus should be designed for rescue and last, with maintenance such as cylinder
changes, until support is deployed from the surface.
Provide six-monthly training for employees who use compressed air breathing apparatus (CABA) on
donning it and using the quick-fill system. Ensure employees have quarterly refresher training on its
use. Every employee needs to don CABA and walk it out under stress, time pressure and limited
visibility every year. Units of the same model and duration as those currently used, or intended to be
used, at the operation and that are close to their expiry date can be used for training and walkout
tests. Real self-contained self-rescuers without canisters can be used for training in donning and
changing.
Develop, and follow, a process to track and update the expiry date of self-contained self-rescuers.
10.3. First aid equipment
Provide first aid equipment and supplies that are suitable to tend to injuries that are likely at the
operation.
10.4. Navigational aids
There must be navigational aids to show pathways to:
• the surface;
• changeover stations, refuge chambers and secure areas;
• escape ways;
• intake and return shafts; and
• first aid equipment.
Post signs every 50 m along escape routes to direct employees to the surface. Post signs at every
intersection that direct employees to the nearest refuge chamber. Signs need to be green, reflective,
and at a height where they can be clearly seen but are not susceptible to damage from underground
vehicles.
There needs to be a green light on the outside of refuge chambers and changeover stations. Keep
laminated maps, showing escape routes and refuge chambers, at the top and bottom of every ladder
way. Maps should show their location so that employees can identify the escape route.
Train all employees about the location and use of navigational aids.
10.5. Rescue drilling equipment
A pre-planned and appropriately resourced ability to drill into a tunnel after an emergency can:
• allow communications to be established;

• provide food, water and air to trapped employees; and
• provide access for environmental monitoring.
Include the need for drilling in the risk assessment when developing the emergency plan. Arrange
access to drilling equipment for use in an emergency that can drill:
• from the surface to an underground location; and

• to provide water pumping and gas detection holes after a flood and at other times it might be
required.
Equipment needs to be suitable for the environment at the mine or tunnel and may include, but is not
limited to:
• a heli-portable drilling rig that has been made intrinsically safe;

• a heli-portable air compressor and associated hoses;
• an intrinsically safe rig coring pump;
• a heli-portable accumulator (Koomey unit);
• drill pipes;
• surface water supply pumps and delivery hosing;
• a hydrant stand pipe;
• multi-gas detectors;
• mud tanks, rod baskets, strops, chains and bed logs; and
• hoses.
Include a drilling risk assessment in the emergency plan that ensures the safety of drill crew and
associated personnel.
11.Training requirements
All employees involved in underground construction must be trained to recognise and respond to
hazards associated with underground construction. Training should be tailored to the specific
requirements of the worksite and include the following topics (plus any unique issues or requirements
appropriate to each worksite):
• Air monitoring
• Ventilation and illumination
• Communications
• Flood control
• Mechanical and personal protective equipment
• Explosives, fire prevention and protection
• Emergency procedures, evacuation plans and check-in/check-out procedures
Safe Work Practice – Excavation and Trenching
Excavation is any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in the earth’s surface formed by earth
removal. A trench is defined as a narrow underground excavation that is deeper than it is wide, and is
no wider than 4.5 metres. Excavations can be dug with a hand shovel or an excavator. Excavation work
has to be properly planned, managed, supervised and carried out to ensure that every excavation that
is made, is done with absolute safety and to ensure there is no threat of damage to any service and
that the excavation remains in a safe condition for the period that it is open.
Most frequent causes of incidents in trenching and excavation work include:
 Collapse of earthwork due to lack of shoring, or inadequate or weak shoring.

 Person falling into excavation due to lack of barriers or inadequate fencing.
 Asphyxiation from exhaust gases which have collected in the bottom of the excavation of a trench
(caused by air stagnation through lack of ventilation).
 Spoil too close to the sides which then become overloaded and collapse.
 Failure to maintain shoring, particularly after wet weather.
 Water seepage.
 Persons working too close together.
 Persons not being provided with or not using proper tools for the job.
 Vehicles or plant too close to the edge, causing the edge to collapse.
 Employees in the excavation being struck by soil, materials or tools falling into the excavation.
 Falls through unsafe means of access or egress of the excavations.
 Employees being struck by excavating machinery, e.g. the bucket of the excavator.
 Vehicles being driven into the excavation due to driving errors, inadequate barriers, or the
absence of stop blocks.
 The striking of services, e.g. electricity cables and gas pipes.
 Changing weather conditions.
 Lack of training or technical knowledge.
1. Pre-excavation
1.1. Planning
Note: All excavation work require a permit.
Planning for trenching and excavation work must as a minimum take the following into consideration:
 Location of existing services (gas, water, electricity, fibre optic cables, etc.) adjacent to or crossing
the line of the trench. Mark all underground services before any excavation work commences by:
- using service plan to locate and mark underground services; and
- using locators to trace any services where there is no obvious signs of these services.
 Traffic diversions
 Hard surfaces or obstructions to be broken out
 Limitations on plant (access, rights of way, headroom, overhead cables, bearing capacity of
ground, noise restrictions)
 Possibility of flooding by surface run-off or water from broken mains
 Presence of standing or running water
 Suitable means of draining discharged water
 Condition and stability of adjacent structures
 Surcharge loads
 Vibrations
 Working area and room for placement of spoil and materials
 Evidence of previous excavations in the area
 Evidence of possible hazardous contamination
Ensure that all employees involved in the digging know about safe digging practices and how to deal
with damage to cables and pipes:
 Excavation by powered equipment is prohibited closer than 1.2 metres to any underground cable;
do not remove tiles covering electric cables without prior approval.
 Make sure that there are an emergency plan to deal with damage to cables and pipes and a system
for notifying the service owner.
1.2. Assessment of ground conditions
Prior to any excavation taking place, the ground conditions must be assessed. This can be achieved
through boreholes, trial pits or information from previous or current work in the area. If none of the
above is possible the ground conditions can only be examined when excavation commences. This
examination must be carried out by a competent person using the initial excavation as a trial pit.
1.3. Excavation depth less than 1.25 metres
A risk assessment must be carried out to determine if a risk to employees exists, and if so, the method
and type of protection to be provided. It should address, but not be limited to, the following:
 Water table - Is it above or below the trench bottom?

 De-watering - is dewatering required, and if so will it affect the stability of the trench?
 Adjacent buildings or roads - are adjacent buildings, roads or services liable to damage?
 Ground conditions - has the type of ground been examined to determine its structure, i.e. clay,
sand, silt, rock, fill or previously excavated ground?
 If any doubt exists as to the self-supporting ability of the ground it must be benched, battered or
shored
1.4. Excavation depth 1.25 metres or greater
Trenches 1.25 metres deep or greater require a protective system, unless the excavation is made
entirely in stable rock. Trenching or excavation work shall not be commenced until the ground has
been examined by a competent person to determine the protection required. Protection must be
erected and maintained where having regard to the nature of the soil and the slope of the side of the
trench or excavation, a fall or dislodgment of earth or other material is likely to occur from a height of
1.25 metres or more so as to bury or trap a person.
The competent person must then provide a statement in writing - detailing the findings of the
examination, type(s) of ground encountered, the calculations used in deciding the method of
protection required. Trenches of six meters (6m) deep or greater require that the protective system
be designed by a registered professional engineer or be based on tabulated data prepared and/or
approved by a registered professional engineer.
1.5. Biological hazards
Risk assessments should consider the past site history to identify any possible contamination. Due
consideration should be given to all waste material accumulations found during excavation for any
possible biological hazards, such as bacteria or fungi.
1.6. Chemical hazards
Soil testing must be conducted for presence of possible hazardous contaminants, where the risk
assessments deems contamination possible. Gas testing should be carried out if in doubt of any
possible gas release, such as methane, sulphur dioxide, etc. Appropriate respiratory equipment should
be provided to the personnel.
2. Protective Systems
Undisturbed soil stays in place because opposing horizontal and vertical forces are evenly balanced.
When you create an excavation, you remove the soil that provides horizontal support. Soil will
eventually move downward into the excavation. The longer the face (a side of the excavation) remains
unsupported, the more likely it is to cave in.
Type of soil structure is an important factor and the safe angle of repose of the soil must be
determined before starting the excavation; some soils are more stable than others. The type of soil is
one of the factors that determine the chance that an excavation will cave in. There are three basic soil
types that you may encounter:
 Type A – very stable. Clay is an example.

 Type B – less stable than type A soil. Crushed rock, silt, and soils that contain an equal mixture of
sand and silt are examples.
 Type C – less stable than type B soil. Gravel and sand are examples.
 Type D — Type D soil will flow very easily and must be supported and contained to be excavated
to any significant depth. Examples are swamplands with high moisture content, quicksand and
clays with high moisture content.
Soil has additional qualities that affect its stability. These include granularity, saturation, cohesiveness,
and unconﬁned compressive strength.
Note: What might appear to be a safe soil structure, can change dramatically with changes in the
weather.
Cave-ins pose the greatest risk and are much more likely than other excavation-related incidents to
result in employee fatalities. One cubic metre of soil can weigh as much as a car. An unprotected
trench is an early grave. DO NOT enter an unprotected trench.
There are different types of protective systems:
1. Sloping and benching provide protection by removing material from the face of an excavation at
an angle to its floor.
2. Shoring requires installing aluminium hydraulic or other types of supports to prevent soil
movement and cave-ins.
3. Shielding protects employees by using trench boxes or other types of supports to prevent soil
cave-ins.
Designing a protective system can be complex because many factors must be considered: soil
classification, depth of cut, water content of soil, changes caused by weather or climate, proximity to
previously backfilled excavations, surcharge loads (e.g., spoil, other materials to be used in the trench)
and other operations in the vicinity.
2.1. Sloping and benching
In general, the flatter the sloping or benching angle, the greater the protection. Benches are cuts in
the slope that give it a stair-step appearance. There are two types of benches: simple and multiple.
Rain, vibration, and pressure from heavy equipment can make soil unstable and increase the risk of a
cave-in. Sloped or benched excavations that show signs of cracks, bulges, or clumps of soil that fall
away from the faces are dangerous and must be inspected by a competent person. You must
immediately get out of the excavation and stay away until the competent person determines it is safe
to enter.
2.2. Shoring
Shoring and shielding systems can prevent cave-ins in excavations with or without sloped or benched
faces; it requires installing aluminium hydraulic or other types of supports to prevent soil movement.
The safest way to install and remove them is from outside the excavation.
Vertical shores are called uprights. They’re easy to install, relatively inexpensive, and often used in
stable soil or in shallow excavations that have parallel faces. Vertical shores must be sized for the
excavation’s dimensions and soil type. Horizontal shores are called walers. Walers are often used
when unstable soil makes sloping or benching impractical and when sheeting is necessary to prevent
soil from sliding into the excavation.
If shoring is to be used, it must be designed by a competent person. Shoring involving major

temporary works (e.g. sheet piling/dewatering) should be designed by an experienced designer with
suitable professional indemnity insurance provisions.
The shoring or support system must be installed without delay as the excavation progresses.
Operatives installing the system must be given clear instructions preferably recorded as drawings or
sketches. The shoring must extend at least 300mm above the edge of the excavation, or a fender
board of the same height provided.
2.3. Shielding
Shields provide employees a safe work area by using trench boxes or other types of supports to protect
them from collapsing soil. Shields don’t prevent cave-ins but “shield” employees if a face does
collapse. They are usually placed in the excavation by heavy equipment.
3. Requirements
3.1. Access and Egress
Whether protected by sloping, boxes, or shoring, trenches must be provided with ladders so that
employees can enter and exit safely. Ladders must:
 be placed within the area protected by the shoring or trench box;

 be securely tied off at the top;
 extend above the shoring or box by at least 1 metre; and
 be inspected regularly for damage.
Ladders should be placed as close as possible to the area where personnel are working and never
more than 7.5 metres away. Where gangways or walkways are required for access across a trench or
excavation and where a person could fall more than 2 metres, the gangway or walkway must be
provided with toe-boards and guard rails and be a minimum of 600mm wide.
3.2. Barricading
Every part of the trench or excavation where there is a likelihood of a person falling 1 metre or more
must be provided with barricades or guardrails as soon as possible after excavation. Barricades or
guardrails can be removed to allow access or movement of plant, or materials. Once access is no
longer required, the barricades or guardrails must be re-instated. Whenever barriers are set back
from the edge of a trench, all access to the excavation should be confined to the proper pathways and
no materials should be stacked in the space between the barrier and the trench edge.
Where vehicles can pass close to a trench, heavy loads can endanger the trench. Traffic barriers must
be provided to keep vehicle traffic from encroaching too close to the trench edge. Barriers or stop
blocks are also necessary to stop cranes, dumpers tip trucks, etc. manoeuvring too close to the edge
of the trench and endangering its stability. Timber baulks are effective against small wheeled
machines but taller barriers are required for larger pieces of plant.
3.3. Ventilation
Hazardous atmospheres can occur in excavations near landfills, sites contaminated by leaking gas lines
or storage tanks, in sewers, and in other confined spaces. Should there be a likelihood risk of toxic
gases being present any trench or excavation, the atmosphere must be tested prior to entry to ensure
the oxygen content is not less than 19% and not greater than 23%. The atmosphere must also be
checked if necessary for the presence of explosive gases. Where mechanical ventilation equipment is
required to establish and maintain a safe environment the equipment must be monitored regularly
and have the controls, including any remote power supply identified and tagged to prevent any
unauthorised and/or accidental interference.
Regular tests on the atmosphere must be conducted throughout the duration of the work.
3.4. Fumes, gases and water
Where excavations are considered as confined spaces:
 Make sure that employees wear the appropriate PPE and have the right equipment.
 Make sure that petrol or diesel driven equipment is not used in, or near the edge of, an excavation
unless the fumes can be ducted away or the area can be adequately ventilated.
 Remove ground water at the bottoms of all trenches and excavations and maintain this while work
is in progress.
If a gas pipe is damaged, arrangements must be put into immediate effect to:
 ban smoking and naked flames;

 if necessary carry out evacuations; and
 erect suitable signs to warn everybody of the danger.
Water makes soil unstable. You can’t enter an excavation when water has built up unless you are
protected from the unstable soil.
3.5. Lighting
During the hours of darkness, the edges of an excavation must be illuminated, especially when it is
adjacent to a public thoroughfare. Battery operated flashing lights placed at intervals are usually
sufficient.
In deeper excavations or during winter, lighting may be necessary to allow work to proceed in a safe
manner. Lighting must be guarded and installed to prevent damage. The lighting must be placed so
that the level of illumination at the working area is adequate and access ways and working areas are
free of glare and deep shadow.
3.6. Equipment and material placement
Equipment, excavated material or other matter must not be placed within 1.5 metres of the edge of
a trench or where there is a likelihood of a collapse of the edge of a trench.
3.7. Backfill and compaction
 A competent person must supervise the installation, alteration, or removal of excavation support.
 Make sure that employees removing shoring after completion of work are not left in the bottom
of the excavation; remove shoring in a manner to prevent cave-in on employees.
 Backfill consists of the placement of specified backfill material, in layers of 15 cm, in the
excavations; use soil materials for backfill that is free of clay clods, rock or gravel larger than 6 cm.
Debris waste, frozen materials and other deleterious matter of any dimension must be removed.
 Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not until completion of the following:
- approval of construction below finish grade;
- inspection, testing, approval, and recording location of underground utilities;
- removal of concrete formwork; and
- removal of rubbish and debris;
 Perform the compaction of soil materials for backfills by using the specified compaction
equipment that is suitable for the soil material being compacted and for use in the location of the
work area.
 Control soil compaction for compliance with the percentage of maximum density for the area
classification, where applicable.
4. Precautions
4.1. Materials falling into excavations
Make sure that the edges of the excavation are protected against falling materials by:
 providing toe boards where necessary; and

 storing excavated ground and building materials well away from the side of any excavation.
4.2. People and vehicles falling into excavation
Take the necessary steps to prevent people and vehicles falling into excavations:
• Provide barricades, handrails, signals or other appropriate warring devices to protect employee
from any hazardous operation or excavation.
• Cover open trenches, excavations, etc. when handrails or barricades do not provide adequate
protection.
• Keep vehicles away from excavation, where possible.
• Use stop blocks to prevent vehicles from over-running where they have to tip materials into
excavations.
• Provide extra support to the sides of excavation where needed.
• Provide walkways, ramps, or bridges with standard guardrails at all excavations and trenches
where employees are required or permitted to cross over. Make the crossing structure of tightly
secured and uniformly sized planking or other material
• Mark grade lines, ropes, chains, and other tripping hazards sufficiently to be clearly visible in the
day or night.
Cave-in rescue
It is natural to try to rescue casualties caught or buried by a cave-in but care must be taken to prevent
injury and death to rescuers, whether from a further cave-in or other hazards. The following
procedures may be suitable, depending on conditions.
• To get down to the casualty, use a tarpaulin, fencing, plywood, or similar material that can cover
the ground and will ride up over any further cave-in.
• Sometimes a further cave-in can be prevented by placing a backhoe bucket against the suspected
area or excavating it.
• Rescue employees should enter the trench with ropes and wear rescue harnesses, if possible.
• To prevent further injury, remove the casualty by stretcher whenever possible. Tarps or ladders
can be used as a makeshift stretcher.
• Stabilise the casualty.
4.3. People struck by plant
Keep employees separate from moving plant as far as is reasonably practical. Make sure that plant
operators are competent to prevent that employees being struck by machinery.
4.4. Undermining nearby structures
Make sure that the excavations do not affect the foundations of nearby buildings or the footings of
scaffolding. Provide temporary support to the nearby structures where necessary.
4.5. Underground services
Mark all underground services before any excavation work commences by:
• using service plans to locate and mark underground services; and

• using locators to trace any services where there is no obvious signs of these services.
Make sure that all employees involved in the digging know about safe digging practices and emergency
plan to deal with damage to cables and pipes:
• Excavation by powered equipment is prohibited closer than 1.2 metres to any underground cable.
Do not remove tiles covering electric cables without prior approval.
• Make sure that there is an emergency plan to deal with damage to cables and pipes and a system
for notifying the service owner.
Employees may not work in excavations where water is accumulating, unless adequate precautions
are taken to protect them against the hazards posed by water accumulation. If water accumulation is
controlled or prevented by water removal equipment, a competent person will monitor the removal
activities to ensure proper operation.
5. Inspections
A competent person must inspect trenches daily, and as conditions change, before employee entry
and as needed throughout the shift to ensure elimination of excavation hazards. Changing conditions
include, for example, after every rainfall or snowfall, as soil conditions change or after any accidental
fall of rock, earth or any other material. Stop work if the inspection shows it is not safe to continue.
Note: A competent person is an individual who is capable of identifying existing and predictable
hazards or working conditions that are hazardous, unsanitary, or dangerous to employees, soil types
and protective systems required, and who is authorised to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate these hazards and conditions.
Safe Work Practice: Working from Elevated Positions
Many work activities involve working from elevated positions; for example, employees in
construction, maintenance and those who undertake one-off tasks without proper training, planning
or equipment are at risk. Working on ladders, scaffolds and platforms are obvious examples, but there
are many more activities where employees are required to work at elevated positions. Examples
include roof work, working over tanks and pits, at the edge of elevated structures, or on top of vehicles
or trailers. Falls from elevated positions are responsible for many serious and fatal injuries. If a person
falls from an elevated position higher than two metres, the likelihood is that they will sustain serious
injury.
The main hazards associated with working from elevated positions are employees falling and objects
falling onto people below. These may occur as a result of inadequate edge protection, or objects in
storage not properly secured.
When working from elevated positions, a safe system of work must be implemented to control risks
to health and safety arising from hazards such as:
 Contact with live apparatus or conductors

 Poorly maintained equipment
 Bad weather conditions (heavy rain or wind)
 Glare from roof sheeting or insulation
 Falls from elevated positions
 Objects falling from elevated positions.
Where a person can fall from one level to another, prevention systems to stop a person to get into a
falling situation are preferred over those that arrest a person once the person has fallen.
1. Pre-work Activities
Work at elevated positions requirements are based on a hierarchy that requires that all work at
elevated positions must be avoided, whenever possible. Where work at an elevated position cannot
be avoided, suitable and appropriate work equipment (such as scaffolding, cherry pickers, stepladders
with handrails, etc. must be provided). Collective protection measures are given priority over other
measures (for example, guard rails rather than a safety harness).
If providing a safe working platform is not possible or reasonably practicable, equipment such as safety
nets and harnesses that will help break falls and minimise the distance and consequence of falls must
be provided. Anyone working with this type of equipment must have the appropriate training to set
up and use it.
1.1. Assess the risk of working from an elevated position

The area Responsible Engineer –
 assesses and selects the correct work system for elevated positions;
 is responsible for the safe erection, installation, proper operation, running and maintenance of all
machinery/equipment;
 provides engineering input to the design of temporary work platforms that are not scaffolding;
and
 approves temporary work platform designs.
The area Responsible Engineer assesses the risks involved and determines the most appropriate work
system where the task is not covered by a Task Instruction or where the work is outside the confines
of a permanent platform. The specific risks posed by working from an elevated position are considered
as part of the overall health and safety risk assessment, for example:
 Why the work is being carried out

 Whether it is possible to avoid having to carry it out
 Possibly completing it using alternative working methods.
Considering the risk of all falls, specific precautions are taken to reduce the risks where it is possible
for anyone to fall a distance liable to cause personal injury. The risk assessment must ensure that –
 all work at elevated positions is properly planned and appropriately supervised;

 those working from elevated positions are competent to do so;
 the place where work at an elevated position is done, is safe;
 the risks from fragile surfaces are properly controlled;
 equipment for work at elevated positions is suitable and properly inspected and maintained;
 the weather conditions are taken into account and all work is stopped if weather conditions
endanger health or safety; and
 procedures in case of emergency are planned for, including rescue procedures.
Existing structures must be stable; they must support the weight of employees and the equipment or
materials they may need. Platforms must be footed on firm ground or on a stable structure to prevent
them from moving. For example, scaffolding should generally be tied to an existing structure and
duckboards must be provided over fragile roofs.
Where employees could fall through holes or openings in a platform, floor guard rails, boards or other
barriers such as toe boards must be erected. The risk assessment assists in choosing the most suitable
type of equipment to use. Consider:
 Injury outcomes:
o How far would a person fall?
o What could they fall into/onto or through?
o What injuries may result?
 Frequency of exposure:
o How often is the person likely to be exposed to the hazard?
o How many people will be exposed to the hazard at any given time?
 Potential/likelihood/causes of a fall occurring:
o How will the employee access or egress the work position?
o Could they fall while doing so?
o Will they need to move from one surface to an unprotected area?
o Will all the surfaces support the intended load?
o Are there any holes/openings in the surface?
o Are there any unprotected edges/openings?
o Do the levels change?
o Is the surface steep, wet or slippery?
o Will any part of the task introduce additional hazards to make the area wet/slippery?
o Will ladders have to be used?
o Are the surfaces stable?
o Is, or could, lighting be a problem?
o Will the weather affect the site conditions?
o Could falling objects affect the safety of persons involved?
o Could any chemicals, electrical, mechanical, noise, pressure, radiant, bio-mechanical or
microbiological hazards affect the task?
1.2. Select the appropriate equipment to work at an elevated position

The hierarchy for managing and selecting equipment for work at elevated positions is –
 avoid work at elevated positions wherever possible;

 use work equipment or other measures to prevent falls where working from elevated positions
cannot be avoided; and
 where the risk of a fall cannot be eliminated, use work equipment or other measures to minimise
the distance and consequences of a fall, should one occur.
When selecting equipment for work at elevated positions –
 use the most suitable work equipment;

 give collective protection measures (e.g. guard rails) priority over personal protection measures
(e.g. safety harnesses). Edge protection provided must -
o be strong and rigid enough to prevent employees from falling and be able to withstand other
loads likely to fall on them, and
o be fixed to a structure for adequate support.
 Take account of –
o the working conditions, and
o risks to the safety of all those at the place where the work equipment is to be used.
1.3. Reduce the risk of employees falling from elevated positions

Underlying causes of falls from elevated positions are:
 Reaching beyond the work surface

 Poor housekeeping
 Walking off an unguarded edge
 Carrying objects
 Slippery surfaces
 Climbing onto or from the work surface
 Using machinery or equipment while on the platform
 Weather conditions – heat, rain, ice, and/or winds.
A written system of work must be produced that stipulates which type of access equipment is to be
used for the task, how it is to be used and any restrictions that may be necessary in its use. The
following requirements are applicable for all systems of work at elevated positions:
 Where a fall from any elevated position could result in harm, some sort of fall protection system
is used.
 Barricades are installed to prevent entry where there is a risk to employees below the work area.
 Others in the area who may be affected by the activities of those working from elevated positions
are notified by the employee in charge of the work before the work commences.
 Appropriate personal protective equipment is worn.
 Load limits specified by the manufacturer are not exceeded.
 Employees must always stand in the floor of the platform, not on planks, boxes, railing or other
devices for a work position.
 Work from elevated positions on any platform is only carried out from within the confines of the
platform.
 Guard rails are used when climbing or descending and to safeguard against employees leaning
over the edge.
 The working platform must be sufficient in size and strength to carry the required loading of
employees, tools and materials.
Before using a fall-arrest system, a plan and equipment must be in place for the rescue of anybody
left suspended mid-air, following a fall.
1.4. Reduce the risk of objects falling from elevated positions

When employees are working from elevated positions it is essential to consider the risk of objects
falling onto somebody or something below. Handheld equipment such as drills, saws, buckets can be
dropped and knocked over the edge of a platform or walkway. Materials such as nails, pieces of wood
and debris can also represent a significant hazard.
Key steps to prevent objects from falling are:
 Platforms must be constructed so that materials or objects cannot fall and cause injury to anyone
or anything below – close-boarded platforms are usually sufficient but, for work over public areas,
a double-boarded platform with a polyethylene sheet in between the boards prevents small items
such as nails and bolts from falling.
 Toe boards prevent items from being kicked off platforms.
 A covered walkway protects employees/people below.
 If a cradle, harness or mobile elevated working platform is used, mesh or netting can be used
underneath the equipment to prevent anything falling and causing injury or damage.
 Covered chutes are an effective and quick method of removing debris from work areas, and much
safer than throwing objects over the side of a platform into a skip below.
 Wrist restraints, tool lanyards and safety helmet chin straps must be considered to prevent
equipment dropped accidentally from falling to below the work area.
 Bad weather can cause difficulties for outdoor work, with wind blowing equipment off platforms
- if the weather is particularly severe, work should be postponed to prevent putting employees at
risk.
2. Working from Platforms

2.1. Fixed work platforms and walkways
Work at heights must be carried out from fixed/permanent platforms when they are suitable for the
work. Existing platforms, i.e. fixed ladders, stairs, walkways and platforms, must comply with the
relevant standards/codes that were in place at the time they were constructed and installed. Ensure
that all permanent platforms and walkways have suitable handrails. Where a hazard exists with
existing structures, a risk assessment must be conducted to determine whether it requires
modification to bring it up to current standards and control the risk.
Permanently fixed ladders, stairs, walkways and platforms must –
 be kept free of obstructions;

 not be overloaded (critical areas will be signed, indicating the loading limits – for general areas
such as walkways and platforms, employees should have general awareness of loading
limits/calculations communicated to them through the working from elevated positions training);
 be provided with adequate lighting; and
 be repaired or removed from service if the integrity of the structure is faulty or damaged.
Anchor points must be inspected daily, by a qualified inspector, prior to use. The minimum
requirements include the following:
 It must be capable of supporting an employee falling 1.8 metres;

 It must be installed in a manner that prevents accidental disengagement from support structures;
 The employee must be able to attach and detach himself without losing balance;
 Must be installed at shoulder height to reduce fall distance; and
 Are free of sharp edges to avoid cutting the lanyard.
2.2. Temporary work platforms

Temporary work at an elevated position involves work more than 2 metres above ground level where
there is no fixed or permanent means of access or working platform. This includes –
 erecting and working from scaffolding;

 work from trestles, stepladders, and/or ladders;
 work from hydraulic platforms; and
 other temporary means of access, including specialised rope mechanisms.
Hazards to be considered, additional to those already mentioned, are:
 Means of access movement – movement of ladders, stepladders or other means of access is a

significant risk in itself;
 Restricted means of escape – In the event of an employee injury or other emergency, the
temporary place of work may be difficult to leave, and further precautions may be required; and
 Vertigo or dizziness – some individuals are prone to disorientation and sickness, and should not
be allowed to work at elevated positions.
The appropriate means of access according to a hierarchy that favours the safest option must be
selected:
 Specify scaffold access, where practicable, for work of extended duration and where significant
loads must be worked with or significant forces will be exerted.
 Specify trestles where work is of short duration, does not require significant loads to be handled
or forces to be exerted and does not require work significantly above two metres. Ensure that the
working platform provided is as wide as possible.
 Specify specialist means of access including hydraulic platforms, fork lift cages, roped access, etc.
only where appropriate for the task(s) to be undertaken.
 Specify ladders only where the work is of a type that cannot reasonably be done from safer means
of access. Ensure that ladders are tied or footed at all times, that loads are not carried up or down
by hand, and that excessive leaning or reaching is not required.
 Specify stepladders where the work requiring access is of very short duration, does not expose
the employee to high winds, and the work does not require goods to be carried up or down.
Any temporary platform must be stable, securely attached or fixed and securely fenced. It must have
handrails, intermediate guard rails and toe boards to prevent employees or materials falling from the
platform. If the platform is attached to hydraulic or rope-operated plant, then in the event of a
hydraulic power failure, a "fail-safe device" must be fitted to the item of plant.
2.3. Guard rail systems

Guard rails must be installed at the perimeter of buildings, structures, pits, tanks, floor openings, etc.
to stop employees falling over the edge. Guard rails must –
 have the necessary strength to withstand the impact of an employee falling against them;
 be installed prior to any work commencing and not removed until all work is completed; and
 have a minimum height of between 900 mm and 1 100 mm above the working surface and have
a top rail, mid rail and a toe board, or include an infill panel that incorporates a kick plate.
The supporting members, including the rafters where the system is connected to them, must support
the load generated if a person falls against the rails. The system must be erected to follow the profile
of the area that needs to be protected and there should not be any gaps through which a person can
fall.
2.4. Fall-arrest systems

Fall-arrest equipment, such as harnesses and lanyards, are used as travel restriction systems to
prevent employees moving from safe to unsafe areas. The systems and devices must be used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Fall-arrest systems consist of some or all of the
following:
 Anchorage point or static line (also known as a safety line or horizontal lifeline)
 Energy absorber
 Inertia reel or fall-arrest device
 Fall-arrest harness
 Lanyard or lanyard assembly.
A competent person must inspect all anchorage points for the device before their first use and then
on a regular basis so that they are capable of supporting the design loads:
 A visual inspection must be conducted before every use.

 If the load-bearing capacity of an anchorage point is impaired, the anchorage should be made
inoperable immediately to prevent its use.
 Any harness, safety line or other component of the device that shows wear or weakness to the
extent it may cause the device to fail, must not be used.
 All employees using the device must be trained in the selection, assembly and use of the system.
 Provision must be made for the rescue of an employee whose fall is arrested by a fall-arrest device.
Note: Employees using fall-arrest systems may not work alone. Before using a fall-arrest system, a plan
and equipment must be in place for the rescue of anybody left suspended mid-air, following a fall.
Serious injury or even death can occur in a matter of minutes, particularly where the employee’s
movement or breathing is restricted or where they are unconscious.
3. Equipment used for Working from Elevated Positions

3.1. Portable Ladders
Ladders are generally used as platforms to work safely at elevated positions and are designed to be
used by one person at a time. Ladders are however strong enough to support the user and the
equipment, tools and materials the person may require for the task to be performed. Ladders are also
used as means to reach and gain access to more fixed elevated working positions such as elevated
work platforms. Elevated positions are reached by ascending the ladder. Ladders could however also
be used to reach and gain access to lowered positions such as lowered work platforms and manholes.
Lowered positions are reached by descending the ladder. Refer the SOP for Portable Ladders for more
detail.
3.2. Scaffolding
Scaffolding is a temporary platform/frame used to support people and material. It is constructed for
reaching heights above arms' reach for the purpose of building, construction, maintenance or repair.
It has a variety of applications; it is used in construction, alteration, routine maintenance and
renovation.
Scaffolding offers a safer and more comfortable work arrangement compared to leaning over edges,
stretching overhead and working from ladders. Suitable and sufficient scaffolding must be supplied
for work at elevations that cannot be accomplished safely by other means. Properly erected and
maintained, scaffolding provides employees safe access to work locations, level and stable working
platforms, and temporary storage for tools and materials for performing immediate tasks. Refer the
SOP for Scaffolding for more detail.
3.3. Elevating work platforms (EWPs)

Elevating work platforms (EWPs) are used increasingly as temporary work platforms that provide a
safe place of work from elevated positions. EWPs are equipment designed to elevate employees and
their tools to carry out temporary work. They are used as an alternative to scaffolding, since erecting
scaffolding could be a long process and may not be considered a safe action for the particular type of
work. EWPs include scissor lifts, boom lifts, extending arm lifts (cherry pickers) and truck-mounted
EWPs (travel towers). Refer the SOP for EWPs for more detail.
4. Alternative means of Working from Elevated Positions

Where work cannot be done from an existing structure and the use of a working platform is not
appropriate, a range of access equipment can be used, for example:
1. Mast climbing work platforms.

2. Rope access equipment.
3. Boatswain’s chairs/seats
4.1. Mast climbing work platforms (MCWPs)

Mast climbing work platforms (MCWPs) are increasingly being used as temporary work places, giving
variable height access to specific areas above ground level. In many cases MCWPs are more
convenient to use than other forms of access equipment such as ladders or fixed scaffolding. Mast
climbers have a power-driven work platform that climbs a vertical tower, allowing them to reach much
higher and carry greater loads than traditional scaffolds.
Mast climbers offer many advantages over other forms of scaffolding. They are quicker to erect and
dismantle, and they are potentially much better at reducing the risk of shoulder and lower back
injuries to employees, since they can be adjusted to an optimum working height. Yet some of their
advantages, such as their ability to reach hundreds of feet in the air, can create new and potentially
hazardous conditions. When installed and used correctly, they are as safe as other scaffold types, but
when they fail, the results are usually catastrophic, often involving multiple deaths and serious
injuries.
The requirements for MCWP safety are similar as for scaffolding, with a few additional issues to be
addressed.
Erection and dismantling
Potential hazards that should be considered when installing or dismantling MCWPs, these hazards
include but are not limited to the following:
 Handling heavy items

 Improper mast bolt connections
 Exposure to dust and particles during the drilling of mast tie anchorages
 Improper mast tie installation
 Improper mast installation
 Moving parts
 Improper dismantling procedures
 Fall hazards on building or platform
Machine guards are to be in place during normal operations of the mast climber to ensure that no one
can access (e.g. climb over or reach above) the areas where shearing or entrapment can occur
between the moving and stationary parts.
Where the MCWP has multiple masts, the drive speeds of all motors are to be synchronised to ensure
the platform remains level. Installers and dismantlers of MCWP must be competent in basic rigging or
scaffolding.
Use a MCWP
Potential hazards that should be considered when using MCWPs, these hazards include but are not
limited to the following:
 Fall hazard from the work platform

 Falling objects
 Crushing hazard beneath a MCWP
 Trapping of persons between the work platform and fixed obstructions, such as the building or
scaffolding
 Instability of a free standing MCWP
 Loss of power or control circuit failure
 Contact with live electrical conductors

 Improper inspections
 Overturning hazard during the transfer of mobile MCWPs
Users of MCWP platforms should ensure that:
 A MCWP is used only in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer.
 A MCWP is not overloaded or used in a manner that would affect the platform’s stability or
endanger an employee. Verify ground compaction or base conditions.
 The rated working load of the MCWP is indicated on a sign visible to the operator at its controls.
 A MCWP is maintained in such a way that the safety factors of the original design are maintained.
 A MCWP is inspected each day before use, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
 Only use normal operating controls for the MCWP. Do not bypass or override the normal operating
controls or safety devices.
 Check for hazards such as overhead obstructions, building protrusions, high voltage lines,
inadequate base support, drop offs, debris and other unsafe conditions.
 Do not alter ties, platform or base without the written authorization of the manufacturer and
Competent Person.
 Be aware of weather conditions and how they can affect the use of the MCWP.
4.2. Rope access equipment

“Rope access” is a term used to describe a method of accessing remote and exposed points on a
structure (tower, building, etc.), in order to carry out some form of work (painting, cleaning,
inspection, installation, repair etc.), using equipment and rope techniques derived from
mountaineering. The technology offers considerable benefits to a wide range of operations, some of
which include:
 greater flexibility than moving platform methods;

 ability to access “hard to get to places” safely;
 inexpensive - the cost of equipment is a fraction of the cost of scaffolding and it can be set up and
removed very quickly, minimising the number of man hours required for a task;
 very safe and very manoeuvrable; and
 employees are able to get on with the task without worrying about their safety; this contributes
to greater speed, efficiency and employee morale.
A working rope is used for movement (to be used for ascent and descent via descenders or ascenders),
combined with a safety rope which, with the use of a fall arrest device, arrests any fall caused by the
breakage of the working rope or by human error. Since the user is suspended for the majority of the
time, a comfortable fall arrest harness must be used; for work carried out entirely in the air, the use
of a rigid seat (i.e. boatswain’s chair) is suggested.
4.3. Boatswain’s chair

Boatswain’s chairs are normally used for light, short-term work, but only where it is not practical to
provide a working platform. A boatswain’s chair (pronounced and often also called bosun’s chair) is a
single-point adjustable suspension scaffold used to suspend a person from a rope to perform work at
an elevated level. Its more or less rigid seat, which provides more comfort than even the best padded
straps for long periods of use, distinguishes it from a climbing harness.
It does not allow the freedom of movement necessary for climbing and the user is generally hoisted
or lowered into place using the rope alone.
Boatswain’s chair selection criteria
There are various aspects that must be considered before selecting the correct type of suspension
scaffolding to gain access to work at height and the risks to be managed while it is in use. In addition
to the relevant risk assessment, the following must be considered (this list is not exhaustive):
 Task requirements:
o Location of the task
o Who operates the boatswain’s chair
o Weight of employee/tools to be suspended
o Number of employees to be suspended
o Required height/outreach
o Manual handling issues
o Time in which the task is to be completed
o What time of the day is most appropriate for the task to be done
 Interface with other vehicles/pedestrians
 Weather conditions, for example strong winds or rain
 Other work activities in the area.
Pre-use inspection
Before using a boatswain’s chair, the following must be checked:
 Ensure that the equipment has been installed correctly, by a competent person.
 Ensure that the area is cordoned off to avoid injury/damage to people and surrounding area.
 Check that measures have been taken to ensure the boatswain’s chair does not come into contact
with anything/anyone when it rises and descends.
 Ensure that any supports are protected from damage.
 Ensure that the equipment is protected from adverse weather.
On completion of the erection and pre-use inspection, a performance test must be done immediately
to ensure the equipment is functioning correctly.
Use of a Boatswain’s Chair
The boatswain’s chair consists of a seat with a back, a central suspension point and a carrying point
for tools. Every boatswain’s chair must be securely suspended and constructed in such a manner so
as to prevent any user from falling. Whether a chair or seat is used, the user must wear personal fall
arrest systems, attached to the suspension system, and a lanyard to protect the employee against
falls.
Employees using the technique must be trained and competent to –
 erect the equipment under the supervision of a competent person and conduct a pre-check;
 safely descent;
 attach the main rope and safety rope to separate suspension points;
 check all the equipment carefully before each use;
 maintain all equipment to a high standard; and
 attach any tools needed for the work to the operator with suitable ropes or chains to prevent
them from dropping - where a risk of dropped tools or falling materials remains, the area must be
fenced off and protected by covered walkways
Fall protection
Employees must use a safety belt and lifeline. The lifeline must be securely attached to substantial
members of the structure, not a scaffold, or to securely rigged lines that will safely suspend the
employee in case of a fall.
A full body harness, that can arrest an accidental vertical or near vertical fall, must be worn when
getting on or off a boatswain’s chair. It must –
 guide and distribute the impact forces of the fall by means of leg and shoulder strap supports; and
 have an upper dorsal suspension assembly which, after the arrest, will not by itself permit the
release or further lowering of the employee connected to the fall arrest system.
Every lifeline used with a boatswain’s chair must –
 suspend independently from the boatswain’s chair; and

 securely attach to a fixed support to ensure that failure of the boatswain’s chair or its supporting
system will not cause the lifeline to fail.
Chair seat and sling requirements
It is imperative that the appropriate boatswain’s chairs are selected to provide stable support to the
user. They must be rigged with a block and tackle and used safely.
 The wood seat of the boatswain's chair must not be less than 300 mm by 600 mm by 25 mm thick.
 The underside of the seat must be reinforced by cleats fastened to prevent splitting.
 The boatswain’s chair seat slings, 13mm fibre, or equivalent, must -
o be reeved through 4 corner holes in the seat;

o cross each other on the underside;
o be rigged to prevent slipping (which will cause the seat to go out of level); and
o be made from fibre, synthetic or other rope that –
 has a diameter of at least 13 mm; and
 must be equal to 1st-grade manila rope, i.e. strength, durability and slip resistance;
 Where an employee is using heat or spark producing processes, i.e. gas or arc welding or cutting,
10mm wire rope must be used instead of fibre rope.
 The load on the platform must –
o be properly secured; and
o not exceed the safe working load of the lift.
 The tackle must consist of bearing or brushed blocks and 13mm manila rope, or equivalent.
 A roof iron, hook, or other object to which the tackle is anchored must be secured to prevent
dislodgment.
 Tie-backs must be installed at right angles to the face of the building and secured to the roof hooks
and the building.
 If the suspension rope between the scaffold and the suspension device is not vertical –
o it must be designed by a qualified person;
o it must be accessible to rescuers;
o the suspension rope must be protected from chafing where it changes direction; and
o it must be positioned in such a way to prevent it from making contact with another surface
when swinging.
Lanyards
The user of a boatswain’s chair must wear a full body harness with attached lanyard secured to a
separate drop line or other means affording equivalent safety.
 Lanyards with maximum length of 1.8 metres must be used. They must be equipped with -
o self-locking hooks on each end;
o shock absorbers; and
o snap hooks of a double-locking design to prevent accidental disengagement.
 Lanyards must be secured and attached to the harness when not in use to prevent tripping or
snagging. Do not –
o drag the lanyard - hook it back into itself; or
o tie knots in the lanyard - this will reduce its strength.
Anchor points
Anchor points may be:
 An existing structure;
 A pipe, or
 A temporary or permanent engineered device such as an installed eyebolt, slide rail, or cable
arrangement (for example, static line).
Engineered anchor points must be inspected on a periodic basis to ensure that it –
 will safely support one person falling six metres;

 is installed in a manner that prevents accidental disengagement from support structures;
 is placed where attachment and detachment can be done without causing loss of balance;
 is placed above shoulder height to reduce fall distance; and
 is free of sharp edges to avoid cutting the lanyard.
5. Roof Work
This includes practical guidance on how to work safely on roofs, including the safe maintenance of
roof mounted plant and services, and how to plan for safe working. The wide range of roof types and
roof work makes it impractical to offer guidance specific for all roof types or roof work activities. All
work at height poses a risk and a risk assessment should be carried out to assess those risks and put
appropriate controls in place. A safe system of work will depend on the nature and degree of the risks
for the roof work that you are involved in.
The principal problem when working on roofs is falls, either through fragile roof coverings or from
unprotected roof edges. In many cases, straightforward physical protection measures can prevent
accidents occurring. In many cases, incidents can be prevented, but too often a lack of foresight and
of management control result in the necessary protection being neglected during high-risk work. Falls
from sloping roofs are more likely if the pitch is steep, if the surface is slippery or conditions windy.
Moisture, ice, snow, moss and lichens all increase the risk of slipping.
Apart from the potential of a fall from or through a roof, there are a number of other hazards
associated with working at height that must also be identified and controlled. These hazards include:
 falling materials
 electrical hazards
 weather conditions.
As well as the hierarchy of controls, consider how controls can protect multiple people from falling.
These are called group controls. The best work methods are those that don’t require any active
judgement by the employees to keep themselves safe, such as edge protection, scaffolding, and
elevating work platforms.
Personal controls only look after individuals and rely on active judgement by the user for them to work
safely (for example, fall restraint harness and fall arrest). Training, inspection, and equipment
maintenance are critical for these personal control measures to be effective.
5.1. Short duration work

Roof maintenance includes upkeep and repair of the roof and would include the following activities:
 Cleaning of the roof and gutters.

 Repairing or replacing damaged gutters, facia boards, soffits, tiles, slates, etc.
 Repointing of ridge tiles or chimney and exhaust copings.
A risk assessment should identify the duration of work to be undertaken. The access and work
equipment required may be influenced by the duration of the work. However, in all cases it must be
ensured that site employees are protected. There are additional factors that you need to be
considered; for example, the number of people working on a roof for a short duration may determine
the requirement for edge protection or other precautions during such work. For work of short duration
it may not be reasonably practicable to install safeguards such as edge protection. The decision on the
precautions to be taken will depend on an overall assessment of the risks involved, which should
include:
 The complexity of the work.

 The pitch of the roof.
 The condition of the roof.
 The weather conditions.
 The risk to those putting up edge protection.
 The risk to other employees and the public.
Full edge protection is required on all roof elevations to which access is needed for work on roofs,
unless the work involved is of short duration. This is to prevent people and materials falling from the
edge of the roof.
Appropriate and certified mobile access equipment can provide a safe working platform in some
situations. Where this is not practicable, travel restraint or fall arrest should be considered. Travel
restraint can prevent a fall by physically restricting the movement of a person to the confines of a safe
area. It should not be possible to reach any unprotected edge, a hole or fragile material when relying
on this system. Fall arrest is not the same as travel restraint. Fall arrest relies on minimising injury once
a fall has occurred. In both cases, specialist advice should be sought from the supplier of the
equipment on anchorage point requirements. Supervision and training are needed to ensure that the
system of work adopted is understood by all and is maintained.
Where employees could fall from a roof, there is a very simple hierarchy of controls that should be
considered:
 Can the job can be done without exposing persons to the hazard (eliminate)? This can often only
be done at the design, construction planning, and tendering stages.
 If the potential of a fall cannot be eliminated when working on a roof, some form of edge
protection should be used to isolate employees from a fall. This includes working on single-storey
buildings and structures. An example is using (if during construction, the existing) scaffolding as
edge protection. If this is not practicable, then elevating work platforms or temporary work
platforms should be used.
 If neither elimination nor isolation are practicable, then steps should be taken to minimise the
likelihood of any harm resulting. This means considering the use of total restraint systems, work
positioning systems, safety mesh, safety nets, and fall arrest systems.
Ladders should only be used as a means of access, and for short duration maintenance work such as
touching up paint.
5.2. Safe access to roof areas

Where there is no permanent access to roof areas, provide temporary access that is properly
constructed. Scaffolding, constructed work platforms or mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs)
are the preferred means of temporary access.
Where this is not practicable, portable industrial-grade ladders with a load rating of at least 120 kg
secured against movement, pitched at about 75 degrees (4:1) and extending at least one metre above
the stepping-off point are a suitable means of temporary access.
For major roofing work, provide a scaffold stairway access tower. Never allow employees to use
barrow hoists to gain access to the roof.
5.3. Walking safely on a roof

When walking on a roof, the employee should walk in the pan of the roof cladding. When this is not
possible the employee’s weight should be spread evenly over two ribs, and the employee should keep
as close as possible to the purlins.
Metal roof cladding is tested to a static load of 1.1 kN, which equals 110 kg, and is meant to represent
an employee carrying tools. Site supervisors should ensure employees walking on metal cladding do
not exceed the recommended 110 kg. To ensure the roof purlins are not overstressed, two people
should not stand within the same purlin spacing, or closer than two metres.
Never stand on translucent or clear sheeting because it is not designed to bear the weight of an
employee. Cover skylights and penetrations securely or fix temporary edge protection around them.
The steepest pitch that will provide a secure footing on a textured surface roof is 35 degrees and on a
smooth surface roof 25 degrees. These pitch factors only apply to clean and dry roofs. If the slope of
the roof exceeds 25 degrees, a roof ladder should be used in addition to perimeter guardrails (or a fall
arrest system) to reduce the likelihood of an employee slipping.
5.4. Use of safety nets

Safety nets can be effective in reducing the potential for serious or fatal injury from falls. They provide
collective, as opposed to individual safety protection and eliminate the need for the individual to make
their own safety arrangements. . They allow a broad range of activity to continue with minimum
restriction.
Safety nets have high-energy absorption capability and, therefore, offer a ‘soft landing’ that minimises
injury. They should always be fitted as close as is possible to the underside of the working platform.
Lightweight, square mesh nets offer the flattest span (less than 10% sag). In most roof work it is
possible to position a safety net so that, even at the point of maximum sag, it is less than 2 metres
from the roof surface. In this position the net is an effective guard and this standard should be
achieved wherever possible.
Safety nets overlaid with an appropriate fine-mesh debris cover can also protect those who have to
work or pass below. Consideration should be given to the type of materials likely to fall (e.g. fixings or
tools) when selecting the overlay material. Safety nets have the additional advantage that materials
are contained by the net and do not bounce.
Safety nets can be effectively employed to:
 Prevent injuries caused by falls from leading edges, through fragile panels or through temporarily
fixed materials in new build roofing.
 Guard roof-lights and fragile roof materials during cleaning, maintenance and replacement of the
roof.
 Prevent injuries caused by falls during roof truss erection (e.g. when fitting diagonal bracing).
When rigging safety nets it is important to maintain their energy absorbency. If there are too many
fixing points, the net becomes more rigid and imposes larger loads on the user, the structure and the
net itself. Too few fixing points and the net will sag too greatly and deflect too much under load. The
manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed on the number and spacing of fixing points.
Checks need to be made to ensure that the supporting structure is capable of resisting the expected
anchorage loads.
Wherever possible nets should be rigged so as to prevent falls of 2 metres or more. If they are to be
used for the arrest of falls greater than 2 metres, they should have:
 An area greater than 35 m².

 A minimum side length (width) greater than 5 metres.
 Maximum support spacing of 2.5 metres.
 An individual anchor point capacity of 6 kN, applied at 45° to the horizontal.
 A combined capacity over an adjacent series of anchor points of 4 kN, 6 kN, 4 kN.
Adequate clearance must be allowed below the net to allow it to function properly. The
manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed for the minimum clearance that should be free
of all obstructions.
Safety nets must extend beyond the leading edge of the work by at least the minimum catching width.
This is linked to fall height (see the Table below).
Fall height < 1.0m < 3.0m < 6.0m

Catching width > 2.0m > 2.5m > 3.0m
The maximum general fall height is 6 metres. However, this is reduced to 3 metres within 2 metres of
the supported edge of the safety net, to take account of the reduced capacity for energy absorption
near the fixed edge.
Planning
When planning the use of safety nets, the technical aspects should be considered. It is feasible to fix
safety net attachment points (e.g. welded lugs) on to primary steel work, which were used when
erecting the building.
Erection
Safety nets can be connected by designed attachment points or by flexible tie ropes to primary
steelwork of suitable capacity, or to other selected anchorage points. Nets can be moved and removed
as the work progress demands.
The risk to riggers erecting, moving and dismantling nets should be assessed and a safe system of work
established. Access equipment such as mobile towers or mobile elevating work platforms (MEWPs)
should be capable of resisting any sideways loading during net installation. In existing buildings there
may be permanently installed access equipment. This may be used if suitable for the imposed loads.
Roped access techniques may be appropriate in some buildings. This is specialised work and should
only be undertaken by those trained in it and competent to carry it out.
Those who erect nets should be aware of the relevant standards, be trained and be competent to
carry out the work safely. This may require the use of specialist installers and riggers, especially where
large nets are being used.
Material should not be allowed to fall into nets. Rubbish should not be thrown into nets and loose or
sharp material should not be stacked loosely above the nets. Any material supported above the net
should be independently secured.
5.5. Use of fall arrest or fall prevention systems

Using a total restraint system (fall restraint), and work positioning are recommended over the use of
fall arrest systems. The total restraint system protects an employee from approaching an unprotected
edge, thereby preventing a fall from occurring.
Work positioning systems enable a person to work supported in a harness under tension in a way that
a fall is prevented. Generally the arrangement allows for the employee to maintain a stable position
and to work hands-free while completing a task. Any static line system must be securely anchored and
set up so that inertia reel lines or other types of lanyards cannot be severed on sharp edges. The rating
of anchor points and the selection of equipment varies according to the type of total restraint, work
positioning and/or fall arrest system.
A fall arrest system should be the last choice for protection against falls from height. There is still a
possibility of injury in an arrested fall. The system relies on the user accepting the discipline of ensuring
that the equipment is consistently and effectively used. There will be circumstances, however, when
it is not reasonably practicable to provide physical measures to prevent a person falling. In such cases,
a full body harness attached to a suitably anchored system incorporating some form of energy
absorber may be the only precaution available. This at least ensures that if a fall occurs, it is safely
arrested.
Fall arrest systems come in a variety of forms. These range from a single lanyard or retractable fall
arrester attached to a fixed anchorage point to a number of lanyards with mobile attachment points
on a single horizontal flexible anchorage line or a proprietary multi-span cable system. All should be
used with full body harnesses. The system should incorporate some form of energy absorbing or
energy dissipating element to ensure that the forces of deceleration on the user do not exceed 6 kN.
Fall arrest systems serve as personal protective equipment (PPE) against falls from height.
Suitable anchorage point is vital when using a fall arrest system such as safety harnesses. This could
be a single fixed anchorage point or a flexible anchorage line. The adequacy of all anchorages,
including the ability of the supporting structure to carry the anchorage loads, should be verified by
calculation or by testing. For example, the structural adequacy of a guard-rail to resist fall arrest forces
should be assessed before a lanyard and harness are anchored to it. Anchorages should generally be
installed as high as possible, preferably above the user and never below foot level. Retractable type
fall arresters should generally be anchored at chest height or above; however occasionally they may
be anchored at ground levels when they have been appropriately tested.
In order for a fall arrest system to function correctly there must be adequate clearance below. For
example, a system comprising a full body harness and a 2 metre long lanyard with an energy absorber
anchored at foot level could require up to 6.25 metres of clearance below the anchorage. This is made
up as follows:
 2 metres – original length of the lanyard plus shock absorber.

 1.75 metres – maximum allowable extension of the shock absorber.
 2.5 metres – allowance to cover the displacement of the full body harness and the clearance below
the feet of the user after the arrest.
When a flexible anchorage line system is used, allowance must also be made for the sag of the line
between anchorages. In the event of an employee falling, ensure the ‘pendulum effect’ will not cause
the employee to come into contact with solid objects or the ground.
However, lanyards have been developed which require less clearance than the 6.25 metres stipulated
above. If 6.25 metres clearance cannot be achieved the use of such lanyards may be necessary to
ensure a safe system of work.
Consideration should also be given to how a person would be rescued after an arrested fall,
particularly from high structures. A system of work must be in place in order to rapidly (within a period
of minutes) rescue an employee whose fall has been arrested by a harness. Anyone working alone
should not undertake work at heights involving fall protection by harnesses. This is to ensure that
there will be someone in place to raise the alarm in the event of a person being suspended in a harness
in order to effect a rescue of that person.
Adequate information, instruction, training and supervision should be given when a fall arrest system
is used. For example:
 How to wear the harness and adjust it to the body.

 How to manage the lanyard and other equipment.
 How to fall so as to minimise the risk of injury.
 How to rescue oneself or assist others after a fall.
 How to inspect the equipment and recognise significant defects.
 How to assemble the system correctly, including recognition of the importance of safe
anchorages.
Fall arrest systems are not fool-proof and their safe usage is not always a matter of common sense.
Without proper training in fitting, using and maintaining them, and their installation and equipment
limitations, all that a fall arrest system can provide is a false sense of security.
5.6. Safety mesh

Only install safety mesh that can be relied on to support the weight of an employee. Particular care is
required to ensure that the mesh is securely connected to the structure and the overlap between
adjacent sections of mesh is sufficient to generate the necessary strength to resist the force of a
person falling onto it. Wire netting is not a barrier and is not safe to walk on.
Safety mesh should be placed over an open area immediately after roof material is removed. This will
enable the replacement sheets to be fixed without the necessity of using fall arrest systems. Safety
mesh also minimises the time that the building below is open to the weather.
5.7. Edge protection

When working on roofs, new or old, it is essential to protect employees from falling from the edge of
the roof. ‘Edge protection’ is the term commonly used to describe measures that can be used to
prevent employees falling from the roof edge.
There are a number of popularly used systems:
 full scaffold;
 scaffold handrail;
 proprietary guard rail systems; and
 netting systems.
The most appropriate system will depend on several factors:
 duration of work;
 type of roof;
 roof slope; and
 size and weight of materials being used.
The decision on which type of edge protection to use must be made by a competent person who has
all of the information about the work that is to be undertaken. Similarly, the person who installs the
edge protection must be competent in its installation and dismantling.
Where roofs are steep and/or materials are large or heavy the risk is greater and so a full scaffold may
be the most appropriate. At the other end of the spectrum, if the work is to be carried out on a non-
fragile flat roof then a simple handrail, or possibly a system using counterweights to support a
handrail, will be adequate. Consider using a system that is also appropriate to the duration of the work
– an access platform that requires minutes to position to carry out minor work may involve less risk
of working at height than a comprehensive scaffolding solution which takes a large number of man
hours to install and dismantle.
There are a number of proprietary edge protection systems available that are suitable for a wide range
of roofing situations. Perimeter or edge protection should be installed on all the exposed edges of a
roof which include the perimeters of buildings, the perimeters of skylights or other fragile roof
materials, and any openings in the floor or roof.
Roof edge protection is considered a passive fall prevention barrier, because once erected or installed,
it requires no further on-going adjustment, alteration, or operation by any person to ensure the
integrity of the system to perform its function. It is also a means of group control as it provides
protection for anyone working on the roof.
Where guardrails are used to provide a barrier to openings in the roof, they must have a top rail, mid-
rail, and a toe board, or a top rail and an infill panel that serves the function of a mid-rail and toe
board. The top rail should be at least 900 mm in height above the working surface.
Where a scaffold has been provided for the construction of the walls or guttering, the roof work
employees may use it to complete their roof work.
5.8. Fragile roof coverings

Some roof coverings can give a false sense of security to those who are working on or passing by them.
They may be capable of carrying some distributed load, giving the impression that they can bear a
person’s weight. But they might NOT carry a concentrated load (e.g. the heel of a person walking, or
a person stumbling and falling). For example, asbestos and other unreinforced fibre cement sheets
are liable to shatter without warning under a person’s weight, even when newly installed. Such
sheeting will also become more brittle with age. A common but fatal belief persists that it is safe to
walk along the line of the roof bolts above the purlins. This is walking a tightrope: one false step or
loss of balance can lead to disaster. It should NOT be assumed that double skin roofs are safe: each
layer can fail independently.
Falls through fragile roof covering are a particular problem in building maintenance. Everyone with
responsibility for this type of work, at whatever level, should treat fall prevention as a priority. This is
particularly important for small, short-term maintenance and cleaning jobs. If possible, work should
be arranged so as to avoid working on or passing near fragile roof areas. If this is unavoidable, it is
essential to identify all fragile areas and decide on and implement stringent precautions.
Note: Assume that the roof is fragile, unless confirmed otherwise by a competent person.
Roofing material deteriorates with age and does not perform as it did when it was installed. Before
commencing work on an existing roof, inspect it thoroughly to determine its strength. This should,
when possible, include inspection from inside the building as well as externally. In some situations the
structure supporting the roof covering may deteriorate so much that the roof can become ‘fragile’ and
might fail catastrophically. In such a situation (e.g. where timber deterioration is a possibility) a
thorough survey is essential.
Prior to commencing work on a roof that may be fragile, the supervisor should undertake a thorough
risk assessment, taking into account the condition of the roof, the environment around the building,
the operation of the building and the access arrangements. The risk assessment should detail the
proposed control measures that must be implemented before work commences. A safe working
platform on the roof, and safe access to the working position must be provided.
To prevent falls through existing fragile roof covering:
 Platforms or coverings MUST be provided and used to support the weight of any person ON fragile
roof covering.
 Guard-rails or coverings are required to prevent a person who is passing or working NEAR roof
covering from falling through.
Stagings (of a minimum 600 mm width) fitted with guard-rails can be used where the roof pitch
permits. There should be a sufficient number available to allow the work to be carried out safely.
Operators should not have to continually move stagings to progress over the roof. Depending on the
situation, a combination of ladders, crawling ladders, crawling boards and duck boards may also be
used when work is to be carried out adjacent to fragile roof covering. Where it is not practicable to
maintain guard-rails on both sides of the staging, other precautions will be required, for example:
 Safety nets and other collective fall arrest systems. These give maximum freedom to employees
on the roof and can protect people working below (e.g. in a refurbishment project).
 Birdcage scaffolds.
Fall arrest or fall prevention systems can also form part of the system of work. They rely on operator
training and a high level of supervision. The quality of the attachment system is critical. There are also
minimum heights below which the system will be ineffective. In this case, a person may hit the floor
before the restraint is fully operational.
Precautions must also be taken to prevent falls from roof edges and working leading edges. Where a
valley or parapet gutter is used for access, precautions should be taken to prevent a person falling
through fragile roof covering in an adjacent roof. Where access along gutters is necessary on a regular
(even if infrequent) basis, then permanent protection should be provided. Where practicable, this
should provide collective rather than individual protection.
Fixed covers, for example, are preferable to running line systems. Covers should extend far enough up
the roof to provide protection to anyone falling against them. This is normally up to 2 metres,
depending on the roof pitch: shallower pitches will require more extensive coverage than steeper
ones. Remember that protection such as safety nets or a birdcage scaffold is needed when covers are
being installed and removed. Valley gutters which are overhung by roof sheets, so much that there is
not enough space for a person’s feet, should not be used for access along the roof. It should be
possible to clean the gutters without removing walkways or covers.
Roof-lights should not extend within 2 metres of valley gutters. Where fragile roof-lights have already
been fitted in this position and access is needed, permanent protection of the roof-lights should be
considered.
Precautions should be taken to prevent unauthorised access to fragile roofs. This will normally involve
people at work, but the likelihood of unauthorised personnel access may need to be considered as
well. Signs warning of the hazard and prohibiting access, except under controlled conditions (e.g.
governed by a permit-to-work/access regime), are required at approaches to roofs with fragile roof
coverings. Such signs are not an alternative to eliminating risks but must be installed if the elimination
of the risk is not reasonably practicable. Permanently fixed ladders can be blocked off by boards
whenever access is not required.
If access must be gained, adequate supports must be put in place. Such supports include properly
supported crawling boards, adequately supported ladders and frames or similar measures. Standing
on the line of fixing bolts is not a safe method of work or a safe method of access and should not be
relied upon for support.
5.9. Creating a safe place of work on the roof

For all roof work, whatever its nature or extent, a safe place of work should be provided. Risk
assessments should identify working positions, access routes (both to the roof and along the roof) and
show:
 How falls are to be prevented.

 How danger from falling materials to those at work below and to the public is to be controlled.
 How risks to health will be controlled.
 How other risks, identified at planning and survey stages, are to be controlled, for example
handling hot bitumen.
 What equipment will be needed.
 What skill, knowledge, relevant experience and training is needed.
 Who will supervise the job on site.
 How other occupational hazards, such as lone working, will be controlled.
 How changes in the work will be dealt with without prejudicing safe working.
 Who will check that the system is effectively controlling risk
6. Equipment Maintenance
Any equipment used to perform work at heights must be inspected, stored and transported as
recommended by the manufacturer, with supporting records available on request.
Platforms must be maintained in good condition and inspected on a periodic basis in conformance
with the manufacturers’ recommendations. Access equipment and scaffolds are inspected and tested
regularly and records kept of any such inspections and tests. The equipment must always be
accompanied by a record of the last inspection. Inspections are carried out -
 by a competent person;
 at the place where work is to be carried out before it is used;
 of the equipment after it is assembled or installed;
 as often as is necessary to ensure safety, and in particular to make sure that any deterioration can
be detected and remedied in good time;
 before use if coming from another business or organisation and before any equipment leaves the
organisation; and
 when any platform used for access to work, and from which an employee could fall more than 2
metres, is inspected in place before use (not more than seven days before use).
Elevating work platforms must be -
 inspected before use (where it is a mobile platform, inspection at the site is sufficient without re-
inspection every time it is moved);
 inspected at three-monthly intervals, unless the EWP is not in service; and
 properly maintained by authorised employees (this is particularly a concern with rented units).
Safe Work Practice: Working at, over or near Water
Any work at, over or near water, or any other liquid substance, is a high-risk activity. A high degree
of safety procedures is essential, irrespective of the duration of the activity. Only the nature of the
safety measure required may vary from one activity to another.
Where work is carried out at, over or near water, or any other liquid substance, proper planning and
precautions must be taken. Provision must be made to -
 prevent workers from falling into the water; and

 rescue workers in danger of drowning.
1. Precautions
When working at, over or near water the following general precautions are taken:
 As a first measure, an adequate barrier or other separation means must be installed to minimise
the risk to workers from falling, which could lead to injury and/or drowning.
 Lifelines must be provided at rivers and strong tidal areas.
 Life jackets/buoyancy aids must be provided where there is a risk of workers falling into water.
 Rescue equipment, e.g. life rings, grappling lines, etc. must be maintained and easily accessible.
 Procedures must be in place for tidal rises and falls and rising river levels.
 Care must be taken as erosion can create hazards by undercutting and washing away the banks,
which could lead to a hazardous work area.
 Salt water and spray could seriously affect workers’ skin, clothing and equipment.
 If using electricity is too great a hazard, compressed air must be provided as an energy source.
 All power leads must be kept out of water.
 Moisture and electricity do not mix - all power tools must be carefully protected and may never
be used near any breaking waves.
 When working from a barge or floating work platform, take into account -
o water swell;
o loading of the barge; and
o weight distribution.
 Systems must be in place to protect workers when working over stagnant water, sewage ponds
or any contaminated water, e.g. workers should be inoculated.
2. Hazard identification and risk assessment

It is essential that all the hazards are identified, the risks assessed and all safeguards and precautions
provided and implemented before any work is conducted at, over or near water or any other liquid
substance. The hazards associated with working at, over or near water include mainly:
 Drowning/hypothermia
 Tripping and falling
 Slippery surfaces.
When conducting the risk assessment, consider the following:
 Height above water

 Depth of the water
 Types of access provided
 Type of work activity
 Work environment
 Temporary/permanent structures in place
 Employees’ ability to swim.
3. Safety Plan
Once all the hazards have been identified and the risks assessed, a safety plan, specific and relevant
to the work activity and environment is established. It must clearly set out the safety precautions
and work systems identified in the risk assessment. The safety plan is prepared by a competent
person with adequate applicable experience and knowledge.
All workers involved in the activities must know and apply the safety plan provisions and the person
in charge must verify adherence to the correct procedures. The safety plan must include at least the
following:
 Responsibilities of all workers involved

 Order of work
 Use of plant and equipment
 Work processes
 Risk control measures
 PPE
 Emergency procedures
 Adequate communication procedures
 Procedures in event of adverse weather, i.e. strong winds, rain, etc.
 Procedures for checking all equipment for safe operation prior to commencement of work.
Additional measures that might have to be considered in the plan, depending on the work activity
and work environment, include the following:
 Safe access to and from work platforms must be considered, e.g. access to
temporary/permanent structures over water from land, etc.
 Safe use of aerial lifts on floating work platforms, e.g.:
o Load rating;
o Design consideration to eliminate the risk of capsizing;
o Aerial lift capabilities/limitations; and

o Fall protection requirements, e.g. fall-arrest equipment, etc.
 Plant and equipment to be used must be in good working condition - measures must be
implemented for the containment of any oil leaks, etc. when working over water.
 Safe use of electrical power tools and equipment, i.e. adequate measures must be taken to
prevent tools or power cables from falling into water.
 All PPE must be considered - including floating devices, safety lines, throw ropes, etc.
 Scaffolding and ladders.
 General housekeeping procedures.
 Signage.
 Lighting (also consider night work and in the event of adverse weather).
 Appropriate rescue vessels, rescue teams, etc.
4. Prevention of drowning
There is a risk of drowning when workers work at, over, near, or have to pass near or across water or
other liquid substances. To prevent drowning, the following measures must be taken:
 Working alone must not be permitted at, over or near water or any liquid substance.
 Barriers must be installed to prevent workers from falling into water or other liquids.
 Working platforms must be properly constructed, including guard rails and toe boards that must
be secured to prevent them from being dislodged by rising water or high winds.
 Ground-mounted scaffold systems must be used on barges/floating platforms, securely
anchored to the structure.
 Continuous fall protection such as harnesses, safety nets etc., must be used regardless of the fall
distance, to prevent workers from falling into the water.
 Ladders must be secured.
 Tool belts must be of the quick-release type.
 The required PPE must be available for use and workers must know how to use it - suitable
floating devices must be worn/used, e.g. buoyancy vests or life jackets, depending on the risk.
 Transport at water must be under the control of a competent person.
 Lighting must be adequate for night work and must illuminate the immediate surrounding water
surface.
 Rescue equipment must be easily accessible and properly maintained.
When work is conducted in water that is more than 1.5 metres deep -
 workers working over water on floating or unstable surfaces must wear an approved personal
flotation device;
 workers in boats underway to the work site must wear an approved personal flotation device;
and
 piers, docks, wharves and work sites along developed shorelines must have rescue devices
available within 6 metres of the water/shoreline work area.
The following is checked at the start of each shift:
 Rescue boats must be continuously manned by two or more competent workers;

 Spotlights must be available; and
 All workers must be familiar with emergency drills.
All defects must be reported to the person in charge.
5. Dewatering of trenches
To keep trenches free from water where groundwater is encountered during trench excavation, and
to ensure the work environment is safe and convenient, consider the following:
 Seepage water from the excavation must be controlled and removed;

 Excavation slope erosion must be controlled;
 Surface water must be diverted to prevent water from entering trenches;
 The installed systems must be capable of lowering and maintaining the groundwater to at least 1
metre below the bottom of the excavation and until the required utilities are installed;
 Storm water drains must be cleaned as part of site clean-up on completion of projects; and
 The temporary dewatering system must be removed after completion of the specified portion of
work.
6. Rescue equipment
Before the start of each shift, check all rescue equipment to ensure it is present and in good
condition:
 Life buoys with at least 30 metres of line must be provided and readily available for emergency
rescue operations - the maximum distance between ring buoys must not exceed 60 metres.
 Floating grab lines must be attached to a structure or floating plant at regular intervals.
 An adequate number of workers, trained in the use of rescue equipment and in emergency
procedures, must be present.
 At least one lifesaving boat must be immediately available at locations where workers are
working over or adjacent to water, equipped with the necessary rescue equipment as well as
first aid kit and with two people on board.
7. Personal protective equipment

Ensure that the following personal protective equipment (PPE) meets the required standards:
 Safety harnesses and belts

 Safety lines
 Safety nets
 Life preservers
 Personal floatation devices with a whistle and, during darkness, lights.
Apart from the above, the following PPE must always be worn:
 Hard hats
 Footwear - consider the type of footwear to be worn when working over water because if filled
with water, it could be a dead-weight.
Safe Work Practice: Working in danger of Engulfment
Fine granular substances can flow like water when in large or unstable quantities. If caught in this
flow, an employee could be buried in 15 to 60 seconds. Unlike water, which allows an employee to
swim, it is difficult or impossible to move if one gets caught in loose material. Employees could
suffocate or “drown” in these materials.
No employee will be required or permitted to enter any place where solid or particulate material is
being released and a danger exists of the employee being engulfed by the solid or particulate
material; and/or dangerous gases, fumes, dust or vapour may be present, unless in accordance with
the provisions as for entry to confined spaces.
1. Safe work on loose materials in stockpiles

Where employees are required to work in, on, or in the vicinity of any material that is capable of
subsiding or flowing, in a manner likely to trap or engulf them -
 no employee is permitted to work on or over loose material until they have been trained in the
hazards involved and the precautions to be taken;
 employees are kept under surveillance when in and round stockpiles and bins;
 appropriate warning notices are displayed;
 open containers have a railing and toe boards around them - if there is no railing, there should
be a grate or walkway with railings;
 adequate fall protection equipment is provided where employees are exposed to fall hazards;
 wearing of loose-fitting clothes, gloves, long hair and jewellery that could get caught in moving
machinery, is to be avoided;
 employees wear appropriate PPE, for example where conditions are dusty the employee wears a
dust mask;
 approved safety lights are used where lighting is not adequate;
 material may not be “walked down” to help it flow;
 stored materials or “material bridges” are never walked on because the surface crusts can
collapse without warning;
 mechanical means with enough energy to pull an employee free, are provided.
2. Trenches and excavations

Trenches and excavation pits at construction sites pose a cave-in hazard where the collapsing soil
can engulf employees. Cave-ins occur when material shifts or slides under the pressure of
gravitational forces. Ensure that -
 there are an adequate number of exit ladders;

 daily safety inspections are done; and
 good engineering principles exist, such as shoring, sloping and benching.
Emergency procedures in accordance with the provisions of the procedure on Emergency

Management are practiced and training provided in the use and maintenance of equipment used.
3. Vessels containing liquid

Where any employee is liable to fall into water or other liquid with a risk of drowning, suitable and
sufficient steps must be taken:
 Prevent, as far as reasonably practicable, such person from falling into the liquid by -
o providing a suitable cover, grate or walkway with railings;
o erecting a fence that extends at least 1m above the adjoining ground, floor or platform;
or
o ensuring that employees wear safety harnesses with retrieval lines if work is necessary
over an open container without railings or a grate.
 Minimise the risk of drowning in the event of a fall by –
o installing an internal ladder to enable the employee to climb;
o ensuring that suitable rescue equipment is provided and maintained; and
o installing fall arrest systems.
4. Hoppers, bins and silos

A silo, bin, hopper, structure or container that is not a confined space for which the requirements
and guidance confined spaces apply, and that is used for storing or containing bulk material may be
entered only where -
 the supply of material thereto is stopped and precautions are taken that will prevent any further
supply;
 where unloading equipment is running, they are locked/tagged out;
 the worker entering is wearing a safety harness or other similar equipment attached to a rope or
lifeline such that the worker shall not be endangered by an collapse or shifting of material in the
silo, bin, structure or container; and
 at least one other worker equipped with a suitable alarm and capable of rendering any
necessary assistance is keeping watch nearby.
At their surface, sand hoppers, aggregate silos or other containers of unconsolidated material may
appear to be unobstructed. However, when the contents are mechanically drawn out from the
bottom of a hopper, a hidden air pocket can often form inside, particularly as the moisture content
increases. Material that has bridged over a draw point, concealing a dangerous void, is extremely
hazardous and may collapse. Reduce the hazard of air pockets that may form inside a storage bin,
hopper or stockpile by using a mechanical digger, vibrator or other effective means of removing or
knocking down material.
Safe Work Practice - Working Outdoors

1. Introduction
Employees working outdoors are exposed to many types of hazards that depend on their type of work,
geographic region, season, and duration of time they are outside. Outdoor employees should be
trained about their workplace hazards, including hazard identification and recommendations for
preventing and controlling their exposures.
2. Physical Hazards
Physical hazards to outdoor employees may include extreme heat, extreme cold, and sun exposure.
Extreme heat can cause heat stroke, heat cramps, heat exhaustion, heat rash, and other problems.
Extreme cold can cause hypothermia, frostbite, and other problems.
2.1. Extreme cold

Employees who are exposed to extreme cold or work in cold environments may be at risk of cold
stress. Extreme cold weather is a dangerous situation that can bring on health emergencies in
susceptible people, such as those without shelter, outdoor employees, and those who work in an area
that is poorly insulated or without heat. Whenever temperatures drop decidedly below normal and
as wind speed increases, heat can more rapidly leave a person’s body. These weather-related
conditions may lead to serious health problems.
a) Hypothermia
When exposed to cold temperatures, your body begins to lose heat faster than it can be produced.
Prolonged exposure to cold will eventually use up your body's stored energy. The result is
hypothermia, or abnormally low body temperature. A body temperature that is too low affects the
brain, making the victim unable to think clearly or move well. This makes hypothermia particularly
dangerous because a person may not know it is happening and will not be able to do anything about
it.
Symptoms
Symptoms of hypothermia can vary depending on how long you have been exposed to the cold
temperatures.
Early Symptoms Late Symptoms

 Shivering  No shivering
 Fatigue  Blue skin
 Loss of coordination  Dilated pupils
 Confusion and disorientation  Slowed pulse and breathing
 Loss of consciousness
First Aid
Take the following steps to treat an employee with hypothermia:
 Alert the supervisor and request medical assistance.

 Move the victim into a warm room or shelter.
 Remove their wet clothing.
 Warm the centre of their body first - chest, neck, head, and groin - using an electric blanket, if
available; or use skin-to-skin contact under loose, dry layers of blankets, clothing, towels, or
sheets.
 Warm beverages may help increase the body temperature, but do not give alcoholic beverages;
do not try to give beverages to an unconscious person.
 After their body temperature has increased, keep the victim dry and wrapped in a warm blanket,
including the head and neck.
 If victim has no pulse, begin cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
b) Frostbite
Frostbite is an injury to the body that is caused by freezing. Frostbite causes a loss of feeling and colour
in the affected areas. It most often affects the nose, ears, cheeks, chin, fingers, or toes. Frostbite can
permanently damage body tissues, and severe cases can lead to amputation. In extremely cold
temperatures, the risk of frostbite is increased in employees with reduced blood circulation and
among employees who are not dressed properly.
Symptoms
Symptoms of frostbite include:
 Reduced blood flow to hands and feet (fingers or toes can freeze)
 Numbness
 Tingling or stinging
 Aching
 Bluish or pail, waxy skin
First Aid
Employees suffering from frostbite should:
 Get into a warm room as soon as possible.

 Unless absolutely necessary, do not walk on frostbitten feet or toes-this increases the damage.
 Immerse the affected area in warm-not hot-water (the temperature should be comfortable to the
touch for unaffected parts of the body).
 Warm the affected area using body heat; for example, the heat of an armpit can be used to warm
frostbitten fingers.
 Do not rub or massage the frostbitten area; doing so may cause more damage.
 Do not use a heating pad, heat lamp, or the heat of a stove, fireplace, or radiator for warming;
affected areas are numb and can be easily burned.
c) Trench Foot
Trench foot, also known as immersion foot, is an injury of the feet resulting from prolonged exposure
to wet and cold conditions. Trench foot can occur at temperatures as high as 15°C if the feet are
constantly wet. Injury occurs because wet feet lose heat 25 times faster than dry feet. Therefore, to
prevent heat loss, the body constricts blood vessels to shut down circulation in the feet. Skin tissue
begins to die because of lack of oxygen and nutrients and due to the build-up of toxic products.
Symptoms
Symptoms of trench foot include:
 Reddening of the skin

 Numbness
 Leg cramps
 Swelling
 Tingling pain
 Blisters or ulcers
 Bleeding under the skin
 Gangrene (the foot may turn dark purple, blue, or grey)
First Aid
Employees suffering from trench foot should:
 Remove shoes/boots and wet socks.

 Dry their feet.
 Avoid walking on feet, as this may cause tissue damage.
d) Chilblains
Chilblains are caused by the repeated exposure of skin to temperatures just above freezing to as high
as 15°C. The cold exposure causes damage to the capillary beds (groups of small blood vessels) in the
skin. This damage is permanent and the redness and itching will return with additional exposure. The
redness and itching typically occurs on cheeks, ears, fingers, and toes.
Symptoms
Symptoms of chilblains include:
 Redness
 Itching
 Possible blistering
 Inflammation
 Possible ulceration in severe cases
First Aid
Employees suffering from chilblains should:
 Avoid scratching
 Slowly warm the skin
 Use corticosteroid creams to relieve itching and swelling
 Keep blisters and ulcers clean and covered
2.2. Snow and ice

Snow and winter weather poses an increased risk to employees performing outdoor tasks, and those
entering and leaving the workplace. While employees face the same risk as everyone else from winter
roads and traffic, those working outdoors suffer from higher incidences of weather related complaints
and accidents related to slippery conditions and reduced visibility. When driving in snow and ice, slow
down and be respectful of other drivers and pedestrians.
Snow and ice cause wet and slippery grounds; employees working outdoors are at a big risk of slipping
and falling. “Black ice,” a thin layer of ice that can be invisible in certain sunlight conditions, poses a
risk.
Precautions
 Be sure to check the daily forecast to know when severe weather will affect the workday.
 Give yourself extra time to complete your normal outside routine.
 Wear shoes or boots with non-slip or non-skid soles, or attach ice grips to the soles.
 When walking on an icy or snow-covered surface, take short steps and walk at a slower pace to
react quickly to a change in traction. Take time climbing stairs, plant feet firmly and use handrails.
 When carrying items remember your sense of balance while walking on ice or snow may be
affected. Try to keep one hand free to use railings or to help balance.
 When exiting or entering vehicles use the vehicle for support.
 Keep the work area as free of ice as possible by using rock salt or another chemical de-icing
compound.
2.3. Extreme heat

Employees who are exposed to extreme heat or work in hot environments may be at risk of heat
stress. Heat stress can result in heat stroke, heat exhaustion, heat cramps, or heat rashes. Heat can
also increase the risk of injuries in employees as it may result in sweaty palms, fogged-up safety
glasses, and dizziness. Employees at greater risk of heat stress include those who are 65 years of age
or older, are overweight, have heart disease or high blood pressure, or take medications that may be
affected by extreme heat.
a) Heat Stroke
Heat stroke is the most serious heat-related disorder. It occurs when the body becomes unable to
control its temperature: the body's temperature rises rapidly, the sweating mechanism fails, and the
body is unable to cool down. When heat stroke occurs, the body temperature can rise to 41°C or
higher within 10 to 15 minutes. Heat stroke can cause death or permanent disability if emergency
treatment is not given.
Symptoms
Symptoms of heat stroke include:
 Hot, dry skin or profuse sweating

 Hallucinations
 Chills
 Throbbing headache
 High body temperature
 Confusion/dizziness
 Slurred speech
First Aid
Take the following steps to treat an employee with heat stroke:
 Call for medical assistance and notify their supervisor.

 Move the sick employee to a cool shaded area.
 Cool the employee using methods such as:
o Soaking their clothes with water.
o Spraying, sponging, or showering them with water.
o Fanning their body.
b) Heat Exhaustion
Heat exhaustion is the body's response to an excessive loss of the water and salt, usually through
excessive sweating. Employees most prone to heat exhaustion are those that are elderly, have high
blood pressure, and those working in a hot environment.
Symptoms
Symptoms of heat exhaustion include:
 Heavy sweating
 Extreme weakness or fatigue
 Dizziness, confusion
 Nausea
 Clammy, moist skin
 Pale or flushed complexion
 Muscle cramps
 Slightly elevated body temperature
 Fast and shallow breathing
First Aid
Treat an employee suffering from heat exhaustion with the following:
 Have them rest in a cool, shaded or air-conditioned area.

 Have them drink plenty of water or other cool, non-alcoholic beverages.
 Have them take a cool shower, bath, or sponge bath.
2.4. Sun exposure (sunburn)

Ultraviolet (UV) rays are a part of sunlight that is an invisible form of radiation. UV rays can penetrate
and change the structure of skin cells. Sunlight exposure is highest during the summer and between
10:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. Working outdoors during these times increases the chances of getting
sunburned. Snow and light-coloured sand reflect UV light and increase the risk of sunburn. At work
sites with these conditions, UV rays may reach employees' exposed skin from both above and below.
Employees are at risk of UV radiation even on cloudy days. Many drugs increase sensitivity to sunlight
and the risk of getting sunburn; some common ones include thiazides, diuretics, tetracycline,
doxycycline, sulpha antibiotics, and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, such as ibuprofen.
Sunburn is an often painful sign of skin damage from spending too much time outdoors without
wearing a protective sunscreen. Years of overexposure to the sun lead to premature wrinkling, aging
of the skin, age spots, and an increased risk of skin cancer. In addition to the skin, eyes can get burned
from sun exposure. Sunburned eyes become red, dry, and painful, and feel gritty. Chronic exposure of
eyes to sunlight may cause pterygium (tissue growth that leads to blindness), cataracts, and perhaps
macular degeneration, a leading cause of blindness.
Symptoms
Unlike a thermal burn, sunburn is not immediately apparent. Symptoms usually start about 4 hours
after sun exposure, worsen in 24-36 hours, and resolve in 3-5 days. Symptoms may include:
 Red, warm, and tender skin

 Swollen skin
 Blistering
 Headache
 Fever
 Nausea
 Fatigue
The pain from sunburn is worse 6-48 hours after sun exposure. Skin peeling usually begins 3-8 days
after exposure.
First Aid
There is no quick cure for minor sunburn:
 Symptoms can be treated with aspirin, acetaminophen, or ibuprofen to relieve pain and headache
and reduce fever.
 Drinking plenty of water helps to replace fluid losses.
 Cool baths or the gentle application of a cool wet cloth on the burned area may also provide some
comfort.
 Employees with sunburns should avoid further exposure until the burn has resolved.
 Additional symptomatic relief may be achieved through the application of a topical moisturizing
cream, aloe, or 1% hydrocortisone cream.
 A low-dose (0.5%-1%) hydrocortisone cream, which is sold over the counter, may be helpful in
reducing the burning sensation and swelling and speeding up healing.
If blistering occurs:
 Lightly bandage or cover the area with gauze to prevent infection.

 The blisters should not be broken, as this will slow the healing process and increase the risk of
infection.
 When the blisters break and the skin peels, dried fragments may be removed and an antiseptic
ointment or hydrocortisone cream may be applied.
 Seek medical attention if any of the following occur:
o Severe sunburns covering more than 15% of the body
o Dehydration
o High fever (> 41°C)
o Extreme pain that persists for longer than 48 hours
2.5. Lightning
People who work outdoors in open spaces, on or near tall objects, with explosives, or with conductive
materials, such as metal have a large exposure to lightning risks. In most places, lightning hits most
often in late afternoon in spring and summer. But lightning can hit anyone in the wrong place at the
wrong time. Lightning can hit the same place many times too.
Assess the lightning risk and take precautionary action
During thunderstorms, no place outside is safe. But you can minimize your risk by assessing the
lightning threat and taking the appropriate actions. Count the number of seconds from when you see
the lightning flash until you hear the thunder. If you hear thunder, lightning is close enough to strike
you. Stop what you’re doing, tell others it is dangerous and all people should go to safe locations. Seek
safety in a substantial building; if a substantial building is not available, a metal-topped vehicle with
the windows up is your next best choice.
NO PLACE OUTSIDE IS SAFE. AVOID being near any metal objects including fences, machinery and
electrical equipment. AVOID solitary trees. AVOID water. AVOID open fields. AVOID small rain/sun
shelters and gazebos. AVOID using the telephone or touching appliances. (Portable radios and cell
phones are safe to use.) Wait a minimum of 20 minutes from the last observed Lightning or Thunder
before resuming outdoor activities.
Objects and equipment to avoid during thunderstorms
 Stay off of and away from anything tall or high, including rooftops, scaffolding, utility poles,
ladders, trees, and large equipment such as bulldozers, cranes, backhoes, track loaders, and
tractors.
 Do not touch materials or surfaces that can conduct electricity, including metal scaffolding, metal
equipment, utility lines, water, water pipes, and plumbing.
 Leave areas with explosives.
People who have been struck by lightning do not carry an electrical charge and are safe to handle.
Apply CPR immediately, if you are qualified to do so, and call for emergency help promptly.
3. Biological Hazards
Biological hazards include vector-borne diseases, venomous wildlife and insects, and poisonous
plants. Venomous snakes, spiders, scorpions, and stinging insects can be found throughout various
geographic regions, and are especially dangerous to employees who have allergies to the animal.
Poisonous plants can cause allergic reactions if their oils come in contact with skin. These plants can
also be dangerous if burned and their toxins are inhaled.
3.1. Poisonous plants

Many local and exotic plants are poisonous to humans when ingested or if there is skin contact with
plant chemicals. However, the most common problems with poisonous plants arise from contact with
the sap oil of several ever-present native plants that cause an allergic skin reaction.
Many of the plants listed for Lesotho are poisonous and suitable care should be taken when handling
(or swallowing) them. For example, Kniphofia Caulescens Baker (common names: Lesotho red hot
poker / umathunga / icacane / lelutla) contains Knipholone compounds, making them toxic if eaten,
but can also cause eye and skin irritation.
Employees may become exposed through:
 Direct contact with the plant

 Indirect contact, such as touching tools, livestock, or clothing that have plant matter on them
 Inhalation of particles containing poison from burning plants
Symptoms
Signs or symptoms associated with dermal contact with poisonous plants may include:
 Red rash within a few days of contact

 Possible bumps, patches, streaking, or weeping blisters (blister fluids are not contagious)
 Swelling
 Itching
Recommendations for protecting employees
Employees should be protected from poisonous plants by training them about:
 Their risk of exposure to poisonous plants

 How to identify poisonous plants
 How to prevent exposure to poisonous plants
 What they should do if they are exposed to poisonous plants
Prevention
Employees can prevent contact with poisonous plants by taking these steps:
 Wear long sleeves, long pants, boots, and gloves. ◦Wash exposed clothing separately in hot water
with detergent.
 Barrier skin creams, such as a lotion containing bentoquatum, may offer some protection before
contact. ◦Barrier creams should be washed off and reapplied twice a day.
 After use, clean tools with rubbing alcohol (isopropanol or isopropyl alcohol) or soap and lots of
water. Plant poisons can remain active on the surface of objects for up to 5 years. Wear disposable
gloves during this process.
 Do not burn poisonous plants; inhaling smoke from burning plants can cause severe allergic
respiratory problems.
First Aid
Employees who have come in contact with poisonous plants should:
 Immediately rinse skin with rubbing alcohol, specialised poison plant washes, degreasing soap
(such as dishwashing soap) or detergent, and lots of water. Rinse frequently so that wash solutions
do not dry on the skin and further spread the poison.
 Scrub under nails with a brush.
 Apply wet compresses, calamine lotion, or hydrocortisone cream to the skin to reduce itching and
blistering. Follow the directions on any creams and lotions. Do not apply to broken skin, such as
open blisters. Oatmeal baths may relieve itching.
 An antihistamine can be taken to help relieve itching. Follow directions on the package. Note:
Drowsiness may occur after taking antihistamines.
 In severe cases or if the rash is on the face or genitals, seek professional medical attention.
 Go to the clinic if suffering a severe allergic reaction, such as swelling or difficulty breathing, or
you have had a severe reaction in the past.
3.2. Spiders, scorpions and stinging insects

a) Venomous Spiders
Spiders are usually not aggressive and most bites occur because a spider is trapped or unintentionally
contacted. It is important for employers to educate their employees about their risk of exposure to
venomous spiders, how they can prevent and protect themselves from spider bites, and what they
should do if they are bitten.
Symptoms
Symptoms associated with spider bites can vary from minor to severe. Although extremely rare, death
can occur in the most severe cases. Possible symptoms resulting from a spider bite include the
following:
 Itching or rash
 Pain radiating from the site of the bite
 Muscle pain or cramping
 Reddish to purplish colour or blister
 Increased sweating
 Difficulty breathing
 Headache
 Nausea and vomiting
 Fever
 Chills
 Anxiety or restlessness
 High blood pressure
Employees should be protected from spider bites by training them on:
 Their risk of exposure to spiders

 How to identify spiders
 How to prevent exposure to spiders
 What they should do if they are bitten by a spider
Prevention
Employees can take the following preventive steps:
 Inspect or shake out any clothing, shoes, towels, or equipment before use.
 Wear protective clothing such as a long-sleeved shirt and long pants, hat, gloves, and boots when
handling stacked or undisturbed piles of materials.
 Minimize the empty spaces between stacked materials.
 Remove and reduce debris and rubble from around the outdoor work areas.
 Trim or eliminate tall grasses from around outdoor work areas.
 Store apparel and outdoor equipment in tightly closed plastic bags.

 Keep your tetanus boosters up-to-date (every 10 years); spider bites can become infected with
tetanus spores.
First Aid
Employees should take the following steps if they are bitten by a spider:
 Stay calm. Identify the type of spider if it is possible to do so safely; identification will aid in medical
treatment.
 Wash the bite area with soap and water.
 Apply a cloth dampened with cold water or filled with ice to the bite area to reduce swelling.
 Elevate bite area if possible.
 Do not attempt to remove venom.
 Notify your supervisor.
 Immediately seek professional medical attention.
b) Stinging Insects
The health effects of stinging or biting insects or scorpions range from mild discomfort or pain to a
lethal reaction for those employees allergic to the insect’s venom. Anaphylactic shock is the body’s
severe allergic reaction to a bite or sting and requires immediate emergency care. Stinging or biting
insects include bees, wasps, hornets, and ants. Bees, wasps, and hornets are most abundant in the
warmer months. Nests and hives may be found in trees, under roof eaves, or on equipment such as
ladders.
Employees should be protected from stinging insects by training them about:
 Their risk of exposure

 Insect identification
 How to prevent exposure
 What to do if stung
Preventing insect stings
Employees should take the following steps to prevent insect stings:
 Wear light-coloured, smooth-finished clothing.

 Avoid perfumed soaps, shampoos, and deodorants.
o Don't wear cologne or perfume.
o Avoid bananas and banana-scented toiletries.
 Wear clean clothing and bathe daily. (Sweat may anger bees.)
 Wear clothing to cover as much of the body as possible.
 Avoid flowering plants when possible.
 Keep work areas clean. Social wasps thrive in places where humans discard food.
 Remain calm and still if a single stinging insect is flying around. (Swatting at an insect may cause it
to sting.)
 If you are attacked by several stinging insects at once, run to get away from them. (Bees release a
chemical when they sting, which may attract other bees.)
o Go indoors.
o A shaded area is better than an open area to get away from the insects.
o If you are able to physically move out of the area, do not to attempt to jump into water. Some
insects (particularly African Honey Bees) are known to hover above the water, continuing to
sting once you surface for air.
 If a bee comes inside your vehicle, stop the vehicle slowly, and open all the windows.
 Employees with a history of severe allergic reactions to insect bites or stings should consider
carrying an epinephrine auto injector (EpiPen) and should wear a medical identification bracelet
or necklace stating their allergy.
First Aid
If an employee is stung by a bee, wasp, or hornet:
 Have someone stay with the employee to be sure that they do not have an allergic reaction.
 Wash the site with soap and water.
 Remove the stinger using gauze wiped over the area or by scraping a fingernail over the area;
never squeeze the stinger or use tweezers.
 Apply ice to reduce swelling.
 Do not scratch the sting as this may increase swelling, itching, and risk of infection.
c) Scorpions
Scorpions usually hide during the day and are active at night. They may be hiding under rocks, wood,
or anything else lying on the ground. Some species may also burrow into the ground.
Symptoms
Symptoms of a scorpion sting may include:
 A stinging or burning sensation at the injection site (very little swelling or inflammation)
 Positive "tap test" (i.e., extreme pain when the sting site is tapped with a finger)
 Restlessness
 Convulsions
 Roving eyes
 Staggering gait
 Thick tongue sensation
 Slurred speech
 Drooling
 Muscle twitches
 Abdominal pain and cramps
 Respiratory depression
These symptoms usually subside within 48 hours, although stings from some scorpions can be life-
threatening.
Employers their Employees should be protected from scorpions by training them about:
 Their risk of exposure

 Scorpion identification
 How to prevent exposure
 What to do if stung
Preventing scorpion stings
Employees should take the following steps to prevent scorpion stings:
 Wear long sleeves and pants.

 Wear leather gloves.
 Shake out clothing or shoes before putting them on.
 Employees with a history of severe allergic reactions to insect bites or stings should consider
carrying an epinephrine auto injector (EpiPen) and should wear a medical identification bracelet
or necklace stating their allergy.
First Aid
Employees should take the following steps if they are stung by a scorpion:
 Contact a qualified health care provider or poison control centre for advice and medical
instructions.
 Ice may be applied directly to the sting site (never submerge the affected limb in ice water).
 Remain relaxed and calm.
 Do not take any sedatives.
 Capture the scorpion for identification if it is possible to do so safely.
3.3. Venomous snakes

Although rare, some employees with a severe allergy to snake venom may be at risk of death if bitten.
Symptoms
Signs or symptoms associated with a snake bite may vary depending on the type of snake, but may
include:
 A pair of puncture marks at the wound

 Redness and swelling around the bite
 Severe pain at the site of the bite
 Nausea and vomiting

 Laboured breathing (in extreme cases, breathing may stop altogether)
 Disturbed vision
 Increased salivation and sweating
 Numbness or tingling around your face and/or limbs
Employees should be protected from venomous snake bites by training them about:
 Their risk of exposure to venomous snakes

 How to identify venomous snakes
 How to prevent snake bites
 What they should do if they are bitten by a snake
Preventing snake bites
Employees should take the following steps to prevent a snake bite:
 Do not try to handle any snake.

 Stay away from tall grass and piles of leaves when possible.
 Avoid climbing on rocks or piles of wood where a snake may be hiding.
 Be aware that snakes tend to be active at night and in warm weather.
 Wear boots and long pants when working outdoors.
 Wear leather gloves when handling brush and debris.
First Aid
Employees should take the following steps if they are bitten by a snake:
 Seek medical attention as soon as possible.

 Try to remember the colour and shape of the snake, which can help with treatment of the snake
bite.
 Keep still and calm. This can slow down the spread of venom.
 Inform your supervisor.
 Apply first aid if you cannot get to the hospital right away.
o Lay or sit down with the bite below the level of the heart.
o Wash the bite with soap and water.
o Cover the bite with a clean, dry dressing.
Do NOT do any of the following:
 Do not pick up the snake or try to trap it.

 Do not wait for symptoms to appear if bitten, seek immediate medical attention.
 Do not apply a tourniquet.
 Do not slash the wound with a knife.
 Do not suck out the venom.

 Do not apply ice or immerse the wound in water.
 Do not drink alcohol as a painkiller.
 Do not drink caffeinated beverages.
3.4. Vector-borne diseases

Vector-borne diseases may be spread to employees by insects, such as mosquitoes or ticks. Tick-borne
pathogens can be passed to humans by the bite of infected ticks. Ticks can be infected with bacteria,
viruses, or parasites.
How to remove a tick
1. Use fine-tipped tweezers to grasp the tick as close to the skin's surface as possible.
2. Pull upward with steady, even pressure. Don't twist or jerk the tick; this can cause the mouth-
parts to break off and remain in the skin. If this happens, remove the mouth-parts with tweezers.
If you are unable to remove the mouth easily with clean tweezers, leave it alone and let the skin
heal.
3. After removing the tick, thoroughly clean the bite area and your hands with rubbing alcohol, an
iodine scrub, or soap and water.
4. Dispose of a live tick by submersing it in alcohol, placing it in a sealed bag/container, wrapping it
tightly in tape, or flushing it down the toilet. Never crush a tick with your fingers.
Avoid folklore remedies such as "painting" the tick with nail polish or petroleum jelly, or using heat to
make the tick detach from the skin. Your goal is to remove the tick as quickly as possible - not waiting
for it to detach. If you develop a rash or fever within several weeks of removing a tick, see your doctor.
Be sure to tell the doctor about your recent tick bite, when the bite occurred, and where you most
likely acquired the tick.
What are the symptoms of infection with a tick-borne disease?
There are many symptoms associated with tick-borne diseases. Infected employees may not have all
of these symptoms and many of these symptoms can occur with other diseases as well. Some common
symptoms of infection with tick-borne diseases include:
 Body/muscle aches
 Fever
 Headaches
 Fatigue
 Joint pain
 Rash
 Stiff neck
 Facial paralysis
What is the diagnosis and treatment for tick-borne diseases?
Tick-borne diseases are diagnosed based on symptoms and the possibility that the employee has been
exposed to infected ticks. Most cases can be successfully treated with specific types of antibiotics,
especially if treatment is started early. However, some employees may have symptoms such as
arthritis, muscle and joint pain, or fatigue for an extended period of time.
Safe Work Practice – Confined Space Entry
A confined space means any place in which, by virtue of its enclosed nature, there arises a reasonably
foreseeable specified risk of fire or explosion; loss of consciousness of any person due to an increase
in body temperature; loss of consciousness or asphyxiation of any person due to gas, fume, vapour or
lack of oxygen; drowning of any person due to an increase in the level of liquid; or asphyxiation of any
person who is trapped by a flowing solid.
Some confined spaces are obvious, but others may not be apparent. It is important for all employees
to be aware of what confined spaces are and the potential hazards they represent. Confined spaces
include any chamber, tank, vat, pit, well, sewer, tunnel, pipe, flue, boiler, pressure receiver, hatch,
caisson, shaft or silo.
Confined spaces can be deadly, and those killed include not only people working in the confined space
but those who try to rescue them without proper training and equipment. When things go wrong,
people may be exposed to serious and immediate danger. Effective arrangements must be made for
raising the alarm and carrying out rescue operations in an emergency. Contingency plans will depend
on the nature of the confined space, the risks identified and consequently the likely nature of an
emergency rescue. A document rescue plan for each confined space must be available.
1.1. Confined space entry hazards

 Deficiency of oxygen in air - air generally comprises 21% oxygen. Changes of the oxygen content
in air that is breathed in, can cause a number adverse physical reactions to the human body.
However, in the following conditions, the oxygen in the air may decrease, resulting in a risk to
human life:
o Chemical reactions caused by oxygen consumption: Oxygen is consumed due to oxidation
during such processes of welding, cutting by oxy-acetylene, rusting, naked flame operations,
fermentation and moulding.
o Substitution: Oxygen is squeezed out by such inert gases as nitrogen, argon and carbon
dioxide.
o Adsorption on surface: Oxygen is adsorbed by porous surfaces, such as activated carbon.
 Flammable spaces - flammable gas in a confined space can lead to explosion or fire. Flammable
spaces will explode when contact with igniting sources such as welding sparks or sparks from
portable electrical appliances.
o A space becomes flammable when oxygen in the air mixes with flammable gases, vapours or
dust. These gases and vapours may be formed by residues mixed with flammable substances,
the use of flammable substances, or chemical reactions (e.g. the formation of methane).
o A space may also become flammable when combustible dust abounds or flows in the air when
disturbed. Dust may come from agricultural products e.g. flour, chemicals, plastic particles,
medicine or metal powder.
 Chemical Substances - the principal means of encountering chemical substances include
respiration, skin absorption and eating. The effects brought by chemical substances upon the
human body may be chronic or acute, depending on the period of contact, the intensity of the
hazards during contact and the impact of such hazards on health, for example, corrosive, toxic or
harmful.
o Some poisonous gases emit a particular odour, like the smell of a rotten egg for hydrogen
sulphide; whereas some toxic gases are odourless, like carbon monoxide, which is both
colourless and odourless.
o In addition, the unpleasant smell of some toxic gases like hydrogen sulphide is likely to
anaesthetise one's sense of smell soon after contact so that one may no longer sense its
existence. Therefore, only the use of scientific equipment is reliable to measure the existence
of chemicals.
 Physical Hazards
1. Mechanical hazards - some dangerous components such as belts, rotation shafts and gears in
equipment may cause harm when used.
2. Electrical hazards - the risk of death caused by electric shock or getting burnt may arise when
touching electric cables, electric wires and transformers in confined spaces or using electrical
appliances in wet spaces.
3. Noise hazards - noise produced when working in confined spaces is generally higher than
normal, leading to impairment in employees' hearing and may even lead to deafness.
4. Radiation hazards - sparks produced when using radioactive equipment in confined spaces
may cause harm, such as laser or welding sparks.
5. Environmental hazards - the following environmental conditions are more likely to pose
danger in confined spaces:
o extremely high or low temperature;
o dampness; and
o wet spaces.
6. Traffic hazards - since the entrance and exit of some confined spaces, such as sewers, are
situated on pavements or roads, employees will have the risk of being knocked down by
vehicles passing by. There is also risk of people falling down into the confined spaces.
7. Engulfment by liquid or flowing solids - The risk of drowning arises when the confined space
is waterlogged or when water or other liquid suddenly pours in. In addition, flowing solids
such as silt or sand may pose the risk of engulfment.
 Other hazards
1. Hazards from manual operations - the working environment of confined spaces is generally
narrow and employees inside need considerable effort when performing manual operations.
The use of personal protective equipment may also increase the difficulty of performing
manual operations.
2. Biological hazards - employees may be infected with different varieties of bacteria and viruses
and even threatened by biological hazards produced by insects and snakes.
2. Preparation
Confined spaces must be adequately barricaded and clearly identified with signage and/or other
devices that warn of the potential danger. Entry is forbidden if there is no correctly prepared and
authorised entry permit and if:
 the atmosphere has flammable levels equal to or greater than 5% LEL;

 the atmosphere is toxic (above occupational exposure standards);
 the atmosphere is deficient in oxygen;
 the atmosphere or equipment is excessively hot or cold;
 the space is receiving ionising radiation from any source;
 there is no fully briefed stand-by person with clear guidelines; or
 there is no person within reasonable reach who is proficient in CPR.
Entry without breathing protection is permitted ONLY when:
 safety of atmosphere checks have been carried out;

 the tasks will not produce an oxygen deficient or toxic atmosphere; and
 continuous fresh air ventilation is assured.
It is imperative that employees are aware that only those individuals having received specialised
training are permitted to enter a confined space regardless of circumstances.
A risk assessment must be completed when conducting work associated with confined spaces. Persons
appointed for conducting risk assessments should determine the appropriate method of assessment
and carry out a site inspection in the confined space.
Whenever employees enter a confined space, a permit-to-work certificate should be issued

beforehand. This permit is only valid for working in one particular confined space. Any person who is
going to enter and work in a confined space should apply for a permit-to-work with the responsible
party who is authorised to issue such permit.
Permit-to-work certificates and risk assessment reports should be displayed in a conspicuous space
within the immediate vicinity of the confined space for employees' reference.
To be suitable and sufficient the arrangements for rescue should include consideration of:
 Rescue and resuscitation equipment;

 Raising the alarm and initiating the rescue;
 Safeguarding the rescuer;
 Fire safety;
 Control of plant;
 First aid;
 Supporting emergency services;
 Training.
2.1. Isolation
Make sure that trained personnel isolate equipment in a confined space to a “zero energy state” to
prevent unexpected activation or release of energy.
 Make physical isolation of pipe work by means of breaking of lines or inserting of spades if gas,
fume or vapour could enter the confined space. Check to make sure isolation is effective.
 When isolating an electrical system, the key(s) of the padlock applied to the isolator must be
carried by the person(s) entering the confined space.
2.2. Safety of the atmosphere

Prior to entry, test the atmosphere in a confined space at all elevations or levels, and in all areas using
calibrated equipment. The atmosphere must be continuously monitored or retested periodically, as
long as the space is occupied.
 Make sure that the testing is carried out in a safe manner.

 Do not enter the confined space, unless testing has proved that the atmosphere is free of
hazardous contaminants and has sufficient oxygen, as required.
2.3. Cleaning and purging

Many confined spaces need specific treatment – such as cleaning, purging, inerting (i.e. making the
atmosphere non-flammable, non-explosive and non-reactive), flushing, ventilating – by trained
personnel before and/or during a safe entry.
Remove where practicable, all solids and liquids which are liable to present a hazard to persons inside
the confined space from the confined space prior to the entry:
 Use suitable purging agent to clear hazards.

 Use equipment designed for use in hazardous locations when flammable contaminants are to be
purged and to eliminate sources of ignition.
 Exhaust contaminants removed from the confined space to a location where they present no
hazard to persons or equipment.
Ventilation may be improved by increasing the number of openings, however, mechanical forced
ventilation may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air; if this is the case, then
continuous monitoring is required. Fresh air should be drawn from a point where it is not
contaminated either by used air or other contaminants.
2.4. PPE
Safe entry into a confined space may require the use of specialised personal protective equipment,
such as safety harnesses and life lines, extrication devices, respirators and related gear. PPE selection
is specific to the confined space and is the responsibility of a trained individual. Make sure that a safety
harness and lifeline are worn where:
 work is done at 2 m or more (relative height);
 rescue arrangements would require lifting/extraction by a safety line; and

 entry is into spaces containing solids capable of shifting and suffocating.
2.5. Portable electrical equipment

Electric-powered tools and lighting used in confined spaces must be low voltage and connected to a
ground fault circuit interrupter. Use only inspected and tested portable electrical equipment fitted
with a current approval tag of 32V or less.
 Locate any ELV transformer or residual current device outside the confined space.
 Make sure that equipment is fitted with a flexible supply cable not inferior to a heavy duty type
complying with legal requirements.
3. Enter a Confined Space

Anyone working in a confined space must be constantly alert for any changing conditions within the
confined space. In the event of an alarm from monitoring equipment or any other indication of danger,
employees should immediately leave the confined space.
Another employee, the attendant (also known as the Safety Watch or Standby), is posted outside the
confined space and continuously monitors the employees inside the confined space. The Safety Watch
has the following duties:
 Understands the nature of the hazards that may be found inside the particular confined space and
can recognise signs, symptoms and behavioural effects that employees in the confined space
could experience.
 Monitors the confined space and surrounding area and is on the lookout for dangerous conditions.
 Remains outside the confined space and does no other work which may interfere with their
primary duty of monitoring the employees inside the confined space.
 Maintains constant two-way communication with the employees in the confined space.
 Orders the immediate evacuation if a potential hazard, not already controlled for, is detected.
 Calls for emergency assistance immediately if an emergency develops.
 Is immediately available to provide non-entry emergency assistance when needed.
 Can provide entry rescue only after the most stringent precautions are taken and another Safety
Watch is immediately available.
Should an employee leave a confined space for a short time (for example, coffee break, getting
additional material for their work.), the confined space should be re-tested before the employee re-
enters. If the confined space has been continuously monitored by equipment that can show the details
of the atmosphere during the time absent from the confined space and this information can be seen
from outside the confined space, it can be re-entered without retesting. If there is not continuous air
monitoring then the hazard assessment needs to be repeated.
When the time for completion as stipulated in the permit is over, employees must leave the confined
space. If extra time is needed for work, a new certificate should be applied instead. No confined space
should be closed off until it has been verified that no person is inside it. After exiting the confined
space, the time of exit should be noted on the entry permit.
3.1. Emergency assistance

If a situation arises where there is a hazardous condition and the employee does not leave or is unable
to leave the confined space, rescue procedures should be begin immediately.
The Safety Watch is qualified in confined spaces rescue procedures and will be available immediately
outside the confined space to provide emergency assistance if needed. The Safety Watch should be
familiar with the structural design of the confined space. The Safety Watch is in constant
communication with the employee inside the confined space and will:
 Have an alarm for calling for help.

 Have all required rescue equipment (for example, safety harnesses, lifting equipment, and a
lifeline) immediately available and be trained in its use.
 Hold a basic first aid certificate.
 Be trained do Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR).
3.2. Precautions
 Maintain a register of the confined spaces.
 Prepare a data sheet for each confined space.
 Erect barricades and/or signs where there is a risk of an unattended confined space being entered
by unauthorised personnel.
 Place notices at each confined space, stating that Confined Space Pre-Entry Checklist and Permit
must be obtained before entry.
 The entry permit shall state its period of validity and it shall be revalidated when there is:
o a change of person accountable for the space;
o a significant break in work continuity; or
o a significant change in atmosphere or work to be performed.
 Each employee entering a confined space shall confirm that all required checks have been
undertaken, all isolations made, and all precautions are in place prior to entry and during entry as
appropriate.
 The acceptable oxygen concentration range is between 19.5% and 21%. Work must not be
undertaken if the oxygen concentration is outside this range.
 Adequate and suitable lighting, including emergency lighting should be provided. The lighting
must be specially protected where flammable/explosive atmospheres are likely to occur.
 Personnel entering the confined space and watchmen should remain in constant visual contact, if
possible; where constant visual contact is not possible, constant voice communication must be
maintained.
 Bottom or side entries may not be made - and work may not be conducted - below the level of
hanging material or stored material that could cause engulfment.
 It is essential ensure fumes do not develop from residues, etc. while the work is being done. All
decontamination requirements must be carried out and the atmosphere tested prior to work
starting. It is the responsibility of the supervisor to ensure effective decontamination is carried

out.
 The access/egress point must be big enough to allow employees wearing all the necessary
equipment to climb in and out easily, and provide ready access and egress in an emergency.
 The detailed plan for emergency response to an injury or other emergency within the confined
space should be described in detail in the Confined Space Hazard Assessment and Control
Program.
 Rescue the victims from outside of the confined space, if possible. No other employee should
enter a confined space to attempt a rescue unless that employee is fully trained in the rescue
procedures and is wearing the appropriate personal protective equipment. More than 60% of
deaths in confined spaces are would-be rescuers, who are not fully trained and adequately
equipped.
 Another employee qualified in confined spaces rescue procedures must be present outside the
confined space before the first rescuer enters the confined space. Do not use the same air as the
confined space employees being rescued. Wear SCBA (self-contained breathing apparatus) or
supplied air respirator with an escape bottle.
 Before a confined space is closed up after entry, the authorised person shall personally check that
no person remains inside and that all required equipment and materials have been removed.
 Smoking is prohibited in all confined spaces; it may be necessary to extend this exclusion area to
a distance beyond the confined space.
Safe Work Practice – Stacking and Storage
There is an enormous variety of storage systems and stacking methods in use today. Materials
handling equipment, too, is extremely diverse. Equipment ranges from hand trolleys through various
types of forklift truck to sophisticated warehouse robots.
Improper stacking, storing and handling of material and equipment can cause serious incidents and
injuries. Stacking and storage incidents are generally the result of poor stacking and storage practices,
for example, such as the stacking of materials that cannot be stacked safely and the incorrect storage
of incompatible hazardous substances.
All goods, materials, substances and equipment in workplaces need to be stacked, stored, secured,
and kept that they do not constitute a danger to persons in their vicinity during the course of daily
operations. Ensure these items cannot, whether of their own accord, or by virtue of any external force
(intentionally applied or otherwise), start to flow, move, roll, or collapse, as to constitute a danger to
persons in their vicinity.
Good organisation of stored materials is essential for overcoming material storage problems, whether
on a temporary or permanent basis. There will also be fewer strain injuries if the amount of handling
is reduced, especially if less manual materials handling is required. The main benefits of proper
stacking and storage practices are –
 clean, tidy, uncluttered and spacious workplaces;

 improved utilisation of available space in the workplace;
 reduced fire risks;
 enhanced control of equipment, tools and materials;
 reduced manual handling from improved equipment, tool, work and material flow; and
 improved employee and equipment, machinery, tools and vehicles (EMTV) productivity.
1. Stacking and storage requirements

Compliance with the following stacking requirements must be ensured:
 Storage areas are specifically designated, clearly marked, and are in the charge of a responsible
employee.
 Incoming goods are carefully inspected for damage of any kind before being placed in store.
 Flammable liquids, gas cylinders, aerosols, materials liable to spontaneous combustion and
hazardous chemicals are not stored in the same area as other goods.
 The location of stockpiles does not interfere with work but still be readily available when required.
 Floors or surfaces required to support stacks, shelving, racks or other means of storage are level
and capable of sustaining the intended load together with shock loads.
 Pallets, racks, shelving, bins, hoppers and other structures for the storage of materials are
adequately designed to support and contain the materials for which they are used.
 The stability of stacked pallets or unit loads are maintained by suitable bonding, avoiding excessive
stack heights, to ensure that the contents of any pallet or unit load cannot collapse.
 Adjacent stacks are not bonded or interlocked to each other, or allowed to lean against each other.
 Stacks, shelving and other fixtures for holding or storing materials are laid out and designed in
such a way that there is sufficient access for safe loading and unloading by either manual or
mechanical means.
 Where a stack or storage adjoins access ways used by vehicles, precautions - such as barriers, signs
and instructions to drivers - are taken.
 Stacks are not created where it will block gangways, aisles, walkways, thoroughfares, emergency
eyewash fountains, emergency showers, first aid stations and, particularly, doors and exits.
 Base areas and heights of stacks are kept as small as circumstances permit - height to base ratio
of an unsupported stack shall not exceed 1:3.
 Goods are kept well clear of light fittings, heating pipes and appliances, fire-fighting and alarm
equipment, and doors. (A space of at least 1m is maintained between the tops of material stacks
and fire sprinklers. Combustible materials are stacked with at least one metre between the stack
and light fixtures and heating units to prevent such combustible material from igniting.)
 No material is loaded or unloaded from stacks, shelving or fixtures if there is a risk of employees
directly or indirectly contacting unfenced machinery, or touching live electrical wiring, until that
machinery or wiring is isolated or made safe.
 Outdoor stacks are affected by weather conditions such as rain, wind, frost, snow and sun, which
can greatly influence the stability of stacks over time, and are taken into consideration.
 Storage areas are constructed, enclosed and equipped to prevent the entrance and harbourage
of pests such as rodents and insects. The required measures are taken to protect staff during
application of pesticides, when application is required.
 All stacking and de-stacking is carried out under competent supervision.
 All employees who are or may be responsible for stacking, storing, securing, or keeping any goods,
materials, substances, or equipment require full training in safe methods of doing so.
1.1. Stacking and storage prohibitions

Materials are never stored or stacked in a way that would cause any of the following to be obstructed:
 Doorways
 Electrical disconnects
 Emergency and other exits – maintain a space of at least one metre around un-barricaded exits to
allow for the opening of doors
 Emergency equipment (e.g. eyewash fountains and showers)
 Fire equipment – maintain a space of at least one metre around fire extinguishers and between
the tops of material stacks and sprinklers
 First aid stations and equipment
 Stairs and stairways
 Walkways/aisles/travelling/drive ways
 Work areas and stations.
1.2. Material handling

When handling materials, it must be ensured that -
 material-handling equipment is used only for the purposes for which it was designed and is not
operated on steep or rough surfaces, which could result in an incident;
 goods are stacked to prevent movement during transportation and be secured so that they will
not fall off when corners or inclines are being negotiated;
 equipment such as cranes, hoists, scoops, stackers, forklift trucks, ladders trolleys, hand trucks,
pallet trucks, chain blocks and slings used for moving and handling materials are kept in a safe and
serviceable condition;
 materials and equipment are properly handled to prevent damage; and
 materials and equipment are moved in original packaging from storage to the point of use or
installation
1.3. Stacking and storage controls
When stacking, consider the importance of ready availability for the particular material. All materials
held in storage are inspected to determine whether they are susceptible to damage, heating,
deterioration, swelling, shrinking, corrosion or attack by insects or rodents. The frequency of
inspection will depend on the type and method of storage.
Material that can’t be stacked due to size, shape, or fragility can be safely stored on shelves or in bins.
Racks, shelving, fixtures and other equipment used for storing, loading and unloading materials are
regularly inspected for damage and other defects that might cause loss of strength or result in damage
or injury. Where these conditions are evident and could cause loss of stability, collapse, fire or any
other harmful effect, action must be taken to eliminate the hazard. Any damaged or defective
equipment is taken out of service until repaired.
2. Stacking
Materials are only stacked if a firm foundation exists on which it can be stacked. Materials are stacked
up to a maximum height of six metres, and then only if the foundation is firm and stable enough to
support the weight of the stack. Materials are furthermore stacked in the way that would yield the
maximum possible stack stability. Unstable stacks that could shift or move and fall over are cross-tied
and/or tied down additionally to improve their stability to a point where the stack is stable and unlikely
to shift or move and fall over. Material stacks are additionally secured by blocking and interlocking a
stack, if possible.
2.1. Ground and floor conditions
The load bearing limit of the area where a stack is intended to be placed, whether it is raw soil or a
built floor, must not be exceeded. A level surface is essential as a general rule. It is however desirable
for the surface to slope to the centre from all sides for large stacks. Due allowance must be made for
extra weight if there is a possibility of a stack getting wet. Timber, concrete or other surfacing may be
required to support stored materials off the ground and the supporting surface must be able to
withstand the effects of damage to or the deterioration of stacked material.
2.2. Stack positioning
Stacks must be positioned a sufficient distance from any surrounding structures and equipment to
allow unimpeded access to the stack and to prevent the stack from being in the way of day-to-day
activities and especially vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Stacks must also not be positioned close to
sources of vibration that could dislodged stacked materials or disturb the stack otherwise. Stacks must
as far as possible have an area of one metre clear on all sides of the stack. Stacks must furthermore
not be positioned such that a stack would impede access to surrounding equipment such as fire-
fighting and other emergency equipment.
2.3. Stack size and shape
The most common stack shapes are:
 Column – a stack in which articles are placed on top of one another in the same orientation;
 Square – a stack, other than a column, with all sides vertical;
 Pyramid – a stack in which the area every successive level is reduced;
 Stepped – a stack in which the area of every second level is reduced;
 Triangular – a stack with two pyramid or stepped sides and two vertical sides; and
 Lean-to – a stack with three vertical and one pyramid or stepped side.
The aggregate weight of a stack is borne by the lowest tier, which must be strong enough to bear this
weight without failing or collapsing. Untidy stacks, besides being visually displeasing, are rarely safe
as improper stacking practices cause stacks to appear untidy. Stacks that appear unstable are broken
down immediately and rebuilt to achieve a satisfactory level of stability. Stacks must be kept as small
as possible as it is much easier to ensure that stability of small stacks.
2.4. Stack stability
Stack stability is dependent on the following aspects:
 The contents of the stacked items;

 The shape of stacked items;
 The packaging material of staked items;
 The proper interlocking of stacked items; and
 A safe height / base ratio.
Weather conditions (i.e. rain, wind, the sun, etc.) can significantly influence the stability of outdoor
stacks and this must be taken into consideration when outdoor stacks are positioned and built. The
stability of a stack can be improved by bonding the stacked items, stepping the stack, tying the stack
down or other similar means to prevent the stack becoming unstable.
Stack height to base ratios must be correctly proportioned to prevent stacks from failing or becoming
unstable. It is critical that the height to base ratio of stacks is correctly proportioned to ensure that
the stack does not fail. The height to base ratio of unsupported stacks must not exceed one vertical
unit for every three horizontal units (1:3). This ratio can however be increased to 2:3 if the stack is
supported/bonded/tied down and the friction between the stacked items is sufficient to prevent the
items from slipping.
2.5. Box/crate/case stacks
The weight of box/crate/case stacks must be considered and taken into account, especially when
cardboard boxes are stacked as any form of dampness will weaken the boxes which could ultimately
result in the stack collapsing. Box/crate/case stacks must be interlocked to ensure the maximum
stability of the stack. Crates and cases must be stacked with care to ensure that their reinforcing
battens and not the crates/cases bear the weight.
2.6. Drum stacks
Drums can be stacked on their sides or ends, depending on the specifications or recommendations of
the manufacturer/supplier and unless they are specifically required to remain in an upright position
to prevent leakages. The first tier of drums that are stacked on their sides must be adequately secured
from moving with wedges at the ends of the tier. If this does not adequately secure the drum stack
the individual drums must also be secured with wedges. Good practice does however advocate the
stacking of drums on their sides on drum storage racks. This practice is more desirable than the
stacking or drums on top of one another on their sides. Drums that are stacked on end must be stacked
symmetrically and prevented from toppling over by adequately securing and supporting the stacked
drums.
2.7. Pipe, reinforcing steel and timber stacks
Long sections of pipe, reinforcing steel and timber that need to be stacked must be stacked in/on
suitably supported racks that would prevent such a stack from collapsing. Where stacking racks are
not available or a feasible option, the bottom tier of such a stack must be supported and prevented
from moving with wedges or chocks. The height of such a stack is then supported by means of stakes
or corner posts that are driven into the ground or secured to the floor. Successive tiers that are not
nested and resting on planks and other similar flat surfaces and supports must also be prevented from
moving with wedges or chocks secured to the material on which the stacked items are resting.
2.8. Bag stacks
The first tier of a bag stack is arranged in such a way that enables the bags to be spread as flat as
possible. Bags must be interlocked as far as possible and successive tiers must also be arranged to
enable bags to be stacked as flat as possible. Bags of differing sizes and with differing content are not
stacked unless suitable precautions have been taken to prevent the bags from moving due to, for
example, weather, settling and vibration. Special care must be taken with synthetic bags, since these
have a tendency to slip when they are new.
2.9. Stockpiles
Material may be deposited by skyline conveyor trippers, dozers and trucks. The method of depositing
material on the stockpile area will have impacts on the stockpile height, rill angles and the degree of
compaction. Bulk material placed by tipping, discharge from overhead conveyors and trippers and
dozing will contain areas of instability. Placement areas are not designed as engineered compacted fill
and the degree of compaction, size and shape is constantly changing.
Tipper discharge areas and sides of the stockpile will be poorly compacted; relatively steep and
gradients will vary depending upon the method, force of placement and material properties. Material
can also be at a significant height above the base level of the stockpile area. This can lead to
circumstances where stockpile dozers are operating alongside stockpile material that is well above the
height of the equipment. Draw-down points can be affected by changes in the free flow of material
and unexpected slumping of the sides of the draw-down point can take place.
The risk is a sudden collapse onto, or engulfment of, the stockpile dozers - see SWP21 for suitable
“Working in Danger of Engulfment” controls.
2.10. Pallets
Incidents associated directly with pallets occur for five main reasons:
a) Poor pallet design;

b) Poor pallet construction;
c) Use of an unsuitable pallet for the load or storage method;
d) Continued use of damaged pallet; and
e) Bad handling.
Pallets should be of sound construction, and be of adequate strength for the loads and conditions
under which they are used. Where pallet loads are stacked tier on tier, the lower pallets should be of
suitable strength and in good condition and the unit loads must be able to support the weight above.
3. De-stacking
De-stacking is largely the reverse process of stacking. Most incidents involving the collapse of stacked
materials occur during de-stacking. The prime cause of this is haphazard removal. Basic rules for
breaking down stacks are:
 One person only should be responsible for the manner in which the stack is reduced. This is
particularly important where gangs are employed.
 If the person in charge of de-stacking had no part in erecting the stack, he or she should ascertain
its construction before work begins
 The stack should be taken down tier by tier, so that no part is in danger, as would happen if the
stack were bitten into locally.
 When a large stack has been given a natural fence by building the periphery higher than the
centre, this fence should be maintained during de-stacking. The work should be done outward
from the centre, reducing the periphery last so that there is a barricade to prevent people falling
off.
 If fencing has been built in or around the stack, it should be dismantled and adjusted as the height
is decreased.
 As there is a high tripping hazard in the working area of a stack, tidiness and systematic work
methods are essential.
 Care should be taken to ensure that people working on stacks are at all times clear of cranes.
Proper signalling arrangements should be made and a lookout should be posted.
All stacking and de-stacking should be carried out under competent supervision.
4. Storage
Equipment, tools and materials must be properly stored in dedicated storage areas when not in use.
Safe storage space that conforms to the storage requirements and specifications related to the item(s)
being stored must be provided in which all equipment, tools and materials are stored until they are
required.
Storage areas are clearly marked with appropriate signage that indicates the contents of a storage
area and what is permitted to be stored in the storage area. Storage areas are maintained in an
organised, clean and unobstructed state similar to the rest of the workplace outside of the storage
area. Proper storage of equipment, tools and materials allows sufficient clear and unobstructed
workspace at every work area/station, to enable employees to work safely.
When equipment, tools and materials are required for an activity/task, only the required equipment,
tools and materials are removed from storage and taken to the work area/station where the work is
to be performed. Unnecessary equipment, tools and materials are not taken to the work area/site to
prevent the area/site from becoming cluttered. Equipment, tools and materials are cleaned and
returned to storage immediately after the completion of the activity/task for which the
equipment/tool/material was used.
At the workplace, equipment, tools and materials must be kept in an orderly and organised state by
storing/keeping them in a manner similar to how they are stored in their storage areas. For example,
equipment and tools are stored on/in suitable fixtures and marked locations, while materials are
stored in suitable containers to prevent spillage of materials.
4.1. Bins and racks

Bins and/or racks must be provided for the storage of material that cannot be stacked or piled.
Materials stored in bins / on racks are placed securely to prevent the stored material from falling from
the bin or off the rack. There are basically six reasons for a racking system failure, either acting singly
or in combination:
a) Design fault i.e. rack is inherently unsafe;

b) Installation fault;
c) Materials handling equipment fault;
d) Materials handling equipment operator fault;

e) Supervision and control fault; and
f) Store or warehouse structural fault.
4.2. Cables and Hoses

Cables and hoses are bundled when they are not in use to prevent them from posing tripping hazards.
Cable and hose bundles that are under tension and at risk of unbundling are tied together to prevent
them from unbundling.
4.3. Hazardous substances

Hazardous substances (see SWP10) are stored in accordance with the storage legal requirements and
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) specifications related to each hazardous substance. Hazardous
materials are stored in appropriately marked containers when such material is decanted into and kept
in containers that have not been labelled by the material manufacturer.
Materials that are stored outdoors are only stored in designated areas. Combustible materials that
are stored outdoors are stored a minimum of three metres away from all buildings and structures.
4.4. Pest control

Storage areas are constructed, enclosed and equipped to prevent the entrance and harbourage of
pests such as rodents and insects. The required measures are taken to protect staff during application
of pesticides, when application is required.
5. Storage Inspections
All materials held in storage should be inspected to determine whether they are susceptible to
damage, heating, deterioration, swelling, shrinking, corrosion or attack by insects or rodents. The
frequency of inspection will depend on the type and method of storage. Where these conditions are
evident and could cause loss of stability, collapse, fire or any other harmful effect, action should be
taken to eliminate the hazard.
Incoming goods should be carefully inspected for damage of any kind before being placed in store.
Racks, shelving, fixtures and other equipment used for storing, loading and unloading materials should
be regularly inspected for damage and other defects which might cause loss of strength or result in
damage or injury. Any damaged or defective equipment should be taken out of service until repaired.
Fencing off or isolation of such equipment may be necessary to prevent its use.
Electrical equipment and fittings should also be inspected and tested regularly. Any repair,
maintenance or alteration work carried out in storage areas should be closely supervised to ensure
the safety of employees and other people on the premises.
All fire protection equipment, including fire doors and partitions, should be inspected, tested regularly
and be maintained in good working order. Fire doors should be kept closed at all times unless required
to be opened for the movement of goods. Use of equipment likely to give rise to a fire hazard should
be closely monitored, and the use of a hot work permit system is recommended.
Waste should not be allowed to accumulate. A regular and frequent waste removal and cleaning
procedure should be adopted. Storage areas should be kept clean and free from all refuse and
incorrectly stored materials.
Safe Work Practice - Manual Handling
Manual Handling is not just about lifting heavy objects, it includes any activity requiring the use of
force exerted by a person to grasp, manipulate, strike, throw, carry, move (lift, lower, push, pull), hold
or restrain an object, load or body part. Manual handling also includes:
 Repetitive activity seen in assembly work;

 Sustained muscle exertion required to restrain or support a load; and
 The effort needed to maintain the fixed postures that occur in the back and neck, while typing,
driving or doing similar work.
As manual handling covers a wide range of activities, it can contribute to a number of musculoskeletal
disorders including:
 Strains and Sprains;

 Injuries to muscles, ligaments, inter-vertebral discs and other structures in the back; and/or
 Injuries to soft tissues such as nerves, ligaments and tendons in the wrist, arms and shoulders.
Musculoskeletal disorders occur in two ways:
1. Gradual wear and tear caused by frequent or prolonged use of muscular effort associated with
repeated or continuous use of the same body parts, including static body positions.
2. Sudden damage caused by intense or strenuous activity or unexpected movements such as when
materials being handled move or change position suddenly.
1. Principles
It is essential that each organisation review their existing tasks for manual handling risks and where
identified develop a procedure and process to manage/control the risks associated with the task.
Manual handling should be avoided as far as possible to eliminate the possibility of manual handling-
related injuries. The employer needs to ensure that -
 all manual handling tasks are assessed and appropriate controls implemented in order to
prevent/minimise the exposure to manual task risk factors that can contribute to or aggravate
work related musculoskeletal disorders;
 all employees will undergo training in safe manual handling methods and identification of specific
manual handling hazards as part of their induction;
 manual handling task procedures are prepared with the aim to reduce heavy lifting and the use of
force;
 where a procedure has not been developed for a manual task, the manual handling assessment
tool (see Annexure 1) is used;
 manual handling aids such as trolleys and portable power tools will be made available to
employees in order to reduce the risk of a manual handling injury; and
 suitable protective clothing will be provided and worn by all employees while at work.
2. Assess and Reduce the Risk of Injury

Risk can only be treated and effectively reduced if they are known. All manual handling tasks are
therefore risk assessed before the task is started.
2.1. Assessing risk
Employees know the job better than anyone. Most situations will require just a few minutes’
observation to identify ways to make the activity easier and less risky, i.e. less physically demanding
and to prevent acute trauma such as cuts or fractures due to accidents.
Employees can help to carry out the assessment – they often know what problems there are and how
best to solve them. Make sure they are aware what risks to look for during manual handling and what
to do about them. The final responsibility for assessments rests with employers. It is useful to get
employees’ input when buying new equipment.
2.2. Recording of assessments
It is often useful to record and keep the main findings and this should always be done if it would be
difficult to repeat the assessment. However, an assessment need not be recorded if –
 it is easy to be repeated and explained at any time because it is simple and obvious; or
 the handling operations have a low risk factor, and are going to last a very short time.
2.3. Individual assessments
It is sometimes acceptable to do a “generic” assessment – one that is common to several employees

or to more than one site or type of work. However:
 This should only be done if there are no individual or local factors that have to be taken into
account, e.g. differences in stature, competence, etc.;
 Generic risk assessments should be reviewed if individual employees report adverse symptoms,
become ill, injured or disabled, or return following a long period of sickness, as they may have
become vulnerable to risk.
The important element in all assessments is to identify all significant risks of injury and point the way
to practical improvements.
2.4. Use of assessment results
Don’t just forget it or file it away. The purpose of the assessment is to pinpoint the worst features of
the work – and they’re the ones you should try to improve first. It is also important to remember to
update the assessment when significant changes are made to the workplace. All employees whose
work is covered by a risk assessment, including generic assessments, should be told about the risk it
identifies.
The risk should be reduced to the lowest level “reasonably practicable”. Mechanical aids should be
provided if it is reasonably practicable to do so and the risks identified in the risk assessment can be
reduced or eliminated by this means (see Annexure 2 for Manual Handling Problems and Remedies).
3. Technique for Lifting/Handling

The most effective way of preventing manual handling-related injuries is proper manual handling
techniques. The following points provide some aspects to consider when something is to be manually
handles:
 Think before lifting/handling.

o What is the weight of the object to be lifted? If it is over 40kg, it is a two-man lift.
 Plan the lift.
o Can handling aids be used?
o Where is the load going to be placed?
o Will help be needed with the load?
o Remove obstructions such as discarded wrapping materials.
o For a long lift, consider resting the load midway on a table or bench to change grip.
 Keep the load close to the waist.
o Keep the load close to the body for as long as possible while lifting.
o Keep the heaviest side of the load next to the body.
o If a close approach to the load is not possible, try to slide it towards the body before
attempting to lift it.
 Adopt a stable position.
o The feet should be apart with one leg slightly forward to maintain balance.
o The worker should be prepared to move their feet during the lift to maintain their stability.
o Avoid tight clothing or unsuitable footwear, which may make this difficult.
 Get a good hold.
o Where possible, the load should be hugged as close as possible to the body.
o This may be better than gripping it tightly with hands only.
 Start in a good posture.
o At the start of the lift, slight bending of the back, hips and knees is preferable to fully flexing
the back (stooping) or fully flexing the hips and knees (squatting).
 Do not flex the back any further while lifting.
o This can happen if the legs begin to straighten before starting to raise the load.
 Avoid twisting the back or leaning sideways, especially while the back is bent.
o Shoulders should be kept level and facing in the same direction as the hips.
o Turning by moving the feet is better than twisting and lifting at the same time.
 Keep the head up when handling.
o Look ahead, not down at the load, once it has been held securely.
 Move smoothly.
o The load should not be jerked or snatched as this can make it harder to keep control and can
increase the risk of injury.
 Do not lift or handle more than can be easily managed.

o There is a difference between what people can lift and what they can safely lift. If in doubt,
seek advice or get help.
 Put down and then adjust.
o If precise positioning of the load is necessary, put it down first, and then slide it into the
desired position.
4. Safe Lifting Tips

The following safe lifting techniques should be employed whenever a task requires lifting or moving
materials, especially heavy and/or bulky objects.
4.1. The feet
The feet should be parted, with one foot alongside the object to be lifted and one behind. The feet
comfortably spread gives greater stability and the rear foot is in position for the upward thrust of the
lift.
4.2 The back
Use the sit-down position and keep the back straight, but remember that straight does not mean
vertical. A straight back keeps the spine, back muscles and body organs in correct alignment. It
minimises the compression of the abdominal organs, which can cause a hernia.
4.2. The chin
Tuck in the chin so the neck and head continue the straight back line. Tucking in the chin helps keep
the spine straight and firm.
4.3. The palm
Gripping with the palm is one of the most important elements of correct lifting. The fingers and the
hand are extended around the object to be lifted – using the full palm. Fingers alone have very little
power – the strength of the entire hand is needed.
4.4. Arms and elbows
Draw the load close, with arms and elbows tucked into the sides of the body. When the arms are held
away from the body, they lose much of their strength, and because the weight is not fully supported
on the spinal axis, back strain can result.
4.5. Body weight
The body should be positioned so that its weight is centred over the feet. This provides more powerful
line of thrust and ensures better balance. Start the lift with a thrust of the read foot.
4.6. Team lifting
If the object is too heavy to be handled by one person, get help. When two or more employees are
handling the same object, one employee should be designated to call signals. All the workers on the
lift should know who this is and should warn him/her if any one of the crew is about to relax his grip.
Annexure 1
Manual Handling Assessment Plan
Task assessed
Work area Date
Brief description of task (and duration)
Reason for analysis
PPE required Tools/equipment used
Action required Responsibility
Conducted by Signature Date
Annexure 2
Manual Handling: Problems and remedies

Task(s) being assessed:
Problems to look for during assessment Ways of reducing the risk of injury
The tasks, do they involve: Can you:
□ Holding loads away from the body? □ Use a lifting aid?
□ Twisting, stooping or reaching upwards? □ Improve workplace layout to improve efficiency?
□ Large vertical movement? □ Reduce the amount of twisting and stooping?
Avoid lifting from floor level or above shoulder height,

□ Long carrying distances? □ especially heavy loads?
□ Strenuous pushing or pulling? □ Reduce carrying distances?
□ Repetitive handling? □ Avoid repetitive handling?
Vary the work, allowing one set of muscles to rest while

□ Insufficient rest or recovery time? □ another is used?
□ A work rate imposed by a process? □ Push rather than pull?
The working environment, are there: Can you:
□ Constraints on posture? □ Remove obstructions to free movement?
□ Bumpy, obstructed or slippery floors? □ Provide better flooring?
□ Variations in levels? □ Avoid steps and steep ramps?
□ Hot/cold/humid conditions? □ Prevent extremes of hot and cold?
□ Gusts of wind or other strong air movements? □ Shield off the workplace?
□ Poor lighting conditions? □ Improve lighting?
Provide protective clothing or PPE that is less

□ Restrictions on movements or posture from PPE? □ restrictive?
The loads, are they: Can you make the load:
□ Heavy, bulky or unwieldy? □ Lighter or less bulky?
Easier to grasp? (If the load comes in from elsewhere,

□ Difficult to grasp? □ have you asked the supplier to help, e.g. provide
handles or smaller packages?)
□ Unstable or likely to move unpredictably? □ More stable?
□ Harmful, e.g. Sharp or hot? □ Less damaging to hold?
□ Awkwardly stacked? □ Re-stacked or divided into smaller parcels?
□ Too large for the handler to see over? □ Smaller in height?
Individual capacity, does the job: Can you:

Require unusual capability, e.g. Above-average Pay particular attention to those who have a physical
□ strength or agility?
□ weakness?
Endanger those with a health problem or learning/
□ physical disability?
□ Take extra care of pregnant workers?
Give your employees more information, e.g. About the

□ Endanger pregnant women? □ range of tasks they are likely to face?
Provide appropriate training (Get advice from an
□ Call for special information or training? □ occupational health advisor if you need to)
Handling aids and equipment: Can you:
□ Is the device the correct type for the job? □ Provide equipment that is more suitable for the task?
Carry out the required maintenance to prevent

□ Is it well maintained? □ problems?
Are the wheels on the device suited to the floor Change the wheels, tyres and/or flooring so that
□ surface?
□ equipment moves easily?
□ Do the wheels run freely? □ Lubricate the wheels?
□ Is the handle height between the waist and shoulders? □ Provide better handles?
□ Are the handle grips in good order and comfortable? □ Provide better handle grips?
□ Are there any brakes? If so, do they work? □ Make the brakes easier to use, reliable and effective?
Work organization factors: Can you:
□ Is the work repetitive or boring? □ Change tasks to reduce the monotony?
□ Is work machine-based or system-paced? □ Make more use of workers’ skills?
□ Do workers feel the demands of the job are excessive? □ Make workloads and deadlines more achievable?
Have workers control of the work and working

□ methods?
□ Involve workers in decisions?
Is there poor communication between managers and

□ employees?
□ Encourage good communication and teamwork?
Safe Work Practice - Housekeeping
If the sight of paper, debris, clutter and spills is accepted as normal, then other more serious health
and safety hazards may be taken for granted. Effective housekeeping will eliminate some workplace
hazards and help get a job done safely and properly.
Poor housekeeping can frequently contribute to incidents by hiding hazards that cause injuries; it
can be a cause of incidents, such as: tripping over loose objects on floors, stairs and platforms; being
hit by falling objects; slipping on greasy, wet or dirty surfaces; striking against projecting, poorly
stacked items or misplaced material cutting; puncturing, or tearing the skin of hands or other parts
of the body on projecting nails, wire or steel strapping. To avoid these hazards, a workplace must
"maintain" order throughout a workday. Although this effort requires a great deal of management
and planning, the benefits are many. Effective housekeeping results in -
 reduced handling to ease the flow of materials;

 fewer tripping and slipping incidents in clutter-free and spill-free work areas;
 decrease in fire hazards;
 lower worker exposures to hazardous substances;
 better control of tools and materials;
 more efficient equipment clean-up and maintenance;
 better hygienic conditions leading to improved health;
 more effective use of space;
 reduced property damage by improving preventive maintenance;
 less janitorial work; and
 improved morale
Housekeeping is not just cleanliness. It includes keeping work areas neat and orderly; maintaining
halls and floors free of slip and trip hazards; and removing of waste materials (e.g., paper,
cardboard) and other fire hazards from work areas. It also requires paying attention to important
details such as the layout of the workplace, aisle marking, the adequacy of storage facilities, and
maintenance. Good housekeeping is also a basic part of incident and fire prevention.
Effective housekeeping is an ongoing operation: it is not a hit-and-miss clean-up done occasionally.

Periodic "panic" clean-ups are costly and ineffective in reducing incidents.
Management must ensure that an acceptable standard of housekeeping is maintained. The

housekeeping standard would include issues like:
 Maintaining sufficient clear and unobstructed space at every machine to enable work to be
carried out without danger to persons;
 Making available and maintaining an unimpeded work space for every employee;
 Keeping every indoor workplace clean, orderly and free of materials, tools and similar things
which are not necessary for the work;
 Keeping all floors, walkways, stairs, passages and gangways in a good state of repair, skid-free
and free of obstructions, waste or materials;
 Keeping the roof and walls of every indoor workplace sound and leak-free;
 Storing materials and equipment properly; and
 Removing scrap, waste and debris at appropriate intervals.
The effectiveness of the housekeeping effort depends on the cooperation and contribution of each
employee. As such, each employee performs the following housekeeping tasks that are relevant and
appropriate to the activities and tasks in their area of responsibility:
 Cleaning;
 Cleaning methods;
 Storage;
 Waste management; and
 Maintenance.
Responsibility for housekeeping is assigned by –
 Including housekeeping tasks in the roles and responsibilities of relevant employees; and
 Including housekeeping inspections and checks in the roles and responsibilities of
Supervisors/Line Managers.
1. Cleaning
Regular and continuous cleaning of the workplace prevents accumulation of dirt that could be
hazardous and hide other hazards from plain sight.
1.1. Work areas and stations
Work areas and stations are cleaned at regular intervals during the workday or shift to prevent the
work area/station from becoming excessively dirty.
1.2. Equipment, machinery and tools
Equipment, machinery and tools are cleaned as soon as the activity/task for which it was used has
been completed.
1.3. Workplace
The general workplace (building) is cleaned at regular intervals by dedicated cleaning personnel.
Such cleaning generally comprises of the cleaning, as necessary, of:
 Doors
 Floors
 Light fixtures
 Roof
 Stairways
 Walls
 Windows
1.4. Workplace facilities
Dedicated cleaning personnel clean workplace facilities at regular intervals during the workday/shift.
Employees are also responsible for maintaining workplace facilities by leaving them clean, tidy,
hygienic and sanitary when they’re finished using it.
Dirty, untidy, unhygienic and unsanitary facilities are reported to the responsible person who
ensures that the facility in question is cleaned and tidied up.
2. Cleaning Methods
2.1. Dust and dirt removal
Dust and dirt is only cleaned away with suitable equipment such as vacuum cleaners and brushes.
Do not use compressed air for cleaning. Hazardous substances are only removed with fit-for-purpose
vacuum cleaners.
2.2. Floors
Dusty and dirty floors are dampened with water or sprayed with suitable sweeping compounds
before being swept to reduce the amount of airborne dust caused by sweeping.
General dirt and dust are cleaned away at regular intervals, but liquid spills are cleaned up
thoroughly and immediately. Keep floors dry as far as possible.
2.3. Lighting
Light fixtures and reflectors are cleaned regularly to ensure a high level of lighting efficiency.
2.4. Pest control
The entire workplace is cleaned and maintained in a clean state so as not to attract pests such as
rodents and insects. This is especially important where food is concerned, and care is taken to
ensure that no foodstuffs are spilled or disposed of in a manner that could potentially attract pests.
Spilled foodstuffs must be cleaned up promptly.
2.5. Scrap and process waste
Scrap and process waste (such as debris, shavings, cuttings, drillings) are cleaned and sorted at
regular intervals during the working day, and segregated from other non-recyclable waste.
2.6. Spills
Spills that do occur are contained as well as possible, and cleaned up immediately. Spills are cleaned
up using suitable and prescribed methods and spill kits provided, while wearing prescribed PPE
where appropriate.
2.7. Ventilation
Air vents and filters are cleaned regularly according to manufacturers’ specifications to maintain the
effectiveness of the ventilation system.
3. Storage
Equipment, tools and materials are properly stored, in dedicated storage areas, when not in use.
Storage areas are clearly marked with appropriate signage that indicate the contents of a storage
area and what is permitted to be stored in the storage area.
Proper storage of equipment, tools and materials allows sufficient clear and unobstructed
workspace at every work area/station, to enable employees to work safely. Storage areas are
maintained in an organised, clean and unobstructed state. When equipment, tools and materials are
required for an activity/task, only the required equipment, tools and materials are removed from
storage; and then kept in an orderly and organised state at the work area/site by storing/keeping
them in a manner similar to how they are stored in the storage areas.
Equipment, tools and materials are cleaned and returned to storage immediately after the
completion of the activity/task for which the equipment/tool/material was used.
3.1. Storage methods
 Bins and racks - Bins and/or racks are provided for the storage of material that cannot be
stacked or piled.
 Cables and hoses - Cables and hoses are bundled when they are not in use to prevent them from
posing tripping hazards.
 Pest control - Storage areas are constructed, enclosed and equipped to prevent the entrance
and harbourage of pests such as rodents and insects. The required measures are taken to
protect staff during application of pesticides, when application is required.
3.2. Storage of hazardous substances
Hazardous substances are stored in accordance with the storage legal and other requirements and
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) specifications related to each hazardous substance.
Hazardous substances are stored in appropriately marked containers when such material is
decanted into and kept in containers that have not been labelled by the material manufacturer.
Work areas and stations are maintained free from combustible materials as far as possible to reduce
the risk of fires breaking out.
Materials that are stored outdoors are only stored in designated areas. Combustible materials that
are stored outdoors are stored a minimum of 3m away from all buildings and structures. Hazardous
materials that pose a fire risk are stored with due regard for their fire characteristics and it is
therefore critical that such materials are stored in and returned to the correct storage areas after
use.
3.3. Stacking
Materials are only stacked if a firm foundation exists in which it can be stacked. Materials are
stacked up to a maximum height of 6m, and then only if the foundation is firm and stable enough to
support the weight of the stack.
Unstable stacks that could shift or move and fall over are cross-tied and/or tied down additionally to
improve their stability. A space of at least 1m is maintained between the tops of material stacks and
fire sprinklers. Combustible materials are stacked with at least 1m between the stack and light
fixtures or heating units.
3.4. Storage prohibitions
Materials are never stored or stacked in a way that would cause any of the following to be
obstructed:
 Doorways
 Electrical disconnects
 Emergency and other exits – maintain a space of at least 1m around un-barricaded exits to allow
for the opening of doors
 Emergency equipment (e.g. eyewash fountains and showers)
 Fire equipment – maintain a space of at least 1m around fire extinguishers and between the tops
of material stacks and sprinklers
 First aid stations and equipment
 Stairs and stairways
 Walkways/aisles/travelling/drive ways
 Work areas and stations.
4. Waste Management and Disposal

Waste is disposed of in the appropriate bin(s) as soon as it is generated to ensure that no waste
builds up in the workplace or in workplace facilities provided to the workforce. Waste with sharp
and/or protruding edges are collected and disposed of in hard containers and not in plastic bags. An
adequate number of suitable waste bins, for each type of waste generated, are provided at
appropriate points throughout the workplace.
Waste is disposed of at regular intervals during the working day to prevent waste build-up that
would require extra effort to clean at a later stage. Waste is cleaned and disposed of in accordance
with waste management provisions. Appropriate PPE is worn at all times when collecting waste and
waste is never collected with bare hands.
4.1. Empty material containers and pallets
Empty material containers are properly disposed of in accordance with the waste disposal
requirements relating to the material once contained in the container. Empty material pallets are
placed in designated locations to ensure the proper disposal and, if possible, recycling of pallets.
4.2. Hazardous waste
Hazardous waste is disposed of in accordance with hazardous waste disposal requirements and
specifications. Combustible waste is removed from work areas and stations and properly disposed of
as soon as it is generated to keep work areas/stations free from combustible waste as far as
possible. Combustible materials such as rags, clothing, waste and combustible refuse soaked with
oil, paint, grease or any other substance that could ignite while left in the presence of oxygen, are
disposed of in non-combustible containers equipped with tight-fitting lids or covers.
4.3. Recycling
Marked containers that are suitable for collecting recyclable waste, whether general (glass, beverage
cans), scrap or process waste, are placed in appropriate positions throughout the workplace.
Recyclable scrap and process waste is collected in suitable containers to allow for later collection for
recycling.
5. Workplace Maintenance
The workplace, including workplace facilities, plant, equipment, machinery and tools are maintained
to ensure that all aspects of the workplace in general remain in a state of good repair. Regular
inspections are conducted on all aspects of the workplace, with the aim of establishing:
 The overall state of the workplace;

 The level of conformance to the provisions governing the state of the workplace; and
 Aspects of the workplace in need of repair and maintenance.
Maintenance is not only reactive. A preventive maintenance programme ensures that no aspect of
the workplace deteriorates to a state where costly reactive maintenance, or replacement, is
required. The preventive maintenance programme not only identifies the preventive maintenance
that is required, but also takes the workload of machinery and equipment into account in scheduling
preventive maintenance.
By doing this, preventive maintenance is scheduled to take place before anything can fail, which, in
turn, prevents an incident and possibly injury, loss, damage or harm from occurring. Any aspect of
the workplace in need of maintenance and repair is reported to the responsible person who ensures
that the necessary maintenance and repair is carried out as soon as possible.
5.1. Doors
Damaged doors and door locks/latches are repaired or replaced as soon as it is discovered that a
door or door lock/latch has been damaged and is no longer functioning properly.
5.2. Floors
Walkways in the workplace are distinguished from areas where pedestrian traffic is not allowed by
demarcating walkways with painted demarcation lines at appropriate positions on the workplace
floor, which is, throughout the workplace, painted in another general colour.
Floors are inspected regularly and the appropriate maintenance carried out if any defects such as
the following are detected:
 Chipped/cracked tiles/floor surface

 Faded/damaged/worn demarcation paint
 Holes in carpets and vinyl floor coverings
 Loose floorboards
 Protruding nails
 Loose/ripped/torn/protruding carpets and vinyl floor coverings
 Unnecessary holes and openings
 Worn floor surface.
5.3. Lighting
Blown light bulbs and fluorescent tubes are replaced as soon after failure as possible to ensure an
ongoing supply of adequate lighting.
5.4. Pest control
Pest control equipment such as rodent bait stations are inspected frequently and refilled to ensure
their ongoing effectiveness.
5.5. Stairways
Stairways, access to stairways and stairway landings are adequately lit, always kept clear and never
used for storage. Stairways are equipped with suitable handrails to assist stair users to use stairs
safely. Handrails and steps are maintained in good condition to prevent injuries caused by rusted
handrails and slippery steps, for instance. Stairways are inspected regularly and the required
maintenance, if any, carried out.
5.6. Walkways/aisles/travelling ways
Walkways, aisles or travelling ways that are wide enough are provided to allow for safe and
comfortable movement of people, vehicles, equipment, materials, etc. They are adequately lit,
always kept clear and never used for storage.
5.7. Walls
Walls are painted in pale-coloured paint to reflect as much light as possible. Walls are maintained as
clean as possible through periodic cleaning, but repainted when it is no longer possible to clean
them thoroughly.
5.8. Windows
Broken window panes are replaced as soon as it is discovered that a window has cracked or broken.
Safe Work Practice - Notices, Signs and Barricading
1. Introduction
1.1. Signs and notices
Risk reduction measures are applied according to the hierarchy of risk control, which advocates the
implementation of risk reduction measures with as little human impact as possible.
The hierarchy of risk control advocates the following sequence of risk reduction measures:
1. Elimination – modifying a design to eliminate the hazard, e.g. terminate the use of a substance, or
terminate an activity;
2. Substitution – substituting a less hazardous material or reduce the system energy (e.g. lower the
force, amperage, pressure and temperature);
3. Engineering controls – e.g. installing ventilation systems, machine guarding, interlocks, sound
enclosures;
4. Signs, warnings, and administrative controls – e.g. safety signs, hazardous area marking, photo-
luminescent signs, markings for pedestrian walkways, warning sirens/lights, alarms, safety
procedures, equipment inspections, access controls, etc.;
5. Personal protective equipment (PPE): safety glasses, hearing protection, face shields, safety
harnesses, respirators and gloves.
It is however not always possible to control and reduce risks sufficiently by applying the first three
levels of the risk control hierarchy. In such cases it becomes necessary to make persons that are, or
could be, exposed to risks aware of them. It is however not sufficient merely to create awareness of
the risks; exposed persons also need to be notified what they are required to do in response to such
risks.
Such awareness is created and required actions communicated by means of workplace safety signs
and notices. Safety signs and notices are placed wherever required or appropriate throughout the
workplace to identify risks and communicate a message to persons in the workplace of what they may
/may not/are required/allowed to/prohibited from doing in the vicinity of the identified risk.
Safety signs and notices are mostly symbolic, but text signs and notices and notices can also be used
if a symbolic sign or notice is unable to communicate a required message effectively. Combination of
symbols and text is also quite common, although not as common as signs with symbols alone.
Safety signs are used far more frequently than notices, which are usually not found in the workplace
itself, owing to the time required to read the entire sign. Safety notices are typically only posted at
entrances to workplaces, on notice boards and other similar locations such as in restrooms and
canteens where employees can safely spend the necessary time to read an entire notice. Safety signs
are used in the workplace so that any person can read and understand the message at a glance.
1.2. Barricading
It is often not sufficient just to notify people of the presence of hazards and risks and notify them of
how they are required to react in response thereto. In some cases it may also be necessary to
physically separate people and hazards and risks. This physical separation is achieved through the
barricading and/or demarcation of hazards and risks to prevent people from coming into contact with
the hazard. Potentially hazardous areas, operations, or pieces of equipment that typically require
barricading and demarcation of some sort, include:
 Overhead working or material handling – which could possibility result in people being struck by
falling materials or tools;
 Hazardous areas or equipment – such as electrical installations;
 Hazardous conditions – such as open drains, sewers and sewer pits, excavations and equipment
with guards removed.
2. Safety Signs and Notices

It is required by law to post certain safety signs and notices, especially in areas where there is a risk
that has not been avoided or controlled by any other means. Not doing so obviously would constitute
a legal transgression that could have serious repercussions for the organisation. It is therefore
essential to identify, provide and maintain legally required safety signs and notices to avoid legal non-
compliances. Safety signs and notices may commonly be required by law:
 whenever there is a risk that has not been avoided or controlled by other means;
 where traffic needs to be directed within a workplace;
 wherever there are dangerous substances or pipework that carry the substances;
 to identify stores or areas where dangerous substances are held; and
 to identify emergency and fire exits and fire safety equipment.
It is also important to identify, provide and maintain those safety signs and notices that are not
required by law, but that are required to control and reduce identified hazards and risks. The most
commonly required and used safety signs and notices include, but are not limited to:
 Emergency escape route

 Personal protective equipment (PPE) that must be worn
 Toxic material
 Flammable material
 Fire equipment
 General danger
 No smoking
 First aid point
 Explosion risk.
Note: Workplace safety signs and notices are not intended to be used as risk reduction and control
measures on their own, nor are they a substitute for other methods of controlling a risk. They are to
be used to supplement or reinforce other measures, such as engineering controls and safe systems of
work, to help reduce risk further.
2.1. Types of safety signs

The different types of workplace safety signs and notices that are typically used include:
 Illuminated signs (front- and back-lit) text notices to provide information or instructions;
 Verbal communication of predetermined spoken or recorded message such as public address
instructions used during evacuations;
 Labels such as hazard warning symbols on containers or pipes to indicate the substance contained;
 Surface area markings such as alternating 45° lines in black/yellow or red/white to indicate
obstacles or dangerous locations, or continuous yellow lines to indicate traffic routes;
 Acoustic signals such as fire alarms.
The universally accepted meaning of safety sign (geometric) shapes and colours are:
Shapes Colours
Shape Meaning Colour Meaning
Square Information (safe conditions) Green Information (safe conditions)
Prohibition (you may not do) Mandatory (you must do behaviour or
Circle Blue
Mandatory (you must do) action)
Triangle Warning (beware of danger) Yellow Precaution/Warning (beware of danger)
Red Prohibition (you may not do)
2.2. Identify required safety signs and notices

Although workplace safety signs and notices are generally either required by legislation or as a result
of the risk assessment process, it could in some cases be sensible to provide signs and notices even if
they are not required by either of the aforementioned reasons.
In order to identify the workplace safety signs and notices that are required to be posted by law, the
Legal Register should be analysed to identify the required workplace safety signs and notices. The
workplace safety signs and notices that are required to be posted as part of risk reduction and control
measures are identified through an evaluation and analysis of the risk assessments that have been
performed.
Note: It is not necessary to post a workplace safety sign or notice where a risk is insignificant or when
the posting of a workplace safety sign or notice does not result in the meaningful reduction of a risk.
Legally required workplace safety signs and notices must however always be posted as specified.
2.3. Post required safety signs and notices

Once the workplace signs and notices that must be posted have been identified, the appropriate signs
and notices are obtained or created and posted where are required and in accordance with the
specifications governing the posting of signs and notices. Keep in mind that workplace safety signs and
notices serve distinct purposes in that they are warnings of potentially unsafe areas, and also alert
people to the degree of danger that is present.
Safety signs and notices must help bring employees’ attention to what should or should not be done
in particular areas of a workplace and aid them in better understanding what the potential danger is.
The writing on safety signs must be clear and concise and deliver its message effectively in as few
words as possible.
Wherever there is a need for a general instruction, there should be a safety sign to emphasise such a
general instruction. Safety signs and notices must be designed so that all employees will understand
the meaning of the sign or notice. Symbol designs especially should be as simple as possible,
containing only those details essential for understanding the sign.
Obtain required signs and notices
Signs and notices must be made of durable materials that are capable of withstanding any destructive
forces it may be subjected to in the environment where it is to be posted. Workplace safety signs in
particular, but notices also, can contain symbols, words or a combination of both. To decide which is
most effective, ask the following questions:
 Will the sign/notice have to be interpreted and understood by anyone that may not be familiar
with the English language?
 Can the intended message be adequately portrayed with a symbol?
 Can text, if any is required, be used in conjunction with a symbol or should the sign rather be a
notice consisting of text only?
Workplace safety signs and notices are provided to convey the following messages, where
appropriate:
 Prohibition - predominantly red and white safety sign denoting that a certain behaviour or activity
is prohibited, such as “No Smoking” and “No Entry”;
 Hazard - yellow warning triangle with a black border signifying a hazard. Signs can be generic and
simply state “Danger”, or can be more specific, such as “Caution Slippery Surface” or “Danger High
Voltage”. The symbol within the triangle varies according to the hazard with an exclamation mark
denoting a general hazard, while a lightning strike denotes an electrical hazard;
 Mandatory - blue and white sign denoting that a certain action must be taken. Most commonly
used to signify that personal protective equipment (PPE) must be worn or used;
 Fire equipment - red and white sign used to denote fire equipment such as extinguishers, alarm
call points and fire hoses. Extinguisher signs are additionally coded to denote the type of fire
equipment and its proper use, e.g. CO2 (black) signifies safe for use on electrical fires but should
not be used in a confined space;
 Safe condition - green and white sign denoting safe conditions. Predominantly used to indicate
escape routes and escape procedures. Normally contains wording such as “Fire Exit” or “Exit”,
along with a running man symbol and a directional arrow. Other common uses include “Assembly
Point”, “Push Bar to Open”, “Drinking Water” and “Safe Eating Area”;
 First aid signs - used to show employees where first aid equipment such as showers, stretchers,
first aid kits and breathing apparatus are located. First aid signs are also used to display first aid
information – such as who on duty is responsible for first aid and emergency telephone numbers;
 Hygiene signs - displayed in workplace facilities such as kitchens and washrooms to ensure that
hygienic conditions are maintained in the workplace, such as when food is prepared and to remind
staff and visitors to wash their hands regularly;
 Smoking signs - used to indicate authorised smoking areas and shelters and where cigarette butts
can be disposed of, or “no smoking areas”. Designed to assist with site housekeeping and a
cleaner, tidier environment for smokers to use.
Labelling on containers and pipelines
Containers holding dangerous substances are marked with self-adhesive or painted signs that clearly
indicate the contained substance on the visible side(s) of the container.
The entire visible length of the pipes must be painted in the appropriate colour if possible. Where this
is not possible, the entire pipe is painted at the most dangerous points such as valves and joints, and
at reasonable intervals along the remainder of the pipe. Labels are additionally affixed if it would be
appropriate to do so. Pipelines are marked in conformity with their content and in compliance with
the following:
 Blue – oxygen
 Green – water
 Red – vapour
 Grey – air
 Yellow – flammable gas
 Black – non-flammable gas (liquid)
 Orange – acid
 Violet – alkali
 Brown – flammable liquid.
Considerations when installing signs and notices
Signs and notices are installed in easily accessible locations close to the relevant hazard or subject, at
a suitable height within employees’ field of vision. Keep the following in mind when installing signs
and notices to ensure that the effectiveness of signs and notices is not impeded:
 Do not install contradictory signs and notices;

 Prevent the use of objects that could interfere with the visibility of signs and notices;
 Prevent the use of objects that could interfere with the audibility of acoustic signs and notices;
 Prevent the use of more than one illuminated signs and/or notices in the same vicinity;
 Do not use illuminated signs and notices in close proximity to other light sources;
 Do not use two acoustic signals at the same time;

 Do not rely on acoustic signals if the surrounding noise level is high.
Sign placement
Consider the following when placing signs:
 Locate signs to alert and inform employees of hazards in sufficient time to avoid the hazard and
take appropriate action. Employees should not be in harm's way before seeing the sign.
 Signs must be placed so that they are legible, do not create a distraction and is not a hazard in
themselves, e.g. low-hanging or protruding into a walkway.
 Signs should have rounded corners, must be free of burrs and splinters, and the fasteners should
not have protruding parts that could cause abrasions or lacerations.
 Avoid placing a sign on a moveable object or adjacent to moveable objects like wheeled
equipment, removable partitions, etc., which if moved will obscure the sign.
 Where illumination may be necessary under emergency conditions, the signs should be equipped
with emergency (battery operated) illumination, luminescent or both.
 Posted signs and notices must be securely fastened to ensure that they remain in position and
effective.
3. Barricading and Demarcation

Barricading means the creation of a barrier or obstacle with any object or structure to control or
prevent access to an area that is potentially hazardous, or to force traffic in a desired direction.
Demarcation means the setting, marking and clear separation of two areas with boundaries.
Barricading and demarcation are usually temporary measures, specifically intended at separating
people from hazards and hazardous work activities by preventing or controlling access to
hazards/high-risk work areas. Both barricading and demarcation can be applied in any hazardous
condition to reduce the risk to people’s health and safety.
3.1. Types of barricading and demarcation
Hazards and hazardous work activities are generally barricaded and demarcated by means of coloured
plastic “danger tape” with the appropriate message printed on it. Danger tape is generally used to
convey the following two messages:
Caution – barricading an area where specific potential hazards exist, using standard yellow tape with
the word "CAUTION" in black letters. People can enter this area when –
 they are aware of the specific hazard(s),

 have taken the necessary precautions to avoid the hazard, and
 are required to enter the barricade in order to perform work.
Persons entering this area should remain in the area no longer than absolutely necessary. The caution
barricade must be removed when the hazardous situation has been eliminated.
Danger – barricading an area using the standard red tape with the word "DANGER" in black letters.
This is used to warn employees of imminent danger and that special precautions are necessary. The
red tape with the word "DANGER" in black letters is used for hazards that are dangerous immediately.
Nobody may enter those areas except those authorised to and assisting with the elimination/
mitigation/control of the hazard itself. The danger barricade must be removed as soon as the
imminent danger has been abated.
Access to barricaded areas is limited to authorised personnel that understand the potential hazards
indicated by yellow (caution) barricades and have been given authorisation to enter when a red
(danger) barricade is present.
It may however in some cases be necessary to barricade and demarcate certain areas and activities
more solidly. Solid barricading and demarcation can be used in such cases and, although still
temporary, solid barricades could provide a more secure barricade/demarcation of a hazardous area
or activity. The purpose of a solid barricade is to provide a physical barrier capable of performing the
same function as a permanent guardrail. Some considerations to keep in mind when using solid
barricades include:
 Appropriate signs and notices must be affixed to solid barricades;

 Barricade tape could be used to highlight the existence of the barricaded area;
 Solid barricades must be erected by a competent person;
 Solid barricades have to be able to withstand significant sideward and downward impacts on the
top rail;
 Freestanding barricades must be secured to prevent them from falling/being pushed over by an
impact;
 Solid barricades must have solid top and middle rails of appropriate material such as steel tubing;
 Solid barricades must be designed and constructed in accordance with guardrail requirements and
specifications;
 Barricades installed across roadways that will remain in place during hours of darkness must be
fitted with flashing lights to identify the barricade/traffic obstruction.
3.2. Identify barricading and demarcation requirements

Risk assessments may identify hazardous activities and areas that require barricading and demarcation
as risk reduction and control measures to protect everybody on the site from the risks posed by these
hazardous activities and areas. Hazardous areas in this context not only refer to areas that are
inherently dangerous as a result of the activity/task/process being performed in such an area, but also
include areas that may potentially be dangerous, requiring access to such areas to be restricted.
Areas to which access must be restricted to authorised employees only, because of a specific task
being performed in such an area, include:
 The area on the same level and the level(s) below where hot work is performed
 Where the covers of confined space entrances have been removed
 Areas beneath floor openings
 Where access to work areas containing uninsulated energised conductors or circuit parts must be
limited
 Where work is started in the vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic that may endanger
employees
 Warning systems around excavations for people and mobile equipment
 Blasting sites when explosives and initiating systems are brought onto the site
 Areas where scaffolding is erected, used or dismantled
 Around areas where overhead work is being conducted.
3.3. Define barricade and/or demarcation requirements

Following the identification of the hazardous activities and areas that are required to be barricaded
and demarcated, the requirements for a suitable installation to barricade and/or demarcate each
hazardous activity and work area effectively, must be defined. The most appropriate form of
barricading and demarcation that would provide the most effective protection from the hazardous
activity/work area under consideration must be selected.
Typical barricading and demarcation installations include:
 Barricading the area below and at a sufficient distance around an area where hot work such as
welding is taking place to prevent unauthorised entry into the area and to protect –
o the eyes of passers-by from being damaged by the arc, and
o passers-by from being burned by welding spatter and hot metal fragments;
 The use of non-conductive barricades where conductive barricades pose an electrical contact
hazard;
 The conspicuous placement of warning signs and/or flags or other traffic control devices to alert
and channel approaching traffic when work is undertaken in the vicinity of vehicular and/or
pedestrian traffic that may endanger employees;
 The use of traffic control barriers where additional protection from vehicular and/or pedestrian
traffic is required;
 Guarding open confined space entrances with a railing, temporary cover or other barrier intended
to prevent:
o unauthorised entry of the confined space,
o an accidental fall through the opening, and
o to protect employees working inside the space from objects entering the space;
 The installation of a warning system around excavations comprising of barricades, hand or
mechanical signals or stop logs and flashing lights at night to alert people and mobile equipment
of the position of the excavation;
 Barricading the area below and at a sufficient distance around an area where scaffolding is
erected, used or dismantled to prevent unauthorised entry into the area and to protect passers-
by from falling materials.
3.4. Install barricading and/or demarcation

Once the appropriate barricade and/or demarcation for a hazardous activity/area has been identified,
the required barricade and demarcation is installed in the appropriate locations. It must be installed
at a sufficient distance from the hazard, that it is required to prevent contact with, to ensure that it
will indeed prevent contact with the hazard.
Access to restricted access zones (red barricades) established by the erection of temporary barricading
is controlled, with authorisation from the supervisor or his/her nominee required before access is
granted to unauthorised persons.
3.5. Remove barricading and demarcation

Barricading and demarcation is removed as soon as it is no longer required or if the hazard(s) against
which the barricading and demarcation had been protecting people has been adequately controlled
to a level where it no longer presents an unacceptably high risk.
4. Maintenance of Signs and Notices

Workplace safety sign and notice maintenance must ensure that signs and notices remain -
 properly located;
 securely fastened; and
 legible.
They are inspected as part of general workplace health and safety inspections to establish and ensure
that they remain:
 Necessary – some signs and notices may not be required anymore when the hazard or condition
that led to its use in the first place is no longer present;
 Legible – illegible signs and notices are not clearly visible and will therefore not have the desired
effect or convey the required message;
 In a state of good repair – damaged, dirty or missing signs and notices are ineffective and will not
have the desired risk reduction and control effects;
 Optimally positioned – improperly positioned and located signs and notices could firstly not be
visible to the appropriate employees and secondly create confusion if they contradict other signs
and notices or are visible to employees to whom they do not apply.
The frequency at which safety signs and notices are inspected, should be based on the environments
in which signs and notices are located, together with their criticality. Irreparable signs and notices are
replaced when normal maintenance actions are not able to restore a missing/damaged/illegible sign
or notice sufficiently.
Safe Work Practice - Fire Prevention, Protection & Control
Fires, like any other incidents, are unexpected when they occur. The difference between fires and
other incidents is that fires are in most, if not all, cases potentially much more destructive than any
other incident. When fires occur they cause immense damage to people and property, both in terms
of injuries/illness and financially. Proper fire safety management is therefore essential to deal with
the Contractor’s fire risks.
Fire safety management comprises two fields, namely fire prevention and fire protection. Fire
prevention seeks to prevent fires from occurring as far as possible, while fire protection is aimed at
taking the necessary preparatory steps to be able to deal with fires when they do occur.
A fire can only occur when the following three elements, known as the fire triangle, are present in the
correct quantities:
 Ignition/heat – the spark/flame/heat that ignites the fire;

 Fuel – the ignited object that burns; and
 Oxygen – a fire cannot burn without the presence of oxygen.
The basic strategy of fire prevention is therefore to prevent the three fire triangle elements from
occurring simultaneously to prevent a fire from breaking out.
1. Fire Prevention
It is essential to properly investigate and plan site fire prevention and protection measures. Fire
prevention and protection measures are intended respectively to prevent and restrict the devastating
effects of fires, and are therefore critical components of the SHEQ management efforts.
Fire prevention and protection measures are only ever really tested when a fire is about to or has
already broken out. Such pressure situations will immediately reveal flaws in the measures and will
very likely result in some, or even all of the measures failing. Fire prevention and protection measures
can however not be allowed to fail owing to the significant damage they are intended to prevent and
limit, and this can only be achieved through careful and thorough fire prevention and protection
measure investigation and planning. The most effective way in which to deal with fires is to prevent
them from occurring as far as possible.
Fire prevention is aimed at preventing fires from breaking out by preventing the three fire triangle
elements, namely heat, fuel and oxygen, from occurring at the same in sufficient quantities to cause
a fire. A fire will not break out if all three elements are not present in the correct quantities at the
same time.
Oxygen is however always present as part of the earth’s atmosphere, and controlling or isolating
oxygen is therefore very difficult. Heat and fuel can however be controlled and isolated and fire
prevention efforts are therefore concentrated on preventing them from coming into contact with one
another. Fire hazards and risks are identified by means of the risk assessment programme.
Some sources of the three fire triangle elements to consider are:
 Heat (ignition source)

- Smokers’ materials – cigarette butts, discarded matches, etc.
- Naked flames
- Electrical, gas or oil fired heaters - fixed or portable
- Hot processes such as welding, grinding work or cooking
- Engines or boilers
- Machinery
- Faulty or misused electrical equipment
- Lighting equipment such as halogen lamps
- Hot surfaces or the obstruction of equipment ventilation;
 Fuel
- Flammable liquid based products such as paints, varnish, thinners and adhesives
- Flammable liquids and solvents such as petrol, white spirit, methylated spirit and paraffin
- Flammable chemicals
- Wood
- Paper and cardboard
- Plastics, rubber and foam such as polystyrene and polyurethane, e.g. the foam used in
upholstered furniture
- Flammable gases such as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and acetylene
- Furniture, including fixtures and fittings
- Textiles
- Loose packaging material
- Waste materials, in particular finely divided materials such as wood shavings, off-cuts, dust,
paper and textiles
- Hardboard, chipboard, block-board walls or ceilings
- Synthetic ceiling or wall coverings, such as polystyrene tiles;
 Oxygen
- Natural airflow through doors, windows and other openings
- Mechanical air conditioning systems and air handling systems
- Some chemicals (oxidising materials), that can provide a fire with additional oxygen and so,
assist it to burn. These chemicals should be identified on their container by the manufacturer
or supplier who can advise as to their safe use and storage.
- Oxygen supplies from cylinder storage and piped systems; e.g. oxygen used in welding
processes or for healthcare purposes.
Effective fire prevention is highly dependent on proper housekeeping to ensure that the workplace
remains free from flammable and combustible materials and substances as far as possible. Attention
must be paid to the following crucial housekeeping aspects:
 Cleaning
- Keep work areas free of flammable and combustible trash and waste.
- Clean up flammable liquid spills immediately with appropriate non-combustible clean-up
absorbents.
- Keep tools and equipment clean from especially dust, oil and grease.
- Ensure trash is emptied frequently enough to prohibit a build-up of flammable and
combustible materials and substances.
 Storage
- Store chemicals properly in tightly closed containers.
- Keep flammable and combustible materials away from ignition sources and heat-producing
equipment such as burners, heat exchangers, boilers, ovens, stoves, fryers, etc.
- Keep incompatible chemicals away from each other - materials that can contribute to a
flammable liquid fire should not be stored with flammable liquids (examples are oxidisers and
organic peroxides, which, on decomposition, can generate large amounts of oxygen).
- Handle compressed gas cylinders carefully and keep them away from heat.
- Store flammable materials according to instructions on the container.
- Store flammable liquids in approved safety cans that prevent the escape of flammable
vapours.
- Store flammable liquids away from open flames and sparks.
- Keep waste materials away from heat sources.
- Store chemicals in detached buildings of non-combustible construction with ventilation at
ground level / ceiling level.
- Limit the storage of flammable, corrosive and toxic chemicals to the minimum possible
quantities.
- Ensure that all containers have labels for proper identification of contents.
- Avoid all sources of ignition in the chemical storage areas.
 Maintenance
- Ensure periodical maintenance and inspection of plant and equipment.
- Check substance containers regularly for damage or leaks.
- Ensure flammable material storage areas are properly maintained.
 Waste disposal
- Place oily rags in sealed metal containers.
- Properly dispose of flammable and combustible waste at regular intervals.
- Properly dispose of liquids and cleaning materials.
Housekeeping is however not the only way in which to prevent fires. Fire hazards are presented by
countless other workplace elements, the most of important of which are:
 Hazardous substances
- Closely monitor the use of flammable materials and liquids.

- Ensure proper bonding and grounding when flammable liquids are transferred or transported.
- Read labels and MSDSs for the fire hazards related to chemicals.
- Never use petrol or similar accelerants to start or encourage fires.
 Smoking
- Obey smoking rules and “No Smoking” signs.
- Extinguish cigarettes and matches completely in designated containers.
 Electrical safety
- Keep wiring, appliances, and other electrical equipment in good condition.
- Do not use equipment with damaged cords or plugs.
- Don’t overload electrical circuits.
- Shut down electrical equipment that smokes or sparks.
- Protect appropriate outlets with ground-fault circuit interrupters.
- Uncoil extension cords fully before use.
- Only use extension cords for temporary wiring.
- Only use extension cords of adequate amperage for the activity/task being performed.
- Do not use equipment that gives off unusual heat or smells odd.
- Do not use electrical equipment when flammable gases, vapours, liquids, dust, or fibres are
present.
- Chemical sources of ignition (such as DC motors, switched and circuit breakers) should be
eliminated where flammable liquids are handled or stored.
- Only approved explosion-proof devices should be used where flammable liquids are handled
or stored.
- Every effort should be made to eliminate the possibility of static sparks which can be
generated as a result of electron transfer between two contacting surfaces. The electrons can
discharge in a small volume, raising the temperature to above the ignition temperature.
 Mechanical safety
- Mechanical sparks can be produced as a result of friction - only non-sparking tools should be
used in areas where flammable liquids are stored or handled.
 Hot work
- Conduct hot work strictly in accordance with the specified work permit requirements.
- Control workplace ignition sources, such as welding and burning.
- Heat producing equipment such as burners, heat exchangers, boilers, ovens, stoves, fryers,
etc., must be properly maintained and kept clean of accumulations of flammable residues.
- Open flames, such as cutting and welding torches, furnaces, matches, and heaters sources
should be kept away from operations where flammable liquids are used.
- Keep hot equipment away from combustible materials.
- Cutting or welding on flammable liquids containers and equipment should not be performed
unless the equipment has been properly emptied and purged with a neutral gas such as
nitrogen.
 Compressed gasses
- Gas containers/cylinders shall be protected as follows:
 Combustible materials shall be kept a minimum of 3 metres from gas containers.

 Cylinders must be protected against physical damage.
 Cylinders must be stored upright and secured to prevent falling.
 Cylinders must not be placed near elevators, unprotected platform edges or other areas
where they would drop more than 1 m.
 Cylinders must not be placed in areas where they may be damaged by falling objects.
 When cylinders are not in use, valve protective caps must be in place.
 Ropes, chains or slings may not be used to suspend gas cylinders, unless the cylinder was
manufactured with appropriate lifting attachments.
- Separation - when stored, gas cylinders must be separated from each other based on their
hazard classes.
- Marking - gas cylinders must be marked with the name of the contents.
 Motorised equipment –
- fuel is stored in an approved area outside the building;
- is never refuelled while in operation;
- is located so that exhausts do not discharge against combustible materials; and
- exhausts are piped to the outside of the building, where possible.
The most effective way in which to prevent fires is an adequately aware and trained workforce. All
employees are therefore trained and made aware of the potential fire hazards and fire prevention
measures related to their jobs and that they must report fire hazards which they are unable to correct
themselves.
2. Fire Protection & Control

While the most effective way in which to deal with fires is to prevent them from occurring as far as
possible, fire prevention efforts are unfortunately not always effective and fires do occur occasionally.
It is essential to be prepared and ready to react to quickly, efficiently and safely deal with fires when
they do occur. This state of ready and preparedness is achieved through the installation and
implementation of fire protection measures.
Fire protection consists of three steps and they are taken in the following sequence:
 Raise the fire alarm – notify the area/building/site of the fire and evacuate appropriately;
 Contain the fire – stop the fire from spreading to neighbouring areas/buildings/sites; and
 Extinguish the fire – as quickly and safely as possible.
2.1. Establish fire protection requirements
Fire protection requirements are established by carefully analysing the fire risks as identified during
risk assessments. It is essential to identify all the different fires that could conceivably occur as the
fire-fighting equipment required to deal with the different fires could be quite diverse.
In terms of the fire triangle, fire protection measures are intended to cut off the supply of as many as
possible of the fire triangle elements, namely heat, fuel and oxygen, as the fire will not continue to
burn if all three are not present in the correct and sufficient quantities. It is however not always
possible to completely cut off the supply of any/all of these. In many cases the disruption of any/all of
the fire triangle elements is sufficient to extinguish a fire, but in such cases it is then important to
effectively isolate the three to prevent the fire from flaring up again.
There is however not a single solution for fire protection. There are a variety of different fires that
could occur in a single workplace due to the many different fire hazards that are normally present.
Similar fires can in some cases fact be treated with the same fire protection measure(s), but this is not
always the case.
Certain fires, such as diesel and petrol fires, require special fire protection measures to enable them
to be quickly, effectively and safely extinguished. Another prime example is an electrical fire which
cannot, under any circumstances whatsoever, be extinguished by using water due to the
incompatibility of electricity and water.
Each fire hazard is therefore analysed and evaluated to establish the type of fire that it would cause.
Suitable fire protection measures to enable each type of fire to be extinguished are then identified
and implemented at the points where fires could potentially occur.
Expert knowledge and assistance from fire engineers and fire departments, for instance, are sought
when there is any uncertainty about the types of fires that could occur and the fire protection
measures that would enable the Contractor to effectively deal with such fires.
Fire risks are evaluated to determine the types of fire that the Contractor could potentially have to
deal with. The worst case scenario for each fire risk is considered and the fire protection measures
that would be required to quickly, effectively and safely deal with the fire are identified.
2.2. Identify required fire protection equipment
Following the identification of the fires that could potentially occur and the analysis of each of these
fires, the correct fire-fighting equipment that would be required to effectively deal with a fire, were it
to break out, must be identified.
2.3. Portable fire extinguishers
Selecting fire extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers are usually named after the type of extinguishing agent they contain, e.g.
an extinguisher containing foam will be referred to as a foam type fire extinguisher. Portable
extinguishers are the first line of fire-fighting and are installed around the site, workshop and office
areas. Various types of extinguishers are available for use on the different classes of fire. In most
instances, the extinguisher is selected to suit the hazard/s in that location.
Class A Extinguishers will put out fires in ordinary combustibles, such as

wood and paper. Water, foam and dry powder fire extinguishers are
suitable.
Class B Extinguishers should be used on fires involving flammable liquids,

such as grease, gasoline, oil, etc. Foam, CO2 and dry powder fire
extinguishers are suitable.
Class C Extinguishers are suitable for use on electrically energised fires.

The presence of the letter “C” indicates that the extinguishing agent is
non-conductive. CO2 and dry powder fire extinguishers are suitable.
Class D Extinguishers are designed for use on flammable metals and are
often specific for the type of metal in question. There is no picture
designator for Class D extinguishers. Special dry powder fire extinguishers
are suitable.
Multi class rating and labelling
Many extinguishers available today can be used on different types of fires and will be labelled with
more than one designator, e.g. A-B, B-C, or A-B-C. Make sure that multi-purpose extinguishers are
properly labelled. The old style of labelling indicates suitability for use on Class A, B, and C fires.
Old style of labelling New style of labelling
The new style of labelling shows that this extinguisher may be used on ordinary combustibles,
flammable liquids, or electrical equipment fires. If a diagonal red line is drawn through the picture it
indicates what type of fire this extinguisher is NOT suitable for. In this example, the fire extinguisher
could be used on ordinary combustibles and flammable liquids fires, but not for electrical equipment
fires. A foam fire extinguisher meets these requirements.
Non-suitability
Size of the unit
Extinguishers are manufactured in various sizes (extinguishing material mass) from 1 kg to 20 kg. It
must be remembered that the extinguisher has to be carried to the fire and must be accessible and
cannot be too heavy. If an extinguisher becomes too heavy to handle, it is fitted to a wheeled cart and
called a mobile fire extinguisher.
Placement of fire extinguishers
In deciding where to place fire extinguishers, the number required and the location needs to be
considered.
Note: Take a site map of the premises and a floor plan of the buildings and indicate the occupancy and
floor area of each area on the map or plan. After the number of fire extinguishers required has been
determined, the locations can be marked on the map. The site map and or floor plan should be made
available to the insurance company and the local fire brigade.
The number of fire extinguishers required
The type, size (capacity or mass) and number of fire extinguishers placed in any area depends on the
occupancy, i.e. what the area is used for, the hazards (or risks) in that area and the site/floor area.
The placement of fire extinguishers
Consider the following when deciding on the placement of fire extinguishers:
 Consider the activities in the area, i.e. movement of personnel and vehicles
 Any fire-fighting equipment in any building or on any vehicle shall be installed such that it is ready
for its purpose at all times
 The smaller fire extinguishers are fitted on quick release wall brackets at a comfortable height
(1.25 m) above floor level. Large units are stood on low platforms (+10 cm) in clearly marked areas
 Extinguishers must always be easily visible and accessible
 Appropriate signage must be posted so that it can be read from at least 7.5 metres
 Fire extinguishers should be placed in areas where the ambient conditions meet the requirements
as specified by the original equipment manufacturer
Signage requirements
The disposition of such fire-fighting equipment shall be clearly visible or shall be indicated by symbolic
signs which shall comply with the requirements contained in an approved national standard.
Typical placement and marking of a portable fire extinguisher
Operating a fire extinguisher
Most fires start off small and, if not detected or extinguished, can grow and spread at great speed
until whole areas are engulfed. Hand-held extinguishers are intended for tackling small fires before
they can take hold and spread. As discussed above, the extinguishers in the area are normally suited
to the class of fire possible in the area – however CHECK before using.
Before tackling a fire make sure that you have raised an alarm (break-glass, phone, tell colleague etc.)
before attempting to fight it. This is essential so that help can be summoned and the area evacuated
in case the fire gets out of control.
Note: Remember, a fire extinguisher, depending on size and type, operates for only 25 – 60 seconds if
used continuously.
Even though extinguishers come in a number of shapes and sizes, they all operate in a similar manner.
Here's an easy acronym for fire extinguisher use (PASS):
1. P - Pull pin
2. A - Aim nozzle
3. S - Squeeze handle
4. S - Sweep nozzle

Fire protection systems and equipment must be inspected on a monthly basis to establish whether
they are in fact still in good working order. The monthly inspection of fire extinguishers can be
conducted by a person designated by the employer to ensure that the extinguisher is serviceable and
that the regulatory requirements are being met. Typical items to be inspected on a monthly basis
would be:
 Location
- Proper signage
- Condition of signage
- Demarcation correct
- Access clear
- Fitted correctly
 Fire extinguisher
- Service card attached and legible
- Annual service done as scheduled i.e. service card signed on service date. Verification of
service documents can be done as a systems check
- Unit identified correctly according to the company’s equipment identification procedure
- Mandatory markings present and legible
- Pressure level acceptable (if gauge is present - gauge in the green)
- Safety pin in place - if not the fire extinguisher could have been used
- Security seal in place - if not the unit may have been tampered with
- The unit should not be damaged, dented or corroded
Note: If any of the checks on the fire extinguisher indicate a problem the unit must be replaced.
Fire protection systems and equipment must be inspected and maintained once a year by suitably
trained personnel, such as fire extinguisher technicians or the fire department, and are tested where
the status cannot be established through inspection.
During the annual inspection and service the following aspects may be considered:
 Unit re-pressurised
 Inspected for damage, dents and corrosion
 Powder replaced if required (the replacement frequency depends on the type of powder
 Vessel hydraulic pressure tested if required. The pressure test requirements depend on the type
of fire extinguisher but are usually done on a four to five year cycle
 Rubber seals replaced
4. Training
Fire prevention is the responsibility of everyone. The entire workforce must therefore be trained in:
 The fire prevention measures in place;

 What their responsibilities are in terms of the fire prevention measures; and
 How everyone can contribute in the prevention of fires.
Employees performing activities and tasks or involved in processes with significant fire risks must be
trained in the fire prevention measures specific to that process/activity/task and what their fire
prevention responsibilities are.
Fire wardens must be trained in the different types of fires they may encounter and the use of fire
protection equipment to enable them to effectively deal with fires when they do occur.
Safe Work Practice - Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
In terms of hazard control, personal protective equipment (PPE) is considered a method of last resort
and should not be used as a substitute for other reasonable measures which would result in the
control of a hazard. Personal protective equipment is the last line of defence a person has against a
hazard that may be encountered on the job. The proper use of this equipment may reduce or eliminate
the extent of harm or injury and therefore its importance must not be under-estimated. It is critical
that the appropriate personal protective equipment for the situation is used, and that:
1. its limitations are fully understood;

2. it is properly fitted for the individual;
3. the person using the personal protective equipment is trained in its use, care and maintenance;
and
4. it is regarded by the person using it as normal attire for working in that environment or with the
particular hazard.
Each individual, to whom personal protective equipment has been issued, is fully accountable for
maintaining it in good operating condition.
NOTE:
When determining controls, or considering changes to existing controls, consideration shall be given
to reducing the risks according to the following hierarchy:
a) elimination;
b) substitution;
c) engineering controls;
d) signage/warnings and/or administrative controls;
e) personal protective equipment.
Pre-contact control is the first and most important method because it prevents the hazard from
reaching the worker. Pre-contact control methods include substituting materials or processes that are
less hazardous, isolating hazardous processes, retrofitting existing equipment, or acquiring safer
equipment. Pre-contact control can also be achieved by e.g. providing protection to the worker with
local exhaust ventilation, machine guarding, better housekeeping, and safe work practices. Where pre-
contact controls are not practical, feasible, or totally effective then point-of-contact controls must be
used.
The point-of-contact control is important, but secondary because it cannot eliminate the hazard. It only
manages the hazard at the point of contact with the worker. This form of control is primarily
accomplished through personal protective equipment. PPE should only be used:
 as an interim (short term) measure before controls are implemented;

 where pre-contact control technology is not available;
 where pre-contact controls are inadequate;

 during activities such as maintenance, clean up, and repair where pre-contact controls are not
feasible or effective; and/or
 during emergency situations.
1. Types of PPE
1.1. Skin, Hands and Body Protection
Employees must always dress suitably for work as items such as denim coveralls and long sleeve cotton
shirts protect against minor scrapes and bruises as well as ultraviolet exposure outdoors. Clothing
made of cotton or wool is recommended as it is more flame retardant then synthetic fibres that can
be readily ignited by or melted by heat or electric flash. Special body apparel is worn to prevent
contact with:
1. noxious gas, liquid, fume or dust;

2. an object that may puncture, cut or abrade the skin,
3. a hot object, liquid, or molten metal; or
4. radiant heat.
Gloves are worn to prevent most minor cuts, scrapes and abrasions when handling sharp or abrasive
materials. Specialised personal protective equipment for hazards include: finger guards, thimbles and
cots, hand pads, mitts and barrier creams. Material Safety Data Sheets for hazardous chemicals
indicate which gloves and other personal protective equipment are required for safe handling.
PPE is of a type and condition that will not expose the wearer to unnecessary and avoidable hazards.
Where there is danger of contact with moving parts of machinery -
 the clothing must fit closely around the body;

 dangling neckwear, bracelets, wristwatches, rings, or like articles must not be worn; and
 hair (including facial hair) must be completely confined or cut short.
Employees whose duties are regularly performed in areas and under circumstances where they are
exposed to the danger of moving vehicles must wear distinguishing apparel or devices of highly visible
material.
1.2. Eye and Face Protection
Eye and face protection is used to protect the worker from such hazards as:
 flying objects and particles;

 molten metals
 splashing liquids; and
 ultraviolet, infrared and visible radiation (welding).
Basic eye protection includes safety spectacles with or without side shields, mono-frame goggles and
eyecup goggles (as with some styles of flame cutting and gas welding goggles). Clip-on side shields
must be used if they are not a built in feature of the spectacles.
Face protection includes chemical and impact resistant (plastic) face shields, (metal) mesh face shields
for hot or humid conditions and chainsaw use and welders’ shields or helmets with specified cover
and filter plates and lenses. Basic eye protection is worn with (underneath) face shields.
1.3. Head Protection
Safety headgear is used to protect the head from the impact of flying and falling objects, bumps,
splashes from chemicals or harmful substances, and contact with energized objects and equipment.
Safety hats must be -
 worn wherever there is a hazard of flying or falling objects;

 adjusted to fit securely on the head - where there is a likelihood of the hat falling off, or being
blown off, chin straps must be used;
 inspected before and after each shift and any signs of wear or damage to the suspension harness
indicates it must be repaired or replaced
 replaced if there is any damage to the shell;
 discarded if it was subjected to any penetration or significant impact;
 cleaned using warm water and mild soap as solvents - such as paint thinner - can damage the
material; and
 stored in a clean, dry location.
1.4. Foot Protection
Safety footwear is worn where there is danger of injury to feet through falling or moving objects, or
from burning, scalding, cutting, puncturing, slipping or similar causes. Safety footwear must always be
laced up and securely tied to prevent a tripping hazard or the footwear from falling off. It must be
maintained in good condition, routine inspections are completed to -
 check for tears or holes in the leather;

 make sure the steel toe caps are not exposed; and
 check the wear of the sole.
1.5. Hearing Protection
Hearing protection is required where the level of noise in a workplace exceeds an average of 85
decibels (dB) over an eight hour shift. Where practical, it is preferable to reduce the level of noise at,
or close to its source through the application of engineering controls. Administrative controls, such as
limiting the amount of time an individual worker is exposed to excessive noise through job rotation,
are also considered. The use of hearing protection is the method of last resort, but is used where
engineering and administrative controls are not feasible. Hearing protection is available in three
general types:
1. Disposable ear plugs (made of pliable material, one size fits all but can only be used once);
2. Permanent plugs (must be fitted to provide a good seal but can be washed and reused); and
3. Ear muffs (when properly fitted and worn, generally provide more protection than plugs).
1.6. Respiratory Protection
Where personnel are exposed to respiratory hazards generated by equipment, materials, or

procedures such as spray-painting and welding, proper work practices and engineering controls are
used to reduce these hazards. Only where engineering or administrative controls cannot be applied,
and it is the only practical control, is respiratory protective equipment used. Protection is ensured not
only by the respirator, but also by its proper selection and use. Respiratory equipment for a particular
job is only selected by someone who understands the characteristics of the hazard, the anticipated
exposure, and the imitations of the equipment. Most manufacturers can assist with selection.
Fit testing of a potential wearer is conducted by a competent person, who has been trained in fit
testing, before a wearer is allowed to wear any tight fitting respirator. Respirators must be inspected
before use to ensure that it is in good operating condition, and then cleaned after each use.
1.7. Fall Arrest/Restraint Systems
Body belts and harnesses are used where a person is exposed to the hazard of falling from a work area
that is:
 2m or more above the nearest safe surface or water;

 above a surface or thing that could cause injury to the person on contact; and
 above an open tank, pit or vat containing hazardous materials,
A fall-arrest system consists of:
 full body harness;

 lanyard;
 rope-grab;
 lifeline; and
 lifeline anchor connectors
Only internally approved safety belts, full body harness and lanyards may be used. Full body harnesses
must be snug-fitting and worn with all hardware and straps intact and properly fastened. Safety belts
are only allowed to be used as a travel restraint/restrict system as fall arrest systems require a full
body harness.
A lifeline may never be used as a service line, as it should be just slack enough to permit free
movement of the service lines. The only time it becomes a load bearing line is in the event of a fall. No
more than one worker shall be attached to a life line.
All equipment used in a fall arrest system must be maintained to manufacturer’s specifications. Any
equipment in need of maintenance must be tagged and removed from service.
A guardrail, personnel safety net or temporary flooring may be used instead of a fall arrest system.
2. Conduct PPE Needs Analysis

Perform a hazard assessment of the workplace to determine if hazards are present, or are likely to be
present, which necessitate the use of PPE. In order to assess the need for PPE the following steps
should be taken:
1. Review injury/incident data to help identify problem areas

2. Conduct a survey of the areas in question. The purpose of the survey is to identify sources of
hazards to employees and visitors. Consideration should be given to the basic hazard categories:
i. Impact;
ii. Penetration;
iii. Compression (roll-over);
iv. Chemical;
v. Heat;
vi. Harmful dust;
vii. Light (optical) radiation; and
viii. Electrical
3. During the survey, the person(s) performing the assessment should observe:
i. Sources of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where any movement of tools, machine
elements or particles could exist, or movement of people that could result in collision with
stationary objects.
ii. Sources of high temperatures that could result in burns, eye injury or ignition of protective
equipment, etc.
iii. Types of chemical exposures.
iv. Sources of harmful dust.
v. Sources of light radiation, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat treating, high
intensity lights, etc.
vi. Sources of falling objects or potential for dropping objects.
vii. Sources of sharp objects which might pierce the feet or cut the hands.
viii. Sources of rolling or pinching objects which could crush the feet.
ix. Layout of workplace and location of people
x. Any electrical hazards
Following the identification of the hazards that need to be controlled with PPE and the probable
methods of contact of these hazards, the PPE items that will be required to provide the required
barrier between the employee and the hazard can be identified.
3. Select PPE
PPE selection is based on the requirements identified during the PPE needs analysis. After identifying
the required PPE items, select the correct items that would be able to effectively control the hazards
and prevent the contact under consideration. It is critical that the appropriate PPE for the situation is
used and that its imitations are fully understood.
All PPE is not made the same - it must be ensured that the selected PPE –
 is appropriate for the risk(s) involved and the conditions at the place where exposure may arise;
 takes ergonomic considerations into account, be capable of being fitted to (and used by) that
employee, where applicable;
 so far as is practicable, prevent or adequately control the risk of exposure without increasing the
overall risk;
 is designed and manufactured to an approved standard - signifying that the PPE satisfies certain
basic safety requirements and in some cases will have been tested and certified by an independent
body.
Employees should be consulted in the proposed selection of PPE to ascertain whether or not it is
suitable; the selection of types and styles of PPE in conjunction with the H&S Appointee and should
have an informed choice wherever possible.
4. Purchase PPE
PPE items must only be purchased from suppliers who will ensure that only approved PPE is provided
and will include the following services:
 Advice on PPE;
 Information relating to any test results;
 Advice on personal fitting, use, cleaning, maintenance and storage of PPE;
 A range of sizes (where appropriate);
 Information on the availability and need for replacement parts;
 Demonstration of the PPE; and
 Immediate replacement of any defective PPE.
When the required PPE has been purchased, each item of PPE is fit to the individual to whom it will
be issued on an individual basis. Fitting is done by qualified personnel. At the time of fitting each
employee is shown how to properly wear and maintain their PPE. Where more than one sort of PPE
has to be used simultaneously, each must be compatible with the other and full effectiveness must be
maintained, without one item of PPE compromising another item’s effectiveness in the process.
NOTE:
If a PPE device is unnecessarily heavy or poorly fitted it is unlikely that it will be worn. Note also that if
a PPE device is unattractive or uncomfortable, or there is no allowance for workers to choose among
models, compliance is likely to be poor. Use every opportunity to provide flexibility in the choice of PPE
as long as it meets required standards.
5. Issue PPE
Each employee’s PPE is issued with their PPE once it has been properly fitted. The PPE items issued to
each employee is captured on a PPE issue register (form provided). At the time of the PPE being issued,
it must be ensured each employee is also properly trained in the proper use and maintenance of their
individual PPE items. PPE is not shared among employees as this could pose a significant health and
hygiene risk.
6. PPE Care and Maintenance

All PPE shall be regularly cleaned and maintained to ensure that the PPE provides the level of
protection it is designed for. It is the responsibility of the user to safeguard and take care of the issued
PPE. Damaged or defective PPE should not be worn for any purpose. Employees are to regularly
inspect their PPE and order replacements, as required -
 due to normal wear and tear;

 should any specific damage occur which compromises the effectiveness of the clothing or
equipment (e.g. contamination);
 if any item is lost; or
 where an item has a specific use-by-date, it should be replaced prior to that date.
A reasonable level of spare PPE, spare parts and cleaning materials shall be kept to facilitate this.
Ordering of replacement PPE shall be carried out through the Line Manager and/or the H&S
Appointee.
The correct manner of cleaning and maintaining the PPE shall be provided by the manufacturer when
purchased, bet below are some general tips on how to care for PPE to ensure adequate protection.
6.1. Hard hats
 Clean hard hats regularly with warm water and soap, and allow to air dry.
 Store head protection out of the sun, away from extreme temperatures, and in a safe place (like
a locker) where it can't get knocked around and damaged.
 Check the headband to make sure that it isn't stretched or worn and that the hat fits comfortably
on the head.
 Replace a hard hat if it is cracked, dented, or has taken a heavy blow.
6.2. Safety eyewear
 Clean safety glasses regularly with mild soap and water.

 Wash lenses with water before wiping to prevent scratching. (If you need to clean the glasses and
don't have access to clean water, first blow dust and grit from lenses before wiping.)
 Store eye protection preferably in a clean dust-proof case or in a safe place such as the top shelf
of a locker where it won't get scratched or otherwise damaged.
 Replace safety glasses if frames are bent or if lenses are scratched or pitted and impair vision.
6.3. Hearing protection
 Wash reusable earplugs with a damp cloth after each use/every day, store them in a clean case,
and replace if plugs are hard or discoloured.
6.4. Foot protection
 Wipe wet or soiled shoes with a clean cloth or paper towel.

 Change socks during the lunch break to keep feet and shoes dry if feet sweat a lot.
 Air out work shoes after work, and check regularly for signs of damage or wear.
 Regularly apply shoe polish to prevent the leather from drying and cracking.
 Have worn or damaged shoes repaired, or replace them.
6.5. Gloves
 Keep gloves clean and dry.

 Check for holes, tears, and other damage before each use.
 Replace worn or damaged gloves right away
Safe Work Practice - Rigging, Slinging and Lifting
The Organisation must ensure that employees, who direct, rig and handle loads –
 have received training in the principles of the operation;

 are able to establish weights and judge distances, heights and clearances;
 are capable of selecting tackle and lifting gear as well as the rigging method suitable for the loads
to be lifted; and
 are capable of directing the movement of the lifting device and load to ensure the safety or all
personnel.
All rigging and lifting equipment, including hardware and accessories, must have a formally designated
equipment custodian. The custodian is responsible for ensuring that –
 all rigging and lifting equipment are reviewed for conformance to relevant specifications before it
is put into service;
 equipment undergoes all required inspections; and
 non-compliant equipment is removed from service.
1. Rigging
The rigging of loads must be accomplished with relative precision by trained, experienced personnel.
To ensure that the safe practices are followed, competent supervision must ensure that –
 rigging equipment of adequate capacity is used for the job;

 rigging equipment is in safe working condition;
 loads are properly rigged; and
 rigging crew and other affected personnel maintain safety practices.
1.1. Rigging operation
The most important step in any rigging operation is determining the weight of the load to be hoisted.
This information can be obtained from shipping papers, design plans, catalogue data, manufacturer’s
specifications and other dependable sources. Calculate the load if the information is not available.
The load applied to any rigging or rigging assembly must not exceed the working load limit or any
single component.
Loads must be rigged so as to prevent any parts from shifting or dislodging during the lift. Suspended
loads must be securely slung and properly balanced before they are set in motion. After a rigging
assembly has been made up and before any lift is attempted, the Organisation must ensure that –
 the assembly is certified safe for lifting by a qualified rigger or similar person with the necessary
competence and experience in rigging to make such a judgement; and
 a test lift of the assembly is undertaken in which the load is lifted a small distance from rest to
ascertain its stability before the actual lift is undertaken.
Note: Never wrap the hoist rope around the load. Attach the load to the hook by slings or other rigging
devices adequate and suitable for the load being lifted.
1.2. Hardware
Components used for rigging must be marked as follows:
 Rigging fittings must be marked with the manufacturer’s identification, product identifier and the
working load limit (WLL) or sufficient information to readily determine the WLL.
 The WLL of existing fittings not identified as specified in the previous paragraph must be
determined by a qualified person and marked on the fitting.
 A wire rope sling with a swaged or poured socket or a pressed fitting must be permanently
identified with –
- Its WLL;
- The angle on which the WLL is based; and
- The name or mark of the sling manufacturer.
Loose materials, such as stones, bricks, tiles or other objects must be lifted in a receptacle of adequate
strength. Where a receptacle is used for raising or lowering such loose materials, the receptacle must
be enclosed or constructed to prevent the accidental fall of any such objects.
Rigging hardware must be removed from service if damage is visible and must only be returned to
service when approved by a qualified person. Remove equipment from service if the following
damage is:
 Missing or illegible manufacturer’s name or trademark and/or rated load identification;

 Indications of heat damage, including weld spatter or arc strikes;
 Excessive pitting or corrosion;
 Bent, twisted, distorted, stretched, elongated, cracked or broken load-bearing components;
 Excessive nicks or gouges;
 A 10% reduction in the original or catalogue dimension at any point around the body or pins;
 Incomplete thread engagement;
 Excessive thread damage;
 Evidence of unauthorised modifications;
 Other conditions, including visible damage that cause doubt as to the continued use of equipment;
 Swivel hoist rings that are unable to freely rotate or pivot; and
 Loose or missing nuts, bolts, cotter pins, snap rings or other fasteners and retaining devices on
swivels.
2. Lifting Tackle
Every lifting tackle item bought, or otherwise obtained, must be accompanied by a test certificate.
Wire and fibre slings are exempt from the above requirement but a certificate must be obtained
showing the safe working load, including a reference to the batch sample test carried out on the
material from which the rope or sling was made.
The Organisation must ensure that –
 only lifting tackle with a minimum safety factor of four is used;

 lifting tackle has a minimum safety factor as indicated:
- 10 for natural fibre ropes;
- 6 for steel wire ropes, man-made fibre ropes and textile webbing; and
- 4 for high-tensile steel chains.
2.1. Slings
Employees involved in hoisting and rigging must exercise care when selecting and using slings.
Selection must be based on the size and type of the load and the environmental conditions of the
workplace. They must be visually inspected before each use to ensure their effectiveness. Improper
use of hoisting equipment, including slings, may result in overloading, excessive speed or sudden
acceleration or deceleration of equipment.
There are generally six types of slings: chains, wire rope, metal mesh, natural fibre rope, synthetic
fibre rope and synthetic web. Slings are usually categorised into three groups, namely chains, wire
rope, and fibre rope and synthetic web. Each type has its own particular advantages and
disadvantages. Factors to consider when choosing the best sling for the job include size, weight,
shape, temperature, the sensitivity of the material being moved and the environmental conditions
under which the sling will be used. The following guide may be useful in selecting the appropriate
sling:
 Chains
- Chains are strong and able to adapt to the shape of the load. Care must be taken when using
chain slings because sudden shocks will damage them. This may result in sling failure and
possible injury to employees or damage to the load. Inspect chain slings visually prior to use.
Pay particular attention to any stretching, nicks, gouges and wear in excess of the allowances
made by the manufacturer. These signs indicate that the sling may be unsafe and must be
removed from service immediately.
 Wire rope
- Wire rope is composed of individual wires that have been twisted to form strands. Strands
are then twisted to form a wire rope. When wire rope has a fibre core, it is usually more
flexible but less resistant to environmental damage. Conversely, wire rope with a core that is
made of a wire rope strand tends to have a greater strength and is more resistant to heat
damage. When selecting a wire rope sling to give the best service, there are four
characteristics to consider:
 Strength of wire rope is a function if its size (e.g., diameter of the rope), grade and
construction and must be sufficient to accommodate the maximum applied load.
 Fatigue (bending without failure) of wire rope is caused by the development of small
cracks during small radius bends. The best means for preventing fatigue failure of wire
rope slings is to use blocking or padding to increase the bend radius.
 Abrasive wear is the ability of wire rope to withstand abrasion and is determined by the
size and number of individual wires used to make up the rope. Smaller wires bend more
readily and offer greater flexibility, but are less able to withstand abrasion. Larger wires
are less flexible, but withstand abrasion better.
 Abuse or misuse of wire rope slings will cause their failure long before any other factor.
Abuse can lead to serious structural damage, resulting in kinks or bird caging (which is
where the wire rope strands are forcibly untwisted and become spread outwards). To
prevent injuries to employees and prolong the life of the sling, strict adherence to safe
and proper use of wire rope slings is essential.
- Wire rope slings must be visually inspected before use. Slings with excessive broken wires,
severe corrosion, localised wear, damage to end-fittings (e.g., kinks, bird caging, and
distortion) must be removed from service and discarded.
 Metal mesh slings
- Metal mesh slings are widely used in metalworking and in other industries where loads are
abrasive, hot, or will tend to cut web slings. Unlike nylon and wire rope slings, metal mesh
slings resist abrasion and cutting. Metal mesh slings grip the load firmly without extensive
stretching, easily maintaining balanced loads. Uncoated metal mesh slings withstand
temperatures up to 288 degrees C. Metal mesh slings have the following properties:
 Smooth, flat bearing surfaces,
 Carbon steel mesh that resists corrosion and abrasion, and
 Flexible mesh that conforms to irregular shapes.
- Chemically active environments can affect the strength of metal mesh slings. Consult the
manufacturer before using a sling in such environments.
 Fibre rope and synthetic web slings
- Fibre rope and synthetic web slings are used primarily for temporary work, such as
construction or painting, and are the best choice for use on expensive loads, highly finished
or fragile parts and delicate equipment. Fibre rope slings deteriorate on contact with acids
and caustics and must therefore not be used around these substances. Fibre rope slings that
exhibit cuts, gouges, worn surface areas, brittle or discoloured fibres, melting or charring must
be discarded. A build-up of powder-like sawdust on the inside of a fibre rope indicates
excessive internal wear and that the sling is unsafe. Finally, if the rope fibres separate easily
when scratched with a fingernail, it indicates that the sling has suffered some kind of chemical
damage and should be discarded. Synthetic web slings are commonly made of nylon,
polypropylene or polyester and have the following properties in common:
 Strength – depending on their size, synthetic web slings can handle loads of up to 150
tons.
 Convenience and safety – synthetic web slings adjust to the load contour and hold it with
a tight, non-slip grip.
 Load protection – unlike other sling materials, synthetic web is less likely to mar, deface
or scratch highly polished surfaces.
 Shock absorbency – regardless of the construction material, shock loading (e.g., excessive
speed and rapid acceleration or deceleration) of slings should be minimised. However, it
should be noted that synthetic web slings can absorb heavy shocks without damage.
 Temperature resistance – the lifting capacity of synthetic web is unaffected by
temperatures of up to 80° Celsius.
 Economy and long life – synthetic web slings have a low initial cost and a long service life.
They are unaffected by mildew, rot, bacteria, they resist some chemical action and have
excellent abrasion resistance.
- Synthetic web slings must be inspected before use and must be removed from service if found
to have chemical burns, melting or charring of any part of the surface, snags, tears, or cuts,
broken stitches, distorted fittings, or wear or elongation beyond the manufacturer’s
specifications.
Lifting equipment must be stored appropriately to protect the equipment from damage, preferably in
a dry, indoor location.
2.2. Lifting hooks
Lifting hooks are usually equipped with a safety latch to prevent disengagement of the lifting wire
rope sling, chain or rope to which the load is attached. The hook and safety latch must be inspected
before use. The hook may not be used if it is worn or damaged, or if the safety latch is damaged or
missing, using open hooks is prohibited when rigging loads for lifting.
Load disengagement can cause severe injury or death. The use of a hook with a safety latch does not
preclude accidental detachment of a slack sling or a load from the hook. Visual verification of proper
hook engagement is required in all instances.
Note: Do not –
 exceed the WLL of the hook (or lift any load in excess of the rated capacity of the weakest rigging
component); or
 use a hook in extreme temperatures, i.e. below -40° Celsius, and remove the hook from service if
heated above 500° Celsius; or
 use a hook in alkaline or acidic conditions.
2.3. Below-the-hook lifting devices
A name-plate or other permanent marking must be on a spreader bar or specialised below-the-hook

lifting device and must display the –
 manufacturer’s name and address;

 serial number;
 weight of the device, if more than 45kg; and
 the working load limit (certified by a professional engineer or established by the lifting device
manufacturer).
A spreader bar and any other specialised below-the-hook lifting device must be considered as part of
the lifted load.
2.4. Shackles
When using shackles:
 Use shackles for their intended purpose only.

 Apply the load slowly – do not jerk.
 Do not apply angular loads to round pin shackles.
 De-rate screw pin and bolt-type shackles when angular load is applied.
 Do not heat or weld shackles.
Shackles and pins have matching serial numbers and may not be interchanged. Changing pins
between shackles may result in uncertified or old items of lifting tackle being used and safe working
loads being exceeded. Ensure that –
 shackles are matched to the grade of sling in use;

 the correct shackle pin is used – never replace a pin with a bolt and nut; and
 threaded shackle pins are secured in place with split pins prior to use.
2.5. Eye bolts
Plain or shoulderless eye bolts or ring bolts should only be used for vertical loadings, as angle loading
on shoulderless bolts could possibly result in the bolts bending or breaking. Shoulder eye bolts can
however be used with vertical or angled loadings. Eye bolts must be screwed down to the shoulder
or until the threaded section bottoms out. Care must be taken to prevent the use of incompatible
threads.
Eye bolts may only be used in combination with hooks when a shackle that comfortably
accommodates the hook is fitted between the hook and the eye bolt. Slings may not be passed
through eye bolts and should only be used in conjunction with shackles, with the eye of the sling
attached to the shackle.
2.6. Pulley blocks and gin wheels
Employees using pulley blocks or gin wheels must:
 Ensure that the pulley block/gin wheel is in sound condition and good working order;
 Take action to ensure the immediate repair or replacement of damaged parts, with recommended
parts only, before using the pulley block/gin wheel;
 Ensure that the support for the pulley block/gin wheel is capable of withstanding a load of at least
1½ times the safe working load of the block;
 Keep the pulley block/gin wheel clean for optimal and safe performance;
 Keep the work are clean and tidy and free from equipment and materials not directly involved in
the use of the pulley block/gin wheel;
 Ensure that all non-essential persons keep a safe distance while the pulley block is in use;
 Ensure that load slings are fully engaged in the load hook and that the hook safety bar is in the
closed position;
 Raise and lower loads on the pulley in a smooth, controlled manner – do not shock-load the pulley
block/gin wheel by allowing the attached load to fall freely, even over very short distances;
 Use the pulley block/gin wheel only for lifting and not for suspending a load;
 Use the pulley block/gin wheel only with rope of the specified diameter.
Note: Do not –
 attempt to free a jammed rope or pulley while a load is attached – use alternative means to
support the load, then unhook the rope from the load and release the jam;
 try to raise a load with more than one pulley block – use a single block of adequate capacity; or
 use the pulley block to drag the load across the floor – always position the load directly below the
block.
All lifting tackle must be –
 stored in a suitable and secure covered location that has been dedicated for the purpose;
 colour coded – lifting accessories that are incorrectly colour-coded are to be stored in a separate,
clearly marked area and returned for re-inspection, certification and colour coding;
 checked before being used to confirm they are correctly rated for the work to be done;
 visually examined for defects and damage prior to use, and equipment in unacceptable condition
must be tagged as damaged and not fit for use and set aside in the same location as incorrectly
colour-coded tackle for repair or disposal;
 used only within their certified working load limits (WLL); and
 removed from service for inspection, testing and re-certification if it is suspected that they have
been subjected to loads in excess of their rated capacities.
3. Lifting Operations
3.1. Safe lifting practices
There are four primary safety factors to consider when lifting a load:
1. Load size, weight, and centre of gravity – the hoist hook must be located directly above the load’s
centre of gravity to allow a level lift to be made. Dangerous tilting will result if the hook is too far
on either side of a load’s centre of gravity, which would in turn cause unequal stress in the sling
legs. Load imbalances must be corrected immediately.
2. Number of sling legs and their angle with the horizontal – the smaller the angle between the sling
legs and the horizontal, the greater the stress on the individual sling legs. This increased stress
effectively decreases the weight that can be safely lifted with any given sling size. Large (heavy)
loads can be safely moved by keeping this angle as large as possible and, when necessary,
distributing the weight of the load among more sling legs.
3. Rated capacity of the sling – the rated capacity of slings vary and is dependent on the type of
material the sling is made of, the size of the sling and the type of hitch. Employees must know the
capacity of the sling, and can obtain this information through charts or tables available from the
manufacturer. The rated capacity of a sling must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
4. History of care and use – abuse and misuse of slings are the leading causes of sling failure.
Following the manufacturer’s recommendations for proper care and use are essential for
maximum sling service life and safety.
When fitting the sling to a load, steps must be taken to ensure that –
 sling legs are free of any tendency to kink;

 only the eye termination or link is placed on the lifting appliance hook;
 sling terminations are properly seated on the hook and without overcrowding;
 the load is effectively secured by the sling;
 the relevant leg angle does not exceed that for which the sling is rated and marked;
 the sling is not bent around any corners that might damage or reduce effective strength of the
sling – where necessary, suitable packing pieces must be used;
 when using a choke hitch –
- the choke angle is allowed to form itself naturally and is not forced;
- a thimble or stirrup is used at the eye whenever possible to reduce damage to the rope and
thereby prolong the life of both the eye and the main part of the rope;
 a choke hitched sling is not used to turn, rotate or drag a load unless special precautions are taken
to ensure that neither the sling nor the load is damaged; and
 a tag line or control rope is attached to ensure that the swing or rotation of the load can be
controlled.
The load line must be brought over the load’s centre of gravity before the lift is started. Make sure
that everyone stands clear when loads are being lifted. First lift the load only a few centimetres to
test the rigging and balance. Keep the load under control at all times. Where personnel may be
endangered by a rotating or swaying load, use one or more taglines to prevent uncontrolled motion.
Loads must be safely landed and properly blocked before the load is unhooked and the lifting tackle
is removed.
Note: When slack in a sling is being taken up, keep hands and fingers out of the space between the
sling and the load to prevent them from being trapped and crushed, and step away before the lift is
made.
3.2. Lifts using cranes/hoists with rigging
Do:
 Define the load path (the path along which the load will travel and the orientation it will be in
while it is being lifted and the location and orientation where it will be set down).
 Choose lifting tackle that is rated for the prescribed load.
 Identify the load’s characteristics (centre of gravity, physical dimensions, weight, lifting points,
etc.).
 Establish the rigging requirements before the lift is performed.
 Identify and avoid potential pinch points (where an individual or a component of the lifting
equipment or load may be caught between two surfaces).
 Consider the load’s balance, configuration, dimensions and attachment points.
Don’t:
 Use cranes/hoists for side pulls.

 Cause the crane/hoist to lift, lower, or travel while anyone is on the load or the hook.
 Carry loads over people.
 Leave a suspended load unattended – land the load before leaving it.
 Change direction quickly.
 Suddenly accelerate or decelerate the moving load.
 Contact any obstruction.
 Operate hoisting and rigging equipment when physically or otherwise unfit.
 Use screw pin shackles if the pin can roll under the load and unscrew.
3.3. Lift plan
All lifts must be planned. For simple routine operations, the following sequence will be considered
sufficient and work orders need only reference the sequence:
 Determine the weight of the load.

 Choose equipment suitable for the weight, environment and stability requirements and assess the
need for tag lines.
 Ensure that the equipment has a valid inspection certificate and clearly indicates its WLL for all
configurations.
 Ensure that the route of the lift and the final destination is clear from obstructions that could
cause trips, slips or falls and that the surface can sustain the weight. An authorised
signaller/dogger must act as a guide, should the lifting equipment operator not have a clear view
of the lifting operation.
 Fit the lifting tackle to the load and inform others with regard to their safety.
 Cautiously lift the load a couple of centimetres to assess its stability and degree of movement. Set
down the load and adjust it if necessary.
 Proceed with the lift and position the load.
 Remove lifting tackle and clear up the area.
A documented lift plan must be developed for critical lifts. A lift is considered critical under any of the
following circumstances: If –
 the item being lifted could result in the release of radioactive or hazardous material into the
environment, which could exceed the established permissible environmental limits (PEL), if it were
to be damaged or upset;
 the item being lifted is unique, vital to a system, facility, or project operation and irreplaceable or
irreparable if it were to be damaged;
 the cost to replace or repair the item being lifted or the delay in operations of having the item
damaged would have a severe negative impact on facility, organisation, or budget to the extent
that it would affect programme commitments;
 the item, although non-critical, is to be lifted above or in close proximity to inhabited areas,
ongoing operations, electrical wires or a critical item or component;
 the load being lifted is 95% or more of the crane’s chart rating for the maximum radius that will
be experienced;
 the load is lifted by two cranes, with the load share greater than or equal to more than 70% of one
or both cranes’ chart rating at the maximum load path radius; and/or
 the manager who has responsibility for the load, requests that it be handled as a critical lift.
A step-by-step plan or work instructions must be prepared or approved by a technically qualified

person and must contain the following:
 Identity of the item(s) to be lifted.

 Special precautions, if any (such as mats for mobile cranes).
 Weight of the item and total weight of the load. (For mobile cranes, see the manufacturer’s
instructions regarding components and attachments that must be considered as part of the load).
 Location of the load’s centre of gravity.
 A list that specifies each piece of equipment (e.g. crane, hoist), accessories and rigging
components (e.g. slings, shackles, spreader bars, yokes) to be used for the lift (this list must
identify each piece of equipment by type and rated capacity).
 Designated checkpoints or hold points and estimated instrument readings as relevant, so that job
progress can be checked against the plan. Hold points or sign-off points must be provided for
personnel assigned to witness the work.
 Rigging sketch(es), which include the following:
- Lift point identification;
- Method(s) of attachment;
- Load angle factors, e.g. vertical and horizontal vectors of sling loads;
- Sling angles;
- Accessories used;
- Other factors affecting the equipment capacity; and
- Rated capacity of equipment in the configuration(s) in which it will be used – for mobile
cranes, many factors affect rated capacity, including boom length, boom angle and work area.
 A load-path sketch that shows the load path and height at key points in the job. Include crane
position(s) relative to the load and relative to surrounding obstructions for lifts with mobile
cranes. Where appropriate, include floor- or soil-loading diagrams.
 A sketch indicating lifting and travel speed limitations – this may be noted on the load path sketch
or on a separate sketch.
 A sign-off sheet to verify that equipment and hardware inspections and tests are current.
 Practice lifts are recommended – if used, requirements for the practice lift must be documented
in the plan.
Note: Although individual plans are prepared for individual critical lifts, more general (multi-use) plans
may be employed to accomplish recurrent critical lifts. For example, a general plan may be used to lift
an item or series of similar items that are handled repeatedly in the same manner.
3.4. Suspended loads
Follow these rules for suspended loads:
 Do not allow loads moved with any material-handling equipment to pass over any personnel.
 Select the load path to eliminate the risk of injury to employees if the material-handling
equipment should fail.
 Do not work on suspended loads – rest the load on adequate cribbing if it needs to be worked on.
 Never leave a suspended load unattended – lower it to the floor, the working surface or onto
cribbing and secure the material-handling equipment before leaving the load unattended.
Should it be necessary to leave a suspended load, the area must be barricaded and hazard signs placed
so as to prevent access to the area. Those required to work under a suspended load must be given
written instruction in the form of a work order or procedure.
3.5. Tilting loads
Using a crane to tilt a load (standing up a load that is lying down or vice versa) carries a significant risk
of shock-loading the crane or losing control of the load. When such operations involve loads that
exceed 50% of the rated capacity of the crane, they must be reviewed by, and may only be performed
with the formal approval of the professional rigging crew supervisor or his designate.
Safe Work Practice - Waste Management
Contractors that generate waste shall characterise their waste according to composition, source, types
of wastes produced, generation rates, or according to local regulatory requirements. Effective
planning and implementation of waste management strategies should include:
 Establishment of priorities, based on a risk analysis, that takes into account the potential risks
during the waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to manage the waste in an
environmentally sound manner;
 Definition of procedures and operational controls for on-site storage;
 Definition of options/procedures/operational controls for treatment and final disposal;
 Continual review of waste sources and collection of data and information about the operation’s
waste streams to identify waste generation and pollution prevention opportunities, and monitor
the effectiveness of treatment, storage, and disposal infrastructure; and
 Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well as reuse and recycling.
Proper waste management can only be achieved if waste is managed through a waste management
programme that ensures the responsible management of waste streams throughout the waste cycle.
At the heart of any effective waste management programme is waste management plan that defines
waste streams that is or will be generated and how each waste stream is managed.
The development of a comprehensive waste management plan is however not an easy task. The
following points provide a guideline which, if followed, results in the development of a comprehensive
waste management plan.
1. Identify waste
Waste management plans are generally quite good in addressing the obvious waste streams a
Contractor generates. Obvious waste streams typically include waste such as process waste, scrap,
and hazardous waste. Less obvious waste streams such as general dust/dirt cleaned from floors and
hazardous substance containers are however often overlooked, which results in such waste being
managed and especially disposed of incorrectly.
A comprehensive waste management plan can therefore only be achieved if all the waste that is or
will be generated is identified first. Waste that is or will be generated is identified by analysing and
examining every process, activity, and task that is performed as part of the Contractor’s operations.
Personnel involved in processes, activities and tasks are consulted during an analysis and examination
which aims to identify -
 what waste will be generated and how much of each type of waste will be generated;
 who or what will be generating waste;
 where the waste will be generated (for planning the type and location of containers and transport
of waste); and
 when the waste will be generated (for planning the container provision and removal cycles).
Each process, activity, and task on the site, regardless of how insignificant it may seem, is analysed
and examined in this way to ensure that all the waste the Contractor is, or will potentially be
generating is identified. The identified waste streams are then listed in the waste register.
1.1. Classify waste
The identified waste streams are classified following their identification as the different waste classes
have different requirements and specifications relating to them. The characteristics of each waste
stream are evaluated and each waste stream is classified into one of three waste classes below.
Waste class Waste characteristics

Inert No threat to people or the environment
General Potential threat to people or the environment
Hazardous (special) Immediate threat to people or the environment
Where there is uncertainty about whether or not waste is hazardous, such waste is classified as
hazardous until it can be proven otherwise. Hazardous or special waste is further classified into one
of the hazardous waste classes below on the hazard rating of waste under consideration:
Hazardous waste class Waste characteristics

Class1 Explosives
Class2 Gases
Class3 Flammable liquids
Class4 Flammable solids
Class5 Oxidising substances and organic peroxides
Class6 Toxic and infectious substances
Class7 Radioactive substances
Class8 Corrosives
Class9 Other miscellaneous substances
Where hazardous substances are concerned, the hazardous waste class can normally be found on the
substance’s material safety data sheet (MSDS).
Waste could fall into more than one of the above classes, in which case such a waste is classified into
all the classes into which it falls. This is done to ensure that the requirements and specifications related
to each class a waste falls into are suitably complied with and satisfied.
The classification of each identified waste stream is noted in the appropriate columns on the waste
register.
2. Identify waste management requirements

The identification and classification of various waste streams on site now allows for the identification
of waste management requirements and specifications related to each waste stream. The applicable
legal and other requirements are consulted and waste management requirements and specifications
related to each identified waste stream identified.
Special care must be taken to ensure that all the waste management requirements and specifications
are identified, especially for hazardous waste. Also take note of and consider the waste management
requirements of other stakeholders - such as clients. References to waste management requirements
and specifications related to each generated waste stream are captured in the appropriate column in
the waste register.
3. Identify waste management options

Each waste stream is examined and the most appropriate option according to waste management
hierarchy for managing that particular waste selected. The waste management hierarchy advocates
the following waste management options in the sequence in which they are shown:
1. Prevent and avoid generating waste in the first place.

2. Minimise and reduce the quantity of generated waste.
3. Reuse of items as many times as possible, often for similar but different applications.
4. Recycle everything that can be recycled if it can no longer be reused.
5. Recover energy from waste that can be incinerated to produce energy.
6. Dispose of waste only if none of above options can be selected.
The appropriate option for each waste stream will be dependent on a number of factors:
 Compliance with legislation;

 Cost;
 Ability to segregate materials on site;
 Volume of waste;
 Availability of markets for recycled materials;
 Ability to transport (reducing vehicle movements) waste; and
 Services available from waste contractors.
4. Define and implement site waste management arrangements

Following the identification of waste management options according to which each waste stream will
be managed; waste management arrangements required for the implementation of each selected
waste management option are put in place.
The particulars of each waste stream and waste management options selected for each waste stream
is examined and waste management arrangements that would enable each waste stream to be
effectively implemented and managed is identified. The waste management arrangements referred
to here includes everything that is required to safely and effectively manage waste on site:
 Containers
 Equipment for handling and moving waste on site
 Instructions on how to handle dispose of, collect sort, etc of waste
The following aspects of handling waste on site are considered when site waste management
arrangements are identified:
 Disposal of waste at source

 Collection of waste
 Movement of waste on site
 Sorting of waste
 Storage and segregation of waste
Knowledgeable personnel such as managers, supervisors and employees actually involved in the
various aspects of handling a waste stream are involved and consulted at the respective stages, when
these requirements are identified.
4.1. Disposal of waste at source
The disposal of each waste stream at its source is considered and the containers, equipment, and
instructions required for the safe and proper disposal of the waste stream under consideration are
identified.
4.2. Movement of waste on site
The movement of waste on site is planned to ensure that waste is always taken to the closest possible
suitable waste storage point. Waste movement routes are also planned to ensure that waste moves
through as few areas as possible while in transit, while still following the shortest possible route. This
reduces the amount of time during which waste is handled, as well as the amount of time that waste
in transit spends in the workplace, thereby reducing the risk of an incident being caused by handling
waste in transit through the worksite. Hazardous waste movement routes are planned to prevent
hazardous waste from being moved through workplace, where at all possible.
The movement of each waste stream is considered and the containers, equipment, and instructions
required for safe and proper movement of the waste stream under consideration are identified.
4.3. Collection of waste
Waste needs to be frequently collected to prevent waste build-up on site. Waste collection frequency
is based on the rate at which waste is generated, the size of the waste disposal containers at a waste
stream’s source as well as any special collection requirements and specifications that may be
applicable to waste stream under consideration. A waste collection schedule is developed to ensure
that waste is collected from waste streams as frequently as is necessary.
The collection of each waste stream as its source is considered and containers, equipment, and
instructions required for safe and proper collection of waste stream under consideration are
identified.
4.4. Sorting of waste
The sorting of each waste stream is considered and the containers, equipment and instructions
required for the safe and proper sorting of the waste stream under consideration is identified.
4.5. Storage of waste
The various waste streams are examined to identify their:
 Sources
 Storage and separation or segregation requirements
 Maximum probable storage quantities
Waste storage areas are planned and located at points throughout the site that:
 Limit the number of waste areas

 Still provide waste storage areas of sufficient capacity as close as possible to waste sources
 Provide for the adequate separation and segregation of incompatible wastes
 Limit disruption of the flow of work and materials and without impending operations
 Do not create hazardous situations
Waste storage areas, especially for hazardous waste, is appropriately constructed and equipped with
bunding to prevent waste spills from spreading and contaminating soil and water.
Waste storage areas are located to ensure easy access to them from outside for waste disposal
vehicles and Contractors to prevent waste from having to be taken off site through the work areas.
Accesses to all waste storage areas are limited to authorised personnel only, especially for hazardous
waste storage areas.
5. Disposal of waste
The waste disposal requirements and specifications related to waste streams generated on site are
identified as part of the waste management requirements identification as described above. Following
the establishment of waste disposal requirements, arrangements have to be put in place to ensure
that the waste disposal requirements can be met. Arrangements need to be put in place for the
collection of waste from the site and the delivery of waste to the appropriate waste recycling,
treatment or disposal site.
Owing to the specialised nature of collecting, transporting, and delivering large quantities of waste,
the services of Waste Management Contractors are mostly utilised to perform these tasks.
Additionally, hazardous waste may only be transported and disposed of by approved, registered
hazardous waste disposal contractors.
Waste Management Contractors are therefore used as far as possible to ensure that waste is correctly,
safely and properly -
 collected from the site;

 transported to waste recycling/treatment/disposal site; and
 disposed of.
5.1. Waste Management Contractors
Based on the different waste streams that are generated, Waste Management Contractors capable of
assisting with management of various waste streams are identified. Prospective Contractors are
thoroughly evaluated to determine whether they would in fact be able to assist with management of
waste streams.
Waste Management Contractors are required to provide proof of their registration and accreditation
as approved Waste Management Contractors by supplying their waste management licences and
permits. Waste Management Contractors are only contracted to assist with management of the waste
for which they are approved, as stated on their registration and accreditations or licences.
Contracts for assistance with the management of each waste stream are placed with Waste
Management Contractors once suitable, licensed Contractors have been identified. The contracts
confirm the need for the Contractor to comply with legislation relevant to the waste stream under
consideration and specify the waste management arrangements between the Contractor and Waste
Management Contractor.
The following arrangements between the Contractor and Waste Management Contractor are
specified in the contract:
 The waste stream being managed

 Waste collection schedule
 Site where is delivered to, including site approval and registration details
 The documentation in the form of records that need be kept and handed over
5.2. Waste collection
Waste needs to be frequently collected to prevent the build-up of waste in waste storage areas. Waste
collection frequencies are based on specific collection requirements and specifications that may apply
to certain waste streams, rates at which waste is generated and the capacity of waste storage areas.
A waste collection schedule is developed for each type of waste to ensure that all waste is collected
from site at appropriate intervals, as frequently as is necessary.
5.3. Waste delivery
Waste delivery requirements are specified depending on the waste management option selected for
each generated waste stream. The different waste management options that could possibly require
the delivery of waste to an off-site location are:
 Reuse when items are reused at another site

 Recycle when item are recycled
 Recover energy when energy is recovered from waste
 Dispose when waste is delivered to disposal sites
The waste delivery requirements indicate where what waste is delivered to and for what reason it is
delivered there. Waste Management Contractors are made aware of need for them to obtain, retain,
and hand over the required waste delivery documentation and records such as waste manifests and
certificates of safe disposal.
6. Monitor waste streams and measure waste quantities

The waste streams generated on site and the quantity of waste generated in each stream is
continuously monitored and measured respectively to ensure that the Contractor remains in touch
with the waste situation.
6.1. Monitor waste streams
Monitoring the generated waste streams allows the Contractor to keep abreast of generated waste
streams, in order for arrangements to be:
 Added for new waste streams

 Changed for altered waste streams
 Removed for obsolete waste streams
6.2. Measure waste quantities
The measurements of waste quantities will allow the Contractor to monitor the amount of waste it
generates. It is also critical to measure the quantities of generated waste to be able to reconcile
generated and disposed waste for legal reporting requirements.
7. Waste Disposal Options
Ink and Toner Cartridges

The two main cartridges used are inkjet cartridge and toner cartridges. Whereas inkjet cartridges are generally
compact (and will fit into the palm of your hand), toner cartridges are larger and bulkier.
Acceptable Disposal Options Unacceptable Disposal Options
 Return to supplier  General landfilling
 Refill of the cartridge  Uncontrolled burning
 Refurbish/Recondition the cartridge (and refill)
 Recycle – material value
 Fuel source for energy recovery (in a controlled
environment)
 Hazardous landfill
Dry Cell Batteries

Non-rechargeable (primary) batteries will be disposed of after their single use. Spent rechargeable
(secondary) batteries will arise from their use in electric appliances, such as cellular phones, video cameras
and portable tools, as well as in some high-power drain applications, such as power tools.
 Hazardous waste site - ensure proper leachate  Incineration: In Ni-Cd batteries, cadmium is
management. volatised and released into the atmosphere when
 Treatment (e.g. encapsulation) may be required incinerated; metallic cadmium condenses onto the
prior to disposal. smallest particles of incinerator smoke, which are

then difficult to contain by pollution control
devices.
 Burning: Li-ion battery can explode if disposed of in
fire.
 Crushing or dismantling.
Electronic Waste (E-waste)

The different types of electronic waste (E-waste) include:
 Computers;
 Cell phones;
 CRTs (cathode ray tube);
 Printed circuit boards (PCBs);
 White and brown goods – electronic household appliances; and
 Medical electronic and electrical equipment.
 Resell  Uncontrolled burning/incineration
 Re-use  Landfilling without treatment
 Recondition – upgrade
 Recycle – material value
 Hazardous landfill
Lighting Waste
The waste is generated from the spent tubes and lamps that were used for various lighting applications:
1. Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps
2. Incandescent bulbs.
3. HID (High Intensity Discharge) lamps include:
 High pressure sodium vapour lamps are smaller than the low pressure lamps, and are used for industrial,
security, and street lighting;
 Low pressure sodium vapour lamps are mostly used for outdoor lighting (e.g. street and security lights);
 Mercury vapour lamps are widely used for roads, courtyards, factories, mines, gymnasiums, sports arenas;
 Metal halide lamps are used in areas where bright white light is required, including marine aquariums,
street lighting, floodlighting and in motor vehicles.
 General landfill – for small quantities of lighting, HID  Uncontrolled crushing or breaking of fluorescent
lamps and incandescent lamps and HID lamps.
 Hazardous landfill sites - for mercury.  No fluorescent tubes, collected in large quantities
 Crushing: crushing fluorescent lamps can reduce from the premises of industries or commercial
the volume by approximately 80%. All fluorescent activities (i.e. large buildings), may be disposed of
tubes originating from industrial or commercial under any circumstances in a General waste
activities are considered to be fluorescent tubes disposal site.
that should be collected in “large quantities” and  Incineration - releases the mercury emissions.
must, therefore, be disposed of in a controlled
manner. Crushing can also reduce transportation
and storage costs, and reduce the risk of releasing
mercury vapours if accidentally broken during
storage and transportation. These tubes are,
therefore, to be collected in purpose-made tube
crushers.
Used Oil And Other Petroleum Products

Oil and oil products are generated from the operation and maintenance of vehicles, equipment and
machinery. Oils originating from petroleum crude oil can be processed, blended and formulated to produce
numerous ranges of products, including the following: fuels, lubricants, hydraulic, transmission fluids and
heat transfer fluids. The transportation industry is a major user of oil, both as a fuel for many land-based
transport systems, as well as a lubricant for the propulsion engines themselves.
 Recycle – used lubricating oil. Oil that is recycled  General landfill – energy value of used oil is lost;
could be re-refined to new base oil or treated and used oil will contaminate groundwater.
sold as fuel oil.  Direct burning in boilers – the combustion process
 Re-refining into lubricating oil. may release heavy metals and other hazardous
 Incinerate to recover the energy value (the oil will, components into the atmosphere. The stack
thus, replace virgin non-renewable fuels) emissions could result in human health problems.
 Reclamation – of transformer oil, hydraulic oil and  Storm water or direct dumping on ground – oil will
turbine oil. Reclamation may take place off-site, contaminate groundwater, surface and ground.
where the vendor of the reclamation service drains  Discharge to effluent.
the existing charge and replaces it with previously
reclaimed oil. Generally, reclamation involves
cleaning and drying, and may also include
adsorption to remove colour, acids and sludge. The
reclaiming of lube oil is, essentially, a non-chemical
process that restores lube oil for reuse in a system.
Hydrocarbon Contaminated Waste

Oil contaminated waste may include soil, rags, gloves, wood, paper, plastic and cardboard packaging. Sawdust
and other oil-absorbent products used for oil spill clean up must also be disposed of correctly. Furthermore,
the oil-contaminated waste may also be contaminated with other compounds.
 Hazardous landfill  General landfill
 Bioremediation (Biological treatment) - remediation  Uncontrolled burning
of oil-contaminated soil in situ
 Landfill sites - this waste could include: used oil and
sludge, combined with sawdust or ash at pH>10; oily
rags; oil and water waste at pH>10 and bitumen).
 Incinerate – energy value
Solvents
Solvents are mainly used in paints and coatings (paints, varnishes, and lacquers), industrial cleaners,
adhesives, printing inks, extractive processes and pharmaceuticals. They are also used in a variety of metal,
electronic and precision cleaning applications. Tins of paints and varnishes that still contain the original
residual contents will, therefore, still contain the solvents, and must be regarded as hazardous waste. Waste
will be generated from maintenance, degreasing machinery and equipment.
Chlorinated solvents (i.e. those that contain chlorine, making the solvent potentially more toxic) are
commonly found in cleaning and degreasing operations.
 Solvents in some processes and applications can be  Empty containers sold/given to staff and
re-used on site. community. Tins or containers must not be sold
 Landfill (or given) to scrap metal dealers if they still
 Thermal destruction: controlled thermal contain the original solvent-containing (or other
destruction at very high temperatures is also hazardous) substance. Recyclers could store the
feasible for certain solvents, and is practiced by scrap on open ground, and, thus, any residual
thermal treatment companies. solvent may spill and seep into the ground.
 Recycled for re-use  Burning
 General landfill - solvents that are carcinogen or
teratogen must not be landfilled on general sites.
Used and Contaminated Chemical Containers

All Contractors that use oils, chemicals and hazardous substances in their processes, or for their facilities, will
generate empty and used containers and contaminated packaging.
 Return to supplier  Inefficient incineration or burning of containers
 Re-use on site can release highly toxic substances (e.g. chlorides
 Re-condition - send to registered drum re- from PVC plastics) into the atmosphere.
conditioners (steel) or re-processors (steel & plastic)  Sold/given to staff and community.
 Recycle – material value  General landfill.
 Incinerate – decontaminate, thermal destruction
 Incinerate– energy value of plastic containers (e.g.
cement kilns).
 Hazardous Landfill
Medical Waste / Health Care Waste (HCW)

The generators of medical waste are generally grouped into two categories that represent major generators,
such as hospitals and clinics, and minor generators, such as health practitioners, dentists, pharmacies, etc.
Large scale Health Care risk waste (HCRW) generators include:

 Public and private hospitals and clinics
 Blood transfusion centres
Small scale HCRW generators include:

 Medical labs
 Pharmaceutical industries
 Pharmacies
 Medical general practitioners
 Dentist
 Veterinary hospitals and surgeons
 Prisons
 Mortuaries
 Private homes
 On site medical facilities at industrial and mining sites
 Onsite clinic or medical facility
 Incinerate – decontaminate  General landfill site (mixed with general waste)
 Sterilisation (e.g. autoclaving)  Hazardous landfill site
 Chemical disinfection  Uncontrolled burning and ineffective incineration
 Landfill after acceptable treatment - only incinerators that have the necessary permits
and authorisations may treat medical waste.
 Illegal dumping.

Sheq Framework

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sheq Framework

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sheq Framework

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LHWP2 SHEQ Management Framework

Lesotho Highlands Development Authority

Contract LHDA No.: 6010 Document Date: 27 February 2017

01 27 February 2017 LHDA Report Template

8.1. Method Statements ............................................................................................................. 21

8.12.2. Project site decommissioning .................................................................................... 36

Tender evaluation - Establishing a systematic approach to evaluating bidding Consultants’ and

o Identifying task SHEQ hazards and associated risks as early as possible.

- the use of sub-standard materials and methods; and

o Applying risk management methodologies to achieve an overall reduction of risk to human

This document aims to -

o support the development of a common approach to Consultant & Contractor SHEQ

1.1. Overview of the Framework and its application

1.1.1. Contract-specific SHEQ requirements

Reference Documents Document No.:

Reference Documents Document No.:

1.1.3. Project SHEQ documentation requirements

1.2. Sanctions for Breach of SHEQ Framework

o The Constitution of Lesotho

o ISO 9001:2015 Quality management systems - Requirements

4.1. Baseline Risk Assessment

Reference Documents Document No.:

4.2. Stakeholders / Interested Parties

o To whom do we have legal obligations?

4.3. SHEQ Plan scope

LHDA SHEQ Framework

Part 1 – Consultant Part 1 – Consultant Part 1 – Consultant

Parts 1 & 2– Contractor A-1 Consultant A - Parts 1 & 2– Contractor A-

Parts 1 & 2– Contractor B-1 Consultant B - Parts 1 & 2– Contractor B-X

Parts 1 & 2 & 3 – Parts 1 & 2 & 3 –

Figure 4.1 SHEQ Plan Structure

Reference Documents Document No.:

5.1. Leadership and commitment

5.2. Project SHEQ Policy

5.3. Organizational roles, responsibilities and

The Consultant shall:

o provide and demonstrate to the Consultant a suitable and sufficiently documented

5.3.2. SHEQ organisational roles and responsibilities

Reference Documents Document No.:

5.3.4. Stop Work

6.1. Actions to address risks and opportunities

o Identify the SHEQ risks based on the contract scope of work.

Reference Documents Document No.:

6.2. SHEQ objectives and planning to achieve

o The programme of works.

o Client Appointed H&S Agent (CAH&SA)

7.3.1. Project and Site SHEQ Rules

Rule Description of Rule

7.3.2. SHEQ Awareness

7.4. Communication and Consultation

7.5. Documented information

o The SHEQ Plan

When creating and updating documented information, ensure appropriate:

o distribution, access, retrieval and use;

7.5.1. Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation Structure

LHDA SHEQ Framework

Safe Work Procedures (SWPs)

Standard Operating Procedures

Figure 7.1 Contract Execution SHEQ Documentation Structure

8.1. Method Statements